Association for Behavior Analysis International

The Association for Behavior Analysis International® (ABAI) is a nonprofit membership organization with the mission to contribute to the well-being of society by developing, enhancing, and supporting the growth and vitality of the science of behavior analysis through research, education, and practice.

Search

41st Annual Convention; San Antonio, TX; 2015

Program by Day for Monday, May 25, 2015


Manage My Personal Schedule

 

Special Event #292
ABAI Business Meeting
Monday, May 25, 2015
8:00 AM–8:50 AM
209 (CC)
Domain: Theory
Chair: Linda J. Parrott Hayes (University of Nevada, Reno)
Panelists: CHRISTY A. ALLIGOOD (Special Interest Group Board), JENNIFER L. AUSTIN (Education Board Coordinator), GORDON BOURLAND (Affliated Chapters Board), MARTHA HÜBNER (University of Sao Paulo), MARIA E. MALOTT (ABAI), M. JACKSON MARR (Membership Board Coordinator), MARK A. MATTAINI (Program Committee Senior Co-Chair), M. CHRISTOPHER NEWLAND (Science Board Coordinator), ANNA I. PETURSDOTTIR (Publications Board), JENNIFER R. ZARCONE (Practice Board Coordinator)
Abstract:

This is an annual ABAI Business Meeting where the leadership of the Association will provide an update of on-going activities and major developments in the Association. Attendees will learn from ABAI's president the direction of the ABAI Council and from the ABAI's CEO the status of finances and administration. Attendees will also hear from the board coordinators including Science, Education, Practice, Program, Membership, Affiliated Chapters and Publications.

CHRISTY A. ALLIGOOD (Special Interest Group Board)
JENNIFER L. AUSTIN (Education Board Coordinator)
GORDON BOURLAND (Affliated Chapters Board)
MARTHA HÜBNER (University of Sao Paulo)
MARIA E. MALOTT (ABAI)
M. JACKSON MARR (Membership Board Coordinator)
MARK A. MATTAINI (Program Committee Senior Co-Chair)
M. CHRISTOPHER NEWLAND (Science Board Coordinator)
ANNA I. PETURSDOTTIR (Publications Board)
JENNIFER R. ZARCONE (Practice Board Coordinator)
Keyword(s): ABAI Business, Business Meeting, Finance, President
 
 
Symposium #293
CE Offered: BACB
Diagnostic, Language, and Barriers Assessments for Children with Autism Spectrum Disorder
Monday, May 25, 2015
9:00 AM–9:50 AM
217B (CC)
Area: AUT/PRA; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Berenice de la Cruz (Autism Community Network)
CE Instructor: Berenice de la Cruz, Ph.D.
Abstract: Various types of assessments are needed when assessing children with autism spectrum disorder (ASD). This symposium will discuss diagnostic, language, and barrier assessments. Obtaining a medical diagnosis for ASD at an early age is important in order to allow children to obtain early intervention. This symposium will discuss a multidisciplinary diagnostic process for diagnosing young children, ages 2-5, with ASD with an emphasis on the role of the behavior analyst. Data will be presented on agreement between diagnostic tools. Information on common barriers to learning identified in young children with ASD will also be presented. Once children receive a diagnosis of ASD and are referred for ABA therapy, an assessment is needed. Data on the use of functional analysis vs. task analysis of verbal behavior for this assessment process will be presented.
Keyword(s): assessment, diagnostic, functional analysis, verbal behavior
 
Autism Diagnosis in Children Ages 2-5: DSM IV-TR, DSM 5, and ADOS-2 Agreement
BERENICE DE LA CRUZ (Autism Community Network), Lupe Castaneda (Autism Community Network), Adriana I Sanchez (Autism Community Network), Megan G. Kunze (Autism Community Network)
Abstract: A multidisciplinary team consisting of a developmental pediatrician or licensed psychologist, a speech pathologist, an occupational therapists, and a behavior analyst assessed children ages 2-5 at risk for Autism Spectrum Disorder (ASD). The diagnostic team utilized various measures including the Diagnostics and Statistics Manual of Mental Disorders (IV-TR; DSM IV-TR; American Psychiatric Association [APA], 2000), the Diagnostics and Statistics Manual of Mental Disorders (5th ed; DSM-5; APA, 2013), and the Autism Diagnostic Observation Schedule-Second Edition (ADOS-2; Lord & Rutter, 2012). Children were scores on both DSM IV-TR and DSM 5 criteria. The ADOS-2 is considered the “gold standard” of diagnostic instruments for individuals at risk for ASD. The ADOS-2 measures communication, social interactions, play, and repetitive/restrictive behaviors. The multidisciplinary evaluation process will be described with an emphasis on the role of the behavior analyst. Data on agreement between the DSM IV-TR, DSM 5, ADOS-2 scores, and overall diagnosis for children who underwent comprehensive diagnostic evaluations will be presented.
 
Learning Barriers in Young Children with Autism Spectrum Disorder
LUPE CASTANEDA (Autism Community Network), Berenice de la Cruz (Autism Community Network), Adriana I Sanchez (Autism Community Network), Megan G. Kunze (Autism Community Network)
Abstract: Individuals with autism spectrum disorder (ASD) present with strengths and deficits that affect their overall development. The deficits or “barriers” often impede the development of new skills and should be a primary target of intervention. The Verbal Behavior Milestones and Placement Program (VB-MAPP; Sundberg, 2008) includes a Barriers Assessment that assesses 24 common language and learning barriers in individuals with autism and developmental disabilities. The Barriers Assessment was conducted by a Board Certified Behavior Analyst (BCBA or BCBA-D) or Board Certified Behavior Analyst – Doctorate (BCBA-D) during a comprehensive, multidisciplinary diagnostic evaluation for children ages 2 to 5 at risk for ASD. Data for children diagnosed with ASD during comprehensive evaluations in 2013 and 2014 (N=105) indicate that the most common barriers were defective mands, instructional control, negative behaviors, failure to make eye contact, and defective listener skills. A description of the procedures utilized to identify the common barriers in diagnostic evaluations and discussion of future research in common barriers of children diagnosed with autism will conclude the presentation.
 
Functional Analyses of Verbal Behavior as an Efficient Alternative to Language Assessment
STEPHANIE CURTIS (The University of Texas at San Antonio), Lee L. Mason (The University of Texas at San Antonio)
Abstract: Learning Skills-Revised (ABLLS-R; Partington, 2006), are frequently employed in clinical settings for both assessment and curricular purposes. However, these tools can take an inordinate amount of time to accurately administer and score, and often exceed the time limitations for assessments allowed by insurance. Lerman et al. (2005) proposed a functional assessment of verbal behavior that may provide an alternative means of expediently measuring the present levels of stimulus control over an individual’s verbal behavior. Extending the procedures described by Lerman and colleagues, we present a comparison of the results between a functional analysis of verbal behavior and corresponding domains from VB-MAPP assessments for children with an autism spectrum disorder diagnosis. Results are presented in terms of a stimulus control ratio among four primary verbal operants: mands, tacts, echoics, and sequelics.
 
 
Panel #294
CE Offered: BACB
From the Ground Up: Developing an Ethical ABA Center in the Dominican Republic
Monday, May 25, 2015
9:00 AM–9:50 AM
Grand Ballroom C2 (CC)
Area: AUT/TBA; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Kaitlin Maguire, M.Ed.
Chair: Molly Ola (Global Autism Project)
STEPHANIA PATIN (APRENDO Center for Autism and other Developmental)
KARLA DEWINDT (APRENDO Center for Autism and other Developmental Disabilities)
KAITLIN MAGUIRE (Global Autism Project)
Abstract:

When ABA services in a developing country are so limited the need for creating services that are ethical and include best practices are essential. During this panel the audience will learn the steps involved in the process of building an ABA center in the Dominican Republic through a partnership with the Global Autism Project. One of the main objectives in creating local services through an international partnership is to ensure the sustainability of services and the ability to building capacity in the professional field of ABA. Critical components such as the importance of remote supervision provided by a BCBA both in a clinical and administrative setting, therapist training, family intake process and center policies, will be shared with participants. Since autism knows no borders, anyone providing services in an under-served community with the desire to learn and build capacity can very well become a service provider with the right plan and support.

Keyword(s): autism, ethical dissemination, international service, organization collaborations
 
 
Panel #295
Towards Developing ABA Soft Skills: Opening the Gate to More Effective Parent Collaboration
Monday, May 25, 2015
9:00 AM–9:50 AM
Grand Ballroom C1 (CC)
Area: AUT/PRA; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Linda S. Heitzman-Powell (The University of Kansas Medical Center)
LISA K. DWORKIN (Autism Home Support Services)
LAURA MCKEE (Autism Home Support)
MARYANNE NUGENT (Autism Home Support Services)
Abstract: Soft skills are personal attributes that enable someone to interact effectively and harmoniously with other people. Examples include communication styles, effective problem-solving, active listening, diplomacy, and collaboration skills. Beyond technical abilities, soft skills are imperative as BCBAs initiate, develop, and sustain relationships with clients and families. Going a step further, it is not enough to identify and design effective and sustainable interventions; rather, clinical effectiveness also hinges on the ability of the BCBA to master more traditional psychology domains (e.g., active listening, establishing a therapeutic relationship, and promoting parent acceptability/treatment adherence; Heitzman-Powell, White, & Perrin, 2007). To date, it is largely unknown to what extent these critical areas are addressed in pre-service training of practitioners in the field of ABA (Kelly & Tincani, 2013; Heitzman-Powell et al., 2007). Soft skills, like technical skills, can be introduced, acquired, and shaped in our professional repertoires. Because of the necessity of these skills, in-service training may be an effective method to develop this repertoire of skills in the growing ABA community. Longitudinal data were collected on gains in BCBAs background information (e.g., years of experience), knowledge, attitudes, and potential behavior change, as a result of these initiatives. Specifically, 76% of BCBAs surveyed (n = 79) responded that the in-service training presentations were ‘very much’ or ‘quite a bit’ relevant to their work as a BCBA. Additionally, 68% of BCBAs surveyed feel ‘quite a bit’ or very much’ more prepared to provide services to children and families following the presentation. The panel will discuss the systematic and organizational efforts a large in-home ABA provider made to establish, implement, and teach soft skills. The panel discussion will bring key stakeholders together; panelists will include the CEO, Director of Clinical Services, and a parent of a child with autism. Participants will have the opportunity to dialogue with the panelists. Future directions and recommendations for research and practice at the organizational, professional, and individual level will be discussed.
Keyword(s): professional development
 
 
Panel #296
The Behavior Analyst and Cultural Competency
Monday, May 25, 2015
9:00 AM–9:50 AM
204A (CC)
Area: CSE/PRA; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Elizabeth Hughes Fong (Fielding Graduate University )
SUSAN JARMUZ-SMITH (University of New England)
RICHARD W. SERNA (University of Massachusetts Lowell)
KIMBERLY D WOOLERY (Unknown)
REBECCA KATE DOGAN (OT&P Medical Practice)
Abstract:

Given the critical nature of behavioral intervention and its growing application across populations and countries, training behavior analysts in culturally competent practice is an ethical imperative. Culturally competent behavior analysts: 1) understand that their own cultural conditioning affects personal beliefs, values, and attitudes; 2) know their ethical responsibility to be knowledgeable about the world views of individuals and groups of differing cultures; and 3) build skills in using culturally appropriate communication, assessment, and intervention. Although the topic of culturally competent services has circulated for a while, anecdotal data demonstrate that professionals in our field report their initial or ongoing training has been inadequate to achieve these required practice standards. Currently, there exist few research-based resources of self-measurement and skill building with respect to culturally competent services. This panel discussion will explore culture competency and include data from a needs assessment of Board Certified Behavior Analysts. From this discussion we aim to better define the current state of culturally competent practice and outline what training, continuing education, and/or practice frameworks would support behavioral intervention across cultures. This is an initial step toward a larger discussion about what tools and strategies are required for culturally competent practice.

Keyword(s): competency self-assessment, cultural competency, differing populations
 
 
Symposium #297
CE Offered: BACB
For the Greater Good: Community Applications of ABA
Monday, May 25, 2015
9:00 AM–9:50 AM
204B (CC)
Area: CSE; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Byron J. Wine (Florida Institute of Technology)
CE Instructor: Byron J. Wine, Ph.D.
Abstract: This symposium presents three studies that address community based problems across populations. The first presentation involves children with a diagnosis of autism being taught to avoid poison hazards. The second presentation presents an intervention to increase "green" driving in adults. The final presentation presents a video modeling intervention to teach undergraduates to correctly install car seats. Taken together, this symposium demonstrates the potential breadth of behavior analysis.
Keyword(s): Community Applications
 
Evaluation of Video Modeling to Teach Children Diagnosed with Autism to Avoid Poison Hazards
SHANNON KING (USF), Raymond G. Miltenberger (University of South Florida)
Abstract: The purpose of this study was to evaluate the effectiveness of video modeling to teach four children diagnosed with ASD to avoid poison hazards. Results showed that video modeling was not effective for any of the participants, but that in situ training was effective for three participants while the fourth participant required an additional incentive. Three out of four of the participants maintained the safety skills at 1-, 3-, and 5-week follow up assessments.
 

Increasing Green Driving in Adults Using Prompts and Goal Setting

ANITA LI (Florida Institute of Technology), Joshua K. Pritchard (Florida Institute of Technology)
Abstract:

Green driving in this study is defined as hard acceleration and braking, excessive speeding, and hard turns. These measures were tracked by GPS, accelerometers, and gyroscopes. A combination of prompts and goal setting was effective in increasing green driving behavior across three participants.

 

A Comparison of First Person Video Modeling and Third Person Video Modeling to Teach Car Seat Installation

BYRON J. WINE (Florida Institute of Technology), Nicholas Green (FIT)
Abstract:

Video modeling has proven to be an effective teaching procedures across a number of skills. This study compared two different methods of implementing video modeling (first person and third person view) to teach car seat installation. Results suggested that both methods were effective in teaching undergraduates to install car seats.

 
 
Symposium #298
Translational Research: Behavioral economics and conditioned suppression
Monday, May 25, 2015
9:00 AM–9:50 AM
214C (CC)
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Keith Lit (Nova Southeastern University)
Discussant: Duncan Pritchard (Aran Hall School)
Abstract:

The past 35 years have seen a growing recognition of the importance of linking basic and applied research in order to develop effective behavioral treatments and establish the generality of basic behavioral relations. This coordinated effort has come to be known as translational research. The most common approach is to translate basic research findings into behavioral technologies that are often novel and of benefit to human problem behavior in applied settings. The first study utilizes behavioural economics to examine stimuli that are functionally similar and functionally dissimilar. A competing stimulus and brief substitutability assessment were conducted and the results from the assessment were used to inform treatment for mouthing, disruption and self-injurious behavior in a five-year old boy. The second study examined obsessive-compulsive disorder (OCD). OCD is characterized by recurrent and ritualized acts that often have no social behavioral function. These behaviors commonly co-occur with anxiety. We used mild reprimands to suppress compulsive behaviors in a 16 year-old male diagnosed with OCD. Both these studies highlight the benefit that translational research can have on improved clinical treatments for serious behavior disorders.

Keyword(s): Behavioral economics, Conditioned suppression, Translational research
 
Are open or closed-behavioral economics models better predictors of favorable responses to treatment of automatically reinforced problem behavior?
STEPHANIE TRAUSCHKE (Nova Southeastern University), Joelle Krantz (Nova Southeastern University), Tara M. Sheehan (Mailman Segal Institute), Danielle Tarver (Nova Southeastern University), Iser Guillermo DeLeon (Kennedy Krieger Institute), F. Charles Mace (Nova Southeastern University)
Abstract: Behavioral economics can be helpful in understanding how behavior is allocated. The present study utilizes behavioral economics to examine stimuli that are functionally similar (matched) and functionally dissimilar (unmatched) to a five-year old male’s mouthing behavior and efficacy of the stimuli in treatment. A competing stimulus assessment and brief substitutability assessment were conducted. Results from the assessments were utilized to inform treatment. For treatment, the participant was exposed to differential reinforcement of other behavior (DRO) for matched and unmatched stimuli, as well as an ignore condition. Data were collected on the participant’s mouthing, self-injurious behavior, disruptive behavior, and engagement in the stimuli. The DRO schedule interval was increased. Results suggest that mouthing decreased more in the unmatched stimulus condition than the matched stimulus condition. In addition, the decrease in mouthing in the unmatched stimulus condition was more durable as the DRO schedule interval was increased.
 
Conditioned Suppression of Compulsive Behavior in an Adolescent Diagnosed with Obsessive-Compulsive Disorder
HEATHER PENNEY (Aran Hall School), Duncan Pritchard (Aran Hall School), Marguerite L. Hoerger (Bangor University), F. Charles Mace (Nova Southeastern University)
Abstract: A distinction can be made between conditioned suppression and stimulus control of punishment effects. The former occurs when a neutral stimulus predicts the onset of an aversive stimulus independent of responding (i.e., an S-S contingency) or contingent on a reinforced response (i.e., an S-R-S contingency). Both contingencies can result in cessation of reinforced behavior in the presence of the stimulus. By contrast, stimulus control of punished responses may be difficult to unambiguously establish. Obsessive-compulsive disorder (OCD) is characterized by recurrent and ritualized acts that often have no social behavioral function. These behaviors commonly co-occur with anxiety. We used reprimands to suppress compulsive behaviors in a 16 year-old male diagnosed with OCD. We paired reprimands with red paper and systematically reduced paper size and added a red wristband while continuing to reduce paper size. Conditioned suppression by the wristband was then generalized to a novel setting and staff.
 
 
Invited Panel #299
CE Offered: PSY/BACB
A Discussion With the 2015 Presidential Scholar, Dr. Sarah Blaffer Hrdy
Monday, May 25, 2015
9:00 AM–9:50 AM
Lila Cockrell Theatre (CC)
Domain: Basic Research
Chair: Linda J. Parrott Hayes (University of Nevada, Reno)
Discussant: Sarah Hrdy (University of California-Davis professor emerita)
CE Instructor: Linda J. Parrott Hayes, Ph.D.
Panelists: SIGRID S. GLENN (University of North Texas), INGUNN SANDAKER (Oslo and Akershus University College of Applied Sciences), FRANCES K. MCSWEENEY (Washington State University)
Abstract:

The aim of this panel is provide an opportunity for commentary on and discussion of the works of Dr. Sarah Blaffer Hrdy as a follow-up to her address as the 2015 Presidential Scholar. Dr. Hrdy's scholarly works pertain to intellectual domains of considerable relevance to the behavior analytic community, including anthropology, primatology and evolutionary theory. Of particular interest to our members are her views on the nature of motherhood and its role in the evolution of the human species, including the evolutionary origins of empathy and mutual understanding. The panelists will offer behavior analytic commentary on various features of Dr. Hrdy's views as presented in her address and other works, with opportunity for discussion with the author.

Instruction Level: Basic
Target Audience:

Psychologists, behavior analysts, practitioners, and graduate students.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants should be able to: (1) discuss the nature of motherhood and its role in the evolution of the human species, including the evolutionary origins of empathy and mutual understanding; (2) discuss the psychological implications of humankind’s long legacy of shared child-rearing; and (3) discuss the reproductive and parental investment strategies of both human and nonhuman primates.
SIGRID S. GLENN (University of North Texas)
Dr. Sigrid Glenn's passionate commitment to the future of behavior analysis has resulted in numerous contributions to her chosen field. She has co-authored four books and more than 45 articles and book chapters. Although her early research was mainly in applied areas, she is widely recognized for her later conceptual work on selection at behavioral and cultural levels. As founding chair of the Department of Behavior Analysis at the University of North Texas, Dr. Glenn established master's and bachelor's degree programs in behavior analysis, leading the faculty in the first accreditation of a graduate program by ABAI. With characteristic prescience about important developments in the field, Dr. Glenn, a charter certificant of the Behavior Analysis Certification Board (BACB), also led the faculty in developing the first Internet sequence of behavior analysis courses approved by the BACB. Dr. Glenn has served as editor of The Behavior Analyst and on the editorial boards of several other journals. She is a former president of ABAI (1993-1994), a fellow of Division 25 of the American Psychological Association, and Regents Professor of Behavior Analysis at the University of North Texas.
INGUNN SANDAKER (Oslo and Akershus University College of Applied Sciences)
Dr. Ingunn Sandaker is a professor and program director of the Master and Research Program Learning in Complex Systems at Oslo and Akershus University College. She also initiated the development of the first Ph.D. program in behavior analysis in Norway. She has been the program director since it was established in 2010. She received her Ph.D. in 1997 at the University of Oslo with a grant from the Foundation for Research in Business and Society (SNF) at the Norwegian School of Economics and Business Administration (NHH). Her thesis was a study on the systemic approach to major changes in two large companies; one pharmaceutical company and one gas and petroleum company. During preparations for the Olympic games in Sydney, Australia, and Nagano, Japan, she was head of evaluation of a program aiming at extending female participation in management and coaching and assisting the Norwegian Olympic Committee’s preparations for the games. For a number of years, Dr. Sandaker worked as an adviser on management training and performance in STATOIL and Phillips Petroleum Co. in  Norway. She also was project manager for Railo International who in cooperation with the Norwegian School of Economics and Business Administration ran a project preparing the electricity supply system in Norway for marked deregulations. Serving as a consultant on top level management programs in Norwegian energy companies, her interest has been focused on performance management within a systems framework. Trying to combine the approaches from micro-level behavior analysis with the perspective of learning in complex systems, and cultural phenomena, she is interested in integrating complementary scientific positions with the behavior analytic conceptual framework.  
FRANCES K. MCSWEENEY (Washington State University)
Dr. McSweeney has made significant empirical and theoretical contributions in the experimental analysis of short term changes in reinforcer effectiveness and has demonstrated the generality of her findings across species and conditions. Her work exemplifies the power of programmatic behavior analytic research on basic behavioral processes, and the value to the larger scientific community of such research, as evidenced by support she has received from the National Institutes of Health and the National Science Foundation. Dr. McSweeney has published more than 100 articles in a broad range of very high quality journals. She has also served multiple appointments on several editorial boards and as president of ABAI. Her scholarly achievements have been recognized both within her university and within her discipline by many honors and awards including Washington State University's Eminent Faculty Award.
Keyword(s): evolutionary theory, motherhood
 
 
Symposium #300
CE Offered: BACB
The Impact of the Science of Applied Behavior Analysis on Adult Education Outcomes
Monday, May 25, 2015
9:00 AM–9:50 AM
212AB (CC)
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Peter F. Gerhardt (JPG Autism Consulting, LLC)
CE Instructor: Marlene J. Cohen, Ed.D.
Abstract: There is increased interest in investigating adult education outcomes in our field. As behavior analysts, we are quite adept at studying the outcomes of our clients, but sometimes miss the opportunity to apply the use of our science to our own professional behavior. This symposium details some current research on adult education outcomes in three different settings. The data will be detailed and the impact of these outcomes on future research will be discussed.
Keyword(s): Adult Education
 

Higher Education Outcomes: How Do the Outcomes of Online Delivery Compare with On Ground and Blended Formats?

MARLENE J. COHEN (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), Lacey Weber (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology)
Abstract:

The rigor of online education in the field of applied behavior analysis has often been challenged. It is common for professionals to believe that face to face interaction is necessary to provide good educational outcomes. The Chicago School of Professional Psychology offers on ground, blended and online educational options for our certificate and MS in ABA programs. These programs have been aligned to allow for direct comparison of results. Several comparative measures will be presented in an effort to determine if program delivery affects student outcomes. The used of learning management system and assessment software to measure outcomes across a variety of variables will also be discussed. Plans for the longitudinal effects of program delivery have been established.

 
Re-Assessing Adult Learning: A behavior analytic account of reflection and its effect on performance
KEVIN ROESSGER (Seattle University)
Abstract: Reflection has been described as the defining characteristic of adult learning (Mezirow, 1991). Formative adult learning texts (e.g., Kolb, 1984; Mezirow, 2000) continue to tout activities for occasioning reflection as ways to increase generalization and contingency adduction. From a behavioral perspective, though, reflection remains difficult to define. Further, activities meant to occasion it are largely unsubstantiated. Dewey’s early conceptualization of reflection is used here to generate a behavioral account that consists of covert elaborative rehearsal, relational contingency framing, and relational coordination framing. Interdisciplinary data is then presented to illustrate the effect of reflective activities on measurable learning outcomes along the novice to expert continuum. Two studies are highlighted: (a) an inferential statistical analysis of reflective activities and paver setting skills and (a) a multiple baseline investigation of reflective activities and concision writing skills. Implications for research and practice are discussed.
 
Teaching Exercise as a Recreational and Leisure Skill to Adults with Intellectual Disabilities in an Inclusive Setting
SARA C. BICARD (Auburn University at Montgomery), Erin Blanton (Auburn University of Montgomery), Angela Russel (University Of Alabama), Michael Esco (University of Alabama)
Abstract: Individuals with intellectual disabilities have a higher prevalence of inactive lifestyles and lower levels of fitness than the general population. Lack of physical activity increases the risk for developing chronic diseases such as obesity, type 2 diabetes and heart disease. Numerous studies point to the unanimous consensus that regular exercise dramatically improves health. However, there is limited research on increasing the physical activity of adults with intellectual disabilities. WarhawkFit is a program that teaches exercise as a recreational and leisure skill to increase the physical activity of adults with intellectual disabilities. As part of this program, behavior analysts collaborate with exercise scientists to identify and teach appropriate fitness activities. Experiences from two-years years of implementation, suggestions for practitioners, and future research will be provided.
 
 
Paper Session #301
Using Technology and ABA to Foster Professional Development of Education
Monday, May 25, 2015
9:00 AM–9:50 AM
210AB (CC)
Area: EDC
Keyword(s): Technology
Chair: Trudi Gaines (University of West Florida)
 
Utilizing Technology and ABA Practices for Effective Professional Development for Paraprofessionals Supporting Students with Autism
Domain: Service Delivery
ROZ PRESCOTT (Rethink), Patricia I. Wright (Rethink)
 
Abstract: Paraprofessionals are pivotal to the success of special education students. There are more than 400,000 FTE paraprofessionals engaged in the education of special education students (U.S. Department of Education, 2010). The vast majority of special education paraprofessionals, 97%, report providing one-to-one instruction to students with disabilities (Carter, O’Rourke, Sisco, & Pelsue, 2009). Unfortunately many paraprofessionals do not receive adequate training to meet the high demands of this profession (However, Ghere and York-Barr (2007) This session provides participants a go-to strategy for effective paraprofessional training. Learn how the largest school district in Florida utilizes video-based training and on-site coaching to increase the knowledge, skills, and behavior of paraprofessionals supporting children with autism and other disabilities. Quantitative outcome data and qualitative narratives regarding the impact and success of this model will be shared. Paraprofessionals must receive quality professional development. This session will illustrate the importance of the paraprofessional role for student success, and an effective professional development model to enhance this important role in today’s school system.
 

Web-Based Professional Development for Novice Teachers in Urban Settings: WIISE (Wireless, Internet, Induction, & Skype for Educators) Strategy for 21st Century Induction and Professional Development

Domain: Service Delivery
TRUDI GAINES (University of West Florida), Wanda Wade (University of South Florida)
 
Abstract:

As school districts, especially those in urban settings, face the challenge of retaining novice teachers and better preparing all teachers for delivering instruction in fully inclusive classrooms, induction programs have become an integral ingredient in meeting this challenge. Effective induction programs have been shown to include mentoring, observation, and feedback, all of which can now be enhanced by utilizing evolving technologies and thereby making their delivery more available in a greater variety of settings. This study examines the utilization of Bug-In-Ear (BIE) Bluetooth technology for novice teachers in an urban elementary school setting using a single case design across participants, and the results support implementing this technology. The research questions that were developed to examine the effectiveness of supporting novice teachers utilizing BIE Bluetooth technology were: (1) Does immediate teacher prompting by an instructional coach via BIE Bluetooth technology increase the average rate of specific positive feedback given to students by the teacher? and, (2) Given an increase, to what extent does the increased average rate of specific positive feedback sustain during the maintenance phases of BIE?

 

Training Board Certified Behavior Analysis Supervisers to Teach College Developmental Algebra: A Treatment Package Incorporating a Flipped Classroom, Teacher Training and Applied Behavior Analysis

Domain: Applied Research
SCOTT BECKETT (Jacksonville State University), Courtney S. Peppers-Owen (Jacksonville State University)
 
Abstract:

Many entering students are unprepared for college math, and developmental math courses delay graduation and deplete financial aid. To address this problem, Board Certified Behavior Analysts in the Department of Learning Skills lowered the typical student:teacher ratio in developmental math classrooms from 35:1 to 4:1 by training psychology graduate students to teach algebra in exchange for supervising their certification hours. The graduate students learn precision teaching, explicit instruction, and behavior analytic techniques for classroom management, and they make data-based decisions on a daily basis. Supervisors collect and analyze longitudinal data to monitor the math students' progress through required math courses. Central to the treatment package is the diagnosis and remediation of cumulative dysfluencies in prerequisite math skills related to fraction operations. Other components for the algebra students include a flipped classroom using teaching videos provided by the National Repository of Online Courses and a workbook that incorporates continual review and progressive difficulty. Training for the graduate students includes weekly data-sharing and training meetings, and continual modeling and supervision by the on-site behavior analyst and certified mathematics teacher.

 
Keyword(s): Technology
 
 
Paper Session #302
Education Implementation
Monday, May 25, 2015
9:00 AM–9:50 AM
211 (CC)
Area: EDC
Chair: Tonya Lambert (Syracuse University)
 

Identifying Effective Ways to Increase Teachers' Implementation Integrity Through Brief Experimental Analysis

Domain: Applied Research
TONYA LAMBERT (Syracuse University), Brian K. Martens (Syracuse University), Matthew Halstad (Towson University)
 
Abstract:

Teachers are often responsible for implementing evidence-based interventions in regular education classrooms with support from pupil service teams, however; past research has shown that in many cases interventions are not implemented with integrity, thus limiting conclusions regarding a student's response to intervention. Although research indicates that provision of scripts, performance feedback, and reinforcement are useful at increasing implementation integrity, their effects vary across teachers. In the present study, a brief experimental analysis (BEA) with a reversal was used to identify the most effective method for increasing the integrity with which 4 regular education teachers implemented a DRA procedure using verbal praise as a reinforcer for student on-task behavior. An extended analysis using a multiple baseline design across teachers was then conducted to assess the predictive validity of the BEA. Student on-task behavior was also observed to determine its relationship to teachers' levels of implementation integrity. Results showed the BEA to be an effective and valid means of identifying an effective support method for 3 of the 4 teacher-student dyads. Although task engagement increased for all students to above 90%, it correlated with implementation integrity for only 2 of 4 dyads. Implications for future research and clinical practice will be discussed.

 

Implementing a Function-Based Social Skills Program in a General Education Classroom

Domain: Service Delivery
LEFKI KOUREA (University of North Carolina at Charlotte)
 
Abstract:

This presentation presents the results of an experimental research study conducted in a second-grade classroom, which included students with behavioral problems. The study examined the effects of a function-based social skills intervention program on the disruptive behavior and academic performance of four male students identified at risk for school failure. A social skills instruction with a self-monitoring strategy comprised the intervention program. Results of the study showed a positive functional relationship between student behavior and intervention program. Student off-task behaviours were reduced by at least 53% during classroom observation period. Student academic performance improved by at least one letter grade. Effect sizes were strong. Presenters will address the educational implications of the study and they will provide information on (1) the importance of function-based interventions in classroom settings and (2) the implementation steps followed to develop effective social skills instruction and self-monitoring system. Research study limitations will also be addressed.

 
 
 
Symposium #302a
CE Offered: BACB
Special and Ethical Considerations in Behavioral Feeding Programs
Monday, May 25, 2015
9:00 AM–9:50 AM
213AB (CC)
Area: PRA/CSE; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Melissa L. Olive (Applied Behavioral Strategies)
CE Instructor: Melissa L. Olive, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Children with and without disabilities may encounter feeding difficulties. This difficulties can include but are not limited to food selectivity by texture, color, and manner of presentation. Feeding difficulties may also include rigidity related to the feeder and/or meal time location. This session will provide a discussion of the issues related to the provision of behavioral feeding services to children with and without disabilities. The first speaker will identify some of the barriers to behavioral feeding programs. She will then identify strategies for reducing the response effort for parents. The second speaker will discuss the importance of individualizing the assessment and intervention process. For example, various medical assessments may be needed prior to the onset of services. Additionally, parents and children have distinct preferences that should be considered when selecting intervention components. Finally, planning and ensuring generalization and maintenance of feeding skills is critical. Thus, the third speaker will identify strategies that have been used successfully to promote both maintenance and generalization. The discussant will summarize the issues and facilitate question and answers from participants.

Keyword(s): ethical issues, feeding
 

Possible Risks of Behavioral Feeding Programs

STEPHANIE REINOSO (Creative Interventions)
Abstract:

In the process of completing a master's thesis on behavioral feeding, the author encountered several risks to the therapy process. This paper will present the study, identify the risks encountered, discuss how to prevent and address risks, and discuss strategies for future research.

 

Addressing Maintenance and Generalization within Behavioral Feeding Programs

ABIGAIL HOLT (Applied Behavioral Strategies LLC)
Abstract:

This author coordinates an outpatient behavioral feeding clinic. She will identify strategies used to address maintenance and generalization of acquired feeding skills. Case studies will be used to illustrate the effectiveness of intervention as well as maintenance and generalization.

 
 
B. F. Skinner Lecture Series Paper Session #303
CE Offered: PSY/BACB

Changing Neurobiology With Behavior: How Expectation of Reward and Punishment Influence Learning and Remembering Via Distinct Brain Systems

Monday, May 25, 2015
9:00 AM–9:50 AM
006AB (CC)
Area: TPC; Domain: Theory
Instruction Level: Basic
CE Instructor: Edward K. Morris, Ph.D.
Chair: Edward K. Morris (The University of Kansas)
R. ALISON ADCOCK (Duke University)
Dr. R. Alison Adcock is an assistant professor of psychiatry, neurobiology, psychology, and neuroscience at Duke University, and core faculty in the Center for Cognitive Neuroscience. Dr. Adcock received a B.A. in psychology from Emory University with one year of training at St. Hilda's College Oxford and an M.D./Ph.D. in neurobiology from Yale University. She was trained in general psychiatry at the University of California San Francisco. Her research fellowship integrated clinical work at UCSF and the San Francisco Veterans Affairs Medical Center with human neuroimaging research at Stanford. Work in her laboratory aims to understand how the neural circuit implementation of motivation--in particular motivation to learn--influences the explanatory models of the world we construct, and in turn, behavior. Her laboratory uses conventional and real-time fMRI, pharmacological challenges, physiology, and behavior to understand how the neuromodulatory systems involved in motivated behavior shape long-term memory. The work extends from learning in the laboratory to real-world exploration of space, to collaborations funded in Singapore to examine these functional systems in youth at risk for severe mental illness. A recent National Institutes of Health Biobehavioral Research Awards for Innovative New Scientists (BRAINS) funds efforts to translate her basic findings about memory enhancement into "behavioral neurostimulation" strategies for better mental health and educational practice.
Abstract:

Although researchers often discuss how the brain produces behavior, it is also true that behavior and experience influence the brain. Dr. Adcock's research has shown that distinct motivational states can be elicited by expectation of reward or punishment, and influence learning and memory via distinct brain systems. These different motivational states correspond to differential activity and connectivity in brain circuits implicated not only in motivation but also in learning and memory. This selectivity in memory mechanisms, in turn, determines whether the information in memory is detailed versus general or flexible versus rigid. Dr. Adcock's recent work has shown that people can self-induce activation of in neuromodulatory systems capable of broadly influencing brain function and thus shaping learning during therapy--a finding with implications for the treatment of mental illness.

Target Audience:

Clinicians and basic scientists.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants should be able to: (1) name at least two constraints on the development of pre-emptive interventions; (2) describe at least two cognitive foundations for learning-based therapies that involve the medial temporal lobe memory systems; (3) describe two different mechanisms of motivational control of medial temporal lobe function and discuss their implications for learning-based therapies; (4) name one therapeutic implication of the critical role of dopamine (and other neuromodulators) in neural plasticity; and (5) describe two methods of modulating neural plasticity that could be used for targeted enhancement of learning during a therapeutic experience.
Keyword(s): learning, motivational states, neural circuits, reward/punishment
 
 
Invited Paper Session #304
CE Offered: BACB

From Analysis to Application: Using Multiply Controlled Verbal Behavior to Teach Generalized Question Discrimination to Children With Autism

Monday, May 25, 2015
9:00 AM–9:50 AM
Grand Ballroom C3 (CC)
Area: VBC; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Judah B. Axe, Ph.D.
Chair: Judah B. Axe (Simmons College)
FRANCESCA DEGLI ESPINOSA (Private practice)
Francesca degli Espinosa has worked with children with autism for nearly 20 years. Her clinical and research interests focus on advanced applications of contemporary analyses of verbal behavior (Horne & Lowe, 1996; Lowenkron, 1998, 2008; Michael, Palmer, & Sundberg, 2011) not only as a basis for teaching generalized verbal repertoires, but, thereby, as a means of minimizing the need to teach specific individual verbal responses. During her time as the University of Southampton's lead clinician for the first United Kingdom-based early intensive behavioral intervention outcome study (Remington et al., 2007), Dr. degli Espinosa developed the Early Behavioral Intervention Curriculum (EBIC) as a framework for intervention derived from functional analyses of language--work that subsequently formed a principal focus for her doctoral thesis (degli Espinosa, 2011). She currently teaches verbal behavior across a range of BACB-approved European postgraduate courses and remains committed to broadening international knowledge and understanding of just how meaningfully ABA can improve people's lives. She provides applied behavioral interventions for families and educational institutions both in the UK and in Italy, where she has mentored many of her home country's currently certified BCBAs and continues to supervise Italian behavior analysts of the future. Dr. degli Espinosa lives in Southampton, UK, with her partner and three children.
Abstract:

Although in recent years an increasing number of single-case studies have focused on teaching language skills to children with autism using Skinner's (1957) analysis of verbal behavior, the majority have concentrated on establishing primary operants at the single-word level. Nevertheless, from 2 to 3 years of age, typically developing children naturally demonstrate generalized and multiply controlled verbal behavior, including autoclitics: They are, for example, able to provide full-sentence answers to novel questions about ongoing and past events, to describe their own experiences, and to respond to a diversity of novel instructions. One of the greatest challenges currently facing applied behavior analysts remains, therefore, how to teach such complex verbal behavior to children with autism. This presentation will propose that contemporary analyses of multiple control (Lowenkron, 1998; Michael, Palmer, & Sundberg, 2011) offer a conceptually coherent practical basis for the development and curricular organization of procedures to meet this challenge. A program of instruction will be presented in which language objectives are organized along a continuum of increasingly complex stimulus control, and discussion thereby provided of how best to move from establishment of basic vocabulary in primary operants to mastery of complex verbal conditional discriminations across both primary and secondary operants. Special emphasis will be placed on the role of autoclitic frames and intraverbal control in teaching generalized question answering at the tact and intraverbal level and as means of avoiding the discrimination errors that commonly result from teaching specific individual responses to specific individual questions.

Keyword(s): autism, conditional discrimination, language, multiple control
 
 
Symposium #305
CE Offered: BACB
Best Practices in Intensive Behavioral Intervention: Increasing the Efficiency of Teaching Procedures
Monday, May 25, 2015
9:00 AM–10:50 AM
217D (CC)
Area: AUT/PRA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Ivy M. Chong Crane (Florida Institute of Technology: The Scott Center)
Discussant: Caio F. Miguel (California State University, Sacramento)
CE Instructor: Ivy M. Chong Crane, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Research in the area of intensive behavioral intervention continues to examine methods to improve learning outcomes for individuals diagnosed with Autism Spectrum Disorders. Especially in the area of early intervention, many questions remain unanswered about the types of children for which certain procedures may be most beneficial. An emerging area of research aims to improve or refine the efficiency of teaching procedures. Presenters in this symposium will provide data from four studies conducted through university autism centers. The first study examines the extent to which pre-arranged stimulus sets produced untrained relations (learning without explicit teaching). The second study systematically evaluates the extent to which multiple exemplar training (MEI) using videos can lead to rule derivation. The third study compares two variations of the stimulus-stimulus pairing procedure on novel vocalizations. Finally, the fourth study examines the effect of generalized imitation training on functional speech acquisition during Picture Exchange Communication System (PECS) Training. Dr. Caio Miguel will provide remarks as our discussant.

Keyword(s): autism, best practice, emergent relations
 
Evaluation of stimulus equivalence training to produce class mergers
Ivy M. Chong Crane Crane (Florida Institute of Technology: The Scott Center), JEANINE R TANZ (The Scott Center for Autism Treatment at Florida I), Michael E. Kelley (The Scott Center for Autism Treatment, Florida Institute of Technology)
Abstract: Using a multiple probe nested into a multiple baseline design, stimulus equivalence procedures were used to teach three children with ASD categories and their corresponding items using pre-arranged stimuli sets. The stimulus equivalence procedures produced untrained relations (learning without explicit training) for all three participants. For at least two the of the participants, class merger (see fig. 1) was demonstrated after teaching two sets of associated stimuli. For the third participant, additional teaching was required. Results indicate that stimulus equivalence (i.e., equivalence based instruction) procedures are an efficient way to produce generalization. Participant characteristics and implications for practice are discussed.
 
Teaching Children with Autism to Derive Rules
MELISSA NISSEN (University of Houston-Clear Lake), Sarah A. Lechago (University of Houston-Clear Lake)
Abstract: Rule-governed behavior is behavior that occurs from contact with the rules that describe the contingency, rather than prior contact with contingency itself (Skinner, 1969). Following and deriving rules are important skills (Bentall & Lowe, 1987; Rosenfarb, I. S., Newland, M. C., Brannon, S. E., & Howey, D. S., 1992; Vaughn, 1985). This study employed a multiple-baseline design across participants to investigate the effects of multiple exemplar instruction (MEI) using videos to teach rule derivation to two children with autism. Thus far, the results demonstrate that the MEI procedure was effective for teaching rule derivation to both participants, and emergent responding was observed to untrained sets of rules. However, in the dyad probes, only one participant derived rules independently, while the other participant did not. Additional data are being collected with four more participants.
 
A Comparison Of Two Variations Of A Stimulus-Stimulus Pairing Procedure On Novel And Infrequent Vocalizations Of Children With Autism
ANDREW BULLA (Western Michigan University), Jessica E. Frieder (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: Despite the growth in a behavioral technology for the treatment of autism, a small population of individuals with autism fails to develop functional language. One procedure used for inducing vocalizations in non-verbal children is a stimulus-stimulus pairing (SSP) procedure. In an SSP procedure a vocalization is paired with a reinforcer over a period of time to establish the vocalization as a learned reinforcer, and any utterance of the target vocalization is believed to be automatically reinforced thus increasing the frequency of the vocalization. Past research has yielded mixed results with the SSP procedure, and more research is warranted to identify the key components of the procedure that are necessary to produce an effect. This study extended the literature in two ways, by (1) comparing two variations of the SSP procedure; a 5:1 condition in which the target vocalization was emitted five times and presented with one delivery of a reinforcer and a 1:1 condition in which the target vocalization was emitted one time with the delivery of one reinforcer, and (2) comparing the effects of a SSP procedure on the frequency of novel and low frequency vocalization. Results suggest that both pairing procedures were effective in increasing target vocalizations over baseline levels, and target vocalizations could be brought under the control of more direct acting contingencies. Additionally, results suggest that infrequent vocalizations may be increased to higher frequencies more easily than the novel vocalization. Implications for applied work will be discussed, and related to previous research findings.
 
Effects of Generalized Imitation Training on Functional Speech Acquisition During Picture Exchange Communication System (PECS) Training
MINDY NEWHOUSE (Western Michigan University), Jessica E. Frieder (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: Previous research has demonstrated that some children with autism exhibit increases in speech during Picture Exchange Communication System (PECS) training, but factors influencing this speech gain have not been widely studied. Some research suggests a link between motor as well as vocal imitation and language acquisition in general. This study examined generalized motor imitation as one potential factor influencing speech gains during PECS training. Participants included children diagnosed with autism with no previous history of formal motor imitation training prior to the study. Participants were divided into two groups, one that received PECS training without any prior imitation training and one which received imitation training prior to PECS training. A multiple baseline design across subjects design was implemented within each group to examine the effects of these procedures on vocal mands, echoics, and other forms of speech. Results of the study will be highlighted and implications for utilizing this information to better inform early intervention practices aimed at improving the communication skills of children with autism will be discussed.
 
 
Symposium #306
CE Offered: BACB
Recent Innovations in Procedures for Teaching Children with Autism
Monday, May 25, 2015
9:00 AM–10:50 AM
217C (CC)
Area: AUT/DDA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Chata A. Dickson (New England Center for Children)
Discussant: Rebecca P. F. MacDonald (New England Center for Children)
CE Instructor: Chata A. Dickson, Ph.D.
Abstract: Four innovative teaching procedures for children with autism spectrum disorders will be presented in this symposium of empirical papers. The first paper, by Farber, Dube, Chiaccio, and Dickson details a procedure for teaching compound matching, addressing the common problem of stimulus overselectivity. The second paper, by Whalen, Casale, Stahmer, Mittal, Small, and Quicho describes effects of an innovative video game with embedded video modeling on social understanding. The third paper, by Niemand and MacDonald, applies matrix training instructional design to teach a general repertoire of recipe following in adolescents with autism spectrum disorders. Finally, the fourth paper, by Weiss, McKay, Dickson, and Ahearn, identifies and compares effective prompting procedures; and discusses the relative simplicity of implementing these procedures. Attendees who are charged with education children with autism spectrum disorders should come away with this symposium with awareness of innovative developments in teaching children in this population, and these innovations should be directly applicable to their own work.
Keyword(s): autism, stimulus overselectivity, teaching, video modeling
 

Teaching Compound Matching with a Sorting-to-Matching Procedure

RACHEL FARBER (University of Massachusetts Medical School-Shriver), William V. Dube (E.K. Shriver Center, University of Massachusetts Medical School), Chata A. Dickson (New England Center for Children)
Abstract:

Individuals with autism often have difficulty attending to multiple features in a compound stimulus (e.g., pictures with multiple objects, words with multiple letters, or signs with multiple symbols). This restricted attending can be detrimental to learning. Participants were 4 children with autism who had low to intermediate accuracy scores (49-84%) on a computer-presented simultaneous matching-to-sample (SMTS) task with compound stimuli. Sample stimuli had 2 elements (e.g., pictures of a chair and tree), the correct comparison was identical to the sample, and each incorrect comparison had one feature in common with the sample (e.g., chair and sun, airplane and tree). A tabletop sorting-to-matching procedure was used to teach compound SMTS. There were 5 steps in the procedure, and an additional prompted scanning step was imposed if progress stalled. The first step required the participants to sort 3 single pictures; subsequent steps gradually changed the task requirements until it simulated the compound SMTS task. Following mastery of the sorting-to-matching procedure, the participants were retested on the computer-presented compound SMTS task; accuracy improved (93-99%) for all 4 children. This procedure illustrates one way to expand attending to multiple features of a complex stimulus.

 

Development of a Video Game Using Video Modeling and Embedded Discrete Trials to Teach Social Understanding to Children with ASDs

Christina Whalen (West Health Institute), MICHAEL CASALE (West Health Institute), Aubyn C. Stahmer (Rady Children Hospital), Asim Mittal (West Health Institute), Matthew Small (West Health Institute), Jovy Quicho (West Health Institute)
Abstract:

While video modeling has been demonstrated as an effective procedure, it is often difficult and time-consuming. Research has also shown that children can learn through characters and that gaming can help facilitate executive function skills. With the intent of developing a game that could potentially teach social skills to children with ASDs, a series of studies were completed to determine naturally occurring social behaviors in neuro-typical and ASD children (n=24), assess usability of a new ABA-based video game (n=16), and assess the feasibility, potential effectiveness, and generalizability through single-subject research (n=12). Data obtained through each phase drives the development and changes are made as the data indicates is necessary through an iterative development process. Observational data helped to establish the behaviors to target. Video modeling, embedded discrete trials, prompt fading, thinning of reinforcement, and naturalistic behavioral interventions are the procedures used. Animated peer models are used in the game with real childrens voices in the social scenes to enhance generalization. Data from the iterative process, a demonstration, and initial findings will be presented from all 3 studies. Implications for increasing accessibility, motivation, and data efficiency will be discussed, as well as potential impact on cost for existing social skills programs.

 
Teaching Cooking Skills Using Matrix Training and Video Prompting
LAUREN-ASHLEIGH NIEMAND (The New England Center for Children), Rebecca P. F. MacDonald (New England Center for Children)
Abstract: The purpose of the present study was to teach cooking skills to children with autism using matrix training in combination with video prompting. A non-concurrent multiple baseline design across two participants was used. Participants were first taught to imitate cooking related actions on objects using matrix training and video prompting. The video prompt was then removed. If recombinative generalization occurred with untrained actions, then training began with the subsequent matrix. Three different 3x3 matrices were used to teach the various cooking skills. After mastery and recombinative generalization occurred for each matrix, the students were presented with three picture recipes (brownies, pudding and rice) that included untrained matrix relations and instructed to complete the recipes. Interobserver agreement was collected in over 50 percent of sessions and ranged between 96-100% agreement. Results indicated that matrix training was effective in teaching cooking skills to children diagnosed with autism. The participants were able to complete the three picture recipes as a result of the cooking skills taught during matrix training and video prompting.
 
A Comparison of Prompting Hierarchies in the Acquisition of Play Skills
JULIE S. WEISS (New England Center for Children), Julie McKay (Cambridge Public Schools), Chata A. Dickson (New England Center for Children), William H. Ahearn (New England Center for Children)
Abstract: The purpose of the study was to compare the effectiveness and efficiency of prompting hierarchies on the rate of acquisition of a behavior chain to teach play skills. Two comparisons were made: manual guidance with constant delay vs. most-to-least physical prompting with constant delay and (b) manual guidance with constant delay vs. modeling with constant delay. Three individuals diagnosed with an autism spectrum disorder participated, and the dependent variable was the number of sessions and number of trials to acquisition for two 12-step play construction figures. Each session consisted of one probe trial and 10 training trials; generalization probes across a novel teacher and one new setting were conducted after acquisition. Results for the first experiment showed that both teaching procedures were effective. Results from the second comparison also demonstrated effective teaching procedures. Findings generalized across new teachers and settings. Inter-observer agreement data were collected in at least 33% of sessions and averaged 96%. Procedural integrity data were collected in at least 33% of sessions and averaged 99%.
 
 
Symposium #307
CE Offered: BACB
Empirical Evidence of Treatment Outcomes from All Four Modules of the PEAK relational training system
Monday, May 25, 2015
9:00 AM–10:50 AM
217A (CC)
Area: AUT/VBC; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Florence D. DiGennaro Reed (University of Kansas)
Discussant: Seth W. Whiting (Yale University)
CE Instructor: Jacob H. Daar, M.A.
Abstract: Behavior analytic language instruction for children with a diagnosis of autism has traditionally focused on the reinforcement of psycholinguistic (expressive vs. receptive) targets or elementary verbal operants such as mands, tacts, echoics, and intraverbals. While generally successful in establishing functional repertoires of basic communication, therapies targeting these basic language units often fail to provide adequate learning histories necessary to achieve flexible and generative language use. One reason for this deficit may be due to the over-emphasis of direct training contingencies across a limited range of verbal skills and the lack of explicit generalization goals within language repertoires. Furthermore, methods to produce stimulus equivalence that promote the emergence of symbolic and generative language have remained virtually unincorporated in behavior analysis’s most popular language curriculums. In an effort to address these issues, the PEAK Relational Training System was developed. PEAK is a verbal behavior and academic curriculum designed to emphasize learning through direct contingencies, generalization learning, stimulus equivalence, and relational responding. The current presentations will present field research collected on each of these learning modalities as described in the PEAK curriculum and discuss the importance of incorporating these types of contemporary behavior analytic concepts into current verbal behavior therapy treatment programs.
Keyword(s): Autism, Language Acquisition, PEAK, Verbal Behavior
 
Direct Training Module: Evaluating the Efficacy of the PEAK Relational Training System using a Randomized Treatment/Control Design of Children with Autism
AUTUMN N. MCKEEL (Aurora University), Mark R. Dixon (Southern Illinois University), Jacob H. Daar (Southern Illinois University), Kyle Rowsey (Southern Illinois University Carbondale)
Abstract: The present investigation sought to examine the efficacy of the instructional curriculum described in the Direct Training Module of the PEAK Relational Training System on the language repertoires, as measured by the PEAK Direct Assessment, of children diagnosed with autism or related developmental disabilities. Twenty-seven children diagnosed with pervasive developmental disorders were evaluated using the protocol Direct Assessment prior assignment to a control and experimental group. Participants in the experimental group received additional language instruction derived from the curriculum programs of the Direct Training Module while participants in the control group received treatment as usual. Both groups were then re-assessed using the PEAK Direct Assessment after 1 month. A repeated-measures ANOVA indicated that participants in the experimental group made significantly more gains in language skills than those who were assigned to the control group, F(1, 25) = 11.394, p = .002. Implications for evidence-based practice and future research are discussed.
 
Generalization Module: How PEAK Assesses and Promotes the Emergence of Untrained Verbal Behavior
JORDAN BELISLE (Southern Illinois University), Kyle Rowsey (Southern Illinois University Carbondale), Caleb Stanley (The University of Mississippi), Jacob H. Daar (Southern Illinois University), Mark R. Dixon (Southern Illinois University)
Abstract: Promoting the Emergence of Advanced Knowledge Relational Training System (PEAK) is an approach to language development that synthesizes our current understanding of complex verbal behavior. The PEAK-Generalization (PEAK-G) module is the second iteration of PEAK, which is designed to promote the emergence of a generalized verbal repertoire in individuals with- or without- disabilities. Psychometric data suggest that PEAK-G is a valid and reliable measure of an individual’s generalized verbal repertoire, and that generalization is a learning modality that interacts with direct training systematically. Participant scores on PEAK-G have been shown to predict intelligence and autism severity, and normalization of the PEAK-G provides a comparative tool for clinicians working with individuals with disabilities. Outcome data at the single-subject level suggest that the PEAK-G curriculum is effective in training simple and complex verbal behaviors, as well as in promoting the systematic emergence of untrained verbal responding. The existing data have several implications for our understanding of verbal generalization as a learning process, and provide avenues for future research.
 
Equivalence Module: Using the PEAK To Promote Equivalence Responding
KYLE ROWSEY (Southern Illinois University Carbondale), Jacob H. Daar (Southern Illinois University), Jordan Belisle (Southern Illinois University), Stephanie Negrelli (student), Mark R. Dixon (Southern Illinois University)
Abstract: Over the last few decades, advancements in behavior analysts' understanding of learning and language have led to new methodologies which may increase the efficiency with which education is delivered. One such advancement is stimulus equivalence which utilizes training procedures that promote the derivation of skills without direct training. While the effectiveness of stimulus equivalence is well supported within the literature, no packaged treatment or assessment protocols have been researched within the field of behavior analysis. The Promoting the Emergence of Advanced Knowledge Relational Training System (PEAK) is one such package. The PEAK is an assessment and curriculum protocol which utilizes behavior analytic principles to train academic, language, and social skills. The PEAK incorporates basic behavior analytic research including Skinner's Verbal Behavior as well as contemporary behavior analytic principles such as stimulus equivalence and Relational Frame Theory. The current study sought to investigate the effectiveness of the PEAK: Stimulus Equivalence Module in training novel skills to individuals with disabilities. The results indicated gains in all skills taught using stimulus equivalence procedures from the PEAK.
 
Transformation Module: Incorporating Relational Frame Theory into skills training using the PEAK Relational Training System
JACOB H. DAAR (Southern Illinois University), Kyle Rowsey (Southern Illinois University Carbondale), Jordan Belisle (Southern Illinois University), Mark R. Dixon (Southern Illinois University)
Abstract: Since its inception, practitioners of behavior analysis have striven to understand all aspects of human behavior. One of the more daunting tasks has been the study one particular area of the complex human repertoire: verbal behavior. While some progress has been made in this area, research on the application of behavior analytic techniques to both understand and teach verbal behavior in applied settings remain lacking. One contemporary approach, Relational Frame Theory (RFT), provides a promising base for launching behavior analysis into a greater understanding of both the theory and practice of teaching and understanding verbal behavior. The current study sought to extend the applied research on RFT incorporating programs from the PEAK Relational Training System: Transformation Module (PEAK). Several advanced language skills were taught to individuals with autism supporting the utility of RFT as a basis for training procedures as well as the effectiveness of the PEAK in training skills to individuals with autism. Data collected in the course of training derived relational responding will be presented along with discussion concerning the methodological and logistical aspects of teaching such complex language.
 
 
Symposium #308
CE Offered: BACB
Advancements in the Treatment of Pediatric Feeding Disorders
Monday, May 25, 2015
9:00 AM–10:50 AM
Texas Ballroom Salon C (Grand Hyatt)
Area: CBM/DDA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Danielle N. Dolezal (Seattle Children's Hospital and The Autism Center)
Discussant: Sean D. Casey (The Iowa Department of Education)
CE Instructor: Danielle N. Dolezal, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Children diagnosed with pediatric feeding disorders present with a variety of difficulties such as food refusal, difficulties advancing texture, and restrictive diets. In the treatment of these disorders, a number of consequent procedures have been shown to be effective. Given the heterogeneity of the population, further advancements in targeted procedures to improve outcomes are necessary. This symposium will present data that exemplify innovative treatments that improve outcomes for these children. The first investigation evaluates a skill training protocol to increase oral-motor skills and improve the consumption in one child. In the second investigation, the authors evaluated the influence of response effort, quality of reinforcement, and the interaction of these two dimensions on advancing texture in a small child. Study 3 examined the utility of telehealth in training parents to implement interventions to treat food selectivity. Results suggested this may be a suitable method for training parents to expand their childrens diets. The final investigation evaluated the impact of positive reinforcement in the treatment of feeding disorders and began to identify for whom the inclusion of this treatment component was beneficial. These studies will be discussed in terms of variables that influence the development of empirically derived treatments for pediatric feeding disorders.

Keyword(s): feeding difficulties, reinforcement quality, response effort, telehealth
 
The Effects of Skills Training on Consumption and Preference in Children with Pediatric Feeding Disorders
ASHLEE MATRIGALI (Clinic 4 Kidz), Meeta R. Patel (Clinic 4 Kidz)
Abstract: Children with feeding problems display a variety of inappropriate behaviors to avoid eating. Avoidance behaviors are often related to negative experiences that have been paired with eating (i.e., gagging, choking, and vomiting). However, some children, especially those who do not consume food orally but instead via feeding tube for prolonged periods of time, may not develop the adequate oral motor skills to manage different textures or types of food. These skill deficits may increase the aversive properties of eating. To address these skill deficits it is common to implement a skill training protocol to train the necessary oral motor skills. Therefore, the purpose of this study was to evaluate the effectiveness of a training protocol to increase consumption of fruits. In addition, we evaluated the effects of the training protocol on preference. A preference assessment was conducted pre and post training to evaluate preference shifts. Independent consumption increased for the first fruit after training occurred for that food. Interestingly, generalization occurred for the other two fruits and training was not necessary. The results from the post-skills training preference assessment indicated an increase in preference for all fruits presented. These data are discussed in relation to negative reinforcement and establishing operations.
 
Outpatient Evaluation of the Effects of Response Effort and Quality of Reinforcement on Increasing Bite Acceptance of Food
BROOKE M. HOLLAND (The University of Iowa), David P. Wacker (The University of Iowa), Linda J. Cooper-Brown (The University of Iowa), Ashley Willms (The University of Iowa), Kelly M. Schieltz (The University Of Iowa)
Abstract: The purpose of this study was to evaluate the influence of response effort, quality of reinforcement, and the possible interaction of these two dimensions on food consumption. The participant, Neil, was a 35-month-old male who had a history of feeding difficulties. Response effort was defined as the combined and regulated oral-motor manipulations required to consume different types and textures of food. Quality of reinforcement was defined as the type of presentation of a particular food. Bites accepted were the dependent variable. Interobserver agreement was assessed across 42.4% of feeding sessions with an average IOA of 97.8%.The evaluation was conducted within two phases: Phase I, conducted within a reversal design, and Phase II, conducted within a changing criterion design. . Phase I results demonstrated quality and effort influenced bites accepted. Specifically, Neil accepted bites of the blended foods (medium effort) via spoon and graham cracker self-fed (higher quality with high effort), but he did not accept bites of fork-mashed foods (high effort). Phase II results demonstrated that the stimulus fading plan of gradually increasing the blended texture to a fork-mashed texture was successful in increasing bites accepted of the high effort food.
 
Examining the Utility of Telehealth in Training Parents to Implement Interventions to Treat Food Selectivity
Abby Greif (Florida Institute of Technology and The Scott Cent), ALISON M. BETZ (Florida Institute of Technology)
Abstract: We trained 4 parents of children with food selectivity to implement treatment procedures during mealtime. Prior to training all children engaged in disruptive behaviors such as vocal protests, aggression, and refusal behaviors (e.g. covering mouth and head turns) when presented with a nonpreferred or novel food. A Behavior Skills Training model was used to train parents to implement a treatment package consisting of 3-step prompting, differential reinforcement, and escape extinction. During training parents were first provided with a description of the protocol via didactic training and role playing with the researchers (in vivo) and had an opportunity to ask questions. The researchers then provided immediate feedback during mealtimes via telehealth. Results showed increases in parents’ appropriate implementation of mealtime procedures as well as increases in appropriate child behaviors. Further, high levels of parent integrity maintained following the removal of immediate feedback. Overall, results suggest telehealth may be a suitable method for training parents to implement interventions to treat food selectivity.
 
On the Effects of Differential and Noncontingent Reinforcement in the Treatment of Feeding Disorders
AARON D. LESSER (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Medical Center), Suzanne M. Milnes (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Medical Center), Jennifer M. Kozisek (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska), Cathleen C. Piazza (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Medical Center)
Abstract: Clinicians commonly use positive reinforcement in conjunction with escape extinction (EE) in the treatment of feeding disorders. Some evidence suggests EE is effective to increase acceptance with or without positive reinforcement; however, the addition of positive reinforcement to EE may result in lower levels of inappropriate mealtime behavior (IMB) and/or negative vocalizations for some children (Piazza, Patel, Gulotta, Sevin, & Layer, 2003; Reed et al., 2004). The purpose of the current investigation was to further evaluate the impact of positive reinforcement in the treatment of feeding disorders and begin to identify for whom the addition of positive reinforcement is beneficial. We conducted an assessment comparing differential (DRA), noncontingent (NCR), and no reinforcement on the acceptance, IMB, and negative vocalizations of 31 children with feeding disorders. We observed no difference for acceptance across all conditions for all children and lower IMB and/or negative vocalizations in NCR for 29% of children. We later evaluated NCR or DRA with and without EE on the same behaviors. If we observed no benefit to NCR or DRA across all behaviors during the earlier assessment, we again observed no benefit when NCR or DRA was combined with EE. Additional findings and implications will be discussed.
 
 
Symposium #309
CE Offered: BACB
Behavioral Economics of Chronic Disease: The Role of Discounting Process in Health Decisions
Monday, May 25, 2015
9:00 AM–10:50 AM
Texas Ballroom Salon B (Grand Hyatt)
Area: CBM/EAB; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Derek D. Reed (The University of Kansas)
Discussant: Suzanne H. Mitchell (Oregon Health & Science University)
CE Instructor: Derek D. Reed, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Since the inception of behavioral economics in the early 1980s, the intersection of behavioral science and microeconomic principles has yielded novel insights into health-related behaviors and their promotion. Early applications primarily explore the abuse liability of pharmacological agents in nonhumans. However, as behavioral scientists began translating behavioral economics outside the operant chamber, researchers and policymakers soon discovered that behavioral economic principles and applications could be taken to scale to inform public health policies and preventative healthcare. This symposium highlights cutting-edge applications of behavioral economic principles and procedures to health decision making. The presentations featured in this symposium range from basic decision making studies on episodic future thinking regarding cancer to applications of mindfulness to alter delay discounting of food. Despite the novel applications across each of the four presentations, a common thread unifying these studies is the reliance on discounting processes and assays to evaluate health decision making under uncertainty or in the face of intertemporal tradeoffs common attributes in most real-world health decisions. These use-inspired studies underscore the translational utility of behavioral economics for health promotion and advancing the fields understand of healthy decision making.

Keyword(s): behavioral economics, discounting, health, mindfulness
 
The Effects of Modified Episodic Future Thinking on Risky Long-Term Health Decisions
BRENT KAPLAN (The University of Kansas), Derek D. Reed (The University of Kansas), David P. Jarmolowicz (The University of Kansas)
Abstract: Many of our everyday choices are associated with outcomes that are both delayed and probabilistic. The temporal attention hypothesis suggests that individuals’ decision making can be improved by focusing attention to temporally distal events and reducing the desire for proximate outcomes. Viewing discounting this framework implies that environmental manipulations that expand the limits of an individual’s temporal perspective by bringing focus on temporally distal outcomes, and thereby reducing present bias, may alter his/her degree of discounting. One such manipulation, episodic future thinking, has shown to successfully lower discount rates. Several questions remain as to the applicability of episodic future thinking to domains other than temporal discounting. The present experiments examine the effects of a modified episodic future thinking procedure on probability discounting in the context of both a delayed health gain and loss. Eleven college-aged participants responded on a probabilistic discounting task when the outcome was either a health gain or loss. Results indicate the modified episodic future thinking procedure effectively altered 9 out of the 11 participants’ degree of discounting in the predicted directions and lend further support to the temporal attention hypothesis.
 
Measurement and Validation of a Novel Delay Discounting Measure for Hypothetical Food: The Food Kirby
ERIN B. RASMUSSEN (Idaho State University), Kelsie Hendrickson (Idaho State University), Steven R. Lawyer (Idaho State University)
Abstract: This study established a brief measure of delay discounting for food, the Food Choice Questionnaire (FCQ), and compared it to other established measures of food and money discounting. Over 140 participants completed either two hypothetical money discounting measures [a computerized monetary adjusting amount (AA) procedure or the Monetary Choice questionnaire (MCQ)] or two hypothetical food discounting (a computerized food AA procedure or the FCQ) measures. Monetary discounting measures highly correlated, replicating previous work. The novel FCQ yielded highly consistent data that strongly correlated with the AA food discounting task. There were also significant magnitude effects across the FCQ and the MCQ. Finally, individuals with higher PBF discounted food more steeply than individuals with lower PBF in the FCQ and AA food discounting procedure. This study is the first to show that the Food Kirby (FCQ) yielded consistent data that strongly correlated to an established measure of food discounting and is sensitive to PBF.
 

Costs, Benefits, and the Propensity to Take Pills: On the Behavioral Economics of Medication Adherence in Multiple Sclerosis Patients

DAVID P. JARMOLOWICZ (The University of Kansas), Jared M. Bruce (University of Missouri-Kansas City), Amanda S. Bruce (University of Missouri-Kansas City), Derek D. Reed (The University of Kansas)
Abstract:

Discounting analyses have robustly contributed to our understanding of clinical disorders such as addiction, problematic gambling, and obesity. Importantly, individuals rates of discounting predict the progression of addiction and the success of addiction treatments. That success suggests that discounting analyses may help predict health behavior in other clinical populations. For example, individuals with Multiple Sclerosis (MS) frequently have low levels of medication adherence. Predicting which individuals will have adherence difficulties may help direct treatment resources to those that need it the most. The current study developed a novel probability discounting paradigm which assessed the effects of differing probabilities of medication efficacy and side effects in a sample of MS patients whom typically were (n=35) or where not (n=35) adherent with their treatments. Discounting was both different across groups and was predictive of group membership, even when accounting for other MS related variables (fatigue, depression, etc.).

 
Mindful Eating Training Reduces Food Discounting Rates in Adolescents and Adults
KELSIE HENDRICKSON (Idaho State University), Erin B. Rasmussen (Idaho State University)
Abstract: The present study examined the effects of a brief mindful eating training on temporal discounting rates (preferences between smaller sooner and larger later outcomes) for hypothetical food and money. In Session 1, 348 participants (176 adults and 174 adolescents) completed a variety a modified Food Choice Questionnaire (FCQ) and Monetary Choice Questionnaire (MCQ) as baseline measures of food and money discounting, respectively. In Session 2, participants were randomly assigned to one of three conditions: a 50-min mindful eating workshop, a 50-min clip of a DVD on nutrition, or an unstructured activity. All participants completed the discounting tasks for food and money again as a post-manipulation measure. Individuals in the mindful eating group evidenced lower rates of food, but not money, discounting after the training, compared to baseline. Participants in the two control conditions did not exhibit changes in their discounting patterns. This study replicates our research with mindful eating and discounting with adults and extends our findings to adolescents.
 
 
Symposium #310
CE Offered: BACB
Issues in and Application of Meta-Analyses and Syntheses of Single-Case Experimental Research in Autism and Developmental Disabilities
Monday, May 25, 2015
9:00 AM–10:50 AM
214B (CC)
Area: DDA/AUT; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Jennifer Ganz (Texas A&M University)
Discussant: Kimberly Vannest (Texas A & M University)
CE Instructor: Jennifer Ganz, Ph.D.
Abstract: Recently, the field has seen an increase in the publication of meta-analyses and systematic reviews of treatments for people with autism spectrum disorder and developmental disabilities, which are critical in providing practitioners and other stakeholders with information regarding for whom and in what contexts particular treatments are most effective. However, many controversies remain regarding these advances. To that end, this symposium will include conceptual and applied presentations and discussions by nationally/internationally-recognized researchers who publish cutting-edge work in meta-analysis and synthesis of single-case research and in autism spectrum and developmental disabilities. The four included presentations will cover current debates in the use of meta-analysis and research synthesis, effects of measurement methods on estimation of effect sizes, and two meta-analyses of studies on caregiver- and family member-implemented interventions. Single-case researchers will gain an understanding of the state of the science in regard to the use of meta-analyses and research syntheses to evaluate single-case experimental research in autism spectrum and developmental disabilities.
Keyword(s): Effect size, Meta-analysis, Research synthesis, Single-case experiment
 

Current Issues in Research Synthesis and Meta-Analysis of Single-Case Experiments on Autism Treatment

OLIVER WENDT (Purdue University)
Abstract:

For single-case researchers in autism and their audiences it is critical to stay informed on current advances and issues related to research synthesis of single-case designs (SCDs). This presentation will highlight the current status of three ongoing debates: 1. Critical appraisal: Evaluating the quality of SCDs is crucial for research synthesis and documenting evidence-based practice. Seven different checklists and evaluation scales have recently emerged for this purpose. The strengths and weaknesses of each will be discussed alongside the results of a field trial comparing their performance on assessing study quality. 2. Selection of effect size metrics: Controversy exists as to which techniques are most appropriate to analyze between-phase differences in SCDs and derive meaningful effect size estimates. Two general strategies have been proposed: Regression approaches versus non-overlap metrics. Advantages and disadvantages of each will be outlined and scenarios will be described when one approach is preferable over another. 3. Mixed methods synthesis: Autism researchers are increasingly confronted with heterogeneous forms of research evidence including both quantitative and qualitative designs; these can be combined using a mixed methods approach. Staying abreast of these recent methodological advances will assist with the production of high quality syntheses of autism treatment research.

 
The Effects of Interval-Based Measurement on the Estimation of Effect Sizes
JENNIFER LEDFORD (Vanderbilt University)
Abstract: Interval-based measurement systems (partial interval, whole interval, and momentary time sampling systems) are widely used in behavioral research. These systems result in different types of predictable or random measurement error (e.g., partial interval recording systematically overestimates occurrence). Historically, this error was considered acceptable because research suggested it might not interfere with accurate determination of the existence of a functional relation, given appropriate measurement constraints (e.g., small intervals). However, the use of interval systems may result in biased effect sizes that are not directly comparable to effect sizes derived from direct measurement. The presenter will provide a brief overview of interval-based measurement systems and their error patterns and will show several examples of how the use of data collected using interval-based systems can result in effect size estimates that are not comparable to those derived from duration recording. Suggestions will be provided for syntheses including both interval-based and non-interval-based systems.
 
A Meta-Analytic Review of Single-Case Studies on Primary Caregiver-Implemented Communication Interventions with Individuals with ASD
EE REA HONG (Texas A&M University), Jennifer Ganz (Texas A&M University), Leslie Neely (Texas A&M University), Margot Boles (Texas A&M University), Stephanie Gerow (Texas A&M University), Jennifer Ninci (Texas A&M University)
Abstract: Children with ASD who acquire spoken language by five to six years old tend to have better long-term outcomes, such as high rate of employment, better academic outcomes and positive social relationships (Howlin & Charman, 2011). For this reason, providing early and intensive social and communication interventions has been emphasized by researchers and educators (Flippin, Reszka, & Watson, 2010). Since young children with ASD who receive special education services spend most of their waking hours at home with their families, involving family members in interventions may provide more communication opportunities to their children with ASD regardless of time and settings (Steiner, Koegel, Koegel, & Ence, 2012). Some studies have found that caregiver- and sibling-implemented interventions promote generalization of acquired skills of those children with ASD (e.g., Schreibman & Stahmer, 2013). In addition, it is expected that caregiver- and sibling-implemented interventions are more cost-effective than clinician-delivered interventions (Minjarez, Williams, Mercier, & Hardan, 2011). The purpose of this meta-analysis is to determine whether family member-implemented interventions are effective in promoting social and communication skills of individuals with ASD. This meta-analysis will include comparisons of effectiveness differentiated by critical moderator variables. In addition, overall and specific effect sizes of family-implemented social and communication interventions according to each moderator variable will be identified. Those moderator variables will include participant characteristics, type of communication interventions, training duration or number of training sessions provided to family members, and design quality of a study. Finally, the gaps in the literature will also be discussed regarding social and communication interventions that family member implemented for individuals with ASD.
 

Parent Implemented Interventions: Evaluation of Utility of 3 Effect Size Estimates and Visual Analysis

WENDY A. MACHALICEK (University of Oregon), Sarah Hansen (University of Oregon), Tracy Raulston (University of Oregon)
Abstract:

For children with intellectual and developmental disabilities (IDD) including autism spectrum disorder, intervention participation is mediated by caregivers, necessitating increased awareness by researchers about how to support parents as interventionists and the effects of parent implemented interventions on child outcomes. WWC 2010 standards for single-case research (SCR) designs recommend reporting multiple effect size estimates alongside regression estimates and visual analysis and researchers are increasingly doing so. We are unaware of any comparison of effect size estimates for parent implemented interventions. The 55 SCR studies for the current analysis were selected from a recently completed review (1997-2013) of parent implemented interventions for children, birth to twelve years of age, with IDD. Following coding of demographic variables, intervention procedures, and social validity outcomes, Tau-U, NAP, and R-IRD were applied to each case. 3 raters independently used visual analysis procedures to evaluate data. Pearsons r was calculated to determine agreement between estimates and visual analysis. Effectiveness of parent training on treatment fidelity and of parent implemented interventions on child outcomes will be discussed. Data analysis will be finished before May. This review offers information on the relative utility and efficaciousness of effect size estimates when applied to parent implemented interventions.

 
 
Symposium #311
CE Offered: BACB
Examinations of outcome data from clinical programs that address behavior disorders
Monday, May 25, 2015
9:00 AM–10:50 AM
214D (CC)
Area: DDA/CBM; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Henry S. Roane (Upstate Medical University)
Discussant: Joel Eric Ringdahl (Southern Illinois University)
CE Instructor: Henry S. Roane, Ph.D.
Abstract: A core feature of ABA is its focus on data collection and analysis. Typically, these data permit an evaluation of an individual’s responding across an observation period and allow for the examination of functional relations. Organizations that conduct such data on individuals often assess those data on a program level. Information gleaned from such analyses can inform a number of organization parameters such as service delivery, treatment implementation, and research – areas that can, in turn, affect the larger practice of ABA. This symposium will describe outcomes from clinics that specialize in the treatment of behavior disorders. The first presentation describes outcomes from a clinic that conducts brief (30-60 min) appointments, including the prevalence of referral concerns, diagnostic profiles of clients, cancellation rates, and percent reduction in problem behavior. The second talk will discuss the evaluation of noncontingent reinforcement across 28 individuals and will compare differences between socially and non-socially mediated behaviors. The third talk details follow-up data on the use of an outpatient approach to address enuresis and encopresis. The final talk will describe the effects of using brief outpatient visits to treat feeding disorders. Each talk will include case examples, and Dr. Joel Ringdahl will discuss the results.
 

Outcome data from a pediatric outpatient clinic specializing in the treatment of severe problem behavior

NICOLE DEROSA (Update Medical University), Leah Phaneuf (Upstate Medical University), Henry S. Roane (Upstate Medical University)
Abstract:

A number of clinics exist worldwide that employee functional analysis-based treatments for severe problem behavior. This presentation will describe the organization and outcome data from a pediatric outpatient clinic at Upstate Medical University. Unique to this clinic is the fact that all services are provided within the constraints of psychotherapy current procedural terminology (CPT) codes. One facet of this method of billing is that all psychotherapy CPT codes are time-limited (e.g., 60 min) which could impact a number of client-related factors such as response to treatment and cancellation rates. We will discuss clinical procedures that have been developed to address these issues while maintaining the technical requirements of the functional analysis process. Case examples will be provided to illustrate the utility of the model. We will also provide outcome data on the types of problems addressed, diagnostic profiles of clients, cancellation rates, and percent reduction in problem behavior (presently over 90% reduction relative to baseline levels of problem behavior). These outcomes will be discussed in terms of factors to consider for clinic development, program evaluation, and client retention.

 

Noncontingent Reinforcement for the Treatment of Severe Problem Behavior: A Consecutive Case Analysis of 28 Applications

Cara Phillips (Kennedy Krieger Institute and the Johns Hopkins Un), JULIA IANNACCONE (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Griffin Rooker (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Louis P. Hagopian (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
Abstract:

Noncontingent reinforcement (NCR) is a commonly used treatment for severe problem behavior displayed by individuals with intellectual and developmental disabilities. The purpose of the current study was to expand on the existing literature on NCR by reporting outcomes achieved with 28 applications of NCR as the primary treatment across consecutive cases with severe problem behavior using a collective case series to minimize selection bias. Participants ranged in age from 5 to 33 years and had intellectual and developmental disabilities. 14 application were for behavior maintained by automatic reinforcement, 13 for behavior maintained by social reinforcement (i.e., attention, escape, tangible), and one for behavior with unknown function (i.e., inconclusive FA). Results suggest that the effectiveness of NCR may in part be determined by behavioral function. NCR resulted in a 90% or better reduction in problem behavior for only 7 of 15 cases in which problem behavior was maintained by automatic reinforcement. In these cases, additional treatment components were added to bolster effects. In contrast, when NCR in isolation was applied to socially maintained behavior, the result was a 90% or better reduction for 12 of 13 cases. Results suggest that NCR is an effective treatment for socially maintained problem behavior.

 
Refinements and Outcomes from a Toileting Program Targeting the Treatment of Enuresis and Encopresis for Individuals with Developmental Delays
JOANNA LOMAS MEVERS (Marcus Autism Center), Nathan Call (Marcus Autism Center), Mynaria Everett (Marcus Autism Center)
Abstract: Toilet training is a critical self-help skill. Whereas typically developing children generally achieve continence by 2-4 years of age (Blum, Taubman, & Nemeth, 2003) individuals diagnosed with developmental disabilities are often delayed in achieving independent continence or never achieve it at all. Incontinence has many negative side effects, such as an increased burden of care for parents, poor hygiene, physical discomfort, lack of independence, and social stigma (Cicero & Pfadt, 2002). In addition, incontinence can lead to exclusion from many settings, such as regular educations classrooms, camps, or extracurricular activities. Despite the social significance and importance of achieving continence there have been few advances beyond the procedures outlined in the study by Azrin and Fox (1971), which presented an early treatment for enuresis. Furthermore, there are no well-established procedures for the treatment of encopresis. The current study includes datasets from a clinical protocol for the treatment of enuresis that includes several refinements to previous methods. In addition, data from a novel procedure developed for the treatment of encopresis will be presented, as well as long-term outcomes that show sustained continence and emergence of skills that were not specifically targeted for intervention (e.g., self-initiation).
 

A Presentation of Outcome Data from an Intensive Pediatric Feeding Program

AARON BOYCE (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Medical Center), Jennifer M. Kozisek (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska), Valerie M. Volkert (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Medical Center), Suzanne M. Milnes (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Medical Center), Cathleen C. Piazza (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Medical Center)
Abstract:

The behavior analytic literature indicates multiple effective interventions to address pediatric feeding disorders (Milnes & Piazza, 2013; Sharp, Jaquess, Morton, & Herzinger, 2010). While the breadth of published interventions affirms that clinicians are developing effective treatments to progress children diagnosed with feeding disorders toward age-typical eating, these published studies provide information on only a small percentage of the children being treated. Furthermore, while there are a few published reviews summarizing which interventions clinicians are using to successfully treat feeding disorders (Volkert & Vaz, 2010), these reviews do not provide information about the totality of successful interventions used in their clinics. Success could be indicated by decreases in enteral feedings and disruptive mealtime behavior or increases in oral intake and integrity when transitioning to caregivers feeding (i.e., rather than a trained therapist). Thus, to contribute to our understanding of successful interventions for pediatric feeding disorders, we preliminarily evaluated outcomes for 46 children from a well-established Midwestern pediatric feeding disorders clinic, which included evaluation of the interventions we used to treat each child. These data may assist in bridging the gap between science and practice in determining which interventions are successful and used most often by clinicians to treat pediatric feeding disorders.

 
 
Symposium #312
CE Offered: BACB
First World Problems: Behavior Economic Analyses of Running, Tanning, Borrowing, and Exotic Dancing
Monday, May 25, 2015
9:00 AM–10:50 AM
006D (CC)
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
Chair: Shea M. Lemley (The University of Kansas)
Discussant: Jeffrey N. Weatherly (University of North Dakota)
CE Instructor: Shea M. Lemley, M.A.
Abstract: Behavior economics has provided insight into a variety of real world problems, including substance use, gambling, and overeating. Areas of interest to behavior economic researchers are expanding to include a broader array of potential behavior problems. This symposium focuses on relatively novel areas of behavior economic interest. Mahoney and Lawyer examine delay and probability discounting in users of short term loans. Speelman, Rowsey, Daar, and Dixon examine delay discounting by women in service positions requiring varying degrees of revealing attire. Sofis, Simmons, and Jarmolowicz study long distance runners’ delay discounting of money and both demand and delay discounting of minutes running. Becirevic, Kaplan, and Reed examine demand for ultra-violet indoor tanning (UVIT) in groups of tanners defined as non-users, ex-users, and current users. These talks demonstrate how behavior economic analyses continue to provide valuable data regarding patterns of decision-making across a number of real world problems.
Keyword(s): behavior economics, delay discounting, demand, impulsivity
 
Delay and Probability Discounting among Payday and Title Loan Recipients
COLIN MAHONEY (Idaho State University), Steven R. Lawyer (Idaho State University)
Abstract: Impulsive choice patterns are associated with the use of payday or title loans (Gathergood, 2012), which are short-term loans that provide an immediate and certain monetary reward, but also include a delayed and uncertain aversive outcome in the form of exorbitant fees and interest. Delay discounting (DD) and probability discounting (PD), which measure different aspects of impulsive choice, offer a unique opportunity to understand the impulsivity-related aspects of payday and title loans. In this study, community-dwelling participants between the ages of 18 and 30 completed delay and probability discounting tasks for hypothetical money. Patterns of discounting were characterized using area under the curve and compared among participants who reported taking out a payday and/or title loan in the past (n = 41) and those who did not (n = 255) using t-tests. There was a significant difference between individuals who endorsed taking out payday and/or title loans versus those who did not on delay discounting tasks, but not probability discounting tasks. These findings suggest that these individuals are more likely than controls to devalue monetary outcomes as a function of delay, but not probability.
 
Monetary Discounting Across Exotic Dancers and Waitresses of Varying Establishments
RYAN C. SPEELMAN (Southern Illinois University), Kyle Rowsey (Southern Illinois University Carbondale), Jacob H. Daar (Southern Illinois University), Mark R. Dixon (Southern Illinois University)
Abstract: Behavioral problems are correlated with decreased sensitivity to larger delayed rewards (Dixon, Marley, & Jacobs, 2003). Delay discounting, a measure of impulsivity, is a reliable indicator of problematic behavior patterns including pathological gambling (Dixon et al., 2003), alcohol consumption (Moore & Cusens, 2010) and smoking (Odum, Madden, & Bickel, 2002). Participants employed in various service positions including exotic dancers, waitresses at Hooters and waitresses of restaurants where revealing clothes are not part of the work attire were recruited. Participants were asked to make several hypothetical choices between $1000 available immediately and an equal or lesser amount available after a delay. Women who were willing to expose themselves or wear revealing clothing as part of a job requirement were found to discount the value of delayed rewards more than women who work in professions where this is not required. For women working as exotic dancers or in establishments in which wearing revealing clothing is a requirement, impulsive behavior patterns may be problematic as the long term benefits and job security of these professions may be negligible. Protocols to help teach self-control and decrease impulsive behavior patterns may be especially warranted for individuals seeking these types of professions.
 
Two Steps Forward, One Step Back? A Behavior Economic Analysis of Long Distance Runners’ Valuation of Running
MICHAEL SOFIS (The University of Kansas), J. Simmons (University of Kansas), David P. Jarmolowicz (The University of Kansas)
Abstract: In the current study, 38 trail runners (14 ultra-marathoners, 7 full marathoners, and 18 half-marathoners) completed two delay discounting tasks. Participants’ valuation of immediate vs. delayed money was assessed in one discounting task whereas the other discounting task measured valuation of immediate vs. delayed minutes of running. Participants reported the number of miles they ran each week and completed a hypothetical purchase task that asked how many minutes they would run across a range of prices. No significant differences observed for demand of minutes of running whether comparing between groups or as a function of weekly mileage. Amongst all participants, minutes of running was discounted at a higher rate than money (p= .009). When comparing self-reported mileage and minutes of running discounting, there was a negatively correlated trend (r= -.367) from 0 to 40 miles and a positively correlated trend from 40 miles and greater (r= .507). This significant difference between trends (p= .008) suggests a potential U-shaped relation wherein discounting of minutes of running is greatest when running mileage is closer to zero or over 40 miles per week. Results suggest that discounting of minutes of running might be a sensitive measure of running as a commodity.
 
The Essential Value of Ultra-Violet Indoor Tanning: A Behavioral Economic Analysis of an At-Risk Population
AMEL BECIREVIC (The University of Kansas), Brent Kaplan (The University of Kansas), Derek D. Reed (The University of Kansas)
Abstract: Ultra-violet indoor tanning (UVIT) is a pervasive issue affecting over 30 million Americans annually, despite well-publicized links to skin cancer (Fisher & James, 2010; Woo & Eide, 2010). UVIT users are predominantly non-hispanic white females between the ages of 18 and 25 (Boniol et al. 2012). Recent studies on UVIT have demonstrated that frequent users are able to distinguish between UV- and non-UV-emitting tanning beds, with some users even displaying withdrawal symptoms, thus providing support for physiological reinforcing effects of UV exposure (Feldman et al., 2004; Kaur et al., 2006). Despite calls for research, relatively little behavioral research has been done on UVIT use. This presentation examines UVIT use within the framework of the reinforcer pathologies model of addiction. Specifically, 222 (Mage = 19.69; SDage = 2.5 years) college-aged females completed a hypothetical purchase task for tanning packages where consumption (probability of purchase) was a function of increasing prices. Data were fitted according to the Hursh and Silberberg (2008) exponential demand equation. Results show differences in consumption between non-users, ex-users, and current users; the latter group yielding higher scores across all metrics of demand. Our findings indicate that applied behavioral economics offers unique insights in the study of UVIT.
 
 
Symposium #313
The Behavior Analysis of Music: Experimental and Theoretical Perspectives
Monday, May 25, 2015
9:00 AM–10:50 AM
007B (CC)
Area: EAB/TPC; Domain: Basic Research
Chair: Michael Domjan (University of Texas at Austin)
Discussant: Jose A. Martinez-Diaz (Florida Institute of Technology and ABA Tech)
Abstract: Virtually everyone listens to music and many participate in various types of musical activities. Music has been studied from a variety of perspective. For example, much of what is referred to as the "psychology of music" explores music from the perspective of cognitive psychology and cognitive neuroscience. In contrast to the "psychology of music," the present symposium will explore music from the perspective of behavior analysis. Presenters will discuss how behavior analysis can be applied to the study of the nature of music and the training of musical skills.
Keyword(s): music, pitch discrimination, RFT, verbal behavior
 
A Relational Frame Theory approach to Learning Music
JASON LEWIS (Florida Institute of Technology), Joshua K. Pritchard (Florida Institute of Technology)
Abstract: In this presentation, we will explore the utility of relational frames and the impact this approach has on teaching music theory. Relational Frame Theory has yielded behavior analytic technologies that could enhance instruction of music theory and we will describe a deliberate method by which naïve students to music theory can be led through learning trials to rapidly acquire foundational skills to play and compose music. This theoretical paper will showcase the utility of viewing music as a form of language as a method to design instructional modules compared to the traditional approach to teaching the art of music. It will conclude with ideas for research lines as well as technological implications for behavior analysts who wish to diversify their career options.
 
The Shaping of Absolute Pitch as a Higher Order Relative Pitch and Verbal Repertoire
BENJAMIN REYNOLDS (University of Nevada, Reno), Linda J. Parrott Hayes (University of Nevada, Reno)
Abstract: Absolute pitch, or the presentation of an accurate note in the absence of an auditory prompt, is often treated as an innate ability in musicology. This study sought to improve absolute pitch accuracy among 2 trained and 2 untrained singers through the use of a changing criterion multiple baseline with criterion level probe design which shaped mimicked, relative, and absolute pitch. Results showed absolute pitch acquisition across all 4 participants as well as unique response acquisition curves between both groups. Further refinements of the existing study and implications of absolute pitch as verbal behavior are proposed for further investigation.
 
Musical Instrument Manipulation as Verbal Behavior
THOMAS LARUM (St. Cloud State University), Benjamin N. Witts (St. Cloud State University)
Abstract: A functional account of language, or verbal behavior, opens up the analyses to many areas of exploration and application. B. F. Skinner (1957) defined verbal behavior as “behavior reinforced through the mediation of other persons” (p. 2) with the caveat that such listener behavior has “been conditioned precisely in order to reinforce the behavior of the speaker” (p. 225). Given this definition, it stands to reason that verbal behavior can encompasses behavior of any form or medium. Indeed, it is possible that the act of playing a musical instrument may meet Skinner’s definition of verbal behavior. As Henry Wadsworth Longfellow said, “Music is the universal language of mankind.” It is in light of arguments of music as language that we offer a preliminary analysis of the verbal and non-verbal effects of playing a musical instrument. Limitations of such an analysis are presented in addition to possible conceptualizations in response to these limitations.
 
Training Intonation Using Shaping and Response Cards
Conny M. Raaymakers (Evidence Based Consultants), DON RAAYMAKERS (Caledonia Community Schools)
Abstract: The traditional method of training intonation is just having students sing pitches and over time they will just automatically gain the knowledge of playing “in tune.” This paper takes a look at whether playing “in tune” became trained quicker through the use of shaping, using response cards and a couple apps called Tonal Energy (TE) and APS Trainer. Students are first given a reference pitch, then a determinant pitch that is a major third higher or lower. Students utilized response cards to identify if the determinant pitch (DP) was higher, lower, or the same. Over time the pitches were brought closer together until the DP was only one half step away from the RP, which is 100 cents higher or lower. After this, we start using APS Trainer which can make the DP anywhere from 1 cent to 50 cents higher or lower than the RP. We start with 50 cents higher and lower and gradually decrease the difference. We ran a multiple baseline design on 4 groups of 6th graders from the same school. Students were called in individually and given a pitch. The students would then play the pitch on their instrument. After 5 seconds the recorder would write how many cents the student was above or below the pitch. Data was taken and treatment started every two weeks after baseline. It is early yet to make any conclusions from the data as students are still developing their technique. Results will be more clear toward the end of the school year.
 
 
Symposium #314
Investigations of derived relational responding with nonhuman subjects
Monday, May 25, 2015
9:00 AM–10:50 AM
007A (CC)
Area: EAB/TPC; Domain: Basic Research
Chair: Manish Vaidya (University of North Texas)
Discussant: Mark Galizio (University of North Carolina Wilmington)
Abstract:

Recent empirical and conceptual developments (e.g., Wasserman & Frank, 2005; Urcuioli, 2008) have suggested that the failure to observe derived relational responding in nonhuman subjects is the result of procedural artifacts. Procedures that preclude the development of these artifacts have begun to produce reliable evidence of associative symmetry in pigeons. This symposium brings together from four different laboratories investigating derived relational responding with nonhuman subjects. Stancato & Vaidya present a review of investigations of derived relational responding with nonhuman subjects and identify experimental procedures that correlate with successful nonhuman demonstrations of derived relational responding. Galizio and colleagues present data on rats performance on the go/no-go task and document failures on symmetry trials despite highly accurate performance on tests for generalized identity matching. Velasco and Tomanari present results suggestive of emergent transitivity and equivalence with pigeons with signal durations serving as sample stimuli and the nodal stimulus. Finally, Swisher and Urcuioli arranged procedures expected, by Ucuiolis theory, to lead to emergent reflexivity without a history of identity matching. The data collected so far are consistent with these predictions.

Keyword(s): go/no-go procedure, nonhuman subjects, Stimulus Equivalence
 
Successive Matching and Associative Symmetry: A Review
STEFANIE S. STANCATO (University of North Texas), Manish Vaidya (University of North Texas)
Abstract: The classical method of studying associative symmetry in non-human animals has been to use match-to-sample procedures, in which the comparison stimuli are shown concurrently in spatially different locations. Within the recent decade however, investigators have utilized a go/no-go (successive) matching procedure to investigate associative symmetry, in which all stimuli are presented in one spatial location. In light of this change of procedures and positive results (Frank & Wasserman, Exp. 1, 2005, and Urcuioli, Exp. 3, 2008), we reviewed the literature of successive matching in the investigation of associative symmetry. Studies that met criteria for inclusion were evaluated along the dimensions related to the characteristics of subjects, training structure, sample/comparison modality and location, sample/comparison duration, inter-stimulus/ inter-trial interval durations, and the overall methodology. Particular attention was paid to the manner in which data were analyzed and what analyses suggest. The results of this review identified the best procedural practices that facilitate the emergence of associative symmetry.
 
Emergent Same-Different but not Symmetry Relations in Rats
MARK GALIZIO (University of North Carolina Wilmington), Ashley Prichard (University of North Carolina Wilmington), Katherine Ely Bruce (University of North Carolina Wilmington)
Abstract: It has proven difficult to demonstrate emergent stimulus control in rats with visual or auditory stimuli, but recent work in our laboratory has shown evidence of generalized matching- and non-matching-to-sample (M- or NMTS) using a non-automated simultaneous conditional discrimination procedure with olfactory stimuli. We will now present data from rats trained on Go-No Go conditional discriminations using olfactory stimuli in an automated olfactometer in an effort to assess emergent same-different and symmetry relations. Rats were trained to make nose-poke responses to ports through which odor stimuli were presented. Seven rats completed baseline training using procedures patterned after Urcuioli (2008), but none showed evidence of emergent symmetry relations. However, using similar procedures, identity and oddity relations have emerged in eight of the nine rats tested. These studies suggest that use of olfactory stimuli provides a promising technique to study emergent relations in rats, but that even with these procedures, symmetry remains elusive.
 
Reflexivity, not Generalized Identity
MELISSA J. SWISHER (Purdue University), Peter Urcuioli (Purdue University)
Abstract: Most demonstrations of reflexivity are actually evidence for generalized identity matching. We used Urcuioli’s (2008) theory to predict emergent reflexivity after training pigeons on three arbitrary matching baseline tasks. The Reflexivity group matched form comparisons to hue samples (AB), hue comparisons to form samples (BC), and different hue comparisons to other hue samples (AC) in training. The Control group received training on the first two tasks only. When tested on form-form (BB) reflexivity probes, five of six Reflexivity pigeons showed evidence for reflexivity; only one of three Control pigeons showed did. We believe that these results are the first demonstration of true reflexivity in any animal (including humans).
 
Equivalence relations in pigeons following training with temporal samples
Saulo Missiaggia Velasco (Universidade de Sao Paulo), GERSON YUKIO TOMANARI (Universidade de Sao Paulo)
Abstract: The present experiment investigated equivalence relations in pigeons using a symbolic matching-to-sample task with temporal stimuli as the samples and hues as the comparisons. The experiment comprised three phases. In Phase I, four pigeons learned to choose a red keylight (R) but not a green keylight (G) after a 1-s signal. They also learned to choose G but not R after a 4-s signal. In Phase II, correct responding consisted of choosing a blue keylight (B) after a 4-s signal and a yellow keylight (Y) after a 16-s signal. Comparisons G and B were both related to the same 4-s sample, whereas comparisons R and Y had no common sample. In Phase III, R and G were presented as samples, and B and Y were presented as the comparisons, and vice versa. On half of the trials, the choice of B was correct following G, and the choice of Y was correct following R. On the other half of the trials, the choice of G was correct following B, and the choice of R was correct following Y. If an equivalence relation between comparisons that shared a common sample were to emerge, then responding to B given G and G given B would be more likely than responding to Y given R and R given Y. The results were consistent with this prediction for two of the four pigeons, thus suggesting the formation of an equivalence class involving the hues related to the same temporal stimulus as nodal sample.
 
 
Symposium #315
CE Offered: BACB
Practice, Principles, and Progressive Contingencies
Monday, May 25, 2015
9:00 AM–10:50 AM
006C (CC)
Area: EAB/PRA; Domain: Basic Research
Chair: Kennon Andy Lattal (West Virginia University)
Discussant: Peter R. Killeen (Arizona State University)
CE Instructor: Kennon Andy Lattal, Ph.D.
Abstract: Progressive contingencies of reinforcement involve successively increasing response and/or temporal requirements for reinforcement. As in symposia on, respectively, reducing reinforcement availability and delay discounting, arranged by Drs. Call and Lattal during two the past two ABAI conferences, this symposium brings together both basic and applied researchers to explore dimensions of the theoretical and applied significance of progressive reinforcement contingencies. Such contingencies are important in both arenas not only because of their utility as tests of the relative efficacy of different reinforcers and circumstances of reinforcement, but also because of what they reveal of how organisms adjust to gradually but consistently changing conditions. One of the papers (Kincaid & Lattal) examines reestablishing responding once it has reached the point where a session normally is terminated (the breakpoint). The others consider progressive ratio contingencies in the context of reinforcer discounting in organizational (Henley et al.), clinical (Call et al.), and laboratory (Jarmolowicz et al.) contexts.
Keyword(s): basic-applied integration, progressive contingencies
 
Beyond the Break Point: Recurrence of Responding under Progressive-Ratio Schedules
STEPHANIE L. KINCAID (West Virginia University), Kennon Andy Lattal (West Virginia University)
Abstract: If more and more responding is required to earn a reinforcer, as in progressive ratio schedules, behavior eventually becomes “strained,” characterized by long pauses and irregular response patterns. If the response requirement continues to escalate, behavior reaches a “break point” and ultimately ceases altogether for a period of time. The present experiments investigated whether responding can be regenerated after the break point has been reached, using techniques that are known to produce recurrence of behavior that was eliminated by extinction. Pigeons responded on progressive ratio schedules until stable performance was observed. Then, test sessions were conducted in which a recurrence procedure (reinstatement, resurgence, or renewal) was applied after the break point had been reached. Control sessions were also conducted in which no recurrence procedure was applied but the session was simply extended. Recurrence procedures were assessed in terms of amount of responding regenerated by the procedure, and latency to the first response following the break point. Implications of the findings for understanding recurrence procedures and the dynamics of ratio-strained behavior are discussed.
 
On the Efficacy of delayed and probabilistic reinforcers: A concurrent progressive ratio analysis
ALEXANDRIA DARDEN (University of Kansas), David P. Jarmolowicz (The University of Kansas), Jennifer L. Hudnall (The University of Kansas)
Abstract: Immediate reinforcers have greater subjective value than delayed reinforcers and certain reinforcers have greater subjective value than probabilistic reinforcers. These findings, widely explored in the literatures on delay and probability discounting, have had wide implications for clinical populations (e.g., addicted individuals, the obese, and problem gamblers). The causal mechanisms behind these behavioral patterns, however, remain unclear. The first study examines the reinforcer efficacy of delayed rewards using concurrent progressive ratio (PR) schedules of reinforcement. One lever consistently resulted in immediate reinforcement whereas the other lever resulted in reinforcement that after a delay that varied across conditions (0-s to 81-s). . The second study evaluated the efficacy of reinforcer probabilistic reinforcers under a similar arrangement with probabilities which ranged from 100% to 12.5% likelihood of reinforcement. Our general findings demonstrate reinforcer efficacy systematically declined for more probable and delayed rewards.
 
A Crowdsourced Experiential Procedure for Generating Breakpoints of Worker Responding
AMY J. HENLEY (The University of Kansas), Florence D. DiGennaro Reed (University of Kansas), Brent Kaplan (The University of Kansas), Derek D. Reed (The University of Kansas)
Abstract: Behavioral economics is an approach to understanding decision-making and behavior using principles of behavioral science and economics (Hursh, 1980). It allows researchers to examine persistence of behavior in the face of increasing cost (i.e., demand). Experimental preparations with humans commonly adopt hypothetical purchase tasks to assess demand, but recent technological advancements offer alternatives that increase the feasibility of experiential methods. The purpose of this study was to examine the utility of an experiential method using crowdsourcing to assess worker responding in the face of increasing response requirements. Participants included experienced workers of Amazon Mechanical Turk who completed a task of progressively increasing ratios to earn a specified bonus. The work task required participants to slide a visual analog scale to match a random target number between -100 and 100. Sixty participants have completed the study to date. The rate at which participants discontinued responding was well explained by the exponential model of demand (r2 = .96; Hursh & Silberberg, 2008). Data collection for additional participants is underway. These data can inform future studies that utilize crowdsourcing methods to evaluate schedules of reinforcement and worker responding.
 
Use of Progressive Ratio Schedules for the Assessment of Reinforcer Efficacy in Clinical Settings with Children with Autism and Related Disorders
NATHAN CALL (Marcus Autism Center), Joanna Lomas Mevers (Marcus Autism Center), Ally Coleman (Marcus Autism Center)
Abstract: The use of progressive ratio (PR) schedules of reinforcement as an assessment of reinforcer efficacy is well-established in experimental research. There are fewer but a growing number of studies demonstrating the use of PR schedules in applied contexts. Most of these studies have involved identifying stimuli that will function as reinforcers for adaptive behaviors or for use in treatments for destructive behavior (e.g., Roane, Lerman, & Vorndran, 2001). This study will present a series of datasets in which PR schedules have been used to address issues of relevance in clinical populations. These will include results of a study that used PR schedules to compare the relative reinforcing efficacy of social attention and leisure items in 8 children with autism spectrum disorder and 9 typically developing peers. Participants in the ASD group exhibited higher breakpoints and Omax for leisure items than for attention, whereas children in the typically developing group exhibited the opposite pattern. Results will be discussed in terms of the contributions of PR methods for research with clinical populations.
 
 
Symposium #316
Marketer-Consumer Contingencies in an Online Environment
Monday, May 25, 2015
9:00 AM–10:50 AM
202AB (CC)
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Valdimar Sigurdsson (Reykjavik University)
Discussant: Valdimar Sigurdsson (Reykjavik University)
Abstract:

Marketer and consumer behavior are closely interconnected. They are mutually reinforced and entail literal exchange. The primary purpose of the theory of the marketing firm (TMF) is therefore to retain customers profitably. In such a scenario, for an organization to be successful, it has to adopt a consumer-centric approach for which a thorough knowledge of consumer behavior is mandatory. The Behavioral Perspective Model (BPM) was developed to explain consumer choice behaviors in affluent environments. It is an elaboration of the three-term contingency and matching applied to the context of economic behavior. In this symposium we will discuss recent theoretical developments and empirical analysis in online behavior analysis from the standpoint of the BPM and TMF. The symposium starts with a theoretical paper on the inter-relationships between a firm and the collective behaviors of consumers. The second paper extends the discussion to the current digital marketplace where the authors emphasize the importance of studying online consumer behavior from a behavioral perspective and explore the contingency categories from the view point of the digital marketer. The third paper extends the BPM to Facebook marketing using alternating treatment designs and the final paper explores the impacts of advertisements on social media marketing.

Keyword(s): BPM, Consumer behavior, Facebook, Marketing Firm
 
The Marketing Firm: Bilateral Contingency and Organizational Behavior
GORDON R. FOXALL (Cardiff University)
Abstract: Given the dynamic interaction between marketing organizations and their publics, it is unusual for theories of corporate behavior to be based firmly on theories of consumer behavior. However, consumer behavior analysis (Foxall, 2001, 2002) provides an operant understanding of consumption as the result of the scope of the consumer behavior setting and the pattern of reinforcement that maintains it, which is directly compatible with the theory of the marketing firm (Foxall, 1999; Vella & Foxall, 2011), that shows how organizations respond to consumer behavior by managing consumer behavior setting scope and pattern of reinforcement. The question remains how we can understand the complex inter-relationships between a contextual system like a firm, the behavior of which is predictable and controllable by considering its emergent operant consequences, and the collective behaviors of consumers, each of whom is a contextual system responding uniquely to the peculiar pattern of contingencies that shapes and maintains its behavior. The paper seeks the solution in terms of an analysis of bilateral contingencies, relating these to issues arising from the theory of metacontingency and macro-behavior.
 
Consumers and Marketers – Interdependent Behaviors in the Digital World
VISHNU MENON (Reykjavik University), Valdimar Sigurdsson (Reykjavik University), Gordon R. Foxall (Cardiff University)
Abstract: The digital environment has changed the way organizations and consumers behave. In order to understand their nature, a thorough account of marketer actions and subsequent consumer behavior is necessary. According to Foxall (1999) consumer and marketer behaviors are mutually reinforced and necessarily entail literal exchange. Considering the outreach of digital activities by both consumers and marketers, there exists an opportunity to understand marketer action and consumer choice from a behavioral perspective by conducting online marketing experiments using real time measurement tools. In this paper we discuss the importance of studying online consumer research from a behavioral perspective and also look into the contingency categories from a marketer point of view. We discuss the possibilities of experimental analysis of online consumer behavior through social media applications in the context of Foxall’s Behavioral Perspective Model (BPM) (Foxall, 1990/2004), which is an elaborate attempt to combine behavioral psychology and consumer behavior in real life settings.
 
Marketing a Behavior Analysis Program with Facebook: An Extension of the Behavioral Perspective Model
TODD A. WARD (University of North Texas), Sandy Magee (University of North Texas)
Abstract: Over the past decade, Consumer Behavior Analysis has emerged as a cohesive sub-discipline of behavior analysis. Central to the CBA approach is the shift in focus of the organization from one that is “management-centered” to one that explicitly includes an interaction with consumers of the goods and services produced by the company. Within this field, the Behavioral Perspective Model (BPM) emerged as an interdisciplinary framework that brings together behavior analysis and marketing. The BPM has evoked numerous studies in recent years, some of which pertain to online marketing. The current study extends the BPM to a Facebook marketing effort geared towards a behavior analysis program. Using an alternating treatments design across 17 weeks, researchers manipulated informational, utilitarian, and control posts consisting of text and graphics. Each week, three posts in the same condition were released on Monday, Wednesday, and Saturday at noon. Each condition was separated by a “break” week with no posts to control for carryover effects between weeks. The posts centered on themes related to BACB certifications and continuing education opportunities. Data was gathered from Facebook Insights and Google Analytics to track Facebook activity as well as the program’s website referrals coming directly from Facebook. Results indicate that the informational posts evoked the highest number of website referrals but received the fewest number of clicks on Facebook. This finding suggests a potential “potency” effect for informational posts in that a higher proportion of interactions led to referrals to the program’s page. The utilitarian posts were least effective at generating referrals. The study has implications for the interaction of the consumer behavior setting via visual media with accompanying marketing messages. Lastly, the study could expand the concept of consumer behavior beyond monetary transactions to include the consumption of information.
 

Understanding the Impacts of Advertisements in Social Networking Sites

ASLE FAGERSTROM (Westerdals � Oslo School of Arts, Communication and Technology), Valdimar Sigurdsson (Reykjavik University), Maria Lillemoen (Oslo and Akershus University College)
Abstract:

Social network advertising is a term that is used to describe a form of online advertising that is distributed through social networking sites. This study investigates the impact advertisement in social media has on a target segments behavior, and to investigate whether there is a difference in the response to different type of advertisements. A Norwegian drug helpline service that provides the public with information about alcohol, drugs and substance abuse, wanted to enhance traffic to its website. Their target segment is mainly youths interesting in and experimenting with drugs. A pre-study of focus group interviews were conducted to identify the use of social media within the target segment. After this, a social networking advertisement campaign was arranged according to ABAB research design. Referring traffic from Facebook to the website of the case organization was measured during the first week with no advertisements running (A). The second week, six advertisements were published on Facebook and the traffic was measured (B). The advertisements were then withdrawn in the third week (A), and in the forth week the same advertisements as in week two were published on Facebook. Results show that traffic to the website was higher in the weeks with advertisements running (week 2 and 4), compared to the weeks without advertisements (week 1 and 3). In addition, results show differences in responses to different advertisements. Discussion of the results are given in relation to verbal behavior, rules, and rule-governed behavior. Implications for marketers as well as suggestions for future research are given.

 
 
Symposium #317
CE Offered: BACB
The State of Functional Behavioral Assessment
Monday, May 25, 2015
9:00 AM–10:50 AM
214A (CC)
Area: PRA/EDC; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Michele D. Wallace (California State University, Los Angeles)
Discussant: Michele D. Wallace (California State University, Los Angeles)
CE Instructor: Michele D. Wallace, Ph.D.
Abstract: This symposium looks at the current trends regarding Functional Behavioral Assessment. The first paper addresses the validity of an online indirect assessment, the mini-FBA, compared to a functional analysis. The second paper looks at the application of the transition functional analysis in two naturalistic settings (home and a after school program). The third address demonstrates the use of pyramidal training to train two different staff levels how to conduct trial-based functional analyses. The final paper, looks at using video-recorded lectures and videoconferencing as a service-delivery model to train teachers in Saudi Arabia on how to conduct trial-based functional analyses. Thus, this symposium will present current research in Functional Behavior Assessment ranging from indirect assessments, to implementation of functional analyses in natural settings, to two different training methodologies to train individuals how to conduct such assessments.
Keyword(s): FBA, Indirect assessment, pyramidal training, transition FA
 

Agreement Between the Insights to Behavior FBA Tool and Comprehensive Functional Behavioral Assessments Conducted by Clinicians

CATHERINE ANNE MILTENBERGER (Trumpet Behavioral Health), Linda A. LeBlanc (Trumpet Behavioral Health), Kerry A. Conde (Trumpet Behavioral Health), Tyra Sellers (Trumpet Behavioral Health), Hal Houseworth (BCBA), Jennifer Lynn Hammond (Intercare Therapy, Inc.)
Abstract:

Functional behavior assessment is essential to the effective treatment of problem behavior and includes indirect informant assessment, descriptive assessment, and functional analysis. Functional analysis is the only experimental method of identifying the function(s) of problem behavior but may require extensive time and resource. An indirect informant assessment that accurately identifies the function of problem behavior would facilitate more immediate, effective treatment of problem behavior. To date, findings on the validity of existing tools have been mixed with most studies indicating only a small to moderate correlation between the results of experimental analyses and informant assessments. One reason why these informant assessments may not correlate well with functional analyses is because all items on the tool are typically weighted equally even if certain items might be more predictive than others. A technology-based assessment might address this problem by allowing researchers to a) examine the specific questions that correlate most strongly with functional analyses results and b) create scoring algorithms that incorporate empirically derived weightings of individual items. The mini-Functional Behavior Assessment (mini-FBA) is an online informant assessment tool composed of 16 questions designed to identify the extent to which a problem behavior is maintained by attention, access to tangibles, escape, or sensory stimulation. Presented findings will assess the validity of this tool by evaluating the degree of correspondence between the results of the mini-FBA and a subsequently conducted functional analysis. Individual item analyses will be calculated to determine optimal item weightings to produce a maximally predictive tool. Data collection is ongoing with eight completed participants and one additional participant in progress at the time of submission. Findings will be discussed in relation to implications for efficient clinical practice in assessment and treatment of problem behavior.

 

Conducting Transitions Functional Analyses in the Real World

SARA GONZALEZ (SEEK Education, Inc.), Michele D. Wallace (California State University, Los Angeles)
Abstract:

The current study extends previous literature by applying the functional analysis methodology to problem behaviors associated with transitions for children with developmental disabilities across both home and classroom settings. Four participants were exposed to variations of transitions including activity initiations and terminations, non-preferred activity initiations, and terminations, each with and without a location change, and finally a location change with no presented activities. Results indicated that location change was a major contribution to problem behaviors during transitioning from activity to activity for three out of four children. Given that transitions between tasks my be difficult for yound children with developmental disabilities, the ability to transition smoothly can assist learning time and create a stress-free environment in any setting. Therefore, conducting a functional analysis to identify the maintaining variables during transition times should be done in the applied setting. Further extension of the functional analyses is suggested to create intervention plans based on the findings to reduce problematic behaviors. Intervention results will also be presented and discussed.

 
Application of a pyramidal training model on the implementation of trial-based functional analysis
Faisal Alnemary (University of California, Los Angeles), LUSINEH GHARAPETIAN (Special Education for Exceptional Kids), Michele D. Wallace (California State University, Los Angeles), Jordan Yassine (LSU), Fahad Alnemary (University of California, Los Angeles)
Abstract: We employed a pyramidal training model (PTM) to teach the correct implementation and data collection of trial-based functional analysis (TBFA) for self-injurious behaviors. In the first phase, a non-concurrent multiple baseline design was used to evaluate the effectiveness of group-format training for four behavioral consultants (BCs). In the second phase, each BC trained one behavior technician (BT) by applying the same training content in an individualized setting. Treatment integrity data were collected for their implementation of the training procedures (i.e., didactic training, video modeling, role play). The results demonstrate that the PTM was successful in teaching all BCs and BTs to implement the TBFA correctly. In addition, a generalization probe with a different topography of problem behavior (i.e., aggression) was conducted for one BC and four BTs and all performed with 100% accuracy. These findings corroborate the utility of PTM in clinical settings, when access to experts such as BCBA might be limited.
 
Reaching the Unreachable: Providing Intentional Staff Training on Trial-Based Functional Analysis
FAISAL ALNEMARY (University of California, Los Angeles), Jennifer B.G. Symon (California State University), Fahad Alnemary Alnemary (CSULA/UCLA), Michele D. Wallace (California State University, Los Angeles)
Abstract: This study aim to extend to literature of tele-consultation by examining the effectiveness of utilizing video-recorded lectures and videoconferencing as a service-delivery model to train teachers in Saudi Arabia (i.e,who do not have access to experts in a regular basis) on how to assess problem behavior that are exhibited by their students with ASD. A multiple baseline design was used to evaluate the effect of video-recorded training on the procedural integrity of trial-based functional analysis across four teachers. Although teachers’ performances were high following reading enhanced-written instruction during baseline, their performances improved following watching the video-recording training to reach 100 fidelity for at least two conditions. However, all teachers needed additional specific feedback for at least one condition. These findings suggest that video-recorded training can be a promising service-delivery model when access to expert on a regular basis is not feasible.
 
 
Symposium #318
CE Offered: BACB
Putting Our Minds to Mindfulness: An Interactive Experiment for Experimentation
Monday, May 25, 2015
9:00 AM–10:50 AM
007C (CC)
Area: TPC/CBM; Domain: Theory
Chair: Scott A. Herbst (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology)
Discussant: Emily Kennison Sandoz (University of Louisiana at Lafayette)
CE Instructor: Thomas G. Szabo, Ph.D.
Abstract: This symposium is an exploration about mindfulness. This is going to be a different sort of symposium. Most symposia feature a series of speakers who take turns telling the audience what they think or what they know or what they think they know and perhaps showing data from experiments that were grounded in that thinking and knowing. The presentations in this series are grounded in not knowing. For an hour and 50 minutes, we are going to pretend we really don’t know anything about mindfulness. We don’t know what it is. We don’t know how to measure it. And we certainly don’t know what questions to ask about it. Each speaker in this series will lead an inquiry. Following a brief review of what we, as a science, thought we knew about mindfulness, the speakers will lead the group through a series of questions aimed at exploring what we would want to know, what we could know, how we might go about knowing it, and the problems we will likely encounter along the way.
 
Experimental Control: The Rules of the Game
SCOTT A. HERBST (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), Kate Kellum (University of Mississippi), Michael Bordieri (University of Mississippi Medical Center), Emily Kennison Sandoz (University of Louisiana at Lafayette), Thomas G. Szabo (Easter Seals Southern California)
Abstract: Following a brief synopsis of the series of events that gave rise to this series of talks, this paper will serve as an introduction to the inquiry based presentations, which will function as a cooperative game. This paper will explore the nature of games. Games have certain properties. For example, they generally have rules. The first part of this talk will lay out the rules of play, and specify the consequences of following them or not. Games also have winners and losers and often have some way of tracking whether the game is being won or lost. As a cooperative game, either everyone present wins, or everyone present loses. As such, this presentation will also lay out the conditions for saying that everyone won or lost the game. Following this, attendees will have the opportunity to choose to participate in the game or not, and after that, the game will start.
 
Let’s Talk: Defining Mindfulness
KATE KELLUM (University of Mississippi), Michael Bordieri (University of Mississippi Medical Center), Scott A. Herbst (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), Emily Kennison Sandoz (University of Louisiana at Lafayette), Thomas G. Szabo (Easter Seals Southern California), Timothy M. Weil (University of South Florida)
Abstract: In recent years, mindfulness practices have received increasing attention in clinical psychology and in western societies. At face value, the psychological term, “mindfulness,” seems problematic for behavior analysis as it includes the often avoided tact, “mind.” Yet, the tact occurred in multiple symposia at our 40th conference. Given the occurrence in popular culture and in our scientific discussions, it seems appropriate to delineate a behavioral definition, the objections to the term “mind”, and the potential benefits of examining interactions between the environment and this behavior(s). This collaborative discussion will remind participants that behavior analysis "does not insist upon truth by agreement and can therefore consider events taking place in the private world within the skin" (Skinner, 1945). The aim of the discussion is to define “mindfulness” from a behavior analytic perspective and describe the potential benefits of studying this behavior(s) for our science. This discussion will likely result in the development of descriptions of the function of “mindfulness” as well its’ topography as covert and overt behavior.
 
Minding the Behavior Analysis Shop: Mindfulness as a Topic for Behavior Analytic Research
THOMAS G. SZABO (Easter Seals Southern California), Kate Kellum (University of Mississippi), Michael Bordieri (University of Mississippi Medical Center), Scott A. Herbst (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), Emily Kennison Sandoz (University of Louisiana at Lafayette), Timothy M. Weil (University of South Florida)
Abstract: Behavior analytic research into the improvement of complex stimulus control by verbally able humans is in its infancy. One strain of current interest involves the use of “mindfulness” strategies to bring behavior under either broad or narrow stimulus control, depending on the moment-to-moment needs of the learner. Although operationally defining “mindfulness” poses conceptual issues for behavior scientists, these problems are solvable when investigators limit their focus to directly observable behavior. The current paper addresses basic and applied issues in need of behavioral research. The presenter will outline a) basic principles that allow for precise identification of the functions mindfulness strategies target and b) components of applied mindfulness-based treatment packages that have not yet been evaluated for their individual utility. Based on the current body of empirical evidence, the presenter and attendees will generate a list of behavior-environment relations of basic and applied relevance for future research.
 
Paying Attention to the Present Moment: Inspiring Increased Behavior Analytic Inquiry into Mindfulness
MICHAEL BORDIERI (University of Mississippi Medical Center), Scott A. Herbst (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), Kate Kellum (University of Mississippi), Emily Kennison Sandoz (University of Louisiana at Lafayette), Thomas G. Szabo (Easter Seals Southern California)
Abstract: Recent years have witnessed an explosion of empirical investigations into mindfulness across multiple basic and applied psychological domains. In the past 10 years alone there have been over 2,000 peer-reviewed empirical publications indexed in PsycInfo containing the keyword of “mindfulness.” In contrast, there has been a relative paucity of behavior analytic inquiries into the phenomenon, with a search of JABA yielding no publications and JEAB yielding only five publications in which mindfulness was referenced. With the primary exception of works guided by relational frame theory, mindfulness has not yet been addressed by the behavior analytic community. This paper endeavors to serve as a call to arms for behavior analysts to design and conduct basic and applied studies of mindfulness and related behaviors. The aim of this discussion is to collaboratively develop a set of concrete mindfulness research proposals that are 1) consistent with behavior analytic methodology and theory, 2) focused on socially meaningful behaviors, and 3) achievable within the next year with no or minimal funding required.
 
 
Paper Session #319
A Comparison of the Effects of Sensory-Integration Therapy and Behavioral Intervention on Challenging Behaviour
Monday, May 25, 2015
10:00 AM–10:20 AM
Grand Ballroom C2 (CC)
Area: AUT
Chair: Helena Lydon (Behavior Analysis in Ireland)
 

A Comparison of the Effects of Sensory-Integration Therapy and Behavioural Intervention on Challenging Behaviour

Domain: Applied Research
HELENA LYDON (National University of Ireland, Galway), Olive Healy (Trinity College Dublin)
 
Abstract:

Autism spectrum disorder (ASD) is a neurodevelopmental disorder and presents as a complex and often puzzling category of conditions. This research evaluates Sensory Integration Therapy (SIT), one of the most popular non-validated treatments for ASD, by comparing the effectiveness to Behavioural Intervention (BI) in altering challenging behaviour. Two studies were carried out to evaluate the effects of SIT and BI on challenging behaviour maintained by environmental variables and automatic reinforcement. Study 1 used an AB counterbalanced group design across 10 participants to compare SIT and BI on behaviours maintained by various functions. Study 2 used a multiple baseline across participants to compare the effects of SIT and Sensory Integration techniques delivered within a behavioural intervention package. The outcome of Study 1found that SIT was not effective at reducing behaviours maintained by environmental variables (e.g., escape from demand, access to tangibles and attention). In contrast, the findings for Study 2 suggest that SIT was somewhat effective in reducing behaviours maintained by automatic reinforcement, and the Sensory Integration techniques were more effective when delivered within the framework of a Behavioural Intervention package.

 
 
 
Paper Session #320
Verbal Operants of Corruption
Monday, May 25, 2015
10:00 AM–10:20 AM
204B (CC)
Area: CSE
Keyword(s): Corruption
Chair: Tete Kobla Agbota (Oslo and Akershus University College)
 
Corruption Language: A Study of Avoidance in Corruption Behaviour
Domain: Basic Research
TETE KOBLA AGBOTA (Oslo and Akershus University College of Applied Sc), Ingunn Sandaker (Oslo and Akershus University College of Applied Sc), Gunnar Ree (Akershus University College, Norway)
 
Abstract: This paper offers an analysis of metaphors in corruption language based on positive and avoidance contingencies of reinforcement. Corruption is illegal and universally shameful; participants in corrupt transactions conduct their business in secrecy. What do beans for the kids in Kinshasa, a glass of wine in Paris and little carps in Prague have in common? The phrases say something about local cuisines, but they are also euphemisms for bribes. The public officer-citizen relationship is characterized by what behaviour analysts describe as, a give and take of stimuli and consequences. The use of corruption language, a common phenomenon associated with the demand and supply sides of corruption behavior demonstrates aspects of this public officer-relationship. Our data show that parties to corrupt transactions in Ghana would use expressions that accentuate this secrecy, whether demanding or giving bribe. The study demonstrates that corruption language (metaphor or euphemism) as a verbal stimulus can be topographically similar to another verbal utterance, but functionally different. Public officials and citizens use metaphors to avoid prosecution and social embarrassment, whiles positive reinforcement contingencies apply when demanding or offering bribes as regards the processing of applications or delivery of service.
 
Keyword(s): Corruption
 
 
Invited Tutorial #321
CE Offered: BACB
Behavioral Economics: Fundamentals and Implications for Intervention in ASD
Monday, May 25, 2015
10:00 AM–10:50 AM
Grand Ballroom C3 (CC)
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
BACB CE Offered. CE Instructor: Jennifer N. Fritz, Ph.D.
Chair: Jennifer N. Fritz (University of Houston-Clear Lake)
Presenting Authors: : ISER GUILLERMO DELEON (University of Florida)
Abstract:

Behavioral economics is a productive blend of behavioral principles and micro-economic theory. Behavioral economic research has revealed that the concepts, principles, and methods that economists conventionally apply to decision-making at the population level have important parallels at the individual level. Armed with this understanding, behavior analysts gain a variety of useful analytic tools with potential for enhancing instructional and therapeutic arrangements. In this tutorial, Dr. IserGuillermo DeLeon will describe some basic tenets of behavioral economics, what one needs minimally to grasp its relevance for practice. He will then review and discuss studies, some from the behavior analytic literature and some from his own work, that show how these tools have been used to enhance our understanding of functional relations and improve our outcomes in work with people with autism spectrum disorder.

Instruction Level: Basic
Target Audience:

BCBAs, BCaBAs

Learning Objectives:
  1. Participants will be able to explain basic behavioral economic concepts that include the law of demand, demand elasticity, substitutability, complementarity, and the impact of open vs. closed economies.
  2. Participants will be able to discuss how these concepts map onto common behavioral interventions to address the instructional or therapeutic needs of persons with ASD.
  3. Participants will understand what demand curves can offer beyond more conventional methods of gauging relative reinforcer effectiveness.
 
ISER GUILLERMO DELEON (University of Florida)
Dr. Iser Guillermo DeLeon received his Ph.D. in psychology from the University of Florida in 1997 and previously held appointments at the Kennedy Krieger Institute, Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine, and the University of Maryland, Baltimore County. Currently, he is an associate professor at the University of Florida and serves on the Board of Directors of the Behavior Analysis Certification Board. Prior commitments include associate editor for the Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, president of the Maryland Association for Behavior Analysis, and member of the Science Board of the Association for Behavior Analysis International. Dr. DeLeon's research has focused on the variables that give rise to severe behavior problems in individuals with developmental disabilities and the hypothesis-driven development of interventions for behavior disorders. Separate, often related, lines of research examine choice and determinants of stimulus value in individuals with developmental disabilities. Dr. DeLeon has been the principal investigator or co-investigator for several National Institutes of Health-funded grants, largely translational in nature, that explore the applied implications of basic behavioral processes and related theories (e.g. behavioral economics, behavioral momentum).
 
 
Symposium #322
CE Offered: BACB
Dissemination and Evaluation of Early Intervention for Autism based on Skinner's Analysis of Verbal Behavior
Monday, May 25, 2015
10:00 AM–10:50 AM
217B (CC)
Area: AUT/VBC; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Michelle Ennis Soreth (Rowan University)
Discussant: Vincent Joseph Carbone (Carbone Clinic)
CE Instructor: Mary Louise E. Kerwin, Ph.D.
Abstract:

As the incidence rates of autism spectrum disorder (ASD) continue to rise, innovative delivery models for wide-scale dissemination of effective, empirically validated treatments for ASD are urgently needed. Early Intensive behavioral intervention (EIBI) has been firmly established as one of the most effective treatments for young children diagnosed with autism; however, intensive time commitments required by traditional Lovaas model EIBI (i.e., up to 40 hours per week) and a shortage of trained professionals are barriers to accessing effective treatment. An alternative EIBI delivery model that has grown in popularity involves the treatment model based specifically on Skinners analysis of verbal behavior (VB). Although there has been little outcome research evaluating VB as a treatment package directly compared to other interventions, single-subject studies have suggested that VB may be able to produce outcomes similar to the Lovaas model in fewer hours of direct treatment delivery. Further, disseminating EIBI through parent training programs has great potential to conserve resources while increasing access to empirically supported intervention. This symposium will explore critical issues in the dissemination and evaluation of the VB delivery model, including the design of competency-based training to improve treatment fidelity and the development and evaluation of a parent-implemented VB intervention.

Keyword(s): competency-based training, EIBI, parent training, verbal behavior
 
Competency-based Procedures for Training Staff, Training Parents, & “Training the Trainer” in a Center-based Program
KRISTIN M. ALBERT (Carbone Clinic)
Abstract: Behavior analysts who work in applied settings to teach children with autism regularly make use of the principles and technologies of applied behavior analysis (ABA) to guide their instructional practices. The organizational structure and services provided within these applied settings can, however, be even more in line with a behavior analytic approach by making use of the organizational behavior management (OBM) literature. Of particular importance are the OBM guidelines for competency-based training and ongoing performance management. This paper provides a case-study description of how a center-based program for teaching children with autism structured its training programs around this research from the field of OBM. First, competency-based procedures for training bachelor’s and master’s level, 1:1 instructional staff will be discussed. Ongoing staff performance management procedures–including competency-based evaluations, performance-based monetary incentives, and public posting–will also be described. Next, competency-based procedures for training parents of children with autism will be described. Finally, competency-based procedures for training 1:1 instructional staff to conduct parent training will be discussed. Examples of program-specific competencies and summary data on staff performance management will be provided.
 

Development & Evaluation of a Parent-implemented ASD Intervention based on Skinners Analysis of Verbal Behavior

MARY LOUISE E. KERWIN (Rowan University), Michelle Ennis Soreth (Rowan University), Moran Amit Dahan (Rowan University)
Abstract:

ABA-based early interventions for autism have not traditionally been designed for parent-implementation. Parent-implemented interventions for ASD offer multiple advantages, and a number of non-behavior analytic, developmental interventions for ASD have distinguished themselves from ABA-based interventions by explicitly centering on parent-implementation. Non-behavior analytic, parent-implemented developmental interventions have also been the focus of multiple randomized clinical trials (RCTs), and despite mixed outcomes, contribute to an increasing volume of ASD intervention research in disciplines outside behavior analysis. To pilot and prepare for RCT evaluation, a 16-session adjunctive, parent-implemented treatment for young children with ASD based on Skinners analysis of verbal behavior was developed and manualized. The Verbal Behavior Milestones Assessment and Program Placement (VB-MAPP) and Sundberg and Partingtons (1998) Teaching Language to Children with Autism or other Developmental Disabilities were adapted for parent implementation and served as the basis of the treatment manual. Preliminary pilot results indicated that a parent-implemented intervention based on Skinners analysis of verbal behavior produced gains in joint attention and verbal behavior, as well as decreased levels of problem behavior post-treatment. In this presentation, the process of developing, packaging, and piloting a parent-implemented behavior analytic intervention for preschool children with ASD will be discussed, and preliminary outcome data presented.

 
 
Invited Tutorial #323
CE Offered: PSY/BACB
Psychedelics as Adjunct Medications in Behavioral Treatments of Addiction
Monday, May 25, 2015
10:00 AM–10:50 AM
006AB (CC)
Area: BPH/CBM; Domain: Basic Research
PSY/BACB CE Offered. CE Instructor: Matthew W. Johnson, Ph.D.
Chair: Paul L. Soto (Texas Tech University)
Presenting Authors: : MATTHEW W. JOHNSON (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine)
Abstract:

Converging evidence suggests that 5-HT2AR agonist psychedelics (classic hallucinogens) may hold a future in addiction treatment. Observational studies have reported addiction recovery associated with the ceremonial use of 5-HT2AR agonists (mescaline, dimethyltryptamine) by indigenous cultures. A meta-analysis of randomized studies from several decades ago showed that administration of 5-HT2AR agonist lysergic acid diethylamide (LSD) in alcoholism treatment resulted in significantly less alcohol misuse than randomized control conditions, with a large effect size (odds ratio ~2). Research with 5-HT2AR agonist psilocybin in nonaddicted individuals shows effects suggestive of antiaddiction efficacy, including positive behavior change as assessed by experimentally blinded community observers, increased personality openness, and high ratings of personal meaning at long-term follow ups. In a recent open-label pilot study of psilocybin as an adjunct to cognitive behavioral smoking cessation therapy in 15 treatment-refractory participants, 80% showed biologically verified smoking abstinence at 6-month follow-up. Although not definitive, these results are substantially greater than typical treatments. Another recent pilot study suggested safety and efficacy of psilocybin as an adjunct to Motivational Enhancement Therapy for alcoholism. This presentation will review this research, describe ongoing randomized trials, and discuss potential behavioral mechanisms.

Instruction Level: Intermediate
Target Audience:

Applied and basic behavior analysts interested in research on the use of hallucinogens in the treatment of addiction.

Learning Objectives: 1) Participants will describe multiple lines of evidence suggesting potential efficacy of classic psychedelics in addictions treatment.
2) Participants will describe the results of a recent pilot study examining psilocybin in the treatment of tobacco addiction.
3) Participants will describe potential mechanisms by which psychechedelics may improve addiction treatment outcomes.
 
MATTHEW W. JOHNSON (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine)
The underlying theme of Dr. Matthew Johnson's career has been to understand and facilitate human behavioral change, particularly behavioral change in addiction recovery. Toward that end, much of Dr. Johnson's research has applied behavioral economic concepts such as delay discounting and demand elasticity to decision making underlying addiction. His recent research has applied these models to understand the high rates of sexual HIV risk behavior associated with certain abused drugs (e.g., cocaine, methamphetamine, alcohol). This line of research has suggested that delay discounting is a critical but under-appreciated variable influencing sexual risk behavior. Another focus of Dr. Johnson's research involves laboratory studies determining the behavioral effects of psychoactive drugs in humans, including novel or atypical drugs. This work has examined psychedelics including psilocybin, dextromethorphan, and salvinorin A (from the plant Salvia divinorum), stimulants including cocaine, methamphetamine, nicotine, and caffeine, and various sedatives including GHB and alcohol. Current research with the psychedelic drug psilocybin is examining its potential for facilitating behavior change. These studies include a trial determining the ability of psilocybin to increase engagement in a meditation program, a trial testing if psilocybin can decrease anxiety and depression in cancer patients, and a study examining psilocybin as an anti-addiction medication for tobacco smoking cessation.
Keyword(s): addiction treatment, cognitive behavioral, psilocybin, psychedelic
 
 
Invited Tutorial #324
CE Offered: PSY/BACB
Behavioral Activation as a Treatment for Adolescent Depression
Monday, May 25, 2015
10:00 AM–10:50 AM
Texas Ballroom Salon A (Grand Hyatt)
Area: CBM; Domain: Service Delivery
PSY/BACB CE Offered. CE Instructor: Steven R. Lawyer, Ph.D.
Chair: Steven R. Lawyer (Idaho State University)
Presenting Authors: : SCOTT T. GAYNOR (Western Michigan University)
Abstract:

From a behavioral perspective, depression is a summary label for a set of responses emitted in a context, not an internal (neurobiological or psychological) defect within a person. As such, depressive symptoms should be treatable by changing environment-behavior interactions and the context in which they occur. Behavioral activation (BA) is a well-developed approach to treating depressive symptoms in adults with an emerging literature for adolescents. The goal of BA is to promote contact with positive reinforcement by engaging clients in focused activation strategies to counter passive avoidance/withdrawal and to increase goal-directed and values-guided behavior. The tutorial will briefly review of major components of BA, including: (1) the rationale and model of depression; (2) mood and activity monitoring; (3) conducting a values assessment; and (4) scheduling pleasurable, mastery-related, and values-based activities.

Instruction Level: Basic
Target Audience:

Anyone interesting in the seeing the application of behavior analysis to depression, a common mental health problem. Also attendees, particularly students, who may have broad applied interests.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants should be able to: (1) describe the BA rationale and model of treatment; (2) describe how to introduce mood and activity monitoring; (3) describe how to assess values; and (4) describe how to select and schedule relevant activities.
 
SCOTT T. GAYNOR (Western Michigan University)
Scott Gaynor received his Ph.D. in clinical psychology from the University of North Carolina at Greensboro, where he had the good fortune to be mentored in behavior analysis by Rick Shull and clinical behavior analysis by Scott Lawrence and Rosemery Nelson-Gray. He completed his clinical internship and a post-doc at the University of Pittsburgh Medical Center’s Western Psychiatric Institute and Clinic. The next stop was Western Michigan University where has been on the faculty for 13 years, serving as the co-director of clinical training for the past six years. His research and clinical interests focus on evaluating the efficacy and mechanisms of action of contemporary behavior therapies.
Keyword(s): behavioral activation, depression
 
 
Symposium #325
CE Offered: BACB
Effective Academic Interventions for Young Adults with Intellectual Disabilities at the Postsecondary Education Setting
Monday, May 25, 2015
10:00 AM–10:50 AM
211 (CC)
Area: EDC/DDA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Doreen J. Ferko (California Baptist University)
Discussant: David L. Lee (Penn State)
CE Instructor: David L. Lee, Ph.D.
Abstract:

The passage of the Higher Education Opportunity Act of 2008 increased the opportunities for learners with intellectual disabilities (ID) to receive postsecondary education. Benefits of the postsecondary education for leaners with ID include better employment opportunities, increased financial security, and general well-being. It is critical that educators should address the academic skill deficit of learners with ID at the postsecondary education setting. Reading and study skills are the two areas essential for success at the postsecondary level. Unfortunately, these are the two primary areas learners with ID struggle with. The symposium will include two experimental studies on effective academic interventions for young adults with ID at a postsecondary education setting. The first study will investigate the effects of a reading intervention on narrative comprehension skills of young adults with ID. The second study focuses on teaching a four-step guided note-taking strategy on information retention of young adults with ID. We will discuss the implication of the findings in the context of designing and delivering effective academic interventions for young adults with ID.

 
Effects of the Repeated Reading and Comprehension Monitoring on Narrative Comprehension of Young Adults with Intellectual Disabilities.
SAEED ALQAHTANI (University of Iowa), Amanda Kern (The University of Iowa), Kevin Preckel (University of Iowa), Abdullah Alwahbi (University of Iowa), Youjia Hua (The University of Iowa)
Abstract: Reading is a primary area of difficulty for individuals with intellectual disabilities (ID). Effective reading interventions for learners with ID should address both code- and meaning-based learning. The purpose of the study is to investigate the effects of a reading intervention on oral reading fluency (ORF) and comprehension of narrative texts for young adults with ID. We incorporated a repeated reading component, a narrative text comprehension strategy, and goal setting procedure in the intervention. Five young adult learners with ID participated in the study. We recorded their ORF and passage retell scores as the two dependent measures. We conducted the study using the masked visual analysis procedures in the context of a multiple-baseline across the participants design. The interventionists randomly selected the participants for the intervention. The data analyst who is blind to participant selection will determine the treatment assignment and compute the p value at the conclusion of the study. We will complete the study by the end of the November, 2014.
 
Effects of Guided Notes and Strategy on Learning Outcomes of Young Adults with Intellectual Disabilities
KRISTIN MONROE-PEI (University of Iowa), Chengan Yuan (University of Iowa), Derek Rodgers (University of Iowa), Youjia Hua (The University of Iowa)
Abstract: Guided note-taking requires learners to write critical information on partially completed notes while listening to the lecture. It is considered an effective intervention designed to improve learners’ study skills and learning outcome. The purpose of the study is to investigate the effects of teaching a four-step guided note-taking strategy (GRIP) on learning outcomes of young adults with intellectual disabilities (ID) at the postsecondary education setting. Eighteen students diagnosed with ID enrolled in a postsecondary education program will participate in the study. We will randomly assign the participants to the control and experimental group. Students assigned to the experimental group will receive the instruction on how to take guided notes using the four-step strategy. During the posttest, we will provide the experimental group with the guided notes and the control group with the completed lecture notes before they watch a recorded lecture. We will measure and compare immediate and delayed recall of the information from the lecture by students from the two groups. We will complete the study by the end of December, 2014.
 
 
Special Event #325a
In Honor of William Abernathy's Contributions to the Field of Behavior Analysis
Monday, May 25, 2015
10:00 AM–10:50 AM
201 (CC)
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Ramona Houmanfar (University of Nevada, Reno)
Panelists:
Abstract:

Friends and colleagues of William Abernathy will gather to celebrate his life and his many contributions to the field. Dr. William Abernathy received his doctorate in I/O psychology from The Ohio State University and taught at Ohio University. He was an associate professor of psychology at Southeastern Louisiana University and vice-president of performance systems at Aubrey Daniels, International. Dr. Abernathy developed and coordinated a new master's degree in I/O psychology at Southeastern Louisiana University. Prior to joining Southeastern, he was the president of Abernathy and Associates in Memphis, TN. Dr. Abernathy authored three books: The Sin of Wages, Managing without Supervisors, and The Liberated Workplace—Transitioning to Walden III. He also published numerous articles in academic and trade publications, was an associate editor of the Journal of Organizational Behavior Management, a board member of The Cambridge Center, and recipient of the International Association for Applied Behavior Analysis Outstanding Contributor Award, plus Outstanding Contributor Award by the Organizational Behavior Management Network. Dr. Abernathy passed away in early March 2015. Behavior analysis has been enriched by Dr. Abernathy's lasting contributions, which shine as an exemplary model of rigorous and socially important behavior science.

Keyword(s): OBM
 
 
Symposium #326
CE Offered: BACB
Training Staff to Effectively Implement Behavior Analytic Procedures When Teaching Children with Autism Spectrum Disorders
Monday, May 25, 2015
10:00 AM–10:50 AM
213AB (CC)
Area: PRA/AUT; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Sharon A. Reeve (Caldwell University)
CE Instructor: Sharon A. Reeve, Ph.D.
Abstract: For applied behavior analysis to be effective, it’s important to develop effective staff training methodologies for all behavior analytic teaching procedures implemented with individuals with autism spectrum disorders. The three studies in this symposium examined ways to increase the effectiveness of training staff to implement discrete trial teaching, activity schedules, token economies, and conduct preference assessments when teaching both adults and children with autism spectrum disorders. The purpose of the first study was to evaluate the effectiveness of self-monitoring on the generalization and maintenance of discrete trial training when teaching two adults with autism spectrum disorders. The second study used video modeling with voice over instruction to train staff to implement a multiple stimulus without replacement preference assessment to children with autism spectrum disorders. The final study used behavioral skills training and multiple exemplar training to program for generalization of staff training skills across discrete trial teaching, activity schedules, preference assessments, and token economies.
Keyword(s): autism, staff training
 
Effects of Self-Monitoring on Discrete Trial Training by Adults with Autism Spectrum Disorders
CONRAD HILLMAN (University of Houston-Clear Lake), Dorothea C. Lerman (University of Houston-Clear Lake), Molly Shireman (University of Houston-Clear Lake)
Abstract: Discrete trial training (DTT) is an effective method for teaching children with autism and can be effectively taught to parents, teachers and staff using behavioral skills training (BST). Research has examined the use of BST to teach adults with ASD and no intellectual disabilities to conduct DTT with children with autism (Lerman, Hawkins, Hoffman, & Caccavale, 2013; Lerman, Hawkins, Hillman, Shireman & Nissen, in press). BST was highly effective for teaching DTT skills, which maintained with on-going performance feedback. An alternative to using feedback with BST is to teach trainees to self-monitor. The purpose of this study was to evaluate the effectiveness of self-monitoring alone on the generalization and maintenance of DTT performance in adults with ASD. Two adults were trained on DTT and then taught to self-monitor by evaluating a therapist’s performance. Next, they worked with two or three children without feedback. Self-monitoring was implemented if a mastery criterion was not met. Self-monitoring improved maintenance for one participant but did not appear to impact performance for the other participant. These findings suggest that self-monitoring may be a viable approach for increasing the efficiency of BST when teaching adults with ASD.
 
Using Video Modeling with Voice-Over Instruction to Train Staff to Implement an MSWO Preference Assessment
Gina Delli (Caldwell University), Jason C. Vladescu (Caldwell University), Ruth DeBar (Caldwell University), Regina A. Carroll (West Virginia University), Randi A. Sarokoff (Bernards Township Comprehensive Behavior Analytic), KAITLYN DONOVAN (Caldwell University)
Abstract: A multiple stimulus without replacement (MSWO) preference assessment is a proven method of identifying these potential reinforcers (DeLeon & Iwata, 1996); however, staff must be trained on the steps necessary to conduct the assessment for it to be useful in everyday practice. The current study examined the effectiveness of using video modeling (VM) to train staff to conduct a MSWO preference assessment. Two staff were trained to conduct an MSWO with a simulated consumer (i.e., the experimenter acting as a child with autism) and to calculate the results and select the item with the greatest selection percentage to use during teaching sessions. Generalization was assessed in two ways: using actual consumers (i.e., students with autism) and using edibles. Results demonstrate that VM was effective in training both staff trainees to exhibit high levels of integrity within two training sessions. These results add to a growing body of literature that supports the use of VM as an effective way to train staff.
 
Combining Behavior Skills Training and Generalization Strategies to Train Staff
JESSICA L. ROTHSCHILD (Caldwell University), Sharon A. Reeve (Caldwell University), Kenneth F. Reeve (Caldwell University), Jason C. Vladescu (Caldwell University), Peter Sturmey (The Graduate Center and Queens College, City University of New York)
Abstract: Behavior skills training is an effective strategy for training staff members through the use of instructions, modeling, rehearsal, and feedback. Research has shown that a combination of behavior skills training (BST) and multiple exemplar training (MET) can be used to train experienced staff members on different learner programs. However, prior research did not use these strategies to concurrently program for and assess generalization across multiple instructional areas (e.g., discrete trial instruction (DTI) and activity schedules (AS) and learner programs (e.g., gross motor imitation and following a picture activity schedule) when training inexperienced staff. Thus, this study combined BST and MET to program for and assess generalization across a variety of learner programs and instructional areas. A multiple-baseline design across instructional areas was replicated across three staff trainees with no prior experience to assess the staff trainee’s implementation of discrete trial teaching (DTI), activity schedules (AS), preference assessments (PA), and token economies (TE) during sessions with a confederate. Generalization was assessed from sessions with a confederate, trained programs and instructional areas to sessions with a learner, novel programs and novel instructional areas. Following the use of BST and MET staff trainee’s correctly implemented target components generalized from trained programs and instructional areas to novel programs and instructional areas. The results of this study support and extend BST research by demonstrating the effectiveness of BST and MET to train inexperienced staff to teach multiple programs across a variety of instructional areas and generalize these skills from training conditions to non-training conditions.
 
 
Symposium #327
CE Offered: BACB
Training Future Behavior Analysts: Methods for aligning experiential and classroom applications of foundational knowledge content.
Monday, May 25, 2015
10:00 AM–10:50 AM
206AB (CC)
Area: TBA/EDC; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Ginette Wilson-Bishop (Bay Path University)
CE Instructor: Ginette Wilson-Bishop, Ph.D.
Abstract:

This presentation will delineate the evolution of a University sponsored fieldwork experience program adhering to the parameters outlined by the Behavior Analyst Certification Board (BACB). The strengths and challenges associated with the growth of the program, as well as the fluid nature of BACB supervision guidelines will also be discussed. Mechanisms by which to adequately train and oversee supervision by adjunct faculty members will be shared. Two applied studies will be presented as an evaluation of skill acquisition for graduate ABA students within classroom and experiential learning opportunities. The first will discuss the Behavior Analyst Certification Boards (2012) identification of the translation of technical language as a competency for certified clinicians and involved a component analysis of a treatment package aimed at the assessment and training of behavior analytic consultation skills. The treatment package involved observation of targeted skills and a self-study (personalized system of instruction) task. The second study presents data supporting the use of a Foundational Knowledge Tool designed to relate concepts to applied practice. The Tool, utilized within core courses, allows tracking of topography-based responding associated with Foundational Knowledge content and its relation (linkage) to other Task List Content (i.e. Fundamental Elements of Behavior Change). Once growth in topography-based connections (intended to represent clinical use/applications of the concepts) was shown, an exam measuring student ability to relate the content to scenario-based multiple-choice questions (intended to represent a national certification exam) was administered. This study evaluated the correlation between use of the Tool and outcomes on selection-based exams.

Keyword(s): Supervision, Teaching
 
Supervision in ABA: Preparing future behavior analysts in practice
GINETTE WILSON-BISHOP (Bay Path University), Susan Ainsleigh (Bay Path University)
Abstract: According to Bernard & Goodyear (1998) supervision is an intervention that is provided by a senior member of a profession to a junior member or members in the same profession. This intervention is evaluative, extends over time, and has the simultaneous purposes of enhancing professional functioning of junior members, monitoring the quality of professional services offered to clients, and serving as a gatekeeper to those who enter a particular profession. This presentation will delineate the evolution of a University sponsored fieldwork experience program adhering to the parameters outlined by the Behavior Analyst Certification Board (BACB). The strengths and challenges associated with the growth of the program, as well as the fluid nature of BACB supervision guidelines will also be discussed. Mechanisms by which to adequately train and oversee supervision by adjunct faculty members will also be shared.
 
Training Interpersonal Communication Skills: A Supplement to an Experiential Learning Course
NOELLE NEAULT (Bay Path University)
Abstract: Concerns have been raised regarding the use of technical language of applied behavior analysis (ABA) when communicating with members of the general public (Rolider and Axelrod, 2005). It has been argued that the technical language of ABA is a barrier to treatment acceptability and limits the field’s social validity (Foxx, 1996). Although the Behavior Analyst Certification Board® (2012) has now identified the translation of technical language as a competency for certified clinicians, there is little literature evaluating the teaching of this skill. The following study involved a component analysis of a treatment package aimed at the assessment and training of behavior analytic consultation skills. The treatment package involved observation of targeted skills and a self-study (personalized system of instruction) task. Keywords: technical language, plain English, consultation, mentoring
 
Generalizing Foundational Knowledge Content Across Response Topographies for Graduate Students
MELISSA HUNSINGER (Bay Path University), Ginette Wilson-Bishop (Bay Path University), Susan Ainsleigh (Bay Path University)
Abstract: With the delineation of the Foundational Knowledge Content Area in the 4th Edition Task List© (BACB®, 2012), there has been a push to integrate and embed this content across all courses within Bay Path University’s Master’s Program Course Sequence in Applied Behavior Analysis. Through the creation of a Foundational Knowledge Tool used to relate all of these concepts into practice, which has been utilized within the student’s core courses, we have been able to track student’s topography-based responding when asked to link Foundational Knowledge to other Task List Content (i.e. Fundamental Elements of Behavior Change). After seeing growth in topography-based connections (intended to represent clinical use/applications of the concepts), we implemented an exam to measure the student’s ability to relate the content to scenario-based multiple-choice questions (intended to represent a national certification exam). This research will evaluate the correlation between students who have used the Foundational Knowledge Tool within core classes and a change in their selection-based exam scores. Also to be evaluated will be the parameters of the intervention (i.e. contacting the Foundational Knowledge Tool 1x versus 6xs) on exam scores. Lastly, we will explore BACB® Certification Exam pass rates within two groups of Bay Path University graduates: graduates who did not receive the Foundational Knowledge Intervention within their course sequence vs. graduates who did receive this intervention.
 
 
B. F. Skinner Lecture Series Paper Session #328
CE Offered: BACB

Self-Talk as a Regulatory Mechanism: How You Do It Matters

Monday, May 25, 2015
10:00 AM–10:50 AM
Lila Cockrell Theatre (CC)
Area: VBC; Domain: Theory
CE Instructor: Judah B. Axe, Ph.D.
Chair: Judah B. Axe (Simmons College)
ETHAN KROSS (University of Michigan)
Dr. Ethan Kross received his B.A. from the University of Pennsylvania and his Ph.D. from Columbia University. He is currently an associate professor in the Psychology Department at the University of Michigan and director of the University of Michigan Emotion and Self-Control Laboratory. He is also a faculty associate at the University of Michigan's Research Center for Group Dynamics, Center for Cultural Neuroscience, and Depression Research Center. Dr. Kross's research explores how people can control their emotions to improve our understanding of how self-control works, and to discover ways of enhancing self-control in daily life. He adopts an integrative approach to address these issues that draws on multiple disciplines within psychology including social, personality, clinical, developmental, and neuroscience. He integrates across these areas in terms of the types of questions he asks, the methods he use to address them, and the populations that he focuses on. He is the recipient of early career awards from the Association for Psychological Science, Society of Experimental Social Psychology, and the Foundation for Personality and Social Psychology as well as multiple teaching awards from the University of Michigan.
Abstract:

Self-talk is a ubiquitous human phenomenon. We all have an internal monologue that we engage in. Yet, surprisingly little research has examined the role that self-talk plays as a regulatory mechanism in adults. In this talk, Dr. Kross will review findings from an interdisciplinary program of research, which suggests that the language people use to refer to the self during introspection--i.e., whether people use nonfirst person pronouns and their own name or first person pronouns--consequentially influences how they think, feel, and behave under stress. Discussion will focus on the potential practical implications of this research and important future research directions.

Keyword(s): behavioral regulation, language, self-talk
 
 
Symposium #329
CE Offered: BACB
Recent Advancements in Functional Communication Training
Monday, May 25, 2015
10:00 AM–11:50 AM
Grand Ballroom C1 (CC)
Area: AUT/DDA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Brian D. Greer (University of Nebraska Medical Center's Munroe-Meyer Institute)
Discussant: Linda A. LeBlanc (Trumpet Behavioral Health)
CE Instructor: Brian D. Greer, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Functional communication training (FCT) is a differential-reinforcement procedure that involves the delivery of the reinforcer maintaining problem behavior contingent on an alternative communication response. Tiger, Hanley, and Bruzek (2008) found FCT to be the most commonly prescribed function-based treatment for problem behavior. As a result, a large portion of the literature on the assessment and treatment of problem behavior surrounds techniques to improve FCT. This symposium was designed to showcase some of the recent advancements in FCT. Kelley and colleagues investigated how noncontingent reinforcement disrupts both response acquisition and maintenance during FCT. Mitteer and colleagues evaluated a pre-assessment that predicts performance under two types of FCT schedule-thinning procedures. Ghaemmaghami and colleagues compared two approaches for programming delays to reinforcement during FCT schedule thinning. Niebauer and colleagues examined the role of stimulus control in mitigating the resurgence of problem behavior during extinction. The overall theme and implications of these studies will be discussed and summarized by Dr. Linda LeBlanc.

 

Response-Independent Reinforcer Delivery Competes with Response Acquisition and Maintenance

MICHAEL E. KELLEY (The Scott Center for Autism Treatment and Florida Institute of Technology), Cy Nadler (Division of Developmental and Behavioral Sciences), Catalina Rey (The Scott Center for Autism Treatment and Florida Institute of Technology), Sarah J. Cowie (University of Auckland), Christopher A. Podlesnik (Florida Institute of Technology)
Abstract:

Response-independent reinforcer delivery (in the form of noncontingent reinforcement; NCR) is a procedure commonly used to decrease levels of problem behavior. As a primary effect of this intervention, response-independent reinforcer delivery abolishes motivation, abates responding, and weakens the functional relation between behavior and consequences. Secondary effects may be undesirable in some cases. For example, some studies (Goh, Iwata, & DeLeon; 2000; Marcus & Vollmer, 1996) showed that response-independent reinforcer delivery treated problem behavior but also might compete with acquisition of an alternative response. In the current study, we extended previous research by (a) showing that response-independent reinforcer delivery competes with both response acquisition and maintenance and (b) extending the generality of the findings by including both basic and applied arrangements.

 

An Assessment to Inform Selection of Multiple-Schedule or Response-Restriction Treatments During Functional Communication Training

DANIEL R. MITTEER (University of Nebraska Medical Center Munroe-Meyer Institute), Brian D. Greer (University of Nebraska Medical Center’s Munroe-Meyer Institute), Wayne W. Fisher (University of Nebraska Medical Center’s Munroe-Meyer Institute)
Abstract:

Fisher, Greer, Querim, and DeRosa (2014) found that when functional communication training included multiple schedules of reinforcement (mult FCT), individuals who were unable to discriminate between the multiple-schedule components engaged in exceedingly high rates of the functional communication response. Response-restriction (RR) procedures were later shown to prevent this problem while maintaining low rates of problem behavior. In the current investigation, we evaluated three childrens successive- and simultaneous-discrimination abilities prior to evaluating Mult FCT or RR FCT. For one child, we conducted Mult FCT and RR FCT concurrently, albeit in separate contexts, and found the assessment accurately predicted the childs discrimination performance during each treatment. For the other children, we used the discrimination-test results to guide the selection of RR FCT to quickly teach the simultaneous discrimination and reduce problem behavior to near-zero levels. Results are discussed in terms of how selecting treatments matched to each individuals skills may be advantageous when evaluating treatments for problem behavior.

 
Efficacy of Contingency-Based Delay Tolerance Training and Preference for Predictable Versus Unpredictable Delays
MAHSHID GHAEMMAGHAMI (Western New England University), Gregory P. Hanley (Western New England University), Joshua Jessel (Western New England University)
Abstract: The effectiveness of treatments for problem behavior, like functional communication training (FCT), depends on the extent to which the treatment can be successfully extended to typical environments that include unavoidable and unpredictable reinforcement delays. Time-based delay (TBD) often result in loss of acquired communication responses and a re-emergence of problem behavior, whereas contingency-based delay (CBD) appears effective for increasing tolerance for delayed reinforcement (Hanley, Jin, Vanselow, & Hanratty, 2014). No direct comparison of TBD and CBD has been conducted, however. We first compared the relative efficacy of TBD and CBD across progressively longer delays using probabilistic reinforcement. Four individuals who engaged in a range of problem behaviors (e.g., aggression, vocal and motor disruptions, self-injury) participated. Lower rates of problem behavior and emotional responding were observed during CBD than TBD. We then evaluated the efficacy of, and participants’ preference for, predictable versus unpredictable CBD. Results from one participant showed that both predictable and unpredictable CBD were highly effective at maintaining optimal rates of communication, low rates of problem behavior, and high rates of compliance during delay. Unpredictable CBD, however, was preferred to predictable CBD and a control condition.
 

Improving Functional Communication Training by Mitigating the Resurgence of Problem Behavior

ASHLEY NIEBAUER (University of Nebraska Medical Center Munroe-Meyer Institute), Wayne W. Fisher (University of Nebraska Medical Center's Munroe-Meyer Institute), Brian D. Greer (University of Nebraska Medical Center's Munroe-Meyer Institute)
Abstract:

Despite being proven successful as a treatment for reducing problem behavior, functional communication training (FCT) does not address what happens to problem behavior during times in which functional communication responses go unreinforced. Previous research has shown that periods of extinction following FCT produce resurgence of problem behavior (Mace, et al., 2010; Volkert, Lerman, Call, & Trosclair-Lasserre, 2009), and such periods of extinction are likely when caregivers implement FCT. The current study evaluated whether establishing strict discriminative control over the FCR with the use of a multiple schedule mitigates the resurgence of problem behavior. With three children who engaged in problem behavior, the effects of a multiple-schedule FCT intervention was evaluated when discriminative stimuli were present or absent during a rigorous extinction challenge developed from Nevin and Shahans (2011) Equation 7 of behavioral momentum theory. Results for one child are compared to rates of problem behavior predicted by Nevin and Shahans (2011) Equation 7. Results are discussed in terms of how stimulus control can offset resurgence of problem behavior during periods of extinction.

 
 
Symposium #330
CE Offered: BACB
Creating Caring and Sustainable Communities: Large-Scale Applications of an Active Caring Approach
Monday, May 25, 2015
10:00 AM–11:50 AM
204A (CC)
Area: CSE; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Richard G. Smith (University of North Texas)
Discussant: E. Scott Geller (Virginia Tech)
CE Instructor: Richard G. Smith, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Societal-level challenges, including wasteful and dangerous personal and cultural practices and the erosion of caring and compassion, demand solutions that promote positive and widespread changes in behavior. Applied behavioral science (ABS) offers a promising foundation from which to address important societal issues such as excessive resource consumption, unsafe personal and workplace behaviors, and a generalized increase in the coarseness of human interactions. Importantly, interventions to improve these cultural-level problems require large-scale applications. Furthermore, successful and sustainable changes in cultural practices require the establishment of self-perpetuating systems that promote the spread of prosocial behavior change by incorporating processes that encourage members of the culture to not only engage in prosocial behavior but to recognize and reinforce the prosocial behavior of others. An example of this type of programmatic approach to large-scale behavior change is the Actively-Caring-for-People (AC4P) movement, which incorporates antecedent, consequential, and self-management strategies encourage, maintain, and generalize prosocial behavior. This symposium will presents four examples of behavioral interventions designed to improve behavior in the areas of: bicycle safety, environmental sustainability, and the spread of compassionate and caring behaviors throughout entire communities. Each presentation incorporates a large-scale AC4P perspective, which has the potential to impact large numbers of people worldwide.

Keyword(s): community, sustainability
 

A Community-Wide Program of Actively Caring for People: Spreading Prosocial Behavior One Bracelet at a Time

KELLY HO (The University of North Texas), Benjamin Libman (University of North Texas), Stephanie Holder (University of North Texas), Richard G. Smith (University of North Texas)
Abstract:

The Actively Caring for People Movement (AC4P) aims to apply principles derived from behavioral science to increase and maintain acts of kindness on a large scale. Although behavior change occurs at the level of the individual, widespread application and adoption across many individuals is necessary for a cultural-level impact of programmatic approaches to prosocial behavior. The current project evaluated dissemination of AC4P in a university campus and the local community. A community forum was held, at which the principles underling AC4P were presented and the AC4P program was described. Approximately 600 people attended the forum, and each received either one or two individually-numbered AC4P bracelets and was encouraged to register their bracelet number on the AC4P website and pass it on to someone engaging in kind acts. Bracelet numbers, as well as AC4P stories, were recorded and tracked on the AC4P website. Bracelet registration continues to evaluate the effects of subsequent contacts with forum attendees as well as additional organized, community-based activities at which bracelets will be distributed.

 
The Road to Bicycle Safety: From Baseline Observations to an AC4P Intervention
MICAH ROEDIGER (Virginia Tech), Taylor Jones (Virginia Tech University), Angela Suraci (Virginia Tech University), E. Scott Geller (Virginia Tech)
Abstract: Bicycle helmets are critical in preventing injuries during a crash. Bicycle helmet use and possible demographic determinants of helmet use were investigated with systematic field observations on the Virginia Tech (VT) campus. Field observations were conducted by 59 research assistants trained to observe bicycling behavior. A total of 14,412 independent observations collected over one academic year were used for data analysis. Reliability observations were conducted on nearly one third of all observations (32.5%) with all inter-rater reliability values exceeding 95%. As depicted in the Table, the number of individuals observed wearing a bicycle helmet was less than 20%, and significantly lower for males than females. These data inspired the development and application of a campus-wide intervention to increase the use of bicycle helmets among VT students. This intervention (which is currently in progress) consists of the following: 1) Various groups of students are informed of the AC4P Movement and offered a 50%-price-reduction coupon to purchase a bike helmet (n>1000), 2) Students are required to give this coupon to a bicyclist observed without a helmet, and 3) These students document their interactions with bicyclists. The impact of this large-scale intervention on bike-helmet purchase and use will be systematically assessed and presented.
 
Exploring the Impact of a Website to Promote Prosocial Behavior: A case study of AC4P
SARA E. VALENTINO (Virginia Tech), Lindsey Futrell (Virginia Tech University), Tara Fialkow (Virginia Tech University), Samuel Robinson (Virginia Tech University)
Abstract: The idea that simple acts of kindness can inspire significant social change has piqued the public’s attention. Virtual social networks dedicated to inspiring self-reinforcing cycles of prosociality have sprung up all across the country (see AC4P.org, randomactsofkindness.org, payitforward.org). These networks attempt to leverage natural social dynamics to perpetuate the spread of prosocial behavior from person to person. In the present study, we calculated several network-level metrics for one such network: AC4P.org: 1.) average degree, the number of ties coming from each person, (1.82), 2.) density, the proportion of ties in the network, (.009), and 3.) transitivity, the extent to which two of a person’s friends are friends with each other, (.435). See Table xx for a graphic representation of the AC4P network connections. Guided by social network research, we show how these metrics influence individual and group processes and how the information contained in this analysis can be applied to enhance the reach of prosocial networks. AC4P.org encourages members to recognize and reinforce others for prosocial acts by passing wristbands embossed with the AC4P logo and to publicly post stories of prosocial interactions on the AC4P website. Over seven years of data has been compiled on wristband dissemination and online-interactions between members. To develop a deeper understanding of the social dynamics that shape online-prosocial-networks, further analyses will include a longitudinal analysis of network change, a time series of wristband purchases and stories posted, as well as a content analysis of the 3,000+ AC4P stories investigating the nature of prosocial behavior (e.g. person-based, behavior-based, or environment-based) diffused along network ties.
 
Developing a Sustainability Institute with an Interdisciplinary Team
CRISS WILHITE (California State University, Fresno), Mara Brady (California State University Fresno), Beth Weinman (California State University Fresno), Steven W. Payne (Melmark)
Abstract: Solving complex cultural problems such as climate change cannot be accomplished without scientific understanding, evidence-based technical solutions, and behavioral implementation of those solutions. This requires integration of activities of consumers, producers, scientists, educators, policy makers and policy implementers. Houmanfar, Rodrigues and Ward’s (2010) five- term contingency model of cultural change has been used by the Fresno State Sustainability Project to effect change on our campus. The group is comprised of behavior analysts, geologists, biologists, students from 8 departments and plant operations personnel. We have received grants and honors from the university system and have completed a variety of educational programs and applied projects. Because we have found the numerous projects on campus and in the community have very little interaction, we proposed a sustainability institute. Fresno State’s top tier administrators have committed to developing the Fresno State Sustainability Institute. With their support, the Sustainability Summit held in the fall of 2014 paved the way to enhancing ongoing activity, promoting research and coordinating university and community stakeholders relative to sustainability in the Central San Joaquin Valley. We are currently developing organizational infrastructure and pursuing additional funding.
 
 
Symposium #331
CE Offered: BACB
New Approaches to the Experimental Assessment and Treatment of Noncompliance for Children with Developmental Disabilities
Monday, May 25, 2015
10:00 AM–11:50 AM
214C (CC)
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Blair Lloyd (Vanderbilt University)
Discussant: David A. Wilder (Florida Institute of Technology)
CE Instructor: Blair Lloyd, Ph.D.
Abstract: Noncompliance is prevalent among young children with developmental disabilities and presents a critical barrier to effective instruction. However, relative to other topographies of problem behavior, there is considerably less research on methods of assessing and treating noncompliance. One potential explanation is that noncompliance presents a set of unique challenges that require modifications to standard assessment and treatment procedures. In this symposium, we present four data-based studies on new approaches to the experimental assessment and treatment of noncompliance for children with developmental disabilities. The first presenter shares results of structural analyses of noncompliance embedded in reading instruction for a student with Down syndrome in a public elementary school setting. The second presenter shares an assessment model designed to distinguish effects of faulty stimulus control versus absent motivating operations for 5 children between the ages of 3 and 11. The third presenter shares data on correspondence between trial-based and traditional functional analyses of noncompliance for two young children with ASD in an outpatient behavior clinic. The fourth study presents a comparison of effects and preference for three function-based interventions for noncompliance for one child with ASD. All four presentations inform new approaches to experimental analysis of noncompliance for children with developmental disabilities.
Keyword(s): antecedent analysis, function-based intervention, functional analysis, noncompliance
 
Embedding Brief Structural Analyses of Noncompliance into Reading Instruction in a Public Elementary School
EMILY WEAVER (Vanderbilt University), Blair Lloyd (Vanderbilt University)
Abstract: Noncompliance is frequently reported in school settings and is associated with poor school and post-school outcomes. Due to unique challenges associated with conducting functional analyses of noncompliance, an alternative approach to assessment is a structural analysis, in which antecedent variables are systematically manipulated while consequences of compliance and noncompliance are held constant. In the present study, we used a hypothesis-testing model to design a brief-format structural analysis of noncompliance. All experimental procedures were implemented by a special education teacher in a public elementary school and embedded in a program of reading instruction for an 8-year-old girl with Down syndrome. The alternation of brief trial segments was used to assess the effects of antecedent variables on levels of compliance. Results of the initial structural analysis were used to inform subsequent evaluations of antecedent-based intervention components until increased levels of compliance were identified. Results suggest that a brief-format structural analysis embedded in naturally occurring instruction may be a promising method worthy of future investigation.
 
An Evaluation of a Model to Assess and Treat Noncompliance
JESSE ALLGOOD (Florida Institute of Technology), Lina Majdalany (Florida Institute of Technology), David A. Wilder (Florida Institute of Technology), Latasha Sturkie (Florida Institute of Technology), Lindsay Smeltz (Florida Institute of Technology)
Abstract: We developed and evaluated a model for assessing and treating compliance problems among young children. The model is designed to distinguish between noncompliance due to faulty stimulus control and noncompliance due to weak or absent motivating operations. Five children between the ages of 3 and 11 participated in the study. Three children were diagnosed with an intellectual disability and two children were typically developing. After the assessment, a treatment evaluation was conducted. Results show that two participants’ noncompliance was a function of poor stimulus control and three participants’ noncompliance was a function of weak or absent motivating operations. Treatments, which were designed based on the source of noncompliance, were effective in increasing compliance for each participant. Treatments for noncompliance due to a weak or absent motivating operation included a guided compliance procedure and differential reinforcement. Treatments for noncompliance due to poor stimulus control included multiple exemplar training, prompting, and reinforcement. The importance of identifying the source of compliance problems before intervening is discussed.
 

Correspondence Between Trial-based and Traditional FAs of Noncompliance: With Treatment Evaluation

Joseph Michael Lambert (Vanderbilt University), ANNE DOYLE (Peabody College of Vanderbilt University), S. Blair Barrows (Vanderbilt University), Nealetta Houchins-Juarez (Vanderbilt Kennedy Center Behavior Analysis Consulting Services)
Abstract:

The trial-based functional analysis (FA) is a practical variation of traditional FA methodology in which brief experimental trials are embedded into an individuals regularly scheduled daily activities. Although relatively understudied, existing research suggests that trial-based FAs can be valid and accurate assessments of commonly studied topographies of problem behavior such as aggression, property destruction, and stereotypy. However, no research to date has outlined variations of trial-based FA methodology appropriate for the assessment of behavior problems that pose unique challenges to valid analysis (i.e., noncompliance). In Study 1, we propose one such variation and evaluate correspondence between trial-based and traditional (multi-element) FAs of the noncompliance of two children referred to an outpatient behavior clinic. In Study 2, we evaluated the validity of Study 1 results by incorporating trial-based FA outcomes into effective function-based interventions. Interventions included a combination of functional communication training (FCT) and mand extinction in two-component compound (i.e., multiple or chained) schedules of reinforcement. Results of both studies provide preliminary evidence indicating that the proposed modifications to trial-based FA methodology may be useful when identifying the function(s) of noncompliance.

 
Evaluating the Relative Effect of, and Client Preference for, Three Function-Based Interventions for Noncompliance
Anne Doyle (Peabody College of Vanderbilt University), Joseph Michael Lambert (Vanderbilt University), MARIA MELLO (Vanderbilt University), Nealetta Houchins-Juarez (Vanderbilt Kennedy Center Behavior Analysis Consulting Services), Corinne Jones (Vanderbilt University)
Abstract: Noncompliance is a socially significant problem in applied settings. However, noncompliance is not behavior; rather, it is the absence of behavior given a specific stimulus condition (i.e., caregiver demand). Given this fact, it is unclear whether traditional function-based interventions can effectively address it. In Study 1 we compared functional communication training (FCT) to a token system; with contingencies placed on mands in the former and on compliance in the latter. In Study 2, we modified the FCT intervention. Specifically, we implemented a two-component chained schedule in which mands were placed on extinction in the first component but were reinforced in the second. Access to the second component was contingent upon compliance in the first and compliance requirements were yoked to those established for the token system. Results of both studies showed that the token system maintained compliance. Conversely, traditional FCT did not. However, when FCT procedures were modified, the results of Study 2 showed that a variation of FCT could also maintain compliance. Following each evaluation we conducted a concurrent-chains preference assessment. Our participant preferred FCT during Study 1. However, when compliance requirements were yoked in Study 2, preference shifted to the token system.
 
 
Symposium #332
CE Offered: BACB
Current Status and Future Directions of Technology to Teach Academics to Students with Autism
Monday, May 25, 2015
10:00 AM–11:50 AM
210AB (CC)
Area: EDC/AUT; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Fred Spooner (University of North Carolina, Charlotte)
Discussant: Robert C. Pennington (University of Louisville)
CE Instructor: Julie L. Thompson, Ph.D.
Abstract: Focus on evidence-based practices (EBP) has shifted attention in the field to careful analysis of the quality and quantity of evidence for a given population or intervention (Horner et al., 2005). Technology assisted instruction and interventions have been labeled as an EBP for individuals with autism spectrum disorder (Wong et al., 2014). Literature reviews on technology-assisted instruction to teach academics to students with autism have found gaps related to breadth of content and quality (Pennington, 2010; Knight, McKissick, & Saunders, 2013). No analyses to date have evaluated participant characteristics, instructional formats, contexts, or procedures. This session will include: (a) review of the literature on the use of technology interventions for culturally and linguistically diverse students with autism, (b) review of the evidence base on computer-assisted instruction to teach academics to students with autism with focus on instructional formats, contexts, and procedures. Additionally, this presentation will include reports on two studies: (a) a recent investigation of systematic delivery of a phonics curriculum via an iPad for students with moderate to severe intellectual disability and autism, and (b) a recent evaluation of the effects of systematic instruction and computer-assisted instruction to teach students with autism a story mapping procedure on an iPad.
Keyword(s): Academics, Autism, Computer-Assisted Instruction, Technology
 
Technology Interventions for Culturally and Linguistically Diverse Individuals with Autism Spectrum Disorder
JULIE L. THOMPSON (Michigan State University), Jenny Root (University of North Carolina at Charlotte)
Abstract: Research on the use of technology to support individuals with ASD has demonstrated great promise; however, few studies include diverse or non-English speaking students (Kasari & Smith, 2013; West, 2013). A recent review on technology for secondary students with ASD identified 31 studies; only two included racially diverse participants and none included linguistically diverse participants. In order to improve research to practice for diverse individuals with autism it is important to identify what research has been implemented with diverse populations and the effectiveness of the research. Based on the limited inclusion of diverse participants in research, there is concern that practices identified as evidence-based may not be effective for some culturally and linguistically diverse individuals, or may need substantial adaptations to demonstrate effectiveness (West, 2013). The current review extends previous reviews of technology by targeting studies that include culturally and/or linguistically diverse participants with ASD from pre-kindergarten through adulthood. Out of 55 total studies identified, only 10 reported ethnicity and/or linguistic diversity. Diverse students performed similar or better than white participants in 7/8 studies that disaggregated data. Implications for individuals with ASD, families, and practitioners will be discussed. In addition, suggestions for future research will be provided.
 
Computer-Assisted Instruction to Teach Academics to Students with Autism: Analysis of the Evidence Base
Jenny Root (University of North Carolina at Charlotte), BRADLEY STEVENSON (University of North Carolina Charlotte), David W. Test (University of North Carolina, Charlotte)
Abstract: The frequency and quality of the studies evaluating the effects of computer-assisted instruction are increasing as the benefits become widely known and technology becomes more accessible and adaptive to the needs of this population (Root et al., 2014). While technology-assisted instruction has been labeled an EBP for students with autism, computer-assisted instruction specifically for academic learning is a promising practice (Knight, McKissick, & Saunders, 2013; Pennington, 2010). The question remains about its effectiveness in academics overall as well as each content area. Furthermore, the literature on computer-assisted instruction varies in implementation and components of the independent variable, making inferences of generalization cautious. Out of 49 identified studies, 22 were of high quality (Horner et al., 2005), with 15 out of 22 teaching literacy skills. The high quality studies were further analyzed in terms of context of instruction, form of instructional technology, and specific instructional procedures. Instruction and/or prompting based on the principles of applied behavior analysis were present in all high quality studies. Implications for practitioners and directions for future research will be discussed.
 
Phonics Instruction for Students who are Nonverbal with Moderate/Severe Intellectual Disability and Autism
Lynn Ahlgrim-Delzell (University of North Carolina at Charlotte), Diane Browder (University of North Carolina Charlotte), LEAH WOOD (California Polytechnic State University at San Luis Obispo), Angela Preston (University of North Carolina at Charlotte), Amy Kemp-Inman (University of North Carolina at Charlotte)
Abstract: Individuals with moderate or severe developmental disabilities (i.e., intellectual disabilities, autism) and especially those who are nonverbal, have limited opportunities for learning the foundations of literacy. Students who successfully gain early literacy skills may still have difficulty moving on to other reading programs that require oral participation. This study reports results of a repeated measures randomized control trial of 32 students with moderate or severe disability who are nonverbal. Students were randomly assigned to treatment (i.e., phonics instruction) or control (i.e., another literacy program) conditions for eight months. Students in the control condition participated in their classroom’s typical non-phonics literacy routines using an iPad™. Students in the treatment condition received phonics instruction using the iPad™ and a phonics curriculum based on principles of applied behavior analysis. Skills taught included phoneme identification, blending, segmenting, decoding, and reading comprehension. Classroom teachers delivered one lesson per student per day for approximately 15 minutes. Monthly data consisted of a curriculum-based assessment and a distal measure of reading (Nonverbal Literacy Assessment). Data were analyzed using a repeated measures ANOVA comparing pretest/posttest scores and treatment/comparison groups. There were statistically significant interaction effects for three of the four comparisons including identification of individual phonemes, decoding, and total score.
 
Electronic Story Mapping to Teach Comprehension of Narrative Texts by Students with Autism Spectrum Disorder
JENNY ROOT (University of North Carolina at Charlotte), Diane Browder (University of North Carolina Charlotte), Leah Wood (California Polytechnic State University at San Luis Obispo), Caryn Allison (UNC Charlotte)
Abstract: Comprehension of text is a pivotal skill, yet there is a paucity of research on how to teach it to individuals with ASD (Browder et al., 2006; Chang & Lin, 2007). This study evaluated the effects of an intervention that paired systematic instruction and computer assisted instruction, specifically an electronic story mapping procedure delivered via an iPad, to teach comprehension skills related to story elements to students with ASD. Students were taught to identify story element definitions using constant time delay. Students then listened to age-appropriate narrative texts with a problem-solution structure, completed an electronic story map, and answered related questions. If unable to complete the map or answer questions, a least to most prompting hierarchy was used, including referring to the electronic story map, and rereading portions of the text. Outcomes of the multiple probe across participants design show a functional relation between the intervention and identification of story element definitions, labeling of a story element map on an iPad, and expressive comprehension of story element questions. Implications for future research and practice will be discussed.
 
 
Symposium #333
Training Novice Teachers to Use Evidence Based Practices in Special Education Classrooms
Monday, May 25, 2015
10:00 AM–11:50 AM
212AB (CC)
Area: EDC/PRA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Sheila R. Alber-Morgan (The Ohio State University)
Discussant: Ronnie Detrich (The Wing Institute)
Abstract:

The research to practice gap has been a persistent problem in special education classrooms. An abundant number of effective interventions for improving student outcomes have been identified across decades of empirical research; yet most teachers select practices based on their own preferences and experiences (Cook & Cook, 2013; Cook, Tankersley, & Landrum, 2013). Despite federal laws mandating that teachers use evidence-based teaching practices, most teachers select interventions based on their own preferences and experiences (Cook & Cook, 2013; Cook, Tankersley, & Landrum, 2013). Not relying on scientifically proven methods deprives students with disabilities of the effective instruction that they so desperately need (Vaughn & Dammann, 2001). In order to close the achievement gap between learners with special needs and their typically developing peers, it is imperative to address the glaring disconnect between research and practice (Burns & Ysseldyke, 2009). Bringing evidence based teaching practices into real classrooms can be accomplished by coaching novice teachers, providing them with self-monitoring strategies, and collaborating with them to produce research based on their students needs.

 

Coaching New Special Educators to Engage in Evidence Based Education

MARY SAWYER (The Ohio State University), Sheila R. Alber-Morgan (The Ohio State University), Carolyn Page Willke (The Ohio State University), Carrie Davenport (The Ohio State University), Lauren Hensley (The Ohio State University), Michael Kranak (The Ohio State University)
Abstract:

Evidence-based practice in education is a recursive problem-solving framework special educators can use to address academic and behavioral targets. Once teachers have (a) identified concrete objectives, they can (b) select, (c) adapt, and (d) implement scientifically supported technologies, and (e) use progress monitoring data to evaluate student response to intervention and inform instructional decisions. This chain of operant, problem-solving behaviors (i.e., evidence based teaching practice) can and should be explicitly taught to novice teachers so that they are prepared to effectively and efficiently improve student outcomes. The current study evaluated the effectiveness of coaching special education student teachers to engage in evidence-based practice. A multiple baseline design across teachers was used to evaluate the effects of coaching on targeted pupil outcomes in special education and inclusion classrooms. Teacher fidelity data and student measures will be reported, and implications for novice teachers, teacher educators, behavioral consultants, and researchers will be discussed.

 
ACCOMPLISH: The Effects of SRSD on Student Teachers’ Lesson Objective Writing Skills
KRISTALL J. DAY (The Ohio State University), John Schaefer (The Ohio State University), Gleides Lopes Rizzi (The Ohio State University)
Abstract: Self-Regulated Strategy Development is an evidence-based practice that has been successfully used to support P-12 students on various tasks (Harris et al, 2012; Santangelo, Harris, and Graham, 2008). One empirically supported SRSD method for teaching multiple component skills to students in the P-12 settings is the use of mnemonic devices (Wood, Frank, & Wacker 1998; Mastropieri & Scruggs, 1998; Scruggs, & Mastropieri, 1991; Pressley, Levin, & Delaney, 1982). In this study we evaluated the effects of a mnemonic on preservice teachers’ lesson objective writing skills. The mnemonic ACCOMPLISH was used to support preservice teachers in remembering all the components of a quality objective (Antecedent Condition, Criterion for mastery, Observable behavior, Measurable behavior, Positively stated, Linked to standards, Individualized, Socially valid, High expectations). A multiple baseline design across participants was used to test the strategy and preservice teachers’ objectives were evaluated using a rubric. Generalization data were also collected through the evaluation of lesson plans that preservice teachers wrote for student teaching assignments. Data indicate that the mnemonic was helpful for some of the student teachers.
 

The Effects of a Graphic Organizer Training Package on the Persuasive Writing of Middle School Students with Autism

SHEILA R. ALBER-MORGAN (The Ohio State University), Anne Bishop (Haugland Learning Center), Melissa Boggs (The Ohio State University), Mary Sawyer (The Ohio State University)
Abstract:

This study examined the effects of a graphic organizer intervention package on the quality and quantity of persuasive writing of three middle school students with Autism Spectrum Disorder. The students novice classroom teacher identified written expression as a priority need for her middle school students with autism, collaborated with a research team to identify an appropriate evidence based intervention, and implemented the intervention while receiving on-going guidance and support from the research team. The intervention included a 3-day training which consisted of explicit instruction on the components of a persuasive essay, modeling and guided practice of graphic organizer completion, and translating graphic organizer notes into a draft. Following training, the students independently completed graphic organizers and wrote persuasive essays throughout the post intervention condition. A multiple baseline across students design demonstrated the intervention package was functionally related to improvements in writing performance as measured by total words written, correct writing sequences, and analytical rubric scores.

 

The Effects of Word Box Instruction on First Graders' Reading and Spelling Outcomes

Brittany Kanotz (The Ohio State University), CHRISTINA A. ROUSE (The Ohio State University), Mary Sawyer (The Ohio State University), Sheila R. Alber-Morgan (The Ohio State University)
Abstract:

Phonemic awareness is critical for the development of proficient reading and spelling skills. Word box instruction is a direct instruction approach to teaching phonemic awareness skills and has been demonstrated to be an effective intervention for struggling readers (e.g., Devault & Joseph, 2004; Joseph & Maslanka, 2002; Joseph, 1999; Keesey, 2012; McCarthy, 2008). As students pronounce each phoneme in a word, they slide a marker (e.g., coin, poker chip) into a picture of the box with that phoneme. This study examined the effects of word box instruction on the outcomes of three at risk first graders. The word box instruction intervention was planned and implemented by a novice teacher in collaboration with a research team. A multiple-probe across participants design demonstrated a functional relation of word box instruction on students reading and spelling performance. Additionally, two of the three participants demonstrated evidence of maintenance and generalization of reading and spelling outcomes.

 
 
Symposium #334
CE Offered: BACB
Designing Successful Elementary Students: Establishing Early Literacy, Observational Learning and Curiosity
Monday, May 25, 2015
10:00 AM–11:50 AM
209 (CC)
Area: EDC/VBC; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Lin Du (Teachers College, Columbia University)
Discussant: Jennifer Longano (Fred S. Keller School)
CE Instructor: Lin Du, Ph.D.
Abstract:

An evidence- based science of teaching is required in order for all students in inclusive and general education classrooms to meet current standards for proficiency across major subject areas. Interacting with storybooks and text, interest in peers and learning new concepts , and a tendency towards exploring new ideas and vocabulary are all identified as foundational benchmarks in the New York State Common Core Standards. We report on three experiments targeting these areas. The first study tested the effects of the establishment of conditioned reinforcement for observing books on the rate of acquisition of novel textual responses. In the second study, the experimenters tested the effects of teaching students to chorally respond on the acquisition of observational learning capabilities. The experimenters in the third study investigated the role of peer modeling and observed contingencies on question- asking in preschoolers. The results of all three experiments showed functional relations between the implementation of the independent variables and increases in the target behaviors. Results are discussed in terms of their implications for students' success in general and inclusive educational settings.

Keyword(s): curiosity, observational learning, reading, verbal capabilities
 

The Effects of the Establishment of Conditioned Reinforcement for Observing Books on Rate of Acquisition of Novel Textual Responses with Two- to Five-Year-Old Participants

SUSAN BUTTIGIEG (Teachers College, Columbia University)
Abstract:

I tested the effects of conditioning books on rate of acquisition of novel textual responses for 17 participants with and without developmental delays (2.4 to 5.4 years old). The independent variable was the establishment of books as a reinforcer. The dependent variable was the rate of acquisition of novel textual responses. A non-concurrent multiple pre- and post-intervention probe design was used. Participants acquired conditioned reinforcement for books through textual operant discrimination training, stimulus-stimulus pairings, or conditioning books through peer observation. The rate of acquisition increased from 1.6 to 7.25 times as a function of acquiring books as a conditioned reinforcer.

 

And Satisfaction Brought Him Back: What Do We Know About Curiosity and What We Choose to Learn?

R. Douglas Greer (Columbia University Teachers College and Graduate School of Arts and Sciences), JEANNE MARIE SPECKMAN (Fred S. Keller School Teachers College Columbia University), Lin Du (Teachers College, Columbia University)
Abstract:

We sought to measure curiosity in special and general education preschool students by measuring the number of questions they asked about unknown items or pictures across four contrived conditions. We identified students who did not ask any questions about unknown items or pictures during the baseline probes, and then provided them with opportunities to observe model peers receive approval and tokens for asking questions about unknown pictures on a computer. The results showed a functional relation between the treatment procedure and increases in questions asked by the participants, and are discussed in terms of eliminating not knowing as a reinforcer.

 

The Effects of a Reading Intervention to Teach Silent Reading with Comprehension on the Speaker-As-Own Listener Capability among Third Grade Students and Comparisons with Fluent Readers

JOANNE HILL-POWELL (Teacher College, Columbia University)
Abstract:

The establishment of covert academic behavior is essential for the development of fluent reader and writer repertoires. One experiment determined the relationship between silent and oral reading fluency and comprehension among adult and elementary-aged fluent readers. A subsequent study identified a procedure to teach comprehension when reading silently. The procedure established covert speaker-as-own-listener repertoires for participants with language delays. The induction of a covert speaker-as-own-listener capability may result in more efficient reading and potential for long term academic success and the development of socially acceptable behavior

 
 
Symposium #335
CE Offered: BACB
Tackling Practicality Issues in the Assessment and Treatment of Problem Behavior
Monday, May 25, 2015
11:00 AM–11:50 AM
217C (CC)
Area: AUT/DDA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Yaniz C. Padilla Dalmau (Virginia Institute of Autism)
CE Instructor: Jonathan Dean Schmidt, Ph.D.
Abstract: This symposium presents results from 3 studies addressing the application of applied behavior analysis for practicality issues that are often barriers to the assessment and treatment of problem behavior. The first study, “A Comparison of Methods for Thinning Schedules of Reinforcement in a Demand Context,” compares two schedule thinning methods for individuals who have escape maintained problem behavior. Emphasis is on determining which method shows the greatest utility for maintaining low rates of problem behavior, while being sustainable in everyday settings. The second study, “Teaching Children with Autism and Language Delays to Reject Non-preferred Food Items Using Multiple Communication Forms,” evaluates what effects teaching multiple functional communication responses has on preventing the resurgence of inappropriate communication. Of importance, results will also show how well these communication forms generalized across people. The third study, “Convergent Validity of the Questions about Behavioral Function Scale and Functional Analyses,” is a 10-year, retrospective analysis of 274 participants who received services for severe problem behavior in an outpatient hospital clinic. Analyses focus on how sensitive results from an indirect measure, the Questions about Behavioral Function scale, are with experimental functional analyses, across mediating factors such as function, topography of behaviors, and age.
Keyword(s): autism, problem behavior, reinforcement
 
A Comparison of Methods for Thinning Schedules of Reinforcement in a Demand Context
MOLLY BEDNAR (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Jennifer R. Zarcone (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
Abstract: Dense schedules of alternative reinforcement for compliance paired with extinction for problem behavior are often used in behavior interventions for children with developmental disabilities, but may not be practical in all settings. The current study compared two methods for thinning reinforcement schedules in academic contexts for three participants whose results from a functional analysis indicated problem behavior was maintained by escape from demands. The first part of the study was to identify a hierarchy of high and low probability vocational and academic tasks for each participant. The second part of this study compared two methods for systematically thinning the schedule of reinforcement for compliance. In the dense-to-lean (DTL) condition, dense schedules of reinforcement were implemented at the start of treatment, followed by systematically thinning the reinforcement schedule across sessions. In the fixed lean (FL) condition, the use of a fixed schedule of reinforcement was implemented throughout treatment, which was the same as the terminal reinforcement schedule in the DTL condition. Results demonstrate that both methods of schedule thinning can result in reductions of escape-maintained target problem behaviors. However, for all participants, the terminal goal was attained more rapidly in the FL condition than in the DTL condition.
 
Teaching Children with Autism and Language Delays to Reject Non-preferred Foods Using Multiple Communication Forms
LAURA C. CHEZAN (Old Dominion University), Erik Drasgow (University of South Carolina), Christian Atlas Martin (Atlas Supports, LLC), James Halle (University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign)
Abstract: Our purpose in this study was extended the application of functional communication training (FCT) by teaching multiple alternative, socially appropriate communicative replacement responses to two young children with autism. First, we taught each child two new responses to replace their subtle communication forms (e.g., pushing away) that served a rejection function. Next, we taught children to alternate between the two new responses. Then, we assessed whether the new responses and their alternation would promote resilience and eliminate resurgence to previous undesirable communicative forms. Finally, we examined generalization of the new skills to novel social partners. Both children acquired the new responses and their alternation. One child used the newly acquired responses when access to reinforcement was not immediately available whereas the other child resorted to previous undesirable communicative forms. Both children used the new responses with novel social partners but only one child alternated between the two forms with the novel social partner.
 
Convergent Validity Between the Questions about Behavior Function Scale and Functional Analyses
JONATHAN DEAN SCHMIDT (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Jill Fodstad (Indiana University School of Medicine), Amanda Goetzel (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Theodosia R. Paclawskyj (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
Abstract: It is well established in the literature that the most effective method for determining the purpose of problem behavior is by conducting a functional analysis (FA). Although an FA may be the most valid method for identifying the variables maintaining problem behavior, it is not always feasible to conduct such an in-depth analysis for practical reasons such as available resources, time constraints, or staffing. Thus, it is often necessary to use indirect measures such as questionnaires to identify the function. We compared the results of the Questions About Behavioral Function (QABF) scale, collected over the span of 10 years, to the results of standard FAs for 274 participants with developmental disabilities who were referred to a hospital clinic for the treatment of severe problem behavior. For all participants, a QABF was completed for each specific topography of problem behavior that was subsequently targeted for assessment in the FA. Both statistical analysis and single-subject design methodology were implemented to evaluate the convergent validity of the results obtained from the QABF and the FA. More in-depth analyses focus on the implications of differences in the predictive validity of the QABF when factors such as specific functions, topography, and age are considered.
 
 
Symposium #336
CE Offered: BACB
What Do We Do About Errors? Empirically Evaluating Error Correction Techniques in Discrete Trial Training and Discrimination Training
Monday, May 25, 2015
11:00 AM–11:50 AM
217D (CC)
Area: AUT/DDA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Robert W. Isenhower (Douglass Developmental Disabilities Center, Rutger)
CE Instructor: Robert W. Isenhower, Ph.D.
Abstract: Although errorless teaching strategies are often used during Discrete Trial Training (DTT) and discrimination training to reduce the likelihood of error commission, errors will inevitably occur. Therefore, in this symposium we will examine the effectiveness of different error correction procedures on the acquisition of receptive and expressive discrete trial targets and simple discrimination targets. At the heart of Applied Behavior Analytic teaching methods is the stimulus consequence provided contingent upon engaging in behavior. Most frequently, when the target behavior is emitted, a reinforcing consequence is delivered. However, when other behavior is emitted (e.g., incorrect responding) consequences can take on a variety of forms. The most common of these consequences are the absence of the reinforcing consequence delivered for target behavior (i.e., differential reinforcement) or some form of error correction (e.g., follow-up prompted trials, corrective feedback, informational feedback, remediation, etc.) that serves to increase the likelihood of correct responding on future trials. Implications for implementing and individualizing error correction techniques in discrete trial training and discrimination training across learners with autism spectrum disorder and other developmental disabilities will be discussed.
Keyword(s): Discrete Trials, Discrimination Training, Error Correction
 
Comparing Variations of Discrete Trial Teaching for Children Diagnosed with Autism
DONNA TOWNLEY-COCHRAN (Autism Partnership Foundation), Justin B. Leaf (Autism Partnership Foundation), Ronald Leaf (Autism Partnership Foundation), Mitchell T. Taubman (Autism Partnership Foundation), John James McEachin (Autism Partnership Foundation)
Abstract: Discrete trial teaching (DTT) is a procedure widely used to teach new skills to children with an Autism Spectrum Disorder (ASD). One component of DTT that warrants further analysis is the feedback given to children when they engage in an incorrect response. The purpose of this presentation is to present data from a study conducted to evaluate and compare two variations of feedback within DTT: corrective plus informative feedback versus informative feedback only. Utilizing an alternative treatment design nested into a multiple baseline design across participants, we sought to specifically evaluate which DTT variation resulted in quicker skill acquisition and how each variation affected the maintenance of expressive or receptive labels. Six children diagnosed with an autism spectrum disorder participated in this study. Three participants would be characterized as lower functioning and three would be considered higher functioning. We will be presenting data on skill acquisition, efficiency to mastery of the two procedures, and maintenance data. Analysis will be conducted within each participant and across high functioning and lower functioning participants. Future areas for research as well as clinical implications will also be discussed.
 

A Comparison of Error Correction Procedures for Teaching Receptive Identification Items in Discrete Trial Training

LARA M. DELMOLINO GATLEY (Douglass Developmental Disabilities Center, Rutgers University), Robert W. Isenhower (Douglass Developmental Disabilities Center, Rutgers University), Kate E. Fiske Massey (Douglass Developmental Disabilities Center, Rutgers University), Meredith Bamond (Douglass Developmental Disabilities Center, Rutgers University), Justin B. Leaf (Autism Partnership Foundation)
Abstract:

Despite the common use of errorless procedures, occasional errors will inevitably occur during instruction within Discrete Trial Training (DTT). Therefore, empirically testing and validating error correction techniques used in DTT is important for the development of best clinical practices. In the current paper, we empirically compare error correction procedures for teaching receptive identification in three learners with autism spectrum disorder. For each learner a try again procedure was utilized in the context of a three-choice discrimination task. This procedure allowed a learner to make up to two additional attempts to respond correctly, without prompts, after making an error. For each learner, this procedure was compared to a previously successful error correction procedure: either, 1.) a prompted follow-up trial or 2.) the delivery of corrective information (i.e., this is the _____) without the requirement of a follow-up response. We found that the more effective error correction strategy was idiosyncratic to each learner. Implications for individualizing error correction procedures across learners with autism spectrum disorder and developmental disabilities will be discussed.

 
Using Stimulus Re-Presentation to Facilitate Discrimination Training in an Individual with Autism
KATE E. FISKE MASSEY (Douglass Developmental Disabilities Center, Rutgers University), Robert W. Isenhower (Douglass Developmental Disabilities Center, Rutgers University)
Abstract: The ability to discriminate between stimuli involves a complex set of skills that many individuals with autism have difficulty acquiring, generalizing, and maintaining. The use of differential reinforcement, or providing reinforcement for responding to the positive comparison (S+) and not to the negative comparison (S-), is a common means of teaching discriminations. However, the absence of reinforcement upon error commission may not be salient to some learners, and criterion levels of responding may not be attained solely through the use of differential reinforcement. In a visual simple discrimination task, we examined the use of stimulus re-presentation as an error correction procedure by not removing the stimulus array after an error until the learner changed his response to the S+. An 11-year-old boy with autism participated. He was unable to acquire simple discriminations when differential reinforcement alone was used; however, when a combination of stimulus re-presentation and differential reinforcement was applied, he learned to reliably respond to the S+ across three pairs of targets. A comparison of differential reinforcement, re-representation, and the two in combination in teaching simple discrimination will be discussed in terms of the possible mechanisms by which each approach (i.e., negative reinforcement, positive reinforcement) had its effect.
 
 
Symposium #337
CE Offered: BACB
Is Choosing Reinforcing? Examining Choice Responding Under Varied Assessment Conditions
Monday, May 25, 2015
11:00 AM–11:50 AM
217B (CC)
Area: AUT/EAB; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Erin Conant (Evergreen Center)
CE Instructor: Mark P. Groskreutz, Ph.D.
Abstract: Reinforcing effects are expected to vary based on the interplay of several variables, such as schedule, immediacy, and magnitude of reinforcement. Previous researchers have examined choice as a variable impacting reinforcement effects, when all else is held constant. For individuals with disabilities, where identifying reinforcers can be challenging, using choice may be particularly important when trying to maximize reinforcing effects when reinforcers may be limited. However, research on choice has been challenging, because of the necessary to keep choice and no-choice conditions equivalent. Previous researchers have used a variety of methods to control for choice and no-choice conditions with varying results. The studies reviewed in this symposium present further examinations of choice as a potential reinforcer considering single and concurrent operants arrangements and fixed and progressive ratio, as well as progressive magnitude assessments of reinforcement effects. Additionally, the current symposia include primary and “conditioned” reinforcers as part of the examination of choice as a reinforcer.
Keyword(s): Choice, Progressive-ratio, Reinforcer assessment
 
A review of research on reinforcement effects of choice and choosing with individual's with disabilities
NICOLE C GROSKREUTZ (University of Saint Joseph), Mark P. Groskreutz (Evergreen Center)
Abstract: Basic and applied research on choice has examined many variables and conceptualizations, from mathematical models of behavior under choice conditions (e.g., the matching law) to the impact of choosing between demand activities on levels of escape maintained behavior. The current review specifically examines research evaluating the reinforcing effects of choosing among available consequences (i.e., the opportunity to select a reinforcer versus being given the same reinforcer in the absence of choosing) with individuals with disabilities. The review includes an overview of common research arrangements for comparing choice and no-choice conditions and a discussion of the strengths and weaknesses of various control techniques. Results of previous research on choice will be discussed along various parameters to identify consistent findings and potential variables impacting results. Parameters to be discussed will include participant populations, categories of consequences, reinforcer assessment arrangements, and strength of conclusions. Finally, a series of recommendations will be discussed to help set the occasion for continued productivity in choice research in applied settings.
 
Using Single and Concurrent Operants Assessments to Examine Choice as a Reinforcer
WENDY WELLER (Evergreen Center), Mark P. Groskreutz (Evergreen Center)
Abstract: Individuals may be more motivated to learn new skills or perform already acquired skills when they may choose from several available consequences. However, research on choice is challenging, because it necessitates arranging choice and no-choice conditions, such that in the no-choice condition, the participant is given what they would have chosen if given the option. Previous research has suggested some participants prefer choice whereas other participants do not prefer choice. In the current presentation, participants with an autism spectrum disorder experienced several brief MSWO preference assessments to identify stable preferences. The preference assessments were followed by reinforcer assessments to examine responding under choice and no-choice conditions. Choice and no-choice conditions were designed and compared using a novel arrangement, to reduce confounds associated with yoking or other control procedures. Participants experienced conditions using both single and concurrent operant arrangements. Results suggest different patterns of responding across participants with some participant preferring choice and other participants showing no differential responding under the arranged conditions.
 
Evaluating Choice as a Reinforcer under Progressive Ratio and Progressive Magnitude Reinforcement Conditions
MARK P. GROSKREUTZ (Evergreen Center), Wendy Weller (Evergreen Center)
Abstract: Some individuals may respond better (e.g., higher rate or with greater accuracy) when given the option to choose among consequences following a response. Previous research on choice has found different results, with some individuals preferring choice, some preferring no-choice, and some showing no difference in responding. However, the reasons for these different findings are currently unclear. The differences in results may be due to the experimental arrangements and/or the specific form of reinforcer assessment. The current research uses additional reinforcer assessment paradigms to examine the responding under choice and no-choice conditions with several individuals with autism spectrum disorders, including progressive-ratio and progressive-magnitude comparisons. The results suggest choice, as compared to no-choice, may be highly-preferred by at least some individuals with mild to moderate disabilities (e.g., individuals with autism spectrum disorders and extensive verbal repertoires). Results are considered from a practical perspective and are discussed in relation to behavioral economic models of behavior.
 
 
Panel #338
CE Offered: BACB
Are we Meeting our Obligation to Learners With Autism Spectrum Disorder?
Monday, May 25, 2015
11:00 AM–11:50 AM
Grand Ballroom C2 (CC)
Area: AUT/DDA; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Jill E. McGrale Maher, M.A.
Chair: Mary Jane Weiss (Endicott College)
JILL E. MCGRALE MAHER (Central Massachusetts Preparatory School)
PETER F. GERHARDT (JPG Autism Consulting, LLC)
MARY JANE WEISS (Endicott College)
Abstract:

The majority of research in Applied Behavior Analysis has substantiated that learners with autism spectrum disorder (ASD) acquire skills most rapidly in a one-to-one teaching format referred to as discrete-trial teaching (DTT). While DTT is an essential instructional model for learners with autism, it may not, over time, provide students with ASD the skills necessary for life success. Moreover, as the incidence of ASD has increased (e.g., by 30% in the last two years), it is predicted that in 5 years, 122,493 students with ASD will turn 22 nationwide, requiring 48,015 caregivers at a cost of 3,623 million dollars annually. Additionally, the new nation-wide Employment First initiatives have drastically decreased and will eventually eliminate sheltered work environments that have been available for more severely impacted people with disorders. We need to consider preparation for next environments to be a primary obligation of our service provision. Working in groups, working independently, and working with minimal and reduced supervision must be explicit goals for learners with ASD. Additionally, we must develop creative and cost-effective ways to teach, support and monitor adults with ASD in community and employment settings.

Keyword(s): Transitions
 
 
B. F. Skinner Lecture Series Paper Session #339
CE Offered: PSY/BACB

Questioning Some Assumptions About the Processes Involved in Addiction

Monday, May 25, 2015
11:00 AM–11:50 AM
006AB (CC)
Area: BPH; Domain: Basic Research
Instruction Level: Intermediate
CE Instructor: Paul L. Soto, Ph.D.
Chair: Paul L. Soto (Texas Tech University)
RICHARD LAMB (University of Texas Health Science Center at San Antonio)
Dr. Richard Lamb received his undergraduate degree from the University of Chicago in biology. He did his doctoral work with Don McMillan at the University of Arkansas for Medical Sciences in pharmacology. Dr. Lamb then moved to Baltimore, where he did a postdoctoral fellowship with Roland Griffiths at Johns Hopkins University in the Division of Behavioral Biology. He went on to be a staff fellow working with Jack Henningfield in the clinical pharmacology branch of the National Institute on Drug Abuse intramural research program and with Steve Goldberg in the preclinical pharmacology branch. From there he went to the Philadelphia area: First as an assistant professor at the University of Medicine and Dentistry of New Jersey and then as an associate professor at Hahnemann University. While at these institutions, Dr. Lamb worked with Martin Iguchi, Kim Kirby, Toby Jarbe, and Andrew Morral doing both treatment studies and preclinical studies related to drug addiction. Dr. Lamb is currently a professor of psychiatry and pharmacology at the University of Texas Health Science Center at San Antonio conducting preclinical studies examining the effects of potential medications on alcohol self-administration and animal models of alcoholism.
Abstract:

Addiction is characterized by continued drug use despite its adverse consequences, and by its chronic relapsing nature. Frequently, this continued use is assumed to result from drugs being over-valued, i.e., drug use being less elastic. In other words, in those who are addicted, increases in price decrease drug use less compared to those who are not addicted. Similarly, relapse is frequently assumed to be precipitated by drug-paired stimuli that, through pavlovian conditioning, elicit increases in motivation to take drugs. While these assumptions may be true, other equally viable alternatives exist. For instance, excessive drug use may result from the unconstrained demand for drug being relatively high, i.e. greater amounts of drug being consumed when it is available at no cost, in those who are addicted. Similarly, drug-paired stimuli may precipitate relapse not because these elicit increased motivation for drug taking, but because these stimuli elicit other behaviors that make drug taking more likely or set the occasion for behaviors that result in drug taking. Surprisingly, the empirical base for deciding among these assumptions is extremely limited, especially given how these assumptions shape our investigations into and our treatment of addiction.

Target Audience:

Basic and applied behavior analysts interested in drug addiction.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of presentation, participants should be able to: (1) define elastic versus inelastic demand; (2) distinguish between conceptions of drug addiction as resulting from drugs being over-valued in those who are or become addicted compared to those who are not addicted versus a greater unconstrained demand for drugs in those who are or become addicted compared to those who are not addicted; and (3) distinguish the various functions of drug-paired stimuli that may contribute to increased drug use.
Keyword(s): demand, drug addiction, relapse
 
 
Symposium #340
CE Offered: BACB
Advances in Behavioral Process Research for Pediatric Tic Disorders
Monday, May 25, 2015
11:00 AM–11:50 AM
Texas Ballroom Salon C (Grand Hyatt)
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Katie Wiskow (Texas Tech University)
Discussant: Thomas J. Waltz (Eastern Michigan University)
CE Instructor: Katie Wiskow, M.A.
Abstract: Behavior therapy is effective for pediatric tic disorders, and shows positive effect sizes comparable to widely-used psychopharmacological methods. Still, not all children with tics respond to behavior therapy, creating the need to examine basic therapeutic processes and ways to augment existing techniques. As such, this symposium will present two studies in line with these directions. First, Matthew Capriotti and will present an experimental study investigating fixed versus progressive reinforcement schedules for tic suppression. Given that tics can be suppressed for short time periods while being reinforced, perhaps more robust forms of reinforcement might increase suppression efforts and create greater resistance to reinforcement withdrawal. Second, David Houghton will present archival data from a recently conducted randomized controlled trial in which the hypothesized mechanisms of change in behavior therapy for tic disorders are tested. For some time, theorists have offered that habituation of premonitory urges (i.e., somatic phenomena that precede tics) drives treatment gains, but little data support this hypothesis. Alternatively, other behavioral processes, such as inhibitory learning, might better explain reductions in tic behavior. Finally, Thomas Waltz will close by discussing the implications of these findings with regard to the immediate applications as well as clinical behavior analysis in general.
Keyword(s): habituation, inhibitory learning, reinforcement schedule, tic management
 
Comparing Fixed-Amount and Progressive-Amount DRO Schedules for Tic Suppression in Youth with Chronic Tic Disorders
MATTHEW CAPRIOTTI (University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee), Jennifer Turkel (University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee), Rachel Johnson (University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee), Flint Espil (University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee), Doug Woods (Texas A&M University)
Abstract: Chronic tic disorders (CTDs) involve multiple motor and/or vocal tics that occur repeatedly and cause substantial distress and functional impairment. Differential reinforcement of other behavior (DRO) schedules of reinforcement have been shown to decrease tics by ~80% in youth with CTDs; however, it is believed that a more robust reduction may enhance clinical change following withdrawal of the reinforcement contingency. Given that previously-used procedures (i.e., standard DRO schedules with token reinforcement) have not commonly yielded such reductions, we evaluated a novel, progressive-amount DRO schedule, based on its ability to facilitate sustained abstinence from functionally-similar target behaviors (i.e., substance use). Five youth with CTDs were exposed to alternating periods of baseline, traditional/fixed-amount DRO (DRO-F), and progressive-amount DRO (DRO-P) within the “tic detector” paradigm. Social validity was assessed via self-report and forced-choice preference assessment. Both fixed and progressive DRO schedules produced decreases in tic rate and median inter-tic interval, but no systematic differences were seen between the two schedules on any dimension of tic occurrence. The DRO-F schedule was generally preferred to the DRO-P schedule, which did not appear to yield any incremental effects. Possibilities for procedural improvements and other future directions are discussed.
 
Inhibitory Learning as a Potential Mechanism of Change in Behavior Therapy for Tourette Syndrome
DAVID HOUGHTON (Texas A&M University), Matthew Capriotti (University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee), Lawrence Scahill (Emory University), Sabine Wilhelm (Massachusetts General Hospital), Alan Peterson (University of Texas Health Science Center at San Antonio), John Walkup (Weill Cornell Medical College), John Piacentini (University of California-Los Angeles School of Medicine), Doug Woods (Texas A&M University)
Abstract: Behavior therapy (BT) is an effective treatment for Tourette syndrome (TS), but the processes underlying treatment gains are poorly understood. BT might produce habituation of premonitory urges (PMUs); aversive somatic phenomena that precede tics. Alternatively, inhibitory learning, or the overwriting of maladaptive PMU-tic associations with newer ‘PMU toleration’ learning, might better explain tic reductions. The current study tested these models in a randomized controlled trial comparing BT to supportive psychotherapy for pediatric TS. Participants were 126 children/adolescents with tic disorders (Age Range: 9-17). A 2x3 (treatment x time) repeated measures ANOVA tested PMU strength over time, and showed no significant main effects or interaction. Additionally, a chi-square test of independence comparing PMU habituation to treatment response was non-significant. Comparatively, in testing the inhibitory learning model, we computed z-score discrepancy indices between premonitory urges and tics at both baseline and post-treatment. Results showed that urge-tic discrepancies were greater at post-treatment than baseline, and these discrepancies were greater in BT than controls. Changes in urge-tic discrepancy between baseline and post-treatment predicted treatment response and partially mediated the relationship between treatment and outcome. Implications for the processes of change in BT as well as the neurobiology of TS will be discussed.
 
 
Symposium #341
CE Offered: BACB
Clinical Behavior Analysis and Disordered Gambling
Monday, May 25, 2015
11:00 AM–11:50 AM
Texas Ballroom Salon B (Grand Hyatt)
Area: CBM/EAB; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Alyssa N. Wilson (Saint Louis University)
CE Instructor: Alyssa N. Wilson, Ph.D.
Abstract:

This symposium will provide empirical evidence on best practices when delivering clinical behavior analytic services to disordered gamblers. Current behavior analytic gambling literature shows an overall increase in publication trends, with minimal evidence on behavioral treatment. Behavior therapies including Cognitive-Behavior Therapy and Acceptance and Commitment Therapy have been shown to be effective forms of therapy for reducing gambling behaviors. While there is minimal research to date on behavioral therapies for disordered gambling, little is known about the success and or failures of treatment goals supporting abstinence or harm-reduction treatment models. For instance, Acceptance and Commitment Therapy has been shown to be an effective treatment for reducing gambling behaviors, yet little research has been conducted on using brief or automated versions of treatment. Similarly, little treatment research has identified mediating variables that impact gambling behaviors such as inter-trial interval or self-report ratings on happiness indexes. Further, limited knowledge exists on the clinical utility of preference and reinforcer assessment on gambling behaviors. Therefore, this symposium will cover these critical clinical topics and provide emerging evidence on successful treatment assessment and outcomes when providing behavioral interventions for disordered gamblers.

Keyword(s): clinical applications, gambling
 
Preference and Reinforcer Assessments of Disordered Gamblers' Slot Machine Play
AMY K. LOUKUS (Oregon Institute of Technology), Mark R. Dixon (Southern Illinois University)
Abstract: The current experiments sought to investigate variables related to slot selection and, consequently the effects of machine on participant responding. Participant preference for three- and five-reel Vegas-style electronic slot machines was evaluated according to (a) a Likert rating of subjective preference, (b) a forced ranking preferred machines, (c) anecdotal report of preference, and (d) a paired-stimulus preference assessment. Also examined were the differences in rate of play/latency between spins, and rate of task completion, when participants gambled on their most- and least-preferred machines, or worked to gain access to the machines (respectively). The degree of influence the machine used during experimentation holds on gambling behavior, and Implications for the treatment of disordered slot gambling will be discussed.
 
Behavior Analytic Treatment for Disordered Gambling: A Review of the Literature
DANIEL TOURIGNY (Saint Louis University), Alyssa N. Wilson (Saint Louis University)
Abstract: The current study systematically examined the behavioral literature on treatment options for gambling. An electronic search in PsychINFO was conducted to identify potential articles published on behavioral treatments for gambling. Combinations of the search term gamble* and treatment were conducted. Of the articles identified, information was extracted using a coding instrument created a priori that included five sections as follows. First, participant demographic information was examined, including age, race/ethnicity, gender, and co-morbidity with other diagnoses. Second, gambling proclivity was identified by categorizing the type of assessment tool used, and categorized by problem or problem/disordered gamblers. Third, treatment provided to participants were categorized by type (e.g., Cognitive Behavior Therapy, Acceptance and Commitment Therapy, Exposure Based Therapy, etc.). Fourth, treatment type was categorized as either abstinence-based or harm-reduction based. Fifth, initial treatment goals were categorized as being determined by the participant or by the clinician. Of the 653 articles identified in behavior analytic journals, 110 articles were experimental while only 21 were treatment focused articles. Of the 21 articles assessing behavioral treatment, half (47%) examined Cognitive Behavior Therapy, while only 12 (57.1%) included follow-up data. Implications and possibilities for future directions will be discussed.
 
Brief Automated Acceptance and Commitment Therapy for Disordered Gamblers
Julie Smailys (Saint Louis University), SOPHIA HOWARD (Saint Louis University), Alyssa N. Wilson (Saint Louis University)
Abstract: Acceptance and Commitment Therapy (ACT) is an empirically based treatment option for a range of behaviors, including disordered gambling. To date, minimal research has been conducted using computer-based therapy, particularly with gambling clients. Therefore, the purpose of the current study was to assess the effectiveness of a brief, automated ACT intervention on gambling behaviors. Participants self-referred to complete brief treatment for their gambling use. Participants were asked to play on a slot machine before and after each treatment session, and were told to play for 10-15min or until the researcher told them to stop. During the slot machine activity, participants were asked to rate how each outcome made them feel on a 10 point Likert scale, ranging from sad (1) to neutral (5) to happy (10). Dependent measures included rate of play, risk, magnitude of bet size, and inter-trial intervals between spins. Following treatment, all participants rated losses disguised as wins to closer to neutral or sad, rather than closer to happy, while the majority of participants opted out of playing for the entire gambling duration towards the end of the intervention. Implications for clinical practice will be discussed.
 
 
Symposium #342
Determining Effective Treatment: Function-based Treatment in the Context of both Positively and Negatively Reinforced Problem Behavior.
Monday, May 25, 2015
11:00 AM–11:50 AM
214B (CC)
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Cara L. Phillips (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
Abstract: The field of Applied Behavior Analysis has emphasized function-based treatment of problem behavior for more than thirty years. Although targeting behavioral function improves the efficacy of treatment, there is still much work to be done in helping clinicians to identify which function-based treatment to use with individual clients and how to maximize the effectiveness of the treatments selected. This symposium consists of three investigations of positive- and negative-reinforcement based treatment for problem behavior. In the first study, the potential positive reinforcement effects of Response Blocking were examined in three individuals who exhibited severe problem behavior. In the second study, Differential Reinforcement of Other Behavior (DRO) and Noncontingent Reinforcement (NCR) were compared for the treatment of behavior maintained by social positive reinforcement. In the final study, the effects of manipulating the magnitude of a reinforcer available for problem and alternative behavior in the context of Differential Negative Reinforcement of Alternative Behavior (DNRA) were evaluated.
Keyword(s): DNRA, DRO, NCR, response blocking
 
Assessment of Response Blocking as a Positive Reinforcer in Children with Intellectual Disabilities
CARA L. PHILLIPS (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Jessica Garcia (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Jennifer R. Zarcone (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Aila K. Dommestrup (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Meghan Deshais (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
Abstract: Response blocking is often used to protect individuals who engage in severe self-injury and to protect others when aggression occurs. Unfortunately, blocking behavior can sometimes result in an increase in frequency or intensity of the blocked behavior which could indicate that blocking functioned as a reinforcer, or it could be indicative of emotional responding or an extinction burst. However, it may not be possible to withhold blocking for severe or intense problem behavior in order to identify the cause of the increase in responding. Therefore, the effects of response blocking on arbitrary responses were evaluated with 3 individuals diagnosed with Intellectual Disabilities to determine whether physical blocking might serve as a reinforcer. Sessions were divided into halves. The first instance of a naturally occuring arbitrary behavior (AB1) was physically blocked during the first half of the session. During the second half, the AB1 was placed on extinction and another arbitrary behavior (AB2) was physically blocked. Reallocation of responding from AB1 to AB2 could indicate a reinforcement effect. Results for 2 of the 3 participants indicate that response blocking may differentially reinforce behavior. Implications for treatments and crisis management will be discussed.
 
Comparison of Differential Reinforcement for Other Behavior (DRO) and Noncontingent Reinforcement (NCR) – Which is More Effective?
AILA K. DOMMESTRUP (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Jennifer R. Zarcone (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Louis P. Hagopian (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Crystal Thomas (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Jessica Garcia (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
Abstract: Only a few studies have directly compared the effects of differential reinforcement of other behavior (DRO) and non-contingent reinforcement (NCR) in reducing problem behavior exhibited by individuals with developmental disabilities (e.g., Vollmer, Iwata, Zarcone, Smith, & Mazaleski, 1993). While both procedures target a decrease of problem behavior without an alternative behavior being introduced, DRO procedures require a greater commitment from caregivers to implement consistently and with high integrity (Fischer, Iwata, & Mazaleski, 1997). As such, the current investigation sought to compare DRO and NCR in decreasing socially maintained problem behavior with two individuals with developmental disabilities. Not only did we evaluate if each procedure worked, but we also wanted to determine if problem behavior remained low when the schedule of reinforcement was thinned and which would be more easily implementable for caregivers. Results suggested that NCR is equally as effective as DRO in decreasing and maintaining low rates of aggressive and disruptive behavior, including across an increased time schedule (98-99% reduction in rates of problem behavior). Thus, given that NCR is easier for caregivers to implement, the long-term effects of the procedure was also evaluated and included as a component of each child’s treatment plan.
 
Negative Reinforcer Value Manipulations Without Extinction for Treating Escape-Maintained Problem Behavior
JACQUELINE MARRA (Western New England University), Eileen M. Roscoe (Western New England University), Daniel Fredericks (Western New England University)
Abstract: Differential negative reinforcement of alternative behavior (DNRA) without extinction may be clinically useful when practical or clinical restrictions preclude the use of extinction. DNRA without extinction, when the magnitude of escape for alternative behavior and problem behavior is equal, has not resulted in successful treatment outcomes. DNRA without extinction, when discrepant escape durations for compliance and problem behavior are used, has been found successful for one participant with escape-maintained problem behavior. This finding has not been replicated. Therefore, the potential utility of using discrepant reinforcer magnitudes in the context of DNRA without extinction remains unclear. The present study sought to replicate previous research by assessing the utility of using discrepant reinforcer magnitudes for the compliance and problem behavior of children with autism in the absence of extinction. Results indicated that a large discrepancy in reinforcer magnitude resulted in shifts in response allocation from problem behavior to compliance, whereas moderate and equal discrepancies did not. These findings suggest that magnitude manipulations enhance the effects of DNRA without extinction and that the procedure may be clinically useful when extinction is not practical.
 
 
Symposium #343
Teaching Vocational and Leisure Skills to Students With Autism and Other Developmental Disabilities Using iTechnology
Monday, May 25, 2015
11:00 AM–11:50 AM
214D (CC)
Area: DDA/EDC; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Christopher A. Tullis (Georgia State University)
Abstract:

Video prompting has been shown to be an effective instructional method to teach an array of tasks to individuals with intellectual and developmental disabilities. In this symposium, three studies will be presented on the use of mobile technologies to teach vocational and leisure skills to students with intellectual and developmental disabilities. One study compared the effects of self-directed video prompting versus in-vivo instruction when teaching vocational skills, the second study examined the effects of self-directed video prompting when teaching daily living skills, and the third study examined the use of video prompting in the acquisition of leisure skills. In addition to data, presenters will discuss implications and directions for future research in this area.

Keyword(s): Leisure Skills, Mobile Technology, Video Prompting, Vocational Skills
 
Comparing Skill Acquisition Using in Vivo Instruction Versus Video Prompting With Young Adults With Intellectual Disabilities.
Helen I. Cannella-Malone (The Ohio State University), ELISEO D. JIMENEZ (The Ohio State University), Jeffrey Michael Chan (Northern Illinois University)
Abstract: This study compared the effects of self-directed video prompting on an iPod Touch to in vivo training on teaching two postsecondary students with moderate intellectual disabilities vocational skills. In the first experiment, students were taught to collate and stuff a large envelope and to fold papers and stuff a business envelope. Students were initially taught to use the inPromptu mobile application on the iPod Touch. Using a multiple probe in combination with an alternating treatments design, the two tasks were counterbalanced across students, and they were instructed to use self-directed video prompting to teach themselves one skill, and an instructor used least-to-most prompting to teach them the second task. Data were collected on sessions to criterion and maintenance of the skills over time. Results demonstrated that both were effective in teaching the skill, but students were able to generalize their use of the technology to learn a new skill with no additional instruction.
 
Using Self-Directed Video Prompting for Skill Acquisition With Post-Secondary Students With Intellectual and Developmental Disabilities
ELISEO D. JIMENEZ (The Ohio State University), Helen I. Cannella-Malone (The Ohio State University)
Abstract: Among individuals with severe and profound disabilities, there is limited self- directed video prompting research containing generalization and maintenance measures. Using an iPod Touch as the prompting device, two individuals with intellectual and developmental disabilities were instructed to complete three tasks within a multiple probe design to assess the generalization of self-directed video prompting. Additionally, maintenance probes were conducted weekly starting one-week post mastery for two weeks. Results showed that both students acquired novel skills across all three tiers, indicating that individuals can acquire novel tasks with minimal prompting with self- directed video prompting.
 
Using Video Prompting to Teach Leisure Skills to Students With Severe and Profound Disabilities
Helen I. Cannella-Malone (The Ohio State University), OLIVIA MILLER (The Ohio State University), John Schaefer (The Ohio State University), Eliseo D. Jimenez (The Ohio State University), Edward Page (The Ohio State University), Linsey M. Sabielny (DePaul University)
Abstract: Participating in recreational activities is important to any individual’s quality of life, however, individuals with intellectual and developmental disabilities (IDD) still have enduring deficits in leisure skills because teaching leisure skills still remains a low priority in many schools. This study used video prompting to teach nine students with IDD leisure skills. Video prompting was effective with all but one student. Additionally, to explore the role of leisure skill acquisition in self-determination this study examined whether preference would shift once a leisure skill was learned. We found a dramatic shift in students’ preferences after they acquire new skills.
 
 
Invited Tutorial #344
CE Offered: PSY/BACB
It's a System!: The Essential Role of Behavior Analysis in Developmental Systems Theory
Monday, May 25, 2015
11:00 AM–11:50 AM
Texas Ballroom Salon A (Grand Hyatt)
Area: DEV; Domain: Theory
PSY/BACB CE Offered. CE Instructor: Susan M. Schneider, Ph.D.
Chair: Martha Pelaez (Florida International University)
Presenting Authors: : SUSAN M. SCHNEIDER (University of the Pacific)
Abstract:

Try to picture all that's known about biology and behavior: Genes, epigenetics, neurophysiology, operant and respondent principles, hormones, history ... and much more. Like other sciences, ours has always been part of a grand interdisciplinary effort, and the biobehavioral system is large and complex indeed. Developmental Systems Theory attempts to encompass everything, including the many complex, nonlinear interactions across all levels. The operant principles in which behavior analysts specialize have proved to be an important part of the empowering flexibility in the larger system. Our work on the benefits of enriched environments, the causes and treatments for autism spectrum disorders, the surprising flexibility of "instincts," and rehabilitation for victims of stroke and traumatic brain injury, to name a few examples, are all part of much larger efforts. In turn, system interactions are critical influences on our own work. Scientists always knew a better understanding of the full nature-and-nurture system would bring surprises, and this tutorial will show how the reality has exceeded expectations.

Instruction Level: Basic
Target Audience:

Psychologists, behavior analysts, practitioners, and graduate students.

Learning Objectives:
  1. To describe developmental systems theory.  At the conclusion of the event, participants will be able to explain how DST encompasses the entire biobehavioral system, including many complex, nonlinear interactions across all levels. 
  2. To show how operant and respondent behavior principles play a critical role in developmental systems theory.  At the conclusion of the event, participants will be able to describe how behavior principles influence and are influenced by the other system variables.
  3. To show the philosophical similarities between behavior analysis and developmental systems theory, including for example anti-reductionism.  At the conclusion of the event, participants will be able to describe these similarities.  Participants will also be able to describe the value to behavior analysts of understanding and contributing to developmental systems theory. 
 
SUSAN M. SCHNEIDER (University of the Pacific)
Dr. Susan M. Schneider’s involvement in behavior analysis goes back to high school when she read Beyond Freedom & Dignity and wrote B. F. Skinner, never dreaming that he would reply. They corresponded throughout her master’s degree in mechanical engineering at Brown University, her engineering career, and her stint in the Peace Corps. At that point, Schneider bowed to the inevitable and switched careers, obtaining her Ph.D. in developmental psychology in 1989 from the University of Kansas. A research pioneer, she was the first to apply the generalized matching law to sequences and to demonstrate operant generalization and matching in neonates. Her publications also cover the history and philosophy of behavior analysis and the neglected method of sequential analysis. Schneider has championed the inclusive “developmental systems” approach to nature nurture relations, culminating in reviews in the Journal of Experimental Analysis of Behavior and The Behavior Analyst, and she has served on the editorial boards for both of those journals. Her book, The Science of Consequences: How They Affect Genes, Change the Brain, and Impact Our World, summarizes the field of operant behavior, its larger nature-nurture context, and its full range of applications. It earned a mention in the journal Nature, was a selection of the Scientific American Book Club, and won the 2015 Society for the Advancement of Behavior Analysis Award for Effective Presentation of Behavior Analysis in the Mass Media.
Keyword(s): genetics, interdisciplinary work, nature-nurture, neurophysiology
 
 
Symposium #345
Response Class Hierarchies: Laboratory Models and Clinical Applications
Monday, May 25, 2015
11:00 AM–11:50 AM
007A (CC)
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
Chair: Tara M. Sheehan (Mailman Segal Institute)
Abstract:

A response class is a set of behaviors that each have different forms, but are maintained by the same or similar consequences (Catania, 2013). Although these behaviors have a common effect on the environment, the probability of their occurrence might not be equal (Baer, 1982). They commonly occur in a hierarchy that escalates from less severe to more severe. The implications of RCH's are vast, with behavioral interventions often relying on this information to dictate treatment. The current symposium includes three presentations that address various aspects of RCH's. First, Joelle Krantz, B.A., will discuss a basic laboratory model targeted to modify an existing response class, preventing problem behavior from persisting during lapses in treatment integrity. Adam Brewer, Ph.D., will then discuss an RCH computer simulation program, assessing response patterns during extinction, after functionally equivalence low-effort responses are no longer reinforced. Finally, Danielle Tarver, M.S., will discuss clinical applications and uses of RCH assessments in determining the functions of individuals behaviors and treatment.

Keyword(s): computer simulation, hierarchies, response class
 
Elimination of High Effort Responses from A Response Class Hierarchy
JOELLE KRANTZ (Nova Southeastern University), Tara M. Sheehan (Mailman Segal Institute), F. Charles Mace (Nova Southeastern University)
Abstract: A response class hierarchy (RCH) is a set of behaviors that have different forms, but are reinforced by similar consequences, with some responses being more probable than others. These behaviors commonly escalate from less severe to more severe. Interventions have been shown to reduce problem behaviors by removing reinforcement for the problem behavior and providing it contingent on an alternative response. However, it is a common phenomenon that after problem behaviors are eliminated, they are likely to re-emerge following lapses in treatment integrity. This suggests that the problem behavior continues to exist in the RCH, despite discontinuation of reinforcement. The present study used a laboratory model to separate the target response from the response class and prevent it from re-emerging during lapses in treatment integrity. Preschool-aged children participated in the study. Results showed preliminary support for the intervention, representing the first solution to date to prevent problem behaviors from persisting during lapses in treatment integrity.
 
A Computer Simulation: History Effects Following Extinction of a Novel Alternative Response within a Response Class
ADAM BREWER (Texas Tech University), David M. Richman (Texas Tech University), Layla Abby (Texas Tech University)
Abstract: A computer program was developed to simulate a response class hierarchy for three topographies that required increases effort to access monetary reinforcers. Undergraduates were instructed to click on different colors and distinct geometric shapes that required different number of mouse clicks to earn the same amount of money (i.e., one nickel was equivalent to a token earned after the schedule requirement was met). Using our computer simulation, we asked what response patterns are engendered during extinction after the functionally equivalent low-effort response is no longer reinforced? Two groups (n=4) of participants were exposed to different behavioral histories: (1) a response class that was placed on extinction before introducing a functionally equivalent low-effort response compared to (2) a response class that was not placed on extinction before introducing the functional alternative. First, we investigated potential predictors of the total number of responses during extinction of the functional alternative response. Mixed results were obtained related to primacy/recency, behavioral momentum, and partial reinforcement effects. A consistent group difference (see Figure) was that the group exposed to extinction prior to the introduction of a functional alternative exhibited shorter latencies to emit a novel response than the group that was not exposed to extinction.
 
Combined Functional Assessments in Assessment and Treatment of Behavior Disorders in Children with Autistic Disorders
DANIELLE TARVER (Nova Southeastern University), Joelle Krantz (Nova Southeastern University), Kristina Samour (Nova Southeastern University), Tara M. Sheehan (Mailman Segal Institute), Stephanie Trauschke (Nova Southeastern University), F. Charles Mace (Nova Southeastern University)
Abstract: Functional behavioral assessment is widely accepted as the Best Practices approach to diagnosing the environmental basis for behavior disorders in children with developmental disabilities, having amassed over 30 years of empirical studies to support its efficacy (Hanley, Iwata & McCord, 2003). However, no one approach to functional analysis is without limitations. We will present the results from five clinical cases utilizing a 3-stage model that includes a functional interview, a parent-run A-B functional analysis, and an A-B-C therapist-run response class hierarchy analysis. The adoption of this multiple component functional model capitalizes on the internal validity of traditional A-B-C methods and may strengthen external validity through the addition of the functional interview and parent-run A-B analysis.
 
 
Symposium #346
CE Offered: BACB
Mutli-SIG Symposium: Toward a Cohesive Understanding of Gambling
Monday, May 25, 2015
11:00 AM–11:50 AM
006D (CC)
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
Chair: Benjamin N. Witts (St. Cloud State University)
CE Instructor: Benjamin N. Witts, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Opportunities to gamble are increasing at very high rates. National and international casinos are developing faster than we have ever seen before. New laws in the U.S. are opening doors for online casinos and states have already adopted online lotteries. While the future of the gaming industry is clear, how behavior analysts will be involved is a bit murkier. A cohesive understanding of gambling, in its many forms, permits we behaviorists to be better prepared to address societal concerns regarding problem gambling as well as to permit students alternative routes to study behavior change. This Multi-SIG symposium combines talks on ethical, clinical, and experimental analysis concerns regarding the future of gambling research and treatment. An emphasis is placed on how multiple areas of interest come together to support these endeavors while striving to make an impact on the gaming industry and its resultant behavioral effects.

Keyword(s): Clinical, Ethics, Experimental Analysis, Gambling
 

Disordered Gambling Hierarchies

DARREN R CHRISTENSEN (University of Lethbridge), Alun Jackson (University of Melbourne), Nicki Dowling (Deakin University), Shane Thomas (Monash University), Robert Williams (University of Lethbridge)
Abstract:

Gambling criteria endorsement was investigated in two large archival gambling datasets. Dataset one contained responses from 4,349 clients attending specialist problem gambling services in Victoria Australia from 1997 to 2002. Dataset two contained responses from 12,521 people from 105 countries who responded to an on-line gambling survey advertised on a popular gambling website from June to December 2007. The exact same principal component clustering of criteria was found in both datasets using; the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders-IV Pathological Gambling Disorder criteria categorised using the National Opinion Research Centre Diagnostic Screen (NODS) for gambling problems taxonomy (dataset one), or the same number of the actual NODS criteria (dataset two). Further, both datasets reported similar hierarchical clustering of criteria (see Figure 1). These results suggest that the gambling experience categorised by the NODS taxonomy is multi-dimensional, and these experiences approximate the phenomenology of substance use disorders. Specifically, the gambling experience has three phases; initial use and development of a problem (Escape, Chasing, and Lying), problematic behaviour (Loss of Control, Preoccupation, Withdrawal, and Tolerance), and the experience of negative consequences for others (Bailout, Risked Relationships, and Illegal Acts). These results have important implications for disordered gambling assessment and treatment.

 
Understanding Gambling in Humans: The Role of the Experimental Analysis of Human Behavior
BENJAMIN N. WITTS (St. Cloud State University), Manish Vaidya (University of North Texas)
Abstract: The experimental analysis of human behavior is an essential element in coming to a cohesive understanding of gambling, and can work to extend and refine basic research with humans by setting the occasion for pursuing alternative approaches given methodological concerns. This talk will focus on how the experimental analysis of human behavior has led to new methodological preparations, what preparations will be of use in our understanding of human gambling, and how basic research can inform practice and vice versa. While much work in human gambling has centered on slot machine research, additional considerations will be given to how the experimental analysis of human behavior can inform research on complex human behavior such as social gaming (e.g., poker) and games of skill. Finally, an effort will be made to help new researchers design and implement important studies with little effort and cost, and how gambling research can be incorporated into master’s- and doctoral-level experimental analysis coursework.
 
Ethics and gambling research
Mack S. Costello (Western Michigan University), R. WAYNE FUQUA (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: Research into gambling behavior has increased over the past several years. Given high rates of gambling and the growing population of disordered gamblers, there is a need to develop research methods with improved validity. Gambling itself involves inherent risk, and a valid simulation of gambling would also have to involve said risk. The ethical issues involved in experimentally studying gambling behavior are numerous, with legal and methodological considerations, risk of exposing participants to gambling, as well as validity concerns. These issues will be discussed from a behavior analytic and ethical perspective. More specifically, gambling itself will be discussed as an ethical issue, and its impact on individuals and groups will be examined. The authors’ current understanding of gambling research will be discussed, especially in relation to a behavior analytic conception of ethics. The ethics of human and non-human models will be discussed, in addition to ethical concerns with respect to methods of observational, experimental, and treatment studies.
 
 
Symposium #347
Artistic Communication and Expression: A Behavior Analysis
Monday, May 25, 2015
11:00 AM–11:50 AM
007B (CC)
Area: EAB/TPC; Domain: Theory
Chair: Lanny Fields (Queens College, City University of New York)
Abstract:

This symposium was organized by the Behavior Analysis and the Arts Special Interest Group. It will include presentations by leading behavior analysts who are known for structural, functional, and/or theoretical analyses of equivalence classes and class formation, transfer and transformation of functions, and other behavior that emerges without direct conditioning (derived relations). Fields will present an analysis of artistic categories that focuses on generalized equivalence classes, function transfer among class members, and linked perceptual classes. For example, he will suggest how such classes allow people to recognize that the same artist produced different paintings and how paintings by different artists can be classified within the same style of artistic expression. De Rose will also focus on derived relations, framing a contribution of the Argentinian writer Jorge Luis Borges as a quasi-behavioral analysis of inter- and intra-individual variability in art appreciation. McIlvane will also consider behavioral variability in expression and appreciation of art. He will present a quasi-theoretic analysis that emphasizes variability of stimulus control and reinforcement relations across different consumers of artwork and also within the same individual at different times. All presenters will address how behavior analyses of the arts can be useful in educating students about both areas.

Keyword(s): artistic behavior
 

The Formation Of Artistic Categories: A Generalized Equivalence Class Analysis

ANTONIOS VARELAS (Hostos Community College, City University of New York), Lanny Fields (Queens College, City University of New York)
Abstract:

The paintings of a given artist and its related information will be viewed through the lens of generalized equivalence classes, function transfer among class members, and linked perceptual classes. The picture produced by a given artist (A), its’ name (B), the artist’s name (C), the era represented by the painting (D), and a defining characteristics of the painting (E) can be viewed as the members of the to-be-formed ABCDE equivalence class. Once formed, all of them will have become related to each other, and a student should then state the era, artist’s name, and characteristic of the painting, on request and without direct training, showing the transfer of informational function among the members of the art-based equivalence class. Also, new paintings by the same artist (A’) should be identified as such, along with paintings from the same era by different artists (X’), without direct training. Some of these outcomes will be illustrated with data obtained from undergraduates majoring in Psychology. Finally, sometimes two sets of works by the same artist are not recognized as being by that artist. The two can become related by forming a linked perceptual class with them. Art-based education by equivalence-based-instruction will be considered.

 
Derived Relations And Meaning In Responding To Art
JULIO C. DE ROSE (Universidade Federal de Sao Carlos)
Abstract: Argentinian writer Jorge Luis Borges may have come closer than anyone else to envisioning a radical behavioristic aesthetics. Borges emphasized the response to the work of art and, since the response varies with the individual history, he suggested that an artwork is not a unified entity. Don Quixote, for instance, is a completely different book for the reader of the XXI Century than it was for a reader of Cervantes’ time; it may be considered, indeed, a different book for each different reader and even for the same reader at each different time it is read. The same happens with music, paintings, theater, and so forth. Each person that comes into contact with a work of art has a different history with the work and its elements. An essential feature of this history is the network of derived relations involving the elements of the artwork, and the transfer or transformation of meaning and emotional functions across this network.
 
Artistic Expression and Appreciation: A Contingency Coherence Analysis
WILLIAM J. MCILVANE (University of Massachusetts Medical School), Joanne Kledaras (Praxis, Inc.)
Abstract: There is great variability across and even within individuals in how various forms of artwork are appreciated. For example, any one highly respected critic may consider a new film to be worthy of Oscar consideration whereas another equally respected critic may perceive the film as superficial and lacking in artistic merit. Years later, the former critic may have changed his/her opinion, viewing the film more negatively while the latter may have discovered merit that s/he missed initially. Our presentation will discuss sources of variability in artistic expression and appreciation in terms of basic stimulus control and reinforcement processes organized within a contingency coherence framework. This quasi-theoretical analysis accounts for inter- and intra-personal variability in terms of discriminability, primarily but not exclusively within stimulus dimensions. Further, we will suggest that analogies to variability in art appreciation may be useful for conveying key elements of contingency coherence theory to those who are unfamiliar with its tenets.
 
 
Symposium #348
Experimental Arrangements and Reinforcer Variables Affecting Resurgence
Monday, May 25, 2015
11:00 AM–11:50 AM
006C (CC)
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
Chair: Apral Foreman (West Virginia University)
Abstract: Resurgence is a replicable process that has been demonstrated across an array of different types and values of reinforcement schedules and species. However, the specific reinforcement-history parameters that produce (and re-produce) resurged responding remain unclear. The experiments in this symposium systematically examine reinforcement-schedule parameters (such as reinforcement rate and reinforcer magnitude) and experimental arrangements to determine situations in which responding resurges, and the extent to which that resurged responding is replicable across repeated exposures to extinction. Presenters will describe empirical data, and discuss implications of those data for theory and practice.
Keyword(s): behavioral momentum, extinction, human operant, resurgence
 
The Effects of Reinforcement Schedule Density for Alternative Behavior on Resurgence
KATHRYN M. KESTNER (Western Michigan University), Stephanie M. Peterson (Western Michigan University), Claire C. St. Peter (West Virginia University)
Abstract: Extinction-induced resurgence refers to recovery of a previously extinguished response when an alternative response no longer produces reinforcement. Resurgence has been demonstrated across organisms with a variety of behaviors and reinforcers. Applied interventions using differential reinforcement of alternative behaviors are common and resurgence of problem behavior has been observed following interruptions to the alternative reinforcement schedule. Research on applied interventions may benefit from translational studies informing the effects of controllable variables on resurgence. Research with nonhuman animals suggests that the schedule of reinforcement for the alternative response can increase or decrease the degree of resurgence obtained during a test. One parameter of reinforcement that seems to affect resurgence in the nonhuman literature is density of alternative reinforcement. The present study compared the effects of varying rich and lean density alternative reinforcement schedules on resurgence of responding in human participants on a computer task. Potential implications for designing applied interventions to reduce treatment relapse and suggestions for future areas of research will be discussed.
 
Relations between Resurgence and Reinforcer Parameters
LUCIE ROMANO (West Virginia University), Claire C. St. Peter (West Virginia University)
Abstract: Resurgence refers to the reoccurrence of a previously reinforced response when differential reinforcement for an alternative response is discontinued. Although resurgence is thought to be influenced by the “momentum” of the previously reinforced response, much remains unknown about how variables that influence behavioral momentum, such as reinforcer rate and magnitude, affect resurgence. In the current series of studies, we identified different ways in which response momentum could be affected (such as the reinforcement rate, reinforcer magnitude, and delay to reinforcement) and systematically manipulated those variables in a human-operant experimental arrangement. Results suggest that, in addition to behavioral momentum, resurgence may be strongly affected by the extent to which shifts between reinforcement and extinction are discriminable. We discuss the implications of these findings for the treatment of problem behavior.
 
Repeated Within-Session Resurgence
JAMES E. COOK (West Virginia University), Kennon Andy Lattal (West Virginia University)
Abstract: Resurgence is a replicable process, but the resurgence effect is transitory and decreases with repetition, making repeated within-subject examinations of resurgence difficult. Four pigeons underwent repeated within-session resurgence tests across daily sessions. Each session was divided into 3 phases. In Phase 1, responses on the left key (resurgence key) were reinforced on a fixed-interval (FI) or variable-interval (VI) 30-s schedule. In Phase 2, responses on the center key (alternative key) were reinforced on an equivalent schedule, and responses on the left key were placed on extinction. In Phase 3 (resurgence test), responses on both keys were placed on extinction. The right key (control key) never provided reinforcement. Phases changed when responding occurred exclusively on the key providing reinforcement for 5 consecutive intervals. In the resurgence test, responding occurred on the resurgence key, and little to no responding occurred on the control key. The resurgence effect occurred in 56-100% of 23-30 consecutive sessions but decreased in magnitude with repetition. This method may be useful to researchers interested in examining repeated relapse phenomena.
 
 
Symposium #349
CE Offered: BACB
Exploring Student Engagement through a Behavioral Analytic Framework
Monday, May 25, 2015
11:00 AM–11:50 AM
206AB (CC)
Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Sarah Wilson (University of Mississippi)
CE Instructor: Darlene E. Crone-Todd, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Engaging students at the college level is important, and implementing behavioral principles in various student settings to facilitate student engagement is underexplored. Engagement in courses by college students is linked to higher achievement in the classroom (Kuh, Cruce, Shoup, Kinzie, & Gonyea, 2008). Additionally, undergraduate psychology students who are involved in activities outside their classes report high academic related satisfaction and academic achievement (e.g. Astin, 1993; Strapp & Farr, 2010). This symposium will discuss the engagement of undergraduate students in academia both in and out of the classroom. The first presentation will discuss the relation between GPA and the time of the semester that students choose to participate in research studies, and explain the implications for experimental research. The second presentation will review methods that were used to bring behavioral analytic principles into the classroom. The final presentation will discuss the implications of using a contextual behavioral analysis of student persistence to address student engagement.

Keyword(s): behavior, education, engagement, student
 
Early bird gets the A: Is GPA related to when in the semester students participate in research studies and does it matter?
EMILY JACOBSON (University of Mississippi), Solomon Kurz (University of Mississippi), Emmie Hebert (University of Mississippi), Kate Kellum (University of Mississippi), Kelly G. Wilson (University of Mississippi)
Abstract: College undergraduates are an interesting population, in their own right, and they are a popular source for convenience sampling. In many studies, undergraduates receive course credit or other rewards for their participation. These contingencies are possible threats to internal validity. One related question is if undergraduates who participate in studies earlier in the semester are more sensitive to experimental contingencies than are those to participate later in the semester. Similarly, is the time in the semester undergraduates participate in studies related to their GPA? In this talk, we will present data from multiple studies aimed at determining if (a) time in the semester is related to experimental performance, if (b) time in the semester is related to GPA, and if (c) GPA is related to experimental performance. We will discuss whether time in the semester or GPA are useful to control for when interpreting results from studies using undergraduate participants.
 
Applying Behavior Analysis: Student Engagement Behavior
DARLENE E. CRONE-TODD (Salem State University)
Abstract: The use of behavior analytic principles and procedures can clearly be taught, but are just as important to use and model, in the classroom. This is especially the case when teaching students in behavior analysis, education, as well as in other relevant academic areas. In this talk, an overview of the relevant principles and procedures involved in behavior-analytic approaches to teaching will be described, including personalized systems of instruction and interteaching at the undergraduate level. These approaches will also be compared with traditional lecturing. Data will be provided showing the relationship between the methods, student behavior, and student performance (products of behavior). Student performance is measured by a model of hierarchical complexity, with interobserver agreement of 95%. In general, all methods show demonstrated effectiveness when carried out appropriately; however, the behavior-analytic approaches result in performance consistent with more complex thinking. Thus, both PSI and Interteaching are recommended forms of teaching.
 
Giving Students What They Came For: Applying a Contextual Behavioral Analysis to the Challenge of University Student Engagement
EMILY KENNISON SANDOZ (University of Louisiana at Lafayette), Ashlyne Mullen (University of Louisiana at Lafayette)
Abstract: Retention is a significant problem for universities across the United States. Most undergraduate students struggle with what’s been referred to as student persistence. In other words, they struggle to behave in a way that culminates in leaving college with a degree instead of in failure or withdrawal. Student engagement has been offered as a potential solution for facilitating student persistence. Students who attend and participate in class, who turn in assignments, who join clubs, and who otherwise exhibit university-relevant behaviors seem to be more likely to persist. It is unclear, however, how to change the university context in such a way that it facilitates such behaviors. Efforts to mandate interpersonal involvement and to reinforce academic behavior have been met with some success. Yet, retention levels for public universities hover around 30-60%. This paper will explore what contextual behavioral analysis of student persistence might offer to the problem of student engagement. Several examples of interventions based on an integration of acceptance and commitment training into existing student supports will be described.
 
 
Invited Paper Session #350
CE Offered: BACB

The Nurture Effect

Monday, May 25, 2015
11:00 AM–11:50 AM
Lila Cockrell Theatre (CC)
Domain: Theory
CE Instructor: Anthony Biglan, Ph.D.
Chair: Ramona Houmanfar (University of Nevada, Reno)
ANTHONY BIGLAN (Oregon Research Institute)
Anthony Biglan, Ph.D., is a senior scientist at the Oregon Research Institute and a leading figure in the development of prevention science. His research during the past 30 years has helped to identify effective family, school, and community interventions to prevent the most common and costly problems of childhood and adolescence. He is a leader in efforts to use prevention science to build more nurturing families, schools, and communities, throughout the world. Dr. Biglan is a former president of the Society for Prevention Research. In recent years, his work has shifted to comprehensive interventions with the potential to prevent the entire range of child and adolescent problems. He was a member of the Institute of Medicine Committee on Prevention, which released its report in 2009 documenting numerous evidence-based preventive interventions that can prevent multiple problems. His recent review of preventive interventions concluded that diverse psychological, behavioral, and health problems can be prevented through the promotion of nurturing families, schools, and communities. Dr. Biglan's book, The Nurture Effect: How the Science of Human Behavior Can Improve Our Lives and Our World (New Harbinger Publications) is a union of his experience and knowledge and experimental evidence stressing the importance of nurturing in raising happy children who become thriving and successful as adults. The book will be available in spring of 2015.
Abstract:

Ensuring that the behavioral sciences produce the improvements in human well-being that we all hope for requires that many more people understand and appreciate the knowledge about human behavior and society that have accumulated in the past 50 years. In The Nurture Effect, Dr. Anthony Biglan has tried to communicate to a broad audience of scientists and nonscientists how the behavioral sciences have accumulated programs, policies, and practices that can have great benefit in improving well-being. Taking an evolutionary approach, he will describe the development during the past 50 or so years of our understanding of operant learning and symbolic processes, as well as the principles involved in the recent evolution of capitalism. In the first section of the book, he describes the contextual principles that are, in his view, the foundation for the progress that has been made. In the second section, he describes family, school, peer, and clinical interventions that have solid evidence of benefit in the prevention and treatment of virtually all of the most common and costly problems of human behavior. But our progress in improving well-being will be limited if we fail to change the trajectory of modern capitalism so that its practices benefit everyone. In the third section, he describes the current problems with our system in terms of the contexts that have selected harmful business practices and economic policies. In the fourth section, he describes what can be done to ignite a movement that influences our societies to adopt the programs, policies, and practices that make all of our environments more nurturing.

Keyword(s): capitalism, evolution, nurture
 
 
Symposium #351
CE Offered: BACB
Evidence-based Practice: How Applied Behavior Analysis Found Its Heart and Ethics
Monday, May 25, 2015
11:00 AM–11:50 AM
213AB (CC)
Area: PRA/TPC; Domain: Theory
Chair: Trina Spencer (Northern Arizona University)
Discussant: Keith D. Allen (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Medical Center)
CE Instructor: Trina Spencer, Ph.D.
Abstract: Within an Evidence-based Practice (EBP) framework, client values, preferences, and context complement best available evidence and clinical expertise to help inform clinical decisions. Although they traditionally have been essential variables for ensuring socially valid behavior analytic services, client values, preferences, and context deserve more explicit attention in behavior analytic training and journals. As professional and ethical challenges proliferate, behavior analysts need guidance about how to judge the relevance of variables, balance conflicting perspectives, and be guided by empirical evidence while practicing within the boundaries of responsible conduct. In this symposium, the presenters will explore these boundaries through an ethical lens and offer practical recommendations for using an EBP decision-making framework when training graduate students in ABA and to guide behavior analysts’ actions when confronted with ethical challenges. Recommendations will also include ways in which to integrate client values, preferences, and context in the decision making process so that benefits to clients can be maximized and collaborative working relationships can be maintained.
Keyword(s): Client Values, Contextual Fit, Ethics, Evidence-based Practice
 
Client Values, Preferences, and Context: More Than Just a Question on the BCBA Exam
SUSAN WILCZYNSKI (Ball State University)
Abstract: Graduate students who study Applied Behavior Analysis are very familiar with the BACB 4th edition task list and can tell you that resources constraint should influence treatment recommendations. Is this all they should know about client values, preferences, and context? In 2014, Slocum and colleagues defined the evidence-based practice of applied behavior analysis as including not only the best available evidence, but also clinical expertise and the values and preferences of clients. This presentation outlines the importance of client values, preferences, and contextual fit. Client values and preferences extend beyond the parameters of a preference assessment because it can influence treatment integrity and acceptability. Contextual fit can impact not only the adoption of treatments but also the long-term sustainability of treatment implementation. Client values, preference, and context have direct bearing on the quality of services we offer and the degree to which we will meet our goal of producing socially meaningful improvements in the lives of those we serve. This presentation will show practitioners how to use a decision-making framework to better consider client values, preferences, and context. It will also identify variables supervisors must consider when mentoring the next generation of behavior analysts.
 
Social Validity, Cultural Reciprocity, and Ethics: Collaboration with Clients and Professionals
TRINA SPENCER (Northern Arizona University)
Abstract: Integrating client values, preferences, and context is a critical component of evidence-based behavior analytic practice. Without considering variables such as client or family’s goals, capacity, and preference for recommendations, social validity may suffer. If the relevant characteristics and preferences of all the individuals involved are not respectfully considered in the decision-making process, critical outcomes may be compromised and ethical challenges may arise. An approach, called posture of cultural reciprocity combined with an evidence-based practice (EBP) framework, offers strategies to promote collaboration among behavior analysts, clients, families and professionals when perspectives and values conflict. The steps of cultural reciprocity can help professionals critically examine their own biases and assumptions while sincerely seeking understanding of others’ perspective and values. Through a conceptual analysis of the role of client values and preferences, the presenter will offer recommendations for navigating collaborations and ethnical challenges using the steps of cultural reciprocity embedded in an EBP decision making process.
 
 
Panel #352
PDS EVENT: Sampling Career Paths in ABA ? A Few Perspectives
Monday, May 25, 2015
11:00 AM–11:50 AM
214A (CC)
Area: PRA/AUT; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Denise Dieter (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
VIVIAN IBANEZ (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
ALISON KOZLOWSKI (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
THERESE MALONEY (Bridgewater-Raynham Regional School Districgt)
Abstract:

A variety of career paths exist for individuals with conferred master?s or doctoral degrees in Applied Behavior Analysis (ABA) and related disciplines who currently possess or are in pursuit of Board Certified Behavior Analyst (BCBA) certification. These paths can lead to practicing in a variety of settings, including clinical environments (e.g. hospitals, outpatient clinics), schools, daycares, consulting firms, and homes. Additionally, although children with developmental and intellectual disabilities are generally the focus of such services, this skill set can be applied to a variety of populations to increase appropriate behavior and decrease inappropriate behavior, teach new skills, and improve an individual?s quality of life. Career paths ranging from practicing in a clinical setting with children with pediatric feeding disorders, pursing a Ph.D. degree in ABA, and practicing in a school setting will be discussed by the panelists. Following this, opportunities to ask questions and further discuss career options will be provided.

Keyword(s): ABA Careers, Career Paths
 
 
Symposium #353
CE Offered: BACB
21st Century Perspectives on Teaching Behavior Analysis in Introductory Psychology
Monday, May 25, 2015
11:00 AM–11:50 AM
205 (CC)
Area: TBA/EDC; Domain: Theory
Chair: Stephanie P. da Silva (Columbus State University)
Discussant: Philip N. Hineline (Temple University - Emeritus)
CE Instructor: Henry D. Schlinger, Ph.D.
Abstract:

The purpose of this symposium is to present different perspectives on teaching behavior analysis in introductory psychology classes. The two papers will discuss ways to approach the teaching of behavior analysis to introductory psychology students, including elucidating certain advances in behavior analysis that may not be well known and that may be pique students' interest, and ways to teach critical thinking skills (i.e., a verbal repertoire) that will lead students more naturally to an appreciation of, if not affinity for, behavior analysis.

 
Operant Psychology for Introductory Psychology: Teaching Behavior Analysis in the Post-Skinner Era
EDWARD K. MORRIS (The University of Kansas), Derek D. Reed (The University of Kansas)
Abstract: In the United States and Canada, introductory psychology courses enroll nearly two million students a year, second only to English composition. They are, thus, unsurpassed in their potential to influence our understanding of human behavior. Achieving this potential, though, is a challenge. Psychology encompasses contrasting philosophies, conflicting systems, and divergent sciences. In addition, its literature is expanding so quickly that staying current with it is another challenge. This paper amends and updates advances in behavior analysis to assist instructors of introductory psychology courses and authors of introductory psychology textbooks stay current with the field, especially advances that are likely to pique student interest (e.g., behavior analysis in space, private events). We begin by reviewing the introductory psychology textbook coverage of operant psychology and place operant psychology in the context of behavior analysis more broadly. Following that, we address advances in three eras that have yet to inform the teaching of introductory psychology: Skinner’s era (1930-1960), the post-Skinner era in his time (1960-1990), and the post-Skinner era since his passing (1990-present). In each era, we address topics in basic and applied research and conceptual foundations. We conclude by relating some behavior-analytic contributions to teaching introductory psychology.
 
Teaching a Behavioral Approach in an Introductory Psychology Class Without Explicitly Doing So
HENRY D. SCHLINGER (California State University, LA)
Abstract: Behavior analysts who teach introductory psychology courses may be frustrated by having to teach standard psychological approaches to such topics as sensation and perception, consciousness, memory, cognition and language, intelligence, motivation and emotion, and social psychology. In this talk, I describe the approach I take in my introductory psychology class in which I teach students a set of verbal skills that help them not only think critically about evaluating evidence for claims about behavior, which many introductory texts do, but about psychology itself. For example, I teach students about observation as the hallmark of science, and about parsimonious (and circular) explanations, and then have them apply those concepts to standard topics in psychology. The result, I hope, is that without necessarily teaching about behavior analysis per se, except for the chapter on learning, students will naturally find it a more attractive alternative than nominal psychology.
 
 
Panel #354
PDS EVENT: An Introduction to Mathematical Principles of Reinforcement
Monday, May 25, 2015
11:00 AM–11:50 AM
007C (CC)
Area: TPC/EAB; Domain: Theory
Chair: Jonathan E. Friedel (Utah State University)
PETER R. KILLEEN (Arizona State University)
MARK P. REILLY (Central Michigan University)
BLAKE A. HUTSELL (Auburn University)
Abstract:

Mathematical principles of reinforcement is theory with three main tenets: motivation, association, and constraint (Killeen & Sitomer, 2004). Reinforcers create a heightened state of arousal in which organisms are more likely to emit behaviors, those behaviors that precede and predict reinforcers are coupled to the reinforcers and more likely to occur in the future, and the overall limit on behavioral output constrains the amount of aroused behavior and previously coupled behavior. Mathematical principles of reinforcement provides an account of behavior that is different than the typical strengthening or value based accounts of reinforcement. This panel will discuss the basics of mathematical principles of reinforcement, research implications of the theory, and where to take the theory next.

Keyword(s): MPR, PDS
 
 
Symposium #355
Trends in Linguistics and Some Behavior-Analytic Answers
Monday, May 25, 2015
11:00 AM–11:50 AM
216AB (CC)
Area: VBC/TPC; Domain: Theory
Chair: Robert Dlouhy (Western Michigan University)
Discussant: Ted Schoneberger (Kohala Educational Services, Waikoloa, Hawaii)
Abstract: The two papers in this symposium will discuss trends in linguistics and how analyses of verbal behavior can inform some of the issues these trends present. The first paper will describe how, over the last twenty years, some linguists have moved away from formal descriptions of language based on innate universals that Noam Chomsky attempted to develop. Instead of inferring rules, linguists are now studying how utterances of various types are dependent on the context in which they occur. It will be argued here that this trend is making the explanations and goals of these linguists more compatible with those of behavior analysts. The second paper presents an example of how the principles of verbal behavior can be used to explain the complex syntactic phenomenon called recursion. Recursion is an autoclitic of order (i.e., a phrase or clause) of a particular type that contains an autoclitic of order of the same type. Skinner’s principles can easily account for recursiveness, as a number of examples from several languages will show. Since verbal behavior of this sort is operant behavior, it must be under control of environmental variables, the analysis of which can be similar to those of linguists who are seeking alternatives to the formal analyses of Chomsky.
Keyword(s): Linguistics, Ordering Autoclitics, Recursion
 

Natural Languages After Chomsky

JOHN H. MABRY (Retired)
Abstract:

Following Peters (1983) and others observations of childrens emerging speech patterns, prefabricated constructions have supplanted the words and morphemes approach of the Chomsky-era, and earlier views. This effort, as addressed by Tomasello (2003), emphasizes a usage-based view which is dependent on the effect of adult audience (as communicative intention) on the childs emerging speech, and is clearly distinct from paradigmatic analyses (relying on verb-noun distinctions, etc.) of formal grammatical and syntactic analysis. Current and recent views in this field have also advanced the notion of discriminative functions as cues, replacing the 'rules' of grammar and syntax. While requiring frequent translation from their child centered focus, the major empirical findings are easily related to the radical behavioral view of Skinners Verbal Behavior. Another relevant post-Chomsky literature has reemphasized language diversity among the thousands of literate and preliterate speech communities. The idiomatic nature of speech (and gestures) has been the subject of several books by linguists such as McWhorter (2014) and Deutscher (2010) which discard the rule-governed and formal systems of fifty years ago. These more current views seem to share many points with the functional analysis proposed by Skinner in 1957 and later works.

 
Recursion in Autoclitics of Order
ROBERT DLOUHY (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: Autoclitics of order, briefly described by Skinner in Chapter 13 of Verbal Behavior, are operants that sequence verbal responses. The order of the constituent responses is itself a discriminative stimulus for relations between them. Although Skinner did not expound on autoclitics of order, it can be shown that these operants can account for the classes of phrases in the verbal repertoires of a verbal community. A particular autoclitic of order is an operant that accounts for a particular type of phrase in a language. The responses that are ordered are not necessarily simple words, they may be products of other sequencing operants. Because of this, phrases often contain other phrases. Sometimes phrases contain phrases of the same type, a situation known as recursion. Using examples from several languages, this paper will demonstrate that the autoclitic of order can easily account for the complexity of phrases, including recursion. Significantly, this analysis can account for intraverbal dependencies which Chomsky claimed behavioral theory could not explain.
 
 
Poster Session #356
EAB Monday Noon
Monday, May 25, 2015
12:00 PM–2:00 PM
Exhibit Hall C (CC)
1. Metacontingencies in the Prisoner's Dilemma Game: a Factorial Design
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
CLARISSA NOGUEIRA (Faculdade Leao Sampaio), Dyego De Carvalh Costa (Universidade de Brasilia; Universidade Estadual d), Laercia Abreu Vasconcelos (Universidade de Brasilia)
Abstract: The use of the concept metacontingency in experimental research was started in 2004 by Vichi, using an experimental model called The Matrix Model. Over the past 10 years, other experimental models were used in these studies, highlighting the model that uses the Meta2 software and the Prisoner's Dilemma Game with the addition of a cultural consequence. This study uses the latter model in a 2x2x2 factorial design to investigate the effect of the following variables and their interactions: communication (with or without communication), type of choice (sequential or simultaneous) and inequity of reinforcements (relative or absolute inequity) . 72 participantes were divided in 24 groups of 3. Each group was exposed to only a specific combination of IVs, for a session with an average duration of 60 minutes. The experimental design was ABA. In each trial each participant had to choose between the alternatives X or Y. The amount of points received by each participant depended on the combination of the choices of the three participants according to the equations: Y = n x 4 / X + Y = 7, where n is the number of participants chosing Y. In Condition B, in addition to individual points, a metacontingency was introduced in which 60 points were released contingent on the production of the combination YXX. The stability criterion used in Condition B was the production of the target combination in 80% of the last 10 trials or a maximum of 400 trials. The two presentations of Condition A lasted for 50 trials each. The results suggest the variable Absolute Inequity as a great hindrance for the selection of the target combinaction. The variable No Communication did not prevent the selection of the combination, however, it is difficult to maintain the production of the combination by the group after the completion of the stability criterion. The interaction between at least two of the following variables facilitated the acquisition of target combination: With Communication, Sequential Choices and Relative Iniquity.
 
2. The effect of instruction´s format over the pattern in a laboratory microculture
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
ANDRÉ SACONATTO (Pontifícia Universidade Católica de São Paulo), Henrique Angelo (Pontifícia Universidade Católica de São Paulo), Thomas Anatol Da Rocha Woelz (Pontifícia Universidade Católica de São Paulo), Artur Nogueira (Pontifícia Universidade Católica de São Paulo), Jade Araújo (Pontifícia Universidade Católica de São Paulo), Candido Pessoa (Nucleo Paradigma), Maria Amalia Andery (Pontifícia Universidade Católica de São Paulo)
Abstract: Experiments have shown the selection of patterns of interlocking behavioral contingencies (IBCs) through generations of participants. The maintenance of specific forms of interlocked contingencies rather than many other possible forms was observed in these studies and some authors explained it by the more or less complete verbal description of contingency. This study manipulated aspects related to the description of experimental contingencies, adding an irrelevant aspect in the description or the criteria to produce the consequence designed to select the interlocked behavioral contingencies. Therefore, the objective was to verify the effects of the instructions’ format given to participants on the pattern of interlocked behavioral contingencies. The experiment consisted in two phases using an ABA design in which the criteria for the production of the selecting consequences were inverted in relation to the previous phase. The results suggests that the described pattern was maintained through some generations, modifying with the transmission to later generations. When the described pattern stopped being produced, a variation was observed through some cycles until a new pattern was established and maintained. The verbal description may have diverse implications to the maintenance of a culture. Among other implications, the description can play a role in the determination of the way contingencies interlock and may restrain the cultural variability when the environmental conditions have been modified.
 
3. Variables and Social Mechanisms of Superstitious Behavior
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
MARCELO FROTA BENVENUTI (USP), Thais F N de Toledo (Universidade Federal de Mato Grosso), Saulo Missiaggia Velasco (Universidade de Sao Paulo)
Abstract: The approach of illusion of control that emphasizes the role of coincidences between behavior and environment changes is an important step to provide a basic background to understand the social aspect of superstitious behavior. In the present paper, we identify the transmission of superstitious behavior as a key question to understand cultural practices whose transmission could be problematic to cultural evolution, especially if we can observe a cumulative effect across generation when the practice evolves. Thirty eight participants performed a task on a computer. They were assigned to one of five groups that used one common task. The experimental task involved a colored rectangle in the center portion of a monitor screen. Participants could click in this colored rectangle using the mouse. When the rectangle was in some color, participants received 10 points independent of their behavior on an average of six or eight seconds. When the color of the rectangle was changed, no points were presented. When the color of the rectangle changed from a color to another, there was a 5 s period during which the rectangle disappeared. In the first group, composed of ten participants, participants worked alone on the task in a condition named Individual Exposition. In the other four groups, participants were exposed to the experimental task according to a chain, with substitution of participants. There always one participant in the task and one observer. Once a participant completes the task, the observer starts to work on it and another participant is called to observe. Superstitious responding was transmitted due to social mechanisms in chain conditions. In Individual Exposition, superstitious responding did not occur or are transient. This suggested that social learning can facilitate the acquisition and maintenance of superstitious behavior.
 
4. Using Emailed Prompts and Feedback to Reduce Electricity Consumption
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
JAMES W. DILLER (Eastern Connecticut State University), Niti Pandey (Eastern Connecticut State University), Brett Gelino (Eastern Connecticut State University), Robert Barry (Eastern Connecticut State University)
Abstract: Reduced energy consumption is one way in which organizations try to become environmentally sustainable. Long-term environmental sustainability can be best achieved by changing targeted consumption/conservation behaviors. Behavior analysts are experts at changing behavior using antecedents and consequence-based manipulations. These techniques can be used at the organizational level to influence resource consumption. Email is a primary method of communication within most organizations. In a multiple-baseline design, we explored the use of weekly emailed prompts and feedback encouraging reduced energy consumption (as measured by an energy dashboard) in two different buildings on our campus. Overall, prompting and feedback did not seem to influence consumption behavior when viewed on a weekly basis. However, there were small decreases in consumption in the hours immediately after messages were sent. This finding raises issues about the effectiveness of current communication strategies aimed at changing consumption.
 
5. The Marriage Game: Do Financial Constraints Affect Marriage Couples-Revised
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
FRANK D. BUONO (Southern Illinois University), Sydney Perate (Southern Illinois University), Matthew E Sprong (University of Montana-Billings)
Abstract: The current study examined 20 married couples, 40 total participants, across different age groups, and marriage lengths to assess how delay discounting trends of hypothetical amounts of money as a couple and individually differs. Current findings showed that as marriage length increases the less impulsive the couple is. However, no statistical significance was found between the discounting rates of males and females when compared to combined rates of discounting. Implications of how the current research impacts the field of marriage and divorce will be addressed.
 
6. The Effects of Rules Describing Contingencies of University Students' Behaviors in the Insolvable Task on Their Prediction About Their Behaviors in the Subsequent Solvable One
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
TATSUHIRO NAKAMURA (Tokiwa University), Tetsumi Moriyama (Tokiwa University)
Abstract: Organisms exposed to inescapable severe aversive stimuli show difficulty in learning of subsequent negative reinforcement contingency. This phenomenon has been called learned helplessness. In the present study, twenty one university female students engaged in insolvable arithmetic problems and then engaged in solvable ones. We investigated whether the participants showed some learned helplessness in the latter task. Further, we investigated the effects of three rules describing the relation between solubility of arithmetic problems and the participants' solving behaviors on the learned helplessness. These rules were presented to each participant after the first task. The rule 1 described that arithmetic problems in the first task were insolvable ones. The rule 2 described that the participants solving behaviors in the first task were inadequate. The rule 3 described irrelevant things to the content of this experiment. The dependent variables were the number of correct answers predicted by each student for each task. The participants were divided into three groups, the rule 1, the rule 2, and the rule 3 groups. They predicted the number of correct answers in each task prior to the task. After the first task, one of three rules was presented to each participant depending on her group. We found that all students predicted less correct answers for the second task than for the first task after they experienced the insolvable problems. However, the participants received the rule 1 predicted more correct answers for the second task than those of the participants in the other two groups. From these results we conclude that our participants showed learned helplessness and that the helplessness was alleviated not by the rule describing behavioral problem of the participants but by the rule describing the problem of discriminative stimulus.
 
7. Personality as Behavior: An Exploration of a Behavioral Measure of Implicit Self-Perception
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
ANDREA DAVIDSON (Southern Illinois University), Sam Kramer (Southern Illinois University), Kaleb Kinder (Southern Illinois University), Chad Drake (Southern Illinois University)
Abstract: The Implicit Relational Assessment Procedure (IRAP; Barnes-Holmes, et al., 2006) is a relatively new measure of cognitive repertoires developed from a body of behavior analytic research. Similar to the more widely-known Implicit Associations Test, the IRAP may provide some advantages for implicit cognition research, as it may be more specific and sensitive to cognitive repertoires. The current study used the IRAP to measure repertoires that are commonly regarded in terms that are discordant with behavioral sensibilities. Personality is typically measured via self-report and not regarded in contextual or situational terms; thus, the purpose of this study was to determine if the IRAP detects behavioral biases consistent with self-reported estimations of personality traits. Participants from a Midwestern university completed self-report personality measures and two IRAPs. One IRAP assessed repertoires reflecting neuroticism, while the other assessed extraversion/introversion. The data suggest some degree of convergence, but only for particular sub-scores provided by the IRAP. These effects may have implications for the nature of "personality" and the situational variables that may influence it.
 
8. Implicit Personality: A Pilot Study on the Stability of Cognitive Repertoires
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
DARMEZ NELSON (Southern Illinois University), Chelsea Vanderwoude (Southern Illinois University), Chad Drake (Southern Illinois University)
Abstract: Outside of behavior analysis, personality is commonly regarded as a fundamental topic of psychology. The defining features of this construct bear a number of difficulties for behavior analysts, especially the a-contextual nature of the very idea of personality. Furthermore, measures of personality are typically self-report questionnaires that do not directly assess the actual behavior of interest. Perhaps a behavioral measure configured to assess cognitive content reflecting particular personality traits might provide a basis for extending behavior analysis into relatively unexplored yet popular areas of psychological research. A pilot study was conducted with the Implicit Relational Assessment Procedure (IRAP; Barnes-Holmes, Hayden, Barnes-Holmes, & Stewart, 2008) populated with stimuli designed to assess introverted/extroverted perceptions of self. Three college students volunteered to engage the IRAP approximately once a week for six weeks. Four indicators of cognitive bias were charted from each IRAP administration across the six-week period of data collection. Results reveal a mixture of stable and unstable repertoires. The pattern of these findings suggests the IRAP may offer a viable means of measuring self-relevant verbal repertoires. This study may provide a foundation for a program of further behavior analytic personality research.
 
9. Assessing the Stability of Social Cognition: An Ideographic IRAP Study
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
KATHERINE COOPER (Southern Illinois University), Anke Lehnert (Southern Illinois University), Chad Drake (Southern Illinois University)
Abstract: Measures of implicit cognition commonly assess social attitudes using a nomothetic approach to stimulus selection. While this approach has generated many empirical fruits, it typically is done in respect to group differences, with little focus on using the measure to assess an individual’s behavior over time. Furthermore, the reliability psychometrics of implicit measures often suggest that using them for individual assessment may not be advisable. Perhaps an ideographic approach to assessing implicit cognition may provide a more psychometrically sound measure. The current study involved three college students who engage the Implicit Relational Assessment Procedure (IRAP; Barnes-Holmes, et al., 2006) on three separate occasions over a 2-week period. For each occasion, the participant completed an IRAP, engaged in unrelated tasks for approximately 15 minutes, and completed the same IRAP again. The IRAP contained the name of a positively-regarded person and the name of a negatively-regarded person, each personally known by the participant. The results show a mix of reliable and unreliable relational repertoires over the duration of the study. Some patterns correspond to within- and between-session intervals. The data overall provide a basis for additional studies with this ideographic approach to IRAP stimulus configuration.
 
10. Varying Near Miss, Loss, and Win Presentations alter Participants’ Predictive Patterns of Upcoming Wins
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
KAITLEN DAHLBERG (St. Cloud State University), Benjamin N. Witts (St. Cloud State University)
Abstract: The near miss event in slot machine gambling can be conceptualized as matching almost all required symbols in a particular pattern necessary to contact a winning outcome. In the standard three-reel slot machine, this means having two of three symbols match on the payline, with the third symbol falling above or below the payline on the final reel. Much debate exists on what role, if any, the near miss event plays in gambling. For example, some speculate the near miss event may prolong play in those who would otherwise terminate the session, while others extend this assertion further by noting that the near miss event may be involved in the development and maintenance of problem gambling. It is the purpose of this study, then, to offer an alternative role for near miss presentation in relation to varying win and loss patterns by investigating whether certain patterns of wins, losses, and near misses related to varying predictive patterns regarding the probability of winning over the next five subsequent spins. The data from this research support this view, and we elaborate on the impact this may have on near miss research.
 
11. The Sharing Game: statistical relation between Gains, Losses and Gender distributor
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
FANNY SILVA (Federal University of São Carlos), Giovana Escobal (Federal University of Sao Carlos), Celso Goyos (Universidade Federal de Sao Carlos)
Abstract: The Sharing Game studies resource allocation and decision making. The participant must choose, in a series of trials, between two options (optimal and competitive) with an amount of resources for themselves and for other passive participant. From their choice, participantes may be classified as optimizers, egalitarians or competitives. The purpose of this study was to assess whether the resource distributions in the Sharing Game are affected by allocation frame (Gains or Losses) and gender distributor. There were the "Gain-Loss" adn the "Loss-Gain" Experimental Conditions, both involving hypothetical money. Data were collected online through the website Survey Monkey (n=427). There was a significant order exposure effect of the allocation frame, that is, if the game started with Gains or Losses. Significant gender differences were found in the two experimental conditions, since in both o them the optimal strategy showed a higher percentage of men. This study has social and scientific importance by presenting an experimental model to investigate the generosity phenomenon. It also contributes for the economic games being more known and used in Psychology and Behavior Analysis. Finally, provides greater generality to the data which are still inconclusive regarding gender and the use of Gains and Losses in economic games.
 
12. A metacontingency experiment: effects of presence and absence of cultural consequences upon culturants
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
FÁBIO HENRIQUE BAIA (Universidade de Rio Verde), Rafael Macedo (Universidade de Rio Verde), Saulo Segantini (Universidade de Rio Verde), Lesley Sousa (Universidade de Brasília), Isabela Lemes (Universidade de Rio Verde)
Abstract: Metacontingency describes a contingent relation between culturants – interlocking behavioral contingencies (IBC) plus aggregated product – and cultural consequences (CC). We investigated the culturant selection when CC was present in one condition and absent in another condition. Six undergraduate students were divided in two triads. The task consisted in 4 digits displayed in a computer screen. Given this stimuli, participants chose another 4 digits to place bellow the given ones. Operants were caracterized as the sum of the two numbers in each column. This sum should result in a odd number to release the reinforcer (points exchangeble for money). Aggregated product were caracterized as the sum of each participant row (the 4 digits they placed). Participant 1 sum should be lower than participant 2 sum, that should be lower than participant 3 sum. If so, CC was released (bonus points). Two conditions were set in an ABAB design. On A condition, only individual consequences were available. On B, individual and cultural consequences were available. Results shown that the culturant was maintained by the CC. In both groups the aggregated product required for the CC release occured in high frequency only on B condition. Experimental research procedures related to metacontingecies are discussed.
 
13. How Valuable is Social Reinforcement? An Economic Analysis of Demand for Social Interaction
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
LAUREN VANDERHOOFT (Reed College), Lavinia C. M. Tan (Reed College), Jasmine Huang (Reed College), Marisol Lauffer (Reed College), Lisa Hiura (Reed College), Timothy D. Hackenberg (Reed College)
Abstract: The current research assessed rats’ demand for social reinforcement at different prices and reinforcer durations. Six pairs of rats (eight males, four females) were studied. One rat in each pair was trapped in a restraining tube; lever presses by the other rat released the trapped rat for the designated reinforcer duration before being restrained again. Once lever pressing occurred reliably at a fixed ratio 1 (FR 1), the price to release the trapped rat increased on a rapid geometric progression schedule (e.g. FR 2, 5, 10, 20) until no reinforcement was achieved during the 25-minute session. Three demand functions were obtained, one at each of three social interaction durations: 10 seconds, 30 seconds, and 60 seconds. For all durations across rats, the number of releases declined with increasing price, characteristic of a typical demand function. Generally, 10 seconds of reinforcement produced higher response levels than 60 seconds of reinforcement, but the effects of reinforcer magnitude were confounded with limited opportunities to respond at the higher magnitude. Future conditions will impose longer session durations to further determine sensitivity to social reinforcement magnitude changes.
 
14. The Effects of Eye Gaze Technology on Social Initiation Between Peers
Area: EAB; Domain: Applied Research
MEGAN STOLLMEYER (University of West Florida)
Abstract: Several studies have focused on AAC in functional communication, however, there are gaps in the research concerning AAC eye gaze technology and its’ impact on social interaction (Cannella-Malone, Fant, & Tullis, 2010). The current study evaluated the effects of eye gaze technology on social initiation by peers with a non-vocal child with Rett Syndrome. Additionally, researchers compared the frequency of the non-vocal participant’s eye gaze towards the AAC technology and towards peers. Researchers concluded that peer social initiation demonstrated a measurable increase when the eye gaze technology was present versus not present. Additionally, eye gaze by the non-vocal participant increased when the eye gaze technology was present, and frequency of computer eye gaze was greater than peer eye gaze overall. Most significantly, peer social initiation was more likely to be directed towards their non-vocal peer when the computer was present, as opposed to social initiation directed towards the instructional aide when the computer was not present.
 
15. The phantom rat: Separating social and non-social behavior in a reciprocity task with rats.
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
JASMINE HUANG (Reed College), Lavinia C. M. Tan (Reed College), Lauren Vanderhooft (Reed College), Marisol Lauffer (Reed College), Lisa Hiura (Reed College), Timothy D. Hackenberg (Reed College)
Abstract: We expanded on previous research to examine the role of the social aspect of reciprocal behavior. Three pairs of rats were trained to press a lever, delivering a food reinforcer to a partner rat in an adjacent chamber separated by a clear barrier. Following stabilization during a baseline period, the response requirement to produce a reinforcer was increased by 1 each day until the behavior was extinguished. After baseline was reestablished, the reinforcer requirement increased daily in increments of 1 until behavior was extinguished. In both of these conditions, as response or reinforcer requirement increased, responding decreased as expected. Control conditions were implemented with and without the partner rat in the adjacent chamber. A focal rat in each pair delivered reinforcers to the other chamber, and was reinforced on a schedule matched to the response rate of their partner at baseline. Additional control conditions added intertrial intervals of 35 and 50 seconds. Increased reciprocal response rates during yoked no rat conditions indicate that responding was not dependent on the presence of the partner and decreased overall response rates during ITI conditions suggest that responding was instead maintained by delay to reinforcement.
 
16. An Assessment of Treatment Options Used to Decrease Expels During Mealtimes
Area: EAB; Domain: Applied Research
Fiorella Ferrando (Kennedy Krieger Institute), HANNAH BUCKMAN (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Melissa Luke Gonzalez (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Tessa Christine Taylor (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
Abstract: Expulsion of food, defined as food which has been placed in the mouth becomes visible outside the lips, is a common problem among children with feeding disorders. Expulsion is problematic as it may result in decreased caloric intake and longer meal duration. Expulsion may result from motivational (escape or attention maintained) and/-or skill-related deficits. Given the varying factors maintaining expulsions, a variety of procedures may be effective in reducing this problematic mealtime behavior. Procedures such as chin prompts, texture manipulation, and escape extinction (i.e., re-presenting food) have been found to be effective in decreasing expulsions. Other potentially effective procedures may be the use of various spoon placements (i.e., flipped spoon) or prompting techniques (e.g., lip closure prompt). The purpose of this study was to conduct a brief assessment using an alternating treatments design to evaluate the effects of 5 potential treatments to help reduce expels in a 4-year-old girl with a feeding disorder who was admitted to an intensive feeding program. The assessment demonstrated that the flipped spoon and Nuk re-presentation conditions resulted in significantly fewer expels. Upon review of the data and parental preference, the Nuk re-presentation was chosen as the treatment for expels.
 
17. Selection of aggregate product: A replication of a metacontingency experiment
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
LUCAS COUTO DE CARVALHO (Oslo and Akershus University College), Kalliu Couto (Oslo and Akershus University College), Ingunn Sandaker (Oslo and Akershus University College of Applied Sciences), Joao Claudio Todorov (Universidade de Brasilia)
Abstract: The metacontingency is a conceptual tool, deals with cultural phenomena within behavioral analytic terms. This work is an indirect replication of a metacontingency experiment (Vasconcelos and Todorov, 2015; Experiment 1). Four pair of students played separately a game in a computer which a chessboard (8x8 quarters) were displayed. The location where the pair met in the chessboard were either reinforced or extinguished depending on the experimental condition. An ABAB procedure was used where conditions A and B were baselines and experimental conditions, respectively. The requirement for the meeting being reinforced changed through three different phases within each reinforcement condition: each phase being separated by a criterion of stability of five consecutive reinforcements. The results replicate the ones found in the original experiment. These results show that the index of variability is smaller when the aggregate product is reinforced than when it is not. These data are also according to the literature based in individual data.
 
18. Rule-following histories increased schedule sensitivity
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
NAOKI YAMAGISHI (Ryutsu Keizai University)
Abstract: This experiment examined effects of rule-following histories on schedule sensitivity. Participants are divided to two groups, mono-history and bi-history group. Participants in mono-history group were explored to one rule-following phase before an extinction phase. The rule-following phase was composed of three different reinforcement schedules, that include two different avoidance schedules, in which responding procrastinate point loss 5 s and 20 s, and extinction, in which no point loss was programed. Emergence of one of three buttons, which located right, center, and left on touch screen, and corresponding instruction label were arranged to provide a multiple schedule. Correspondences of three buttons with schedules were fixed in the same phase. Instruction labels indicate predominant reinforcement schedules on each button. In extinction phase, participants experienced extinction on all of buttons without labels on multiple schedule. Bi-history group were explored two different rule-following phases that differ in a correspondence of buttons with schedules, which followed by an extinction phase. Results showed that participants in both groups complied with instruction of labels in rule-following phase. In extinction phase, mono-history group respond similar way to in rule-following phase, still bi-history group’s responding were extinguished. These findings indicate that mono-history group followed rules and bi-history group followed contingency in extinction phase. History effects of rule-following and rule-change increased sensitivity to reinforcement schedules.
 
19. The Contextual Nature of Altruism: How Relative Risk of Harm Effects Social Discounting
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
JORDAN BELISLE (Southern Illinois University), Mark R. Dixon (Southern Illinois University)
Abstract: The study evaluated the effect of relative risk of harm on the social discounting of university students across two independent experiments. Forty-five participants took part in the first experiment, where they were required to complete three discounting surveys – each of which conceptualized risk of harm as a discrete variable (i.e., no risk to participant – risk to other, risk to participant – no risk to other, and risk to participant – risk to other) and social distance as a continuous variable (i.e. 1, 2, 10, 25, 50, 75, 100). Forty participants took part in the second experiment, in which risk of harm was conceptualized as a continuous variable (i.e., percentage probability of harm) and social distance was conceptualized as a discrete variable (i.e., close friend or relative, distant friend or relative, or distant acquaintance). The results from both experiments suggest that relative risk of harm had a significant effect on the social discounting of participants.
 
20. Impulsive Behaviors in Relation to Studying
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
DEBRA J. SPEAR (South Dakota State University), Amber Houser (South Dakota State University)
Abstract: Students completed several behavioral measures of impulsivity, including the AISS, BIS, and hypothetical gambling. Hypothetical studying scenarios with the type of class (major/nonmajor), time of semester (beginning/middle of semester), and type of involvement (work/time) were presented with the average number of hours required to obtain an “A” or a “C”. The measures of impulsivity were compared to the number of hours students reported in each studying scenario. All students were required to complete nine-online quizzes during the semester. The measures of impulsive behaviors were compared to the delay to completing the quizzes. There was no relationship between hypothetical gambling and the delay to complete online quizzes. However, students that were more likely to choose the smaller, more immediate money in the hypothetical gambling situation were also less likely to report they would devote the required number of hours to obtain an “A” in the hypothetical studying scenarios when there was a large difference between the required hours for an “A” vs. a “C” grade. This was especially true for freshmen, for nonmajor courses, and when time was required for the grade.
 
21. Analysis of protocol and Tower London as Strategy for Study Human Behavior:A Comparison Between Adults and Children
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
ROSALINDA ARROYO (Universidad Nacional Autónoma de México), Diana Moreno Rodriguez Rodríguez (FES Iztacala Universidad Nacional Autónoma de Mé), Maria Luisa Cepeda Islas (FES Iztacala UNAM), Hortensia Hickman (Universidad Nacional Autonoma de México, FES-Iztacala), Maria Bautista (UNAM, FES Iztacala)
Abstract: To evaluate the effects of the interaction between protocol type (retrospective, concurrent and control) and linguistic development in the completion of a Tower of London (TOL) task as well as the verbal quality of post session reports, a study was conducted in which a two factor (protocol type and age group) design was used. Verbal reports collected after the solution of the task were analyzed and categorized. Thirty adults and thirty children were divided in three groups; each group was exposed to one condition (concurrent or retrospective protocol, and control condition -without protocol-). The participants were exposed to three phases, one session the training and two transfer sessions. The results showed an effect of age in the condition of training and the second Test. Meanwhile in Test 1 an interaction effect was observed in both measures, the number of correct responses and the total of extra movements performed. The analysis of verbal reports indicated differences between children and adults but not between protocol type. The evidence suggests that both the analysis of protocols in conjunction with TOL can be used reliably to study of complex human behavior.
 
22. Habilitation effect on active modes of language from reactive observing mode
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
AGUSTIN DANIEL GOMEZ FUENTES FUENTES (Universidad Veracruzana), Enrique Zepeta (Universidad Veracruzana), Zaira Garcia Perez (Universidad Veracruzana), Elvia Peralta (Universidad Veracruzana), Jose Muños (Universidad Veracruzana)
Abstract: The purpose of the study was to evaluate the effect of habilitation on active pointing out mode, speaking mode and writing mode from reactive observing mode. The habilitation concept is linked to interactions in which the learner initially deployed as only requirement reactive linguistic behavior modes. The effect of habilitation may be evaluated in the active linguistic mode. Fifteen experimentally naive adolescents, ten men and five women, 14 year old third grade Public High School participated. Three groups experimental design with Initial Test, Familiarization Phase, Exposure Phase and Final Test were used. Second order experimental arrangement with geometric figures was used. The results suggest that the reactive observed mode habilitated the response in the three active modes of language at different levels of execution, first writing, and then speaking and after that pointing out. Also, the results suggest that high execution level in the familiarization phase may have a positive effect on Exposure Phase and Habilitation and Final test.
 
 
 
Poster Session #357
CBM Monday Noon
Monday, May 25, 2015
12:00 PM–2:00 PM
Exhibit Hall C (CC)
23. Evaluation of a multielement assessment and behavioral training for pill-swallowing difficulties
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
VALORI N. BERENDS (Seattle Children's Hospital - Autism Center), Danielle N. Dolezal (Seattle Children's Hospital - Autism Center), Amber Persons (Seattle Children's Hospital - Autism Center)
Abstract: Previous research demonstrated the effectiveness of a protocol for teaching pill swallowing to children with developmental disabilities (Slifer, 2014; Ghuman et al., 2004). We extended this research by conducting a multielement evaluation of pill size across measures of swallowing, sips of water, refusals and chewing to determine the most appropriate starting point for treatment. Once an appropriate pill size was identified, we implemented a positive reinforcement package including stimulus fading and differential reinforcement for pill-swallowing with one participant. The participant was a 16-year old male with diagnoses of epilepsy, autism, anxiety not otherwise specified, and disruptive behavior disorder. Pill sizes were evaluated in treatment using a multielement and reversal design across refusals, sips of water, chewing and both active and placebo “pills” swallowed. Performance across the dependent variables was used to determine next appropriate steps in treatment. Data show pill chewing until differential reinforcement was contingent on swallowing with no chewing rather than swallowing alone. Results indicate that the multielement assessment was successful in identifying the largest pill the adolescent could swallow with limited refusal and with which to begin the behavioral training. Treatment was terminated following success with active pills.
 
24. Discounting of Delayed Rewards in Humans With Neurological Diseases
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
BARTLOMIEJ SWEBODZINSKI (University of Social Science and Humanities in Warsaw)
Abstract: The aim of this study is to answer the question whether focal damage within the cerebral cortex of different locations has an impact on the rate of discounting of delayed positive reinforcement. The pilot study was done in a sample of 26 patients with focal brain damage. Patients were divided into groups based on neuroimaging data. The study involved 14 women and 12 men. Patients were asked to choice between different amount of money, hypothetically received immediately or after a certain delay. The dependent variable was the subjective value of delayed reward. Independent variables were: location of neurological damage within the cerebral cortex (frontal lobe vs. other areas of the brain), the size of the reward (2000 PLN or 200 PLN) and the delay of the reward (three days, a week, a month, 3 months, 6 months, a year). A significant interaction was the damage location and size of the reward. The people with the frontal location of damage compared to people with damage in other areas of the brain, discounted bigger reward faster but slower the small one. Bigger rewards were discounted more slowly than smaller only in humans with injuries located not in the frontal lobe cortex.
 
25. The Therapist's Behavior and Its Relationship With User's Treatment Attendance
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
JUDITH ELISA FERRER ALARCÓN (National Autonomous University of Mexico), Silvia Morales Chaine (UNAM)
Abstract:

There are a significant proportion of drug users who do not finish your intervention. Often users leave the intervention before the first month of treatment, when they have not received the expected benefits with the procedures. Therapists behavior has influence in the users behavior. The aim of this study was to describe the relationship between the therapists behavior and users treatment attendance after a one session of brief counseling using motivational interviewing. We worked with 8 therapists (87.5 % female) aged 22 to 43 years old and 8 men aged 18 to 57 years old who used marijuana, cocaine or tobacco, at the public institution created to prevent drug abuse. We used a sequential behavioral coding system in motivational interviewing that includes 20 behavioral categories. We obtained a reliability of 0.83 through kappa index and we performed a sequential analysis. The results showed that 80% of users that received the brief counseling attended at one additional treatment session and therapists behaviors consistent with motivational interviewing were more likely to be followed by users behavior descriptive. By understanding the behavior performed by the therapist and his connection with users attendance we will hope foster the behaviors that increase adherence to treatment of users substance.

 
26. Behavioral Skills Training for Teaching Assertiveness in Condom Insistence for College Students
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
SADIE L. LOVETT (Central Washington University), Megan McCulley (University of Washington)
Abstract: The Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) report that over 1.7 million people acquired a new sexually transmitted disease in 2011 (CDC, 2013d). Condom use can protect the user from exposure to sexually transmitted diseases; however, many people discontinue use of condoms because they lack the assertiveness skills to request a partner use a condom (e.g., Harvey et al., 2004). The current study used Behavioral Skills Training (BST) to teach assertiveness skills to three undergraduate students. A multiple probe design was used to evaluate the effects of BST on assertiveness. BST was delivered in individual sessions in a role-play format that included scenarios in which the participants were required to respond to a verbal request to initiate sex without a condom. Results indicate that BST was an effective for increasing assertiveness skills, and generalization was observed with novel scenarios. Results of a short post-training survey indicate that participants also evaluated the BST intervention positively.
 
27. A fading procedure reduces the number of impulsive choices in adolescents witnesses of family violence
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
AGUSTIN JAIME NEGRETE CORTES CORTES (Universidad Autónoma de Baja California), Ariel Vite Sierra Sierra (Universidad Nacional de Mexico)
Abstract: The experience has an important role in the development of self-control. Human and animal studies have shown that it is possible to increase the self-control through exposure to choice contexts favoring the choice of the larger reinforcer if the delay of the larger reinforcer is gradually increased. This procedure is known as fading procedure of the delay (Mazur & Logue, 1978). Therefore, the aim of this study was to evaluate whether a treatment derived from this model is useful to develop self-control in a sample of adolescents witnesses of family violence with high scores of impulsive behavior assessed through manipulating dimensions of reinforcer such as Immediacy (I), Quality (Q ), Effort (E) and Rate of Reinforcement (R). Participants were 10 adolescents witnesses of family violence with ages between 14 and 17 years old, all high school students in Mexico city. The dimensions of reinforcer involved in impulsive behavior were identified through an initial assessment. Subsequently, the identified dimensions were subjected to fading procedure and finally were evaluated under the same conditions as in the initial evaluation. In general, the treatment increased the preference for those conditions where the gain was a higher quality reinforcer, despite it has a higher delay
 
28. An Evaluation of the Variables Associated with Weight Loss in Parent-Supported Weight Reduction Programs for Adolescents and Young Adults with Intellectual Disabilities
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
GRETCHEN A. DITTRICH (Simmons College and E. K. Shriver Center at Univer), Richard K. Fleming (University of Massachusetts Boston), Carlos Salas (University of Massachusetts Boston), Barbara Fargnoli (E. K. Shriver Center at University of Massachusetts Medical School)
Abstract: Overweight and obesity are associated with an increase in health disorders, including heart disease, diabetes, hypertension, and some cancers. The prevalence of obesity is higher in individuals with intellectual disabilities than in the general population. Behavioral weight loss programs have been demonstrated to be effective in reducing weight in individuals with intellectual disabilities, yet it is unclear which components of the treatment packages influence weight loss. The current study retrospectively evaluated data collected during two randomized control trials consisting of parent-supported weight reduction intervention to determine variables associated with weight loss in adolescents and young adults with intellectual disabilities. Variables analyzed included treatment adherence (attendance, participation during sessions, answering weekly phone calls, setting goals, and monitoring), goal attainment, and step count. Data were analyzed using time series analysis to evaluate within-subject trends and aggregate data throughout the progression of the intervention, including change in adherence over time. Additionally, multiple regression analyses were used to analyze the individual effects of each variable on weight loss. Data were evaluated from two different weight loss programs, one program consisting of 10 weekly sessions, followed by four biweekly sessions, and two triweekly sessions (16 total sessions), and the second program consisted of 24 weekly sessions. For both programs, 1.5 hour sessions occurred in a group format with both parents and their children. The first 45 min of the session focused on nutrition education for both the parents and their children, and during the second 45 min of the session the group was separated, at which time the children completed activities related to nutrition and physical activity, while the parents were instructed on behavioral strategies (e.g., monitoring, reinforcement, behavioral contracting, stimulus control, and goal setting) to facilitate weight loss in their child. The current study is still ongoing; therefore data are forthcoming. Preliminary data suggest treatment adherence declined over time, and participants whose parents showed higher treatment adherence lost more weight.
 
29. Conceptualizing food preferences as rich-to-lean and lean-to-rich choices with children who self-feed
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
GRACE CALVIN (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Julia N. Woods (Kennedy Krieger Institute), John C. Borrero (University of Maryland, Baltimore County), Carrie S. W. Borrero (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
Abstract: Pausing between responses occurs between preferred and non-preferred activities (Perone & Coutney, 1992). In the case of feeding, these pauses potentiate long and challenging meals for families of children with feeding disorders. The present study examined pause durations between bites of preferred and non-preferred foods among children with feeding disorders when children were given an opportunity to choose their transitions. Two children with feeding disorders were presented a full-plate containing preferred (rich) and non-preferred (lean) foods and data were examined to determine the average durations of pauses in acceptance when transitioning between foods. The data demonstrate that rich-rich transitions are associated with the shortest pause duration between bites, and rich-lean transitions are associated with the longest pause duration between bites. Children’s choices and responses during transitions between preferred and non-preferred foods have significant implications for feeding disorder interventions. Discerning ways to reduce pauses during meal-times can shorten the duration of meals and significantly improve the quality of meals for children with feeding disorders and their families.
 
30. An Evaluation of Different Magnitudes of Differential Negative Reinforcement in the Treatment of a Pediatric Feeding Disorder
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
COURTNEY MAUZY (University of North Carolina Wilmington), Melanie H. Bachmeyer (University of North Carolina Wilmington), Billie J. Klein (University of North Carolina Wilmington), Jessica Keane (University of North Carolina at Wilmington), Natasha Chamberlain (University of North Carolina at Wilmington), Caitlin A. Kirkwood (University of North Carolina Wilmington)
Abstract: Given the role of negative reinforcement (escape from bites/drinks) in the maintenance of pediatric feeding problems and the effectiveness of escape extinction as treatment, it is surprising that little attention has been given to the effects of escape as reinforcement for appropriate mealtime behavior during treatment. Some applied studies have shown that reinforcement magnitude may influence responding (e.g., Trosclair-Lassere et al., 2008). Using a combined multi-element and reversal design, we examined the relative effects of different magnitudes of negative reinforcement (30-s or 150-s break) for appropriate mealtime behavior (mouth clean, a product measure of swallowing) with and without escape extinction to treat the liquid refusal of a child diagnosed with a feeding disorder. Interobserver agreement was conducted on 80% of sessions and was above 80%. Liquid consumption increased only when escape extinction was implemented. Neither magnitude of negative reinforcement combined with escape extinction resulted in differential treatment effects compared to escape extinction only. Potential areas for future research will be discussed.
 
31. Parent-Led Shaping for Adipsia and Plate A-Plate B for Food Selectivity in a Young Child
Area: CBM; Domain: Service Delivery
WHITNEY HARCLERODE (Penn State Hershey Medical Center), Shannan Lamparski (Penn State Harrisburg), Keith E. Williams (Penn State Hershey Medical Center)
Abstract:

A two-year old child with typical development was referred for consumption of only baby food and yogurt mixed with water. His parents fed him these smooth foods by spoon. He refused to drink from a cup, bottle, or straw and consumed only liquids mixed with smooth foods. His table foods were limited to cheese balls, angel hair pasta, crackers, and pretzels. In the past, he drank from a bottle until the nipple broke and he refused all further liquids. Due to his reliance on watered-down food to meet his hydration needs, he was seen in an intensive outpatient feeding program for 11 days. This child was treated with a parent-led shaping procedure for his adipsia. His food selectivity was treated with Plate A-Plate B, which involves reinforcement of novel food consumption with preferred foods. Results showed the stimulus fading procedure increased acceptance and consumption of liquids from a cup. In three baseline sessions, he consumed no liquids for his parents. For the last three meals of treatment, his average per meal consumption for his parents exceeded five ounces. Using the Plate A-Plate B intervention, his consumption of novel table foods increased from 0 to 36.

 
32. Profile of a sample of obese and overweight children
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
ARIEL VITE SIERRA SIERRA (Universidad Nacional Autónoma de Mexico), Tania Romero (Universidad Nacional Autónoma de México), Geraldine Zúñiga (Universidad Nacional Autónoma de México), Michelle Mora (Universidad Nacional Autónoma de México)
Abstract: Childhood obesity, especially in adolescence is a strong predictor of obesity in adulthood and is now considered public health problem in clear ascent. In fact, it is the most common childhood disorder literature shows as the psychological characteristics have a significant weight in the etiology and maintenance obesity, as well as in their treatment, both adults and children. But must take into account that the relationship between obesity and psychological characteristics is complex and multifactorial. However it seems that the literature indicates a psychological profile associated with childhood obesity and overweight; however, data not totally conclusive and, some cases, conflicting. Therefore the aim of this study was to explore the profile of overweight/obese children, in comparison with a group of non-overweight/obese children. A sample of 40 children (8 to 10 years-old) was evaluated for the presence of the following psychological variables: Self-concept, Body Perception, Self-efficacy to Exercise, Anxiety and Impulsivity. The sample consisted of 20 overweight/obese children and 20 normal-weight children. Compared to the children with normal weight, the overweight/obese children presented minor self-efficacy to exercise and higher levels of anxiety. The variable which best discriminated between the groups was impulsivity. The results support previous studies that have shown the presence of impulsivity in obese children, and the existence of differential psychological features.
 
33. Escape Baseline: An Efficient and Sufficient Means to Assess the Function of Food Refusal Behavior
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
GABRIEL SCHNERCH (Marcus Autism Center), Roseanne S Lesack (Emory University School of Medicine), Camila Salvador (Marcus Autism Center), William G. Sharp (Emory University School of Medicine)
Abstract: Applied behavior analytic methods have proven effective in treating food refusal, and best practice dictates that the function of a behavior should be assessed prior to treatment. In behavior analysis, functional analysis is the gold standard for determining the likely function of inappropriate behaviors. However, single component analyses of function are more efficient, and in some cases, may be adequate to provide quantitative support for a hypothesis of the function of a behavior. In addition, prior literature suggests that escape from demands is often the primary function in cases involving food refusal. Participants for this retrospective chart review included children receiving treatment at a day treatment program from November 2013 to November 2014. Preliminary analyses via visual inspection of graphed data (i.e., rapid acceptance of bites and inappropriate mealtime behaviors) suggests that food refusal is a category of behavior in which a single component analysis, namely the “escape baseline”, may be a sufficient assessment of the function. It is also more efficient in terms of time and labor than conducting a full functional analysis. Future research experimentally comparing the results of only the escape baseline condition to a full functional analysis would be warranted to improve confidence in the method.
 
34. Treating Food Refusal for a Client with Food Allergies and Eosinophilic Esophagitis
Area: CBM; Domain: Service Delivery
LINDA-MAI NGUYEN (Marcus Autism Center), Roseanne S Lesack (Emory University School of Medicine), William G. Sharp (Emory University School of Medicine)
Abstract: This case study demonstrates considerations taken at multiple stages in treating food refusal with a client presenting with multiple food allergies and eosinophilic esophagitis. Adam, a 7-year-old male with autism spectrum disorder and developmental delay, was admitted to a day treatment program for total food refusal and formula dependence. His medical history also included gastroesophageal reflux disease, eczema, and multiple nutrient and vitamin deficiencies. At the time of admission, his diet consisted solely of whole milk ( identified as one of his food allergens) and he refused all solid foods. Treatment involved systematically introducing four foods selected based on a negative skin prick test response. Behavioral elements involved in treatment included non-removal of the spoon, noncontingent reinforcement, and bolus fading. During the course of admission, there was a significant increase in rapid acceptance and mouth cleans, coinciding with a decrease in combined inappropriate behaviors. Feeding treatments based on the principles of applied behavior analysis have been shown to be highly effective at treating food refusal; however, this case demonstrates key treatment considerations when food allergies are a major, life-threatening concern.
 
 
 
Poster Session #358
OBM Monday Noon
Monday, May 25, 2015
12:00 PM–2:00 PM
Exhibit Hall C (CC)
35. The relative effects of different incentive types and task structure on group performance
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
HANGSOO CHO (Chung-Ang University), Jaehee Lee (Chung Ang University)
Abstract: The relative effects of different incentive types and task structure on group performance This study aimed to examine the effects of different incentive type and task structure on group performance. A 2 × 3 factorial design was adopted. 117 participant were randomly assigned to one of six experimental group: individual, equally-distributed and differentially-distributed incentives in two different task structure (independent and interdependent task). Each participant attended five 20 minute sessions to perform typing task. In first session, participants earned base pay regardless of their performance. In 2~5 sessions, participant earned not only base pay but also incentive depends their experiment conditions. We found the significant interaction effects between incentive type and task structure. The difference of performance among three incentive condition as not significant when task structure was independent. However, participants in equally-distributed incentive condition performed better than the rest condition when they had engaged in interdependent task. Keywords: task structure, reward contingencies, monetary incentives, computer typing task
 
36. A Comparison of the Effectiveness of Person Feedback vs. Email Feedback on Work Performance
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
SONGHWA CHAE (Department of Psychology Chung-Ang University), Kwangsu Moon (Chung-Ang University), Kyehoon Lee (CLG), Shezeen Oah (Chung Ang University)
Abstract: This study compared the effects of person feedback and E-mail feedback on work performance. Between group design was adopted and 18 participant were randomly assigned to one of the two experimental groups: (a) person feedback, (b) e-mail feedback. Participants were asked to work on a simulated mobile phone assembly task. They performed for 30 minutes per session and attended 4 sessions. The dependents variable was the number of work tasks completed correctly. Independent variable was the difference in delivering method of feedback. Under the person feedback condition, a written feedback containing individual performance for before session delivered and same content with person feedback was provided via email under the email-feedback condition. The Result showed that both feedback was effective in improving work performance, however, person feedback was more effective than e-mail feedback.
 
37. Frequency of Texting while Driving is Related to Delay Discounting in College Students
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
YUSUKE HAYASHI (Penn State Hazleton), Christopher T. Russo (Penn State Hazleton), Oliver Wirth (The National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention)
Abstract: The purpose of the present study was to examine the relation between texting while driving and delay discounting in college students. We gave 147 students a survey designated to measure how frequently they send and read a text message while driving. Based on this information, we identified 19 students who frequently text while driving. We also identified 19 matched control students who infrequently text while driving but were similar to the students who frequently text while driving in terms of gender, age, years of education, and years driving. We then compared the extent to which these groups of students discounted hypothetical monetary rewards. In a paper-based delay discounting task, they made repeated choices between $1,000 available after a delay (ranging from 1 week to 10 years) and an equal or lesser amount of money available immediately. The results show that the students who frequently text while driving discounted delayed rewards more steeply than the matched control students.
 
38. A Feedback Tool to Assess the Travel Experiences of Passengers with Disabilities: Pilot Results
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
JASON M. HIRST (The University of Kansas), Amy J. Henley (The University of Kansas), Florence D. DiGennaro Reed (University of Kansas), Skyler Rueb (University of North Texas), David Martin (Delta Air Lines)
Abstract: Travel by airline can present a variety of challenges for passengers with a range of disabilities (e.g., physical, intellectual, sensory). Despite legislation and policy changes aimed at facilitating air travel by passengers with disabilities, survey data and self-reports have shown that passengers still encounter several barriers to air travel. We describe the development of a passenger feedback tool developed to identify barriers to air travel for passengers with disabilities and best practices of the airline. The development of the tool took place over two years and followed a social validation approach to assess services and accommodations provided to passengers with disabilities by a large international airline. The tool was designed to assess barriers and best practices in two primary categories including environmental factors and customer service. The results of the survey of passengers indicated that disruptions in travel resulted from skill deficits on the part of staff as well as from systems-level issues of policy and infrastructure. These results suggest some directions for future intervention and policy changes among airlines.
 
39. Hypothetical Discounting in Probabilistic Workplace Incentive Arrangements: A Preliminary Investigation
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
JASON M. HIRST (The University of Kansas), Florence D. DiGennaro Reed (University of Kansas)
Abstract: A concern in organizational settings is maintaining motivation among employees. Organizations often implement a system of bonuses or incentives to supplement naturalistic outcomes that maintain work behaviors among employees. Unfortunately, incentive systems tend to be mediated by supervisors who cannot monitor the behavior of all employees at any given time. The resulting incentive system may result in a system of delayed and probabilistic contingencies between work behavior and contrived reinforcement. Because the literature in behavioral economics has demonstrated that the value of delayed or uncertain outcomes is discounted, a behavioral economic framework may have some utility for employee motivation systems. To determine the degree to which discounting might occur in workplace settings with probabilistic incentive contingencies, we adapted an adjusting amount discounting task in which we asked participants to choose between a larger, uncertain option and a smaller, certain option with the options being framed as workplace outcomes. The results were somewhat idiosyncratic with some participants appearing to discount monotonically as a function of probability while other participants did not appear to discount. The present study was exploratory in nature, but may suggest some directions for future investigation on how economic concepts can affect important employee behaviors.
 
40. A group contingency to increase cleanliness in a center setting utilizing a multiple baseline design
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
LINDSAY K. BRANCH (Little Star Center), Margaret M. Moore Moore (Little Star Center), Kaitlyn Peitz (Little Star Center), Brooke Raderstorf (Little Star Center), Vincent LaMarca (Little Star Center), William Tim Courtney (Little Star Center)
Abstract: The purpose of this study is to increase the cleanliness of several instructional areas in an early intervention applied behavior analysis center for children with autism. The participants in this study are the staff members that work with the children at this center. The participant’s ages range from 19 years old to 53 years old all with a minimum of a high school diploma with the majority of the participants having a bachelor’s degree. Utilizing a multiple baseline design, an interdependent group contingency was put in place to maintain a sufficient level of cleanliness throughout the day. The group earned half of a token or a whole token depending on the current phase of the intervention and the level of cleanliness of the areas in question. The tokens were presented daily at a morning meeting where all staff at the center attended. Once all 12 tokens were earned, the group selected a food item as a backup reinforcer. The bathrooms and kitchen show significant improvement in cleanliness from baseline levels, while the motor room shows moderate improvements in cleanliness.
 
41. The Effects of a Combined Group Reinforcement Contingency and Corrective Feedback on Treatment Integrity and Daily Note Accuracy of Behavior Line Technicians
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
GREGORY R. MANCIL (Louisiana Tech University)
Abstract: One of the most important aspects of treatment outcome research is establishing treatment integrity. Integrity of the treatment refers to the degree to which treatment is implemented as intended (Perepletchikova & Kazdin, 2005). The level of treatment integrity effects the outcomes of treatments (Wilder, Atwell, and Wine, 2006), with lower levels of fidelity have poorer outcomes, particularly when the levels reach below 50% (Vollmer et al., 1999). In facility and school staff working for individuals with developmental disabilities often implement procedures haphazardly with low levels of treatment integrity, if at all (Reid & Parsons, 2005). In addition, staff documents procedures and/ or outcomes poorly during the day. Thus, the purpose of this study was to investigate the examine the effects of a group reinforcement contingency and corrective feedback intervention on the behavioral accuracy of daily notes and treatment integrity. A reversal design (ABACAC) design was used to examine the effects of a group reinforcement contingency and corrective feedback intervention on the behavioral accuracy of daily notes and treatment integrity. Four behavior line technicians participated in this study with a total of 16 clients. The workers chose a dinner out at a favorite restaurant as the reward. Results indicate a change from baseline to combined intervention (group contingency plus corrective feedback). Upon removal of the intervention, the pinpoint objectives (i.e., TI and daily note accuracy) decreased below intervention levels. In addition, pinpoint objectives increased when the intervention was reintroduced. IOA across conditions was 95% and reliability (each observer's comparison of same observation at different points in time) was 100%.
 
42. The Relative Effects of Incentive Distribution Method and Social Comparison Feedback on the Work Performance
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
KWANGSU MOON (Chung-Ang University), Dongyeon Lee (Chung-Ang University), Shezeen Oah (Chung Ang University)
Abstract: The purpose of this study was to investigate the relative effects of incentive distribution method and social comparison feedback on the work performance in the large group. Participants were ninety voluntary college students and attended 8 experimental sessions in total. The participants were randomly assigned to one of three experimental groups: (1) social comparison and objective feedback, (2) objective feedback, (3) no feedback. After individual incentive system for 4 session, equally-distributed group incentive system was introduced for 4 session in all experimental groups. We adopted a 3*2 mixed subject design. The participants performed a simulated work task on the computers. The dependent variable was the number of work task completed. The results showed that the work performances under two types of feedback group were higher than control group. In addition, under the individual incentive phase, the two types of feedback did not produce differences in the performance, however, under the equally distributed group incentive phase, the performance under the social comparison and objective feedback condition was higher than objective feedback condition.
 
 
 
Poster Session #359
EDC Monday Noon
Monday, May 25, 2015
12:00 PM–2:00 PM
Exhibit Hall C (CC)
43. iCoaching Preservice Teachers: A Pilot Project
Area: EDC; Domain: Basic Research
KATHLEEN RANDOLPH (Florida Atlantic University)
Abstract: The use of audio coaching with both preservice and inservice teachers has been used in the past twenty years using different systems, but with the same purpose: to provide immediate feedback to the recipient teacher in order to facilitate, and often times improve, effective teaching practices. Bug-in-ear (BIE) systems have come in many shapes and sizes providing covert audio feedback to teachers as they teach, and enabling them to receive that feedback in order to make changes in their teaching practice with one thing in mind, student learning. This study explores the use of current technology, iPods and their available applications, in providing feedback to a preservice teacher in the classroom in order to see gains in targeted effective teaching behavior. Conducted in an alternative public school where students who have been expelled from the general education setting are sent for no less than 180 days, this project was a pilot study to determine the ability for current technology to provide immediate feedback and the effectiveness of the feedback provided to the student teacher. This study also sought to determine the feasibility of the design and measurement used. This study provided valuable data and information to the researcher, as well as limitations within its preliminary design.
 
44. Enhanced Goal Setting to Increase Teacher Adherence to Positive Behavior Management Strategies
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
COREY MILES COHRS (Unviversity of Nebraska Medical Center), Keith D. Allen (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Medical Center), Mark D. Shriver (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Medical Center), Ray Burke (The Prevention Group)
Abstract: Teachers in classroom settings are often expected to use positive behavior management strategies on a daily basis with children. In fact, increased teacher praise has been demonstrated an effective program component in improving students’ academic engagement, rule following, and overall outcomes. Achieving successful outcomes with BSP depends largely on the degree of teacher adherence to program strategies. Treatment adherence or treatment integrity refers to the extent to which a teacher follows the prescribed guidelines of a behavioral treatment plan. However, in many circumstances teachers may encounter obstacles which deter or prevent consistent program implementation. One method frequently employed to improve treatment adherence in teachers has been the combination of goal setting and performance feedback. Indeed, this specific combination has been repeatedly used to target adherence to praise recommendations in the classroom. A goal (statement) may be defined by a “verbal stimulus or event (i.e., goal statement, mental representation, etc.), which precedes behavior… and reliably accompanies a reinforced response.” Previous research would suggest that perhaps superior weight should be attributed to performance feedback components. One line of evidence for this is provided by studies which have indicated goal setting is often found to be unsuccessful in the absence of supporting intervention components. An expanding line of research by Gollwitzer and colleagues has suggested that goal setting may be enhanced, by adding specific behavioral intention statements to pre-existing goals. These “implementation intentions” specify both the behaviors necessary to achieve a goal and the conditions under which they will be executed. Therefore, the purpose of this study was to extend the previous cognitive evaluations of implementation intentions to evaluate the potential for improving teacher adherence to praise recommendations through an enhanced goal setting intervention. This led to a series of two studies exploring (1) the effect of implementation intentions following and in combination with a traditional goal setting intervention to increase teacher praise statements and (2) the effect of implementation intentions in isolation, systematically replicated with a second set of participants.
 
45. Writing Behavioral Learning Objectives Aligned to the Reading Foundations and Math Common Core State Standards
Area: EDC; Domain: Service Delivery
ELIZABETH A. LANG (MiBLSi (Michigan's Integrated Behavior and Learnin), Sonia M. Lewis (MiBLSi (Michigan's Integrated Behavior and Learnin)
Abstract: The purpose of this poster is to share both a task analysis and resources for writing behavioral objectives aligned to the Common Core State Standards (CCSS). Since 2010, forty-three states have adopted the CCSS. Concurrently, Multi-Tier System of Supports (MTSS) is being used more frequently to meet the educational and behavioral needs of all students. The basic elements of MTSS are required by the Elementary and Secondary Education Act (ESEA) and the Individuals with Disabilities Education Act (IDEA). A continuum of evidence-based practices is a critical element in an MTSS framework and is predicated on high quality instruction. Several school districts continue to grapple with aligning their curriculum and instruction to the CCSS. A point of confusion is that the CCSS are standards-based outcomes, not a curriculum. We must operationally define the skills needed for students to be able to demonstrate mastery of each standard, which is not only essential for students requiring Tier 2/3 and/or Special Education instruction but also to improve the overall quality and efficacy of Tier 1 core instruction. Since all student academic responses can be analyzed with a behavior analytic lens, the science of behavior analysis can be used to clearly define the content.
 
46. The Differential Effects of Textual Prompts and Behavior Skills Training on Teacher Skill Acquisition
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
JESSICA RYDBERG (Arizona Centers for Comprehensive Education and Li), Donald M. Stenhoff (Arizona Centers for Comprehensive Education and Life Skills), Tisha L Denton (Arizona Centers for Comprehensive Education and Li)
Abstract: Researchers have demonstrated that the skills teachers display in the classroom relate to student achievement. This is imperative with teachers serving populations with moderate and severe disabilities. In this study, we examined the differential effects of textual prompts and behavior skills training on increasing four teachers’ performance displaying targeted teaching skills in a school for students with disabilities. The researchers targeted two teaching skills in which the teachers needed to improve. Teachers were assigned to one of two conditions (textual prompts or behavior skills training) for each of the two identified targeted teaching skills. In the textual prompt condition, the specific behavior was described in bullet format on a poster board and posted on the wall as a visual prompt for the teacher. In the behavior skills training condition, researchers described the skill, modeled the skill, and provided practice with feedback to the teacher. A repeated acquisition counterbalanced across participants design was used to compare whether teachers demonstrated the skills at a faster rate using textual prompts or behavior skills training. Preliminary results indicate that behavior skills training produces a faster rate of skill demonstration than textual prompts.
 
47. Effects of Teachers’ Self-recording of Behavior Specific Praise on Children’s On-task Behavior in the Classroom
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
KAZUKI NIWAYAMA (Kwansei Gakuin University), Junko Tanaka-Matsumi (Kwansei Gakuin University)
Abstract: This study examined the effects of self-recording on teachers’ use of behavior specific praise. We also examined changes in children’s on-task behavior in a classroom. The study was conducted in three general education classrooms at a Japanese elementary school using a multiple baseline design across teachers and classes. Participants were three teachers and 85 children in general education classes. We used an event recording procedure to record teacher’s use of behavior specific praise during a 45-min class. Children’s on-task behavior was recorded by using a 15-min time sampling procedure. After the baseline (A), the teachers were simply told to count behavior specific praise while conducting class (B). The self-recording procedure was implemented one 45-min class per day. The teachers self-graphed their daily counts of behavior specific praise at the end of the day. We praised teachers once per week for the increase of behavior specific praise. After the intervention, all three teachers’ use of behavior specific praise increased. Percentage of children’s on-task behavior also increased after the intervention. We continue to observe if teachers’ use of behavior specific praise and children’s on-task behavior are maintained after the formal withdrawal of the intervention.
 
48. Tackling the Evidence-Based Practice Issue: Do the IES/NSF Guidelines Provide a Line-of-Research Protocol?
Area: EDC; Domain: Theory
BARBARA SCHIRMER (Defiance College), Todd Schirmer (Napa State Hospital), Alison Schirmer Lockman (Western Governors University)
Abstract: The purpose of this conceptual piece is to determine whether the recent report issued by the Institute of Education Sciences and National Science Foundation provides a reasonable protocol that explains the differential role of methodological designs in lines of research inquiry that culminate in evidence-based instructional practices. In spite of considerable discussion in the literature, at conferences and meetings, and in online venues about evidence-based practices, no consensus has emerged about what constitutes sufficient evidence to identify a practice as research-based, with proposed algorithms involving dissimilar configurations of quantities, qualities, and types of research (e.g., H. Cooper, 2010; Gersten, Fuchs, Compton, Coyne, Greenwood, & Innocenti, 2005; Kazdin, 2011; What Works Clearinghouse, 2010). The recent IES/NSF guidelines is the newest entry and the five-hundred-pound gorilla in this debate given that these federal agencies distribute millions of dollars in grants to support research that meets their defined criteria of quality research and promising evidence for practice. Our research seeks to identify a common denominator protocol by which the use of particular methodological designs in a line of research inquiry provides evidence for each successive step in the process of bringing any given instructional intervention into practice.
 
50. Teaching 4-5 Year Old Children to Create Cartoons in Computer.
Area: EDC; Domain: Service Delivery
CELSO SOCORRO OLIVEIRA (UNESP - Sao Paulo State University), Maria Fernanda Cazo Alvarez (UNESP - Universidade Estadual Paulista), Fabio Leyser Goncalves (Universidade Estadual Paulista)
Abstract: The objectives of this work was to expose fourteen 4-5 year old children to computers using a cartoon maker software, to introduce the concept of story making with 3-figures strip cartoon (containing a beginning, a middle and an ending figure), to teach matching of dialogs to keyboard letters and to check the emergence of equivalent classes among the characters and their printed names through a matching-to-sample procedure (MTS). Strips had simple sentences in Portuguese (natural language), different types of balloons, characters and scenarios, all provided by the software. The software is a free cartoon strip maker, from a national Brazilian cartoon maker site. The experiment was held in a pre-school class in the interior of Brazil. First, children were introduced to printed cartoon and had to retell the story. Then the children grouped in pairs for each computer were introduced to the software commands, scenarios, balloons, characters and dialogs. Finally, a MTS computer program tested if the the children matched the characters to their printed names. A multiple baseline procedure introduced stepwise to each group. The criteria to pass to next phase were the ability to reproduce the task given. Ethical procedures were conducted with children, parents and teachers.
 
51. Just Do It! Reducing Academic Procrastination of Secondary Students
Area: EDC; Domain: Service Delivery
ZIWEI XU (The Ohio State University), Marnie Nicole Shapiro (The Ohio State University)
Abstract: Academic procrastination is a maladaptive study pattern frequently observed among secondary students, which negatively impacts students physical, mental, and social well-being. If performance management systems are not in place in secondary classrooms, the negative effects of academic procrastination may markedly increase as students enter college or the work force. Given that procrastination is often a result of an ineffective natural contingency, for several decades behavioral researchers have focused on the development of antecedent manipulations (e.g., a written commitment to study) or competing contingencies (e.g., frequent deadlines and differential grading practices) to prevent or reduce academic procrastination among young learners. In this poster, we provide secondary classroom teachers with both student- and teacher-administered evidence-based strategies (e.g., self-management, altering assignment or course designs) to reduce or prevent academic procrastination. In addition, we will present a framework, the Three-Tier Anti-Procrastination (T-TAP) Model, which encompasses these strategies and modifications for students with different learning histories.
 
 
 
Poster Session #360
AUT Monday Noon
Monday, May 25, 2015
12:00 PM–2:00 PM
Exhibit Hall C (CC)
52. Inducing First Instances of Speech in Non-Vocal Children With Autism: A Replication of Sign Mand Training With Delayed Vocal Prompt Procedure
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
SMITA AWASTHI (Behavior Momentum India), Sridhar Aravamudhan (Behavior Momentum India), Karola Dillenburger (Queens University Belfast)
Abstract:

Stimulus stimulus pairing (SSP; Sundberg et al., 1996) and mand training (Tincani et al., 2006) are technologies that have proven effective in increasing vocalization in children with autism. Teaching manual signs and gestures for this population is also effective not only in symbol acquisition but also in related outcomes such as speech comprehension and production (Schlosser and Wendt, 2008a). In the current study, three children with autism aged between 4.5 and 5 with low vocal-verbal repertoire of between 0 and 2 syllables were undergoing sign mand training in conjunction with SSP and vocal prompting procedures. Acquisition of vocals was improving only marginally, therefore a prompt delay was introduced (Carbone et al, 2010) to test if that would be more effective in inducing vocalization. Vocals were emitted under relevant motivating operations and with vocal models in the very first session of prompt delay intervention by two participants and after 4 weeks by third participant. Over a 4 months period of continued training, all three participants acquired additional 9-14 novel sounds or word approximations prompted or independent.. At 4 week follow up, the specific vocal sounds had generalized to a total of 24-56 vocals including other operants, namely, tacts, echoics and intraverbals.

 
53. Effect of Instructional Control on Parental Confidence in Delivering Instructions to Adolescents with Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
GILAH HABER (Kerry's Place Autism Services), Jnnifer Fairfield (Kerry's Place Autism Services), Mary Konstantareas (Kerry's Place Autism Services)
Abstract: In the literature, there is a shortage of studies regarding competence and confidence in parents of youths with Autism Spectrum Disorder (ASD) who are exposed to skills training based on Applied Behavior Analysis (ABA). This study included 52 parents of youths diagnosed with ASD, ages 11-18 who were currently receiving ABA services at Kerry’s Place Autism Services, Toronto Region. Each parent completed the Self-Reported Levels of Competence and Confidence Parenting Questionnaire containing 11 questions in a multiple choice format. Data resulting from individual questions were put into Statistical Package for the Social Sciences (SPSS). A series of ANOVAS revealed that the overall level of functioning, family size and location of the program had no significant effect on parent levels of competence or confidence. However, higher levels of competence and confidence, on specific questions were noted regarding child gender (i.e. boys), number of groups attended (by the child) and curricula used (social). This study confirms that self-reported parent competence and confidence levels directly correlate. Results also demonstrated that increased confidence directly correlated with increased competence, specifically to gain youths’ attention, deliver higher quality directions and to better follow through with original instructions.
 
54. Effects of using an activity schedule for children with autism spectrum disorders
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
SUNGHA CHO (University of Tsukuba Graduate School), Shigeki Sonoyama (University of Tsukuba)
Abstract: An activity schedule is a set of pictures or words that cues someone to engage in a sequence of activities. The goal of teaching schedules use is to enable children with autism to perform tasks and activities without direct prompting and guidance by parents or teachers (McClannahan & Krantz, 2010). The current study examined the effects of using an activity schedule of off-task behavior (inappropriate behavior; for example, leave chair, making noisy, hitting, crying, biting etc.) for 2 children with autism spectrum disorders. All sessions were consisted of 4~5 tasks and were conducted in a playroom. A picture activity schedule was used for this intervention. The schedule consisted of a laminated card with Velcro pictures in the center of playroom. A visual timer was also used. A multiple baseline design was used. During the baseline and intervention phases, data were collected using partial interval recording for three minutes each task during sessions. And on-schedule behavior analyses to seventeen small steps. The time intervals were 10 second. As a result, Both of children were presented that as on-schedule behavior increasing, off-task behavior (inappropriate behavior) and their lever decreased. The results of this intervention supported previous research on the effectiveness of using a picture schedule for children with autism spectrum disorders to help decrease off-task behavior.
 
55. The Emergence of Oral Labeling Following Equivalence-Based Instruction
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
KELLY DELLA ROSA (Alpine Learning Group), Jaime DeQuinzio (Alpine Learning Group), Bridget A. Taylor (Alpine Learning Group)
Abstract: Following years of traditional, direct instruction to orally label numerals, an adolescent girl with autism could not orally label double-digit numbers. Despite this deficit, she could read any written word (e.g., the word thirteen) and had an intense interest in baseball and the names and team affiliations of baseball players. Past research has demonstrated that oral labeling can emerge following equivalence-based instruction (Groskreutz et al., 2010) so we designed an equivalence-based protocol to determine if oral labeling will emerge following training. We are using a pretest/posttest experimental design to examine the effects of teaching specific conditional relations among complex auditory visual stimuli (i.e., Class A is the written digit and the auditory word), the written word (Class B), and the corresponding written names of baseball players (Class C) on the emergence of untaught relations and the oral labeling of digits. The format used for training and testing sessions is a match-to-sample protocol using a one-to-many training structure. Stimuli are presented on PowerPoint slides on a touch screen computer that require the participant to engage in an observing response (i.e., touch the screen) to reveal the sample stimulus and to then select the correct comparison stimulus. Prior to teaching, pretests were conducted for all relations. The participant tested at criterion for A-C and B-A on the prestest. Following the pretest, A-B and B-C relations were trained. After each training session, a probe is conducted for oral labeling of digits and the percentage of correct responses during these tests are recorded. The participant was not able to orally label any of the numbers of the pretest. After four sessions of equivalence based training, the participant correctly labeled digits on 75% of the trials without being directly taught to label these digits. Posttest performance is at criterion for all relations. We plan to continue with this protocol and add additional sets of numbers when the current set is mastered.
 
56. An Evidence-based Practice Review: Animal Assisted Therapies for Children with Autism Spectrum Disorders
Area: AUT; Domain: Basic Research
KRISTINA BROOKSHIRE (Northern Arizona University), Madalyn Hungate (Northern Arizona University Student), Alex Davidson (Northern Arizona University), Heather Ramsden (Northern Arizona University), Maisie Wilson (Northern Arizona University), Keanaloha Covington (Northern Arizona University), Andrew W. Gardner (Northern Arizona University)
Abstract: A literature review/analysis of studies targeting the effects of animal assisted therapies (AAT) on the behavior of children with ASD was conducted. Accessible databases were searched for peer-reviewed articles using specific key terms. Only “data-based” articles identified were scored according to the 21 quality indicators outlined by Horner, et al (2005) for single-subject design studies. The search resulted in 45 articles identified as “data-based” and specifically related to AAT and ASD. Only 18 of these articles could be scored for quality indicators with 100% by two independent reviewers. Reviewers scored and compiled the 18 articles into a database with reliability and were deemed “acceptable” if the article included between 18 - 21 quality indicators (including all internal validity criteria). Articles that did not meet these criteria were deemed “not acceptable” (i.e. 17 or fewer quality indicators). Only three empirical articles investigating AAT with individuals with ASD were found to be “acceptable,” according to the Horner, et al. guidelines for evidence-based practices. These results suggest that there may be some emerging empirical support for AAT with individuals with ASD. However, issues in diverse methodologies, what constitutes “therapy” with an animal, and similar dependent variables need to be addressed in future research.
 
57. "Get Outta My Way:" The Assessment and Treatment of Dangerous Repetitive Behavior
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
REBECCA HOLDEN (Bancroft), Jessica A Fedezko (Bancroft)
Abstract: Repetitive behavior is identified as one of the three main diagnostic criteria of Autism Spectrum Disorder, however it is widely understudied. Response blocking is widely used as a treatment for complex ritualistic behavior. Research has shown that the interruption of complex ritualistic behavior is correlated with other more severe problem behaviors (Hausman, Kahng, Farrell & Mongeon, 2009; Kuhn, Hardesty & Sweeney, 2009; Murphy, Macdonald, Hall & Oliver, 2000). The purpose of this study was to further investigate ways to extend a standard functional analysis of complex repetitive behavior. The study then used the information obtained from the functional analysis to identify a function-based treatment package for ritualistic behavior that cannot be safely treated with response blocking. A function based treatment package consisting of a verbal prompt to complete a behavior incompatible with ritualistic behavior and redirection to another task was then evaluated using a component analysis. Results indicated that the treatment package as a whole was successful in eliminating the participants complex ritualistic behavior. Reliability data was collected for 33% of Functional Analysis sessions, distributed across conditions with an average agreement of 93%. Reliability data was collected for 57% of treatment sessions with an average agreement of 99%.
 
58. Sustained and Selective Attention in Comorbid Autism Spectrum Disorder (ASD) and Attention-Deficit/Hyperactivity Disorder (ADHD)
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
AMBREEN SHAHABUDDIN (Eastern Michigan University), James T. Todd (Eastern Michigan University)
Abstract: Children with autism spectrum disorder (ASD) and attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder (ADHD) often have difficulties attending. While attentional characteristics have been identified in ASD and ADHD separately, research in comorbidity is limited. Children ages 8 to 10 years with ASD (n=16), ADHD (n=16), comorbid ASD+ADHD (n=16), and a control group (n=16) were administered the Conners Continuous Performance Test (CPT) to measure the quality of sustained and selective attention. The Conners-3 was completed by parents and teachers to examine reports of attentional problems. Results showed that errors of commission and omission were one standard deviation higher and more variable for the ASD+ADHD group (M=68.50, SD=8.89; M=62.62, SD=12.93) compared to the ASD (M=50.80, SD=8.17; M=51.28, SD=7.9), and ADHD groups (M=51.67, SD=7.81; M=54.57, SD=8.40). Parents reported elevated behaviors of inattention (M=81.37, SD=12.17) and impulsivity (M=82.47, SD=9.44) for the ASD+ADHD group, while teachers reported elevated behaviors of inattention (M=72.56, S=14.69). Significant correlations were found with parent and teacher reports of inattention [t(16)=.257, p=.336; t(16) =.104, p=.701] and impulsivity [t(16)=.585, p=.017); t(16)=.287, p=.281)] with CPT performance. Findings suggest that comorbid ASD and ADHD is characterized by greater impairments of inattention and impulsivity, indicating an additive co-occurrence, rather than a separate condition with a distinct pattern of deficits.
 
59. Video Self-Modeling Math Engagement Intervention for Children with Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
ROCHELLE SCHATZ (Indiana University-Bloomington), Rachel Peterson (Indiana University-Bloomington)
Abstract:

The researchers created a video self-modeling (VSM) intervention for increasing on-task classroom engagement for three elementary school males diagnosed with an autism spectrum disorder (ASD). VSM is a form of video modeling that enables the individual to perform specific, targeted behaviors by watching himself execute a positive behavior effectively. The effectiveness of VSM has been empirically validated by previous studies on youth with ASD, but few studies have investigated its usefulness in improving academic engagement. Numerous studies have shown that engaged time-on-task is directly related to higher levels of student achievement. Similarly, research has shown that off-task, unengaged students struggle academically, resulting in withdrawn, isolated, unmotivated, and failing students. For the purpose of this study, “on-task” is defined as attending to math worksheets by writing or focusing attention on worksheet instructions; raising hands for teacher assistance; or by preparing materials, such as sharpening pencils, opening binders, and putting worksheets away. The strong evidence-base for VSM for children with autism suggests that this intervention may promote appropriate classroom behavior. Results of the intervention, including data collected using a multiple baseline design from baseline to maintenance phases will be presented. Conclusions regarding intervention effectiveness, study implications, and future directions will be discussed.

 
60. Decreasing Overselective Stimulus Control through Differential Observing Response Training
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
MEGAN CICOLELLO (New England Center for Children), Rachel Farber (Shriver Center, University of Massachusetts), William Dube (Shriver Center, University of Massachusetts), Chata A. Dickson (New England Center for Children)
Abstract: Some individuals with autism have difficulty attending to all relevant stimuli in the environment, often referred to as overselective stimulus control. Two adolescent girls with autism (B68 and B69) and mean accuracy in the overselective range (75-77%) served as participants. In Study 1, a computer-presented differential observing response (DOR) was implemented to increase accuracy on a 2-sample delayed matching-to-sample (DMTS) task. The DOR was a compound simultaneous matching-to-sample task embedded within the 2-sample DMTS. Accuracy for B69 increased when the DOR was in effect, and accuracy for B68 increased when DOR was implemented with multiple exposures. In Study 2, the percentage of trials with the DOR was systematically decreased contingent on accuracy from the previous session. The DOR was thinned for both participants. A post-test following DOR thinning was administered to verify the level of support needed to maintain high accuracy on the 2-sample DMTS task. For B69, the DOR support needed was decreased to 25% of trials. For B68, the DOR requirement was completely eliminated, suggesting that overselective stimulus control can be decreased or eliminated with DOR training.
 
61. Treatment of food refusal using the teaching interaction procedure for individuals with autism spectrum disorders
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
Julide Saltuklaroglu (Autism Partnership), Eric Rudrud (St. Cloud State University), JOHN JAMES MCEACHIN (Autism Partnership), Justin B. Leaf (Autism Partnership Foundation)
Abstract: Individuals diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder frequently display food refusal and have a limited range of foods that they will consume. The majority of empirical support to treat food refusal for individuals diagnosed with autism spectrum disorders and developmental disabilities is escape extinction. One intervention which has been implemented to teach a variety of behaviors to individuals diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder but has not been implemented to treat food refusal is the teaching interaction procedure. The teaching interaction procedure is a multiple component procedure which consists of: (a) labeling and identifying the behavior; (b) providing a meaningful rationale; (c) breaking the skill down into smaller components; (d) the teacher demonstrating the behavior; (e) the student role-playing the behavior; and (f) providing feedback based upon performance. In this study, the researchers utilized a multiple baseline across foods design to evaluate the effects of the teaching interaction procedure to increase acceptance of new foods for a six year old child diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder. Results showed that the participant increased his food acceptance following the implementation of the teaching interaction procedure over various food items. Additionally, the results showed that few maladaptive behaviors occurred with the implementation of the procedure.
 
62. Treatment of Anxiety and Severe Problem Behavior in an Individual with Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
FRANCES NIEVES SERRET (Crossroads School for Children), Keira M. Moore (Crossroads School for Children), William H. Ahearn (Western New England University)
Abstract: Anxiety is a cluster of responses that occur in the presence of a conditioned aversive stimulus that signals future presentation of an aversive stimulus. Although difficult to define and assess, anxiety affects many individuals and is prevalent in those with autism (Mayes et al., 2011). The purpose of the current study was to behaviorally measure anxiety, and to determine the effectiveness of an anxiety and functional communication treatment package in decreasing anxiety and severe problem behavior related to it. The participant was a 17-year-old male with autism who engaged in high-intensity aggression. A functional analysis was conducted and showed that biting was maintained by escape from loud noises. This was followed by an anxiety assessment, which confirmed the presence of anxiety in the participant. During the anxiety treatment, the participant learned to engage in an anxiety-reducing response while in the presence of loud noises. Once the anxiety treatment was completed, functional communication training was initiated, where the participant acquired a functional communication response, in which a sign approximation for stop terminated loud noises. Inter-observer agreement was collected for 33% of sessions and was above 80% for all measures. This treatment package reduced severe problem behavior and anxiety.
 
63. Building Bridges: Outcomes of a Social Skills Group for Children with Autism Spectrum Disorder, and their Typical Peers Utilizing Parent Education.
Area: AUT; Domain: Basic Research
JASMINE TEJWANI (In Stepps), John Garlock (In Stepps), Elise Landgraf (In Stepps)
Abstract: This poster examines the efficacy of combining brief parent training sessions along with the Teaching Interaction Model (Autism Partnership, 2012), and the Children's Friendship Training (Frankle, 2002) for three social skills training groups. Group 1 contained 5 children total (ages 4-5 years): 2 children diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder, 1 child with selective mutism, 1 child with social deficits that do not meet the requirements for autism spectrum disorder, and 1 neurotypical peer. Group 2 contained 7 children total (ages 8-9): 6 children diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder, and 1 neurotypical peer. Group 3 contained 7 children total (ages 6-7): 6 diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder and 1 neurotypical peer. Each group utilized the Teaching Interaction Model which teaches social skills by describing the behaviors, segmenting the skill into smaller steps, modeling the behavior, then having the child role play the behavior, and providing feedback. Small group parent training was provided at the end of each social skills class in order to facilitate generalization outside of the teaching environment though parent mediated skills training. Data taken on body orientation, on- topic conversation, responding to peers, joining conversation, initiating conversation, and joining peers in play showed significant gains in all areas. Data on skill use outside of the teaching environment shows successful generalization. Parents of participants also reported that socially significant skill gains were observed.
 
64. Using an Abbreviated Assessment to Compare the Effectiveness of Different Error-Correction Procedures on Skill Acquisition for Children with Autism Spectrum Disorder
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
Regina A. Carroll (West Virginia University), Brad Joachim (West Virginia University), Jennifer Owsiany (West Virginia University), Jessica Morgan (West Virginia University), JESSICA CHEATHAM (West Virginia University)
Abstract: Previous research supports the use of a variety of error-correction procedures to facilitate skill acquisition during discrete trial instruction. At present there is no quick and easy way for caregivers to determine which error-correction procedure is most effective for an individual learner. In the current study we used an abbreviated assessment to rapidly compare the effects of five error-correction procedures on skill acquisition for two children diagnosed with an autism spectrum disorder. First, we conducted an abbreviated assessment exposing participants to 36 to 48 trials of each error correction procedure. Next, we conducted validation assessments and compared the effectiveness of the different error-correction procedures. Finally, we assessed participants’ preference for the different error-correction procedures using a concurrent-chains assessment. The results showed a high level of correspondence between the abbreviated assessment, validation assessments, and concurrent-chains assessment. Overall these findings suggest that an abbreviated assessment consisting of 36 to 48 trials may be useful for identifying the most effective error-correction procedure for individual learners.
 
65. Improving the Conversation Skills of a College Student with High-Functioning Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
CHARLOTTE MANN (Western New England University), Amanda Karsten (Western New England University)
Abstract: While intellectually capable of meeting the academic demands of college, many individuals with high functioning autism (HFA) struggle with social deficits which are characteristic of their diagnosis (Nuernberger, Ringdahl, Vargo, Crumpecker, & Gunnarsson, 2013; Pinder-Amaker, 2014). Few studies have examined tactics to assess and improve the social skills of young adults with HFA (i.e., engaging in reciprocal conversations and interpreting nonverbal cues.) The purpose of this study was to improve the conversation skills of a college student diagnosed with HFA. A multiple baseline design across behaviors was used to demonstrate the effectiveness of a behavioral skills training package on increasing both the frequency and quality of questions, percentage of appropriate initiations and interaction endings in the context of a conversation. Interobserver agreement (IOA) was collected for 40% of sessions (mean = 95.98).
 
66. A Methodology for Conducting Functional Analyses to Confirm Hypothesized Tangible Function of Food Stealing
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
CORMAC MACMANUS (New England Center for Children), William H. Ahearn (New England Center for Children), Sean Heaney (University of Ulster)
Abstract: Food stealing is a common disruptive behavior among individuals with developmental disabilities. Research is lacking in determining the function of this behavior to better inform effective treatment. Functional analysis is used to test the sensitivity of responding to three main types of reinforcement contingencies: social positive, social negative, and automatic. The current study assessed hypothesized tangible functions of food stealing for two individuals with autism. Food stealing was defined as actual or attempted taking of food without permission from a present teacher. Test-control functional analyses were conducted in which access to food was contingent on engaging in the response in the test condition. Noncontingent food was delivered on a fixed time schedule in the control condition. This timed delivery of food was based on the average inter-response time as measured in the first test condition conducted with each participant. Results showed high responding in the test condition and zero to low rates of responding in the control condition.
 
67. Functional Analysis of Problem Behavior Occurring during Transitions from Activity to Activity
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
STACY COHEN (New England Center for Children), Clelia Deltour (New England Center for Children), William H. Ahearn (New England Center for Children)
Abstract: Children with autism and related disabilities may present difficulties with transitions, both between locations and between activities (Davis, 1987). As behavior analysts, we aim to identify the conditions under which problem behavior occurs and its maintaining variable. The purpose of this study was to develop and conduct a functional analysis of problem behavior occurring during transitions for two participants with a disability. First, we identified for each participant several preferred, neutral, and non-preferred activities using caregiver surveys and a structured assessment. Second, we conducted a preference assessment to further clarify the results obtained using the caregiver surveys and structured assessment and identify one preferred, one neutral and one non-preferred activity for each participant. Finally, we conducted a functional analysis of problem behavior occurring during transitions between the activities previously identified. The preliminary results obtained suggest that problem behavior occurred when the transition involved a worsening in the reinforcement condition, for example terminating one activity to initiate a non-preferred activity (negative reinforcement contingency). Interobserver Agreement (IOA) was collected for over 30% of the sessions and averaged over 90% for all scored responses.
 
69. Comparing Treatment Options for Decreasing Inappropriate Vocal Behavior
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
JENNIFER CRONER (Temple University), Matthew Tincani (Temple University), Amanda Guld Fisher (Temple University)
Abstract: Inappropriate vocal behavior maintained by automatic reinforcement is associated with negative outcomes including slowed skill acquisition and stigmatizations (DiGenarro Reed, Hirst, & Hyman, 2012; Liu-Gitz & Banda, 2010; MacDonald et al., 2007). Several behavioral interventions have been research to reduce inappropriate vocal behavior. Two consequence-based interventions response interruption and redirection (RIRD) and differential reinforcement of other behavior (DRO) have shown some promise with this reduction. The purpose of this study was to compare the efficacy of these interventions to reduce inappropriate vocal behavior in one young adult with intellectual disabilities. The results of this study suggest that DRO was slightly more effective during the alternating treatments design, and during the best treatment phase reduced levels of inappropriate vocal behavior further; this reduction was maintained as the DRO interval was increased.
 
70. Teaching Facial Expressions to Children with Autism in Naturalistic Settings Using Video Modeling
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
ANA BIBAY (IME MAIA - Paris, France), Neal N. Fleisig (Professional Crisis Management, Inc.)
Abstract: The purpose of the present study was to assess the effects of video modeling to teach facial expressions to two school-age children with autism. The students are enrolled in a day school program in Paris (France). A multiple probe across responses design was used to evaluate the effects of video modeling on correctly responding to facial expressions. This study supports early research indicating that the use of video modeling procedures can increase correct responding to facial expressions in children with autism. The study also indicates that responses in naturalistic settings can be trained concurrently with the intervention to improve outcomes in terms of generalization.
 
71. A review of the various models of home-based interventions in Behavior Analysis
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
AARTI HARESH THAKORE (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), Ashley Whittington (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology)
Abstract: Abstract There are different types of treatment options for children diagnosed with Autism, and most can be classified as home-based, clinic-based, and interventions in school setting. Few studies have suggested that 35-40 hours per week of early, home-based intervention has a significant impact on the learning and development of children diagnosed with Autism (e.g., Lovaas, 1981; Sheinkopf and Siegel, 1998). Consequently, many organizations begin to provide home-based services to the families of children diagnosed with Autism. However, the nature and prevalence of home-based intervention is not yet clearly understood. Some in-home therapy is conducted by parents who are trained in ABA by BCBAs, whereas some in-home services are provided by a team of paraprofessionals who would conduct therapy under the supervision of a BCBA. Thus, this review will be an attempt to gather data on how many agencies across the U.S. provide in-home services, using the Google search engine. These data will be analyzed further to understand the nature of the advertised in-home services and role of BCBA supervision involved in the dissemination of home-based therapy.
 
72. Decreasing Self-Stimulatory Behaviors utilizing Differential Reinforcement of Low Rates (DRL) and Differential Reinforcement of Diminishing Rates (DRD) in individuals with Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
ASHLEY N. FIORILLI (Applied Behavior Consultants), Casey Dudley (Applied Behavior Consultants), Andrew R. Weiher (Applied Behavior Consultants Inc./ St.Cloud State)
Abstract: Individuals with autism often display self-stimulatory behaviors that interfere with social skills and may even lead to more intense behavior excesses. Cooper, Heron, and Heward (2007) define DRL as reinforcement being delivered for the occurrence of the target behavior that is spaced from previous response by a minimum interresponse time. It is noted that the application of DRL should be linked with behaviors that occur too frequently but can remain in the individual’s repertoire. DRD occurs when the individual contacts reinforcement at the end of a predetermined interval contingent upon the specific criterion of target responses and then number of responses by a gradually decreasing criterion. The purpose of the intervention is to determine the effectiveness of these procedures for decreasing self-stimulatory behaviors. The procedures were effective in decreasing self-stimulatory behavior across all three participants. The procedures were successfully implemented by two different direct staff members. Staff was able to implement the individual’s regular ABA programming while collecting data on the DRD and DRL procedure.
 
73. Assessment of Outcomes of Children with Autism Spectrum Disorder Receiving EIBI Services in a Bilingual, Centre-Based Environment
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
HAYLEY VININSKY (Gold Learning Centre), Ali Dussault (ABIL-T ABA Programme), Nathalie Garcin (Abe Gold Learning and Research Centre)
Abstract: In May 2011, a bilingual (French and English) multicultural centre-based, non-profit EIBI centre was built to meet the needs of children aged 18 months to-6 years in a large urban area. Given results of EIBI on various variables in other jurisdictions, our team sought to assess several outcomes related to the receipt of EIBI services, and to ascertain whether they replicated what was indicated in the primarily American literature. Children aged 18 months to 6 years received at least 20 weekly hours of centre-based EIBI services. At intake, and each following year, parents completed two questionnaires: the PDDBI and the PSI. In addition, children’s progress was evaluated using the VB MAPP. Paired samples t-tests were used to evaluate changes in parental stress, autism symptomatology, problem behaviour, barriers to learning, language, and academics. Results indicated that there are no significant differences in parental stress following both one and two years of services. Significant differences were found in VB MAPP scores. Additionally, ANOVA results indicated no significant differences in VB MAPP scores between children of different linguistic backgrounds, suggesting all children, regardless of linguistic background, highly benefited from the intervention.
 
74. Matrix Training of Verbal and Nonverbal Greetings with Primary School Students with Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
Malarie Thompson (Stephen F. Austin State University), GINGER KELSO (Stephen F. Austin State University), Glen L. McCuller (Stephen F. Austin State University)
Abstract: By increasing a student’s repertoire of social skills, they will be better able to develop interpersonal relationships and be potentially more successful in the academic process. Matrix training, an approach that requires training to be framed around a matrix, intended to result in some information being taught and some being generalized, was utilized to develop a training format for two primary school aged boys with autism and in self-contained classrooms. A 4x4 matrix was set up to organize a training schedule for the boys, in which they would be taught to respond with the appropriate social greeting to an appropriate and familiar school staff member. The participants were taught four combinations of social greetings to four pictures of familiar school personnel. At the end of the study, matrix training was shown to facilitate generalization to untrained social greetings and to the actual school staff. This study demonstrates that matrix training is an effective and efficient means of teaching social skills, particularly social greetings, to primary aged children with autism.
 
75. The Effects of Auditory Matching Protocol on Echoics in Students Diagnosed With Autism Spectrum Disorder and Speech/Language Delays
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
Suzzanna Javed (Teachers College, Columbia University), LEANNA MELLON (Teachers College, Columbia University), Georgina Kemp (Teachers College, Columbia University), Nelcy Garcia (Rockland BOCES)
Abstract: We tested the effects of an auditory match-to-sample protocol on the emission of echoics. The participants selected for the study were four elementary school students diagnosed with autism. Three participants functioned at the emergent listener/emergent speaker level of verbal behavior, and one participant functioned at the listener/ emergent speaker/pre-reader level of verbal behavior. All participants were selected because they did not emit vocal verbal operants with point-to-point correspondence to the vocal stimulus of another person. The independent variable was the implementation of the basic auditory match-to-sample protocol. The basic auditory match-to-sample protocol requires the participant to correctly match auditory stimuli when presented with a correct exemplar and a non-exemplar. The dependent variables were the emission of full echoics, partial echoics, and incorrect echoics. A time lagged multiple probe design was implemented. Results demonstrated the implementation of auditory matching protocol increased full echoics and partial echoics for all participants. Keywords: auditory match-to-sample, naming, verbal behavior, tact, learn unit, echoics
 
76. Contingent adult vocal imitation promotes reciprocal vocal imitation for children with autism.
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
YUKA ISHIZUKA (Keio University), Jun'ichi Yamamoto (Keio University)
Abstract: Several studies suggested that for children with autism, contingent adult imitation increase non-vocal communication such as attention and proximity to adult. However, few studied showed the effect of contingent adult imitation for vocal communication such as vocal imitation and vocal turn taking in children with autism. The previous study was to examine whether contingent adult vocal imitation increase vocal communication compared with contingent response. Six children with autism (CA: 36-63months) participated in alternating treatment design composed of contingent imitation condition and contingent response condition. One block composed of 4 sessions and two minutes session were conducted both conditions and lasted four blocks. During contingent imitation condition, adult imitated children’s vocal response immediately. During contingent response condition, adult didn’t imitate but responded their vocal response immediately. Children increased the number of vocal imitation and vocal turn taking between experimenter and participant compared with contingent response condition. The result showed that contingent imitation produced reciprocal vocal imitation and promoted vocal communication in children with autism. It is considered that contingent imitation was effective strategy for early intervention in children with autism.
 
77. Generative Language Learning in Severe Autism: Matrix Training through a Mobile Application
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
OLIVER WENDT (Purdue University), Ning Hsu (Purdue University), Amber Torelli (Purdue University), Katelyn Warner (Purdue University)
Abstract: Non-verbal individuals with autism who use tablet devices to communicate often do not surpass single-word responses for requesting and labeling with limited vocabulary. A mobile application, SPEAKmore!, was developed to carry out matrix training, an intervention to systematically build up vocabulary and teach longer word combinations. Linguistic elements (e.g., nouns, verbs) are presented in systematic combination matrices, which are arranged to induce generalized rule-like behavior. A-B designs were replicated to assess the acquisition of action-object combinations on a tablet device. Generalization probes were taken during intervention to assess performance on combinations not taught before. This design is currently implemented with five participants, 8-12 years old, with an official diagnosis of severe, non-verbal autism according to CARS-2 and ADOS-2 scores; these have no more than 10 spoken words, and communicate primarily on a tablet. Preliminary results for two participants (Figure 2) show performance measured as percentage of correct symbol combinations. Both participants demonstrate a similar pattern of successful acquisition during the intervention condition and subsequent generalization to untrained stimuli. Effect sizes measured by the Non-overlap of all Pairs Index indicate medium-strong and strong effects. Results, with considerable, but limited confidence given the pre-experimental nature, suggest matrix training through a mobile application may be a promising approach. To further investigate the robustness of this technology intervention, findings need to be replicated using (a) full experimental designs, and (b) different language targets (e.g., agent-action, adjective-object combinations).
 
78. Analyzing the relationship between social skills and success with a video-modeling intervention technique
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
LOGAN MCDOWELL (Florida International University), Anibal Gutierrez Jr. Jr. (Florida International University)
Abstract: This study analyzed the effectiveness of video-modeling (VM) and live-modeling (LM) procedures for teaching imitation to young children with autism spectrum disorders (ASD). Little research exists examining what predictors may impact success with VM, however age, social skills, attention, and imitation have all been suggested as potential factors. This study aims to explore a subset of these factors as they relate to a VM intervention for teaching imitation. Participants in this study included 6 children under the age of 4 with a diagnosis of ASD. All were taught to imitate two equivalent behaviors, one using LM and one using VM. Pre-treatment Autism Diagnostic Observation Schedule (ADOS) assessments were used to analyze the social skills of each participant. We hypothesize that those children with fewer social skills, as evidenced by higher social affect totals on the ADOS, will be more successful with the VM intervention. The results of this study will add to the available literature on VM by providing potentially valuable information about the impact of this individual variable.
 
79. Effects of Instructional Videomodeling on Teaching Behavioral Skills to Individuals with Autism Spectrum Disorders Through Caregivers
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
ADRIANO ALVES BARBOZA (Universidade Federal do Pará), Romariz Barros (Universidade Federal do Pará)
Abstract: Currently, the Autism Spectrum Disorder data has increased in prevalence rates in a manner that establishes an emergent need to disseminate the intervention based in Applied Behavior Analysis (ABA), considering that some countries do not have enough financial support or amount of behavior analysts dedicated to that cause. This paper shows results of a research aiming to teach behavioral skills to children with ASD by teaching caregivers using instructional videomodeling. Three children and their caregivers are participating in this research. The tasks to be taught are a preference assessment and two intervention programs based on the children assessments, using a multiple-baseline design. The performance on the preference assessment increased from 0% to 91% for Alice and from 19% to 99% for Cassio. The intervention programs performance increased from an average of 5% to 91% for Alice and from 35% to 98% for Cassio. We observed the generalization of this repertoire (90% for Alice and 91% for Cassio). The intervention is still in course with one more participant. By these data, the instructional videomodeling shows itself as a promising tool to teach caregivers of children with developmental disabilities and to disseminate the Behavior Analytic-based Intervention with good quality and lower costs.
 
80. Video Modeling Intervention for a Elementary Students Diagnosed With Autism Spectrum Disorder
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
LINA GILIC (St. John's University)
Abstract: Video modeling can impact positively on social behaviors in students with autism. Specifically, video modeling was implemented for a young elementary student with ASD. This study was conducted in a reversal design, in which the student demonstrated an increase in social skills after presentation of the video model. The intervention data show that the students behavior decreased by three to five times from baseline. During the return to intervention, target behaviors had occurred between 0 to 2 times a day, a decrease of 3x from baseline. This data from the intervention suggests that the duration of the video and frequency viewed may influence its effectiveness as a teaching tool. Video modeling shows to have been a tool used to further improve this students behavior.
 
81. Visual Scene Displays vs. Exchange- Based Communication for Children with ASD
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
KRISTI MORIN (Texas A&M University), Jennifer Ganz (Texas A&M University), Ee Rea Hong (Texas A&M University), Whitney Gilliland (Texas A&M University), Nicole Svenkerud (Texas A&M University)
Abstract: Visual scene displays (VSDs) are a novel type of augmentative and alternative communication (AAC) that have recently been investigated as an alternative to traditional, grid-based systems. However, most of the limited research on VSDs has focused on typically-developing populations. In addition, a limited range of communicative functions has been explored (i.e., requests). This study sought to expand on the existing literature on VSDs by investigating the differential impact that VSDs versus traditional, grid-based systems have on the number of spontaneous comments and correct answers to questions made by two male, preschool children with autism who exhibited different levels of functional speech. The participants in the current study were exposed to two conditions—a VSD condition and an exchange-based communication (EBC) condition—in an alternating treatment design. The results indicated that VSDs may be more appropriate for children who display echoic and matching-to-sample skills prior to being exposed to a VSD.
 
82. Treatment Comparison between the Picture Exchange Communication SystemTM and Proloquo2Go for Manding Behaviour in a Young Boy with Autism Spectrum Disorder: What does the data tell us?
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
KATHRYN MANN (Monarch House), Tracie L. Lindblad (Monarch House)
Abstract: There has been a growing body of literature examining the use of various augmentative and alternative communication (AAC) systems for individuals with Autism Spectrum Disorders (ASD). There exists emerging evidence to support the Picture Exchange Communication System (PECS) and equivocal evidence for speech generating devices (SGDs) such as an iPadTM with Proloquo2Go to support functional communication skills in non-vocal/minimally vocal individuals. A young boy with ASD and limited vocal-verbal behaviour was taught PECS from Phase I to Phase IV to mastery. Parents and a Speech-Language Pathologist (SLP) from the local AAC clinic recommended transition to an SGD using Proloquo2Go. Baseline data regarding the number of sessions to mastery for PECS, frequency, and percent correct of mands were collected prior to transition to the SGD. Implementation of the SGD mirrored the implementation of PECS with corresponding data collected for treatment comparison purposes. The results showed that the frequency of manding favoured the SGD while the percentage of correct responses slightly favoured PECS. Clear differences existed in the number of sessions to mastery for Phase IV between the systems. Furthermore, generalization from one system to another was not automatic. Accordingly, data-based decisions are required when implementing and selecting a functional communication system.
 
83. Using Demand Fading Sets to Decrease Multiple Problem Behavior For Adolescents with Autism: Group Study.
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
DAVID BARTON (Firefly Autism), Kenneth G. Winn (Firefly Autism)
Abstract: An FBA was conducted on 6 individuals with developmental disabilities where instructional (demand) situations were the common antecedent to escape maintained behaviors consisting of loud vocalizations, physical aggression, dropping, self injurious behavior and property destruction among other behaviors. Treatment included a demand fading protocol where demands were graded based on difficulty and placed into demand sets that were ordered and introduced according to predetermined mastery criteria of low rates of problem behavior. Demand fading protocol resulted low rates of problem behavior across multiple individuals.
 
84. Reinforcing Short Latency to Task Completion to Treat Noncompliance.
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
SARA JEGLUM (The University of Iowa), Deva Carrion (University of Iowa), Matthew O'Brien (The University of Iowa), James Green (University of Iowa), Gunsung Lee (The University of Iowa), Wendy K. Berg (The University of Iowa)
Abstract: Some children with autism spectrum disorder struggle with staying on task. It may be due to excessive slowness. This excessive slowness may function in a social capacity, such as to avoid demands (i.e. long latency to task initiation). This poster presents a case study of an 8-year-old male, Tim, diagnosed with autism referred to a two-week Day Treatment clinic for noncompliance, aggression and destruction. To treat problem behavior, we implemented a work then break schedule. We saw noncompliance ascend over several sessions. To treat noncompliance, we then implemented a schedule in which Tim had a discrete time (i.e. 10 minutes) to complete a work task that was observed to take him 3 minutes when compliant. Once he completed the work, he had the remaining balance of time to play. Thus, short latency to task completion was reinforced. We saw a significant decrease of noncompliance. These results expand on Tiger et al. (2007)s work. Limited research has evaluated interventions to accelerate task completion. Further research concerning response-dependent reinforcement should be considered.
 
85. Assessment and Treatment of Inappropriate Sexual Behavior in a Hispanic Child With Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
NORMA ROJAS (The University of Texas-Pan American), Daniel Gonzalez (The University of Texas-Pan American), Noemi Trevino (The University of Texa- Pan American), Zina A. Eluri (The University of Texas-Pan American)
Abstract: This poster focuses on the assessment and treatment of inappropriate sexual behavior (ISB) in a 4-year old Hispanic child with autism. A functional analysis was conducted and it was determined that inappropriate sexual behavior was maintained by multiple reinforcers including attention, escape from demands, and tangible items. Based on the results of the functional analysis and the nature of the behavior, treatment involved a discrimination training procedure. This procedure used a discriminative stimulus to indicate whether or not the behavior was appropriate in a specific location. The child was taught that he could engage in the behavior in the presence of a green stop sign and that he should not engage in the behavior in the presence of a red stop sign. This behavior was ignored throughout treatment. Treatment involved permitting the child to engage in ISB, as indicated by the green stop sign, for approximately 50% of the sessions. Reductions in this behavior were observed and continued to decrease when transitioned into the home setting.
 
86. Dissemination of Evidence-based Intervention Strategies: Examining the Effectiveness of Performance Feedback
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
ATSUKO MATSUZAKI (Keio University), Jun'ichi Yamamoto (Keio University)
Abstract: Evidence has demonstrated that early intervention based on applied behavior analysis (ABA) improved several functions of children with autism spectrum disorders. Studies of dissemination to community settings are now needed. The authors examined the effectiveness of performance feedback by comparing two groups. Twenty-one specialists, such as special education teachers, staff at regional support centers, and clinical psychologists, were assigned to a lecture with performance feedback group or a lecture only group. Both groups received a three-hr didactic lecture which explained the basic knowledge of ABA, intervention techniques, and intervention skills. The lecture with performance feedback group consequently received 30-min performance feedback, which applied modeling, verbal instructions, and immediate reinforcement, on one-to-one intervention setting. The participants intervention skills were assessed with a 20-item fidelity list, and their knowledge was assessed with a 20-question knowledge examination which the authors had developed. The results showed that (a) both groups increased their fidelity scores after the training, (b) the averaged post-training fidelity score was higher in the lecture with performance group than the lecture only group, and (c) the both groups increased their knowledge scores after the training. Implications in relation to the effectivity and feasibility of the performance feedback will be provided.
 
 
 
Poster Session #361
DDA Monday Noon
Monday, May 25, 2015
12:00 PM–2:00 PM
Exhibit Hall C (CC)
87. A Competition Assessment to Identify Relative Preference between Positive and Negative Reinforcement for Multiply-Controlled Problem Behavior
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
CAITLIN PARKER (Bancroft), Katie Donohoe (Bancroft), Susan Field (Georgian Court University), Nicole Sullivan (Bancroft), Tracy L. Kettering (Bancroft), Sean Smith (Bancroft), Patrick Thulen (Bancroft)
Abstract: Access to contingent or noncontingent positive reinforcement has been shown to compete with problem behavior maintained by automatic reinforcement (Fisher et al.,1997; Hagopian et al., 1994), escape (Lomas et al., 2010, Piazza, 1997), or attention (Fisher et al., 1997). Lalli et al. (1999) used a competition assessment to predict the effectiveness of positive reinforcement-based interventions for escape-maintained problem behavior. Similar assessments may help to identify critical components of intervention for multiply-controlled problem behavior, particularly when consumption of one reinforcement (e.g., a break) limits the availability of the alternative reinforcer (e.g., tangible item for appropriate behavior). The current study extends the research of Lalli et al. to multiply-controlled problem behavior in individuals with developmental disabilities. Relative preference for positive (tangible) and negative (escape) reinforcement were assessed using a concurrent schedule of reinforcement. Results indicated that the assessment may predict situations when a thin schedule of positive reinforcement may be effective for reducing multiply-controlled problem behavior.
 
88. Increasing Duration on Vocational Tasks using Visual Prompt and Self-Monitoring by an Adult with Developmental Disabilities
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
ICHA K. ARIEF (St. Cloud State University), Kim Frost (TSE, Inc.), Benjamin N. Witts (St. Cloud State University)
Abstract: This intervention compared continuous independent work during two different vocational tasks through the use of visual prompts and a self-monitoring schedule, by an adult with multiple developmental disabilities across group and individual activities. The accuracy of behavioral product was measured before and during program implementation. Visual prompts included pictures of objects and performance steps in 3 x 5 in. pictures compiled in a binder. The self-monitoring materials included a reinforcement schedule board and timer. Results indicated high levels of continuous independent work during the use of visual prompts and self-monitoring, and high levels of accuracy for behavioral product.
 
90. Using Problem Behaviour as an Indicator of Preference in Individuals With Profound Multiple Disabilities
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
BRENNA HENRIKSON (University of Manitoba), Brenna Henrikson (University of Manitoba), Alison Cox (University of Manitoba), Jade Wightman (University of Manitoba), CT Yu (University of Manitoba)
Abstract: Individuals with profound multiple disabilities (PMD) have a limited set of skills, including choice making. Often individuals with PMD engage in challenging behaviours (e.g., self-injury, stereotypy), and it is possible that they do this to indicate preference. Identifying items that are preferred by individuals with PMD may improve behaviour program outcomes. However, existing studies that have examined preference among individuals with PMD do not often incorporate reinforcer assessments to confirm preference assessment outcomes. The current study examines whether problem behaviour can be used as an indicator of preference in individuals with PMD. Four phases were conducted. In phase 1 caregivers completed the Reinforcer Assessment for Individuals with Severe Disabilities (RAISD) to provide information about preferences. Phase 2 involved conducting a standard functional analysis to determine the environmental variables maintaining challenging behaviour. Next, a single stimulus preference assessment was conducted to evaluate participants preference for items that were indicated as highly favored by the caregiver. Finally, a direct reinforcer assessment will be conducted to validate the results of the preference assessment. Frequency of engagement in problem behavior, engagement with preferred items, and touching items served as the dependent variables for preference assessments.
 
91. Conditional Discrimination Abilities and Differentiation of Functional Analysis Data
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
JANIE FUNK (University of Nevada, Reno), Billy Rom (University of Nevada, Reno), W. Larry Williams (University of Nevada, Reno)
Abstract: Despite established utility, functional analyses have long been noted for disadvantages including inconclusive data as evident by the numerous modifications of the standard methodology since its development. As such, researchers continue to evaluate the predictive use of descriptive assessments, though they have been poor predictors of FA outcomes (Camp, Iwata, Hammond, & Bloom, 2009, and Pence, Roscoe, Bourret, & Ahearn, 2009). Undifferentiated data is often attributed to a deficit of discrimination skills of the individual. Greenwald, Senuik, & Williams (2012) evaluated the extent to which conditional discrimination abilities affected a participant’s differential responding during a multi-element FA. Additionally, discrimination affects with inclusion of programmed SDs during the FAs were evaluated. Conditional discrimination abilities were assessed by the Assessment of Basic Learning Abilities (ABLA) developed by Kerr, Meyerson, and Flora in 1977. They concluded that individuals who were unable to make conditional discriminations were less likely to show differentiated results in an FA and the inclusion of programmed SDs may not aid in discrimination between conditions. The current poster discusses theoretical implications of Greenwald et al., 2012 with respect to utilizing the ABLA-R prior to a formal functional analysis (DeWiele, Martin, Martin, Yu, & Thomson, 2010).
 
92. Using Redistribution to Decrease Packing and Meal Duration in a Child with Feeding Problems
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
STEPHANIE MILLER (Clinic 4 Kidz), Meeta R. Patel (Clinic 4 Kidz)
Abstract: Packing is a problematic behavior in children with feeding problems where children hold food or liquids in the mouth for extended periods of time. This may cause meals to last for long durations and impede an increase in caloric intake and cause insufficient weight gain. Multiple treatments have been used to reduce packing behaviors including food redistribution, texture manipulation, simultaneous presentation of preferred and non-preferred foods, flipped spoon presentation, and liquid and solid chasers. However the majority of these studies focused on pureed food as the target texture. In addition, meal duration has not been used as a major dependent variable. The purpose of this study was to decrease packing behaviors of regular textured food using redistribution with a Nuk® brush in order to decrease the duration of meals for a child with severe feeding problems. A reversal design was used to evaluate the treatment protocol. Data showed that even though packing behaviors only reduced moderately, the duration of packing behaviors substantially reduced which then reduced the overall duration of meals. This allowed for an increase in the volume of meals which led to higher caloric intake.
 
93. Implementing Bolus Fading and Escape Extinction to Decrease Gagging and Expulsion in a Child who is Liquid Dependent
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
STEPHANIE MILLER (Clinic 4 Kidz), Meeta R. Patel (Clinic 4 Kidz)
Abstract: Children with severe feeding problems have restricted diets and only consume certain types or textures of food and in some cases may only consume liquids at inappropriate ages. When presented non-preferred food and/or liquids they display a wide variety of inappropriate behaviors to avoid them. When problematic eaters refuse to consume age-appropriate textures, they are not exposed to opportunities of learning the oral motor skills needed to eat successfully. Underdeveloped skills make it more difficult to control food efficiently which may lead to more problematic behaviors such as gagging and expulsion when presented more difficult textures. Treatments used to reduce expulsion include escape extinction via re-presentation with a spoon, escape extinction via re-presentation with a Nuk brush, presentation via flipped spoon, texture manipulation, chasers, and presentation via flipped spoon combined with chin prompting. The purpose of this study was to use bolus fading and escape extinction to decrease gagging and expulsion with solids in a child who is liquid dependent. A reversal design was used to evaluate the treatment package. Data showed that in baseline gagging and expulsions were high when the child was presented a level spoon of crumbles (crushed meltable solids) and regular textured meltable solids. As the bolus of crumbles was faded in small increments, both gagging and expulsion decreased. During this time skill training was being implemented using non-food tools (e.g., Nuk® brush, chew stick). Once the target bolus was obtained, regular textured meltable solids were presented following escape extinction (re-presentation). Data showed that both gagging and expulsions reduced when presented regular textured meltable solids.
 
94. Tantalizing or Tedious Tokens: The effect of pictures of preferred versus neutral stimuli as tokens on behavior and task completion
Area: DDA; Domain: Service Delivery
JOSEPH BAIRD (Indiana University South Bend), John Haggard (Indiana University South Bend), Sorah Stein (Partnership for Behavior Change)
Abstract: Using effective reinforcers is crucial to progress in the therapy setting. Numerous studies (i.e., Matson & Boisjoli, 2009) demonstrate the effectiveness of tokens as secondary reinforcers in ABA programming. In particular, using pictures of objects of obsession as tokens was demonstrated to decrease a variety of inappropriate behaviors and increase appropriate, on-task behaviors in three children diagnosed with Autism (Charlop-Christy, 1998). The current study replicates this, with an older child, who has a lower tested IQ than the children in the Charlop-Christy study. We compared using neutral tokens (stars on a plain, white background) with pictures of preferred items (characters and a scene from the movie Frozen®) as tokens to reinforce task completion and attending behaviors associated with the child’s therapy. We also measured inappropriate behaviors related to task refusal for the child during therapy. Implications for the use of pictures of preferred items versus neutral pictures as tokens will be discussed.
 
95. A Comparison of Prompting Tactics to Teach Intraverbals to an Adolescent With Down Syndrome
Area: DDA; Domain: Service Delivery
ABIGAIL WALLACE (University of West Florida), D. Reed Bechtel (University of West Florida), Sue Heatter (University of West Florida), Leasha Barry (University of West Florida)
Abstract:

Ingvarsson and Hollobaugh (2011) found that tact-to-intraverbal-transfer-of-stimulus-control (i.e. a picture prompt) was more effective than echoic-to-intraverbal-transfer-of-stimulus-control (i.e. an echoic prompt) in teaching correct responses to intraverbal questions in three preschool-aged boys with autism. The current study was a systematic replication of Ingvarsson and Hollobaugh with a 14-year-old girl with Down Syndrome as a participant. A multi-element design with baseline and best condition was used to compare the effectiveness and efficiency of picture prompts presented on an iPad, in vivo picture prompts, echoic prompts presented on an iPad, and in vivo echoic prompts in teaching correct responding to targeted WH questions when utilizing tact-to-intraverbal or echoic-to-intraverbal transfer of stimulus control procedures. Reliability data were collected in 50% of sessions and averaged 96%; treatment fidelity data were collected in 53% of sessions and averaged 99%. Although all prompt conditions eventually were effective (Figure 1), results showed that echoic prompts presented on an iPad were most efficient in terms of trials to acquisition (i.e. 3 consecutive sessions of at least 80% correct responding) in teaching correct responding to the targeted WH questions followed by picture prompts presented on an iPad (Figure 2). A best condition phase with new Wh questions reflected a consistent pattern of acquisition for iPad echoic prompts. Generalization probes for both iPad conditions reflect criterion level performance. Prompting method preference of the participant was assessed via a paired choice procedure; results indicated a preference for the iPad Echoic condition Conclusions and recommendations for future research are presented.

 
96. Prerequisites to Video Modeling in Adults with Intellectual Disability
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
KAREN BECKER (University of West Florida), D. Reed Bechtel (University of West Florida), Sue Heatter (University of West Florida), Leasha Barry (University of West Florida)
Abstract: This study examined prerequisite skills for subjective (point of view (POV)) video modeling in adults with intellectual disabilities. Experiment 1 was a replication and extension of Robinson’s (2009) work and evaluated the relation between these skills and responding to in-vivo versus embedded voice over prompting in twelve adults, ages 25 to 69 with disabilities ranging from mild to severe. Experiment 2 used a multiple baseline across subjects matched by intellectual level with an alternating treatment design, to compare the effects of in-vivo prompting and embedded voice over prompting on responding to instruction presented via subjective (POV) video modeling. Occurrences and non-occurrences of correct imitation were recorded. Interrater reliability data were collected during 31% of all sessions and averaged 97% for occurrences and 82% for non-occurrences. Treatment fidelity probes included stimulus prompts, materials utilized, time allowed and reinforcement delivered. Probes were taken utilizing a procedural checklist for each task during 30% of the sessions and averaged 97%. Experiment 1 revealed that adults with Intellectual Disabilities may respond to one step in-vivo or voice over video modeling without possession of the prerequisite skills thought to be required of children with Autism Spectrum Disorder. Further examination into the variables responsible for successful use of video modeling with adults is warranted. Preliminary data from Experiment 2 indicated that some individuals may display higher accuracy with voice over prompting in subjective (POV) video modeling instruction. Two participants displayed no benefit from the procedure. Potential variables for further investigation are suggested.
 
97. Improving Medication Administration: Applied Behavior Analysis Training for Medical Professionals
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
MEGHAN BRENNAN (Bancroft), Rebeca Torres (Bancroft), Lauren F. Troy (Bancroft)
Abstract: Medication compliance in individuals diagnosed with Autism Spectrum Disorder and other intellectual disabilities is a widespread problem. Failure to take medications as prescribed can lead to health complications and unclear treatment effects. In addition, challenging behaviors that interfere with medication compliance may restrict individuals from less restrictive settings and disrupt access to educational time. Previous research has utilized behavioral techniques such as high probability request sequencing (Riviere et al. 2011), stimulus fading, and positive reinforcement (Schiff et al. 2011) to increase compliance with medication consumption with this population. While behavioral techniques have been shown to be effective, people who assist individuals with medication administration often have little to no training in applied behavior analysis. The purpose of the current study is to evaluate the effects of providing basic applied behavior analysis training to nurses at a campus-based residential treatment facility for individuals with intellectual disabilities and behavior disorders. An A-B design was used to evaluate the effects of the general training on nurses’ adherence to a behaviorally-based medication administration task analysis. Didactic training is not typically effective in changing behavior (Sarkoff & Sturmey, 2004), so additional hands-on training and feedback was provided and evaluated using a multiple baseline across participants design. Concomitant changes in medication compliance, measured by duration of medication administration, was also measured and will be discussed.
 
98. Token Reinforcement and Treatment Durability in the Treatment of Escape-Maintained Problem Behavior
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
JESSICA GARCIA (The Kennedy Krieger Institute), Iser Guillermo DeLeon (University of Florida), Michelle A. Frank-Crawford (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Mariana I. Castillo (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Daniel Clark (Kennedy Krieger Institute, University of Maryland Baltimore County)
Abstract: Interventions for treating problem behavior (PB) in children with intellectual and developmental disabilities typically involve promoting alternative behaviors that produce the reinforcers hypothesized to maintain PB. Our prior research demonstrated that if PB continues to be reinforced, reinforcing alternative behavior with arbitrary, edible reinforcers not implicated in the maintenance of PB often results in more “durable” treatment effects (i.e. less re-emergence of PB) during schedule thinning. The current study evaluated whether interventions that reinforce appropriate behavior with tokens later exchangeable for arbitrary reinforcers would be as durable. Three interventions were evaluated with two individuals who engaged in problem behavior to escape demands: (a) tokens earned contingent upon meeting the schedule requirement that were then exchanged for an activity (both participants) or food (1 participant) after session, (b) food delivered immediately upon meeting the schedule requirement (both), and (c) access to a 30 s break contingent upon meeting the schedule requirement (1 participant). PB always resulted in a 30 s break on an FR 1 schedule. Results indicated that interventions incorporating tokens were as durable as those that incorporated immediate access to food (both) and were more effective than those that included the functional reinforcer (1 participant).
 
99. On the relation between Adaptive Functioning and Behavior Disorders
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
PHILLIP ORCHOWITZ (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Jonathan Dean Schmidt (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Griffin Rooker (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Patricia F. Kurtz (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Louis P. Hagopian (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
Abstract: Adaptive functioning varies for individuals with intellectual and developmental disabilities. Due to deficits in functioning, these individuals may be more likely to engage in problem behavior to have their needs met. Some prerequisite adaptive skills such as communication or social skills may make particular treatments more effective than others. The Vineland-II assesses adaptive behavior in domains of communication, daily living skills, socialization, and motor skills. Thus, the outcome of the Vineland II may predict the maintaining variables of problem behavior and enhance treatment selection. The purpose of this study was to: 1) evaluate the correlation between the Vineland-II Parent/Caregiver Survey results and functional analysis outcomes for 64 individuals who were hospitalized for the treatment of severe problem behavior, and 2) assess the intensity of treatment (based on treatment components) as related to Vineland-II scores. Many Vineland-II scores were in a similar range for this population, however, results suggest that individuals with behavior maintained by escape from demands generally had the lowest Vineland scores across domains. Additionally, Vineland-II scores were not predictive of the effectiveness of components selected for treatment of problem behavior; potential reasons for this finding due to the homogeneity of the sample will be discussed.
 
100. Checking the Retention of Skills Taught in a One to One Setting
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
Michelle Harrington (Judge Rotenberg Center), JILL HUNT (Judge Rotenberg Educational Center)
Abstract: Over the past seven years, our developmentally delayed clients have received extensive one to one instruction in the Activities of Daily Living. These skills include Washing Hands, Brushing Teeth, Buttoning, Unbuttoning, Zipping, Unzipping and Toileting. These skills were taught in a variety of settings (classroom, one to one room, residence), by several different staff. Multiple rewards were used. Teaching methodologies included forward and backwards chains. Data was collected daily on number of prompts needed, type of prompt needed and time needed to complete the skill. As a skill was mastered, the client did not receive daily one to one instruction in them. It was expected that these skills would be performed daily, as part of the clients daily life. We will be revisiting these skills to see what skills were retained over the past seven years. We will be looking at prompting required to complete the skill and time needed to complete the skill.
 
 
 
Poster Session #362
VRB Monday Noon
Monday, May 25, 2015
12:00 PM–2:00 PM
Exhibit Hall C (CC)
102. Tact-Mand Transfer as a Higher-Order Verbal Operant: Assessing and/or Establishing this Relation in Early Learners with Autism
Area: VBC; Domain: Applied Research
GENAE HALL (Behavior Analysis Center for Autism, Behavior Analysis), Jennifer Elia (Behavior Analysis Center for Autism), Meghan Miles (Behavior Analysis Center for Autism), Kelli Luck (Behavior Analysis Center for Autism), Mark L. Sundberg (Sundberg and Associates)
Abstract: With the variety of experimental arrangements that have been employed and differing entering repertoires of the participants, it is not surprising that results of studies on tact-mand independence have seemed to vary. Tact-mand transfer appears to constitute an abstract relation between tacts and mands--a higher-order verbal operant. Assessing this relation would seem to involve training specific verbal topographies as tacts, arranging effective mand conditions, and assessing whether the same topographies emerge as mands. If they do not, the learner is currently naïve with respect to this relation; that is, tacts and mands are functionally independent in his or her repertoire. In many learners, an abstract relation between tacts and mands may then be established via multiple exemplar training. The present study replicated and extended Hall & Sundberg (1987) by first assessing a pre-existing abstract relation between tacts and mands in several early learners with autism. If this relation was absent, one or more tact-mand pairs were trained in an effort to establish it. For all participants (five, to this point), the experimenter specified three tact-mand targets for each of three behavioral chains (nine total) and probed all mands after all tacts had been trained to criterion; this was accomplished by manipulating transitive conditioned motivating operations via the interrupted behavior chain procedure. If mands did not emerge, participants were considered naïve with respect to an abstract relation between tacts and mands and received direct mand training on one or more topographies previously trained only as tacts. After each mand was trained, the remaining untrained mands were probed, to assess the point at which untrained mands began to emerge (i.e., the point of transfer).
 
103. Use of Textual Prompts to Teach Mands for Information using “who?”
Area: VBC; Domain: Applied Research
WILLIAM WALTON (Marcus Autism Center), Cassondra M Gayman (Marcus Autism Center), Brittany Bartlett (Marcus Autism Center), Sarah Wymer (Marcus Autism Center), Sarah Frampton (Marcus Autism Center), Alice Alice Shillingsburg (Marcus Autism Center, Emory University School of Medicine)
Abstract: Recent research on teaching mands for “information” to children with language deficits have focused on manipulating establishing operations (EOs). However, only a few of those studies have focused on programming both EO and abolishing operation (AO) conditions to ensure functional use of the mand for information. Shillingsburg, Bowen, Valentino, and Pierce (2014) provided a successful demonstration of differential responding between conditions in which information was needed (EO condition) versus when it was already provided (AO condition) demonstrating control of the response by the relevant EO. Although the two participants (both diagnosed with autism) acquired mands for information “who?” via echoic prompting, they were not observed repeating the initial mand to the novel listener in both EOA and EOP. For example, in the EOP condition the children were observed emitting a request for the item, appropriately asking “who has the item?”, successfully approaching the identified person but not emitting an additional mand for the item. The current study sought to replicate and expand the methods employed by Shillingsburg and colleagues for two children diagnosed with autism by including the repeated request for the item upon approaching the novel listener. Textual prompts reading “Who” were used with all participants during prompted trials. Procedures resulted in differential use of the mands for information during EO and AO conditions for both participants. Results have implications for an alternative way to prompt mands for information. Participant’s use of information obtained via emitting mands for information is also discussed.
 
104. The Effects of Topography Specific Distractors on Joing Controlled Sequencing: A Preliminary Investigation
Area: VBC; Domain: Basic Research
Curtis Clough (California State University, Sacramento), CAREEN SUZANNE MEYER (California State University, Sacramento), Timothy Fechter (California State University, Sacramento), Stephanie Cran (California State University, Sacramento), Caio F. Miguel (California State University, Sacramento)
Abstract:

The purpose of the current study was to evaluate the effects of vocal and motor distractors on sequencing arbitrary stimuli. Seven undergraduate students were exposed to different sets of stimuli and were given either vocal or motor (hand signs) instructions to sequence them in a multielement design. The effects of tact, echoic/mimetic, and joint control training were evaluated in a multiple baseline design, while distractor tasks were presented in a reversal design. The results indicated that four participants arranged the sets taught vocally and with hand signs in novel sequences after tact and echoic training. Three participants required additional training for the set taught with hand signs prior to accurate novel sequencing. In addition, accurate responding deteriorated in all participants for sets taught vocally and with hand signs, when a vocal distractor task was required. Accurate responding also deteriorated for four participants during distractor tasks that required tapping to the sound of a metronome, but when consistent tapping without the sound of a metronome was used, responding in three participants was not affected.

 
105. Teaching Mands for Information Using "When"
Area: VBC; Domain: Applied Research
ROBIN K. LANDA (Marcus Autism Center), Chelsea Kremer (Marcus Autism Center), Olivia Sadler (Marcus Autism Center), Alice Alice Shillingsburg (Marcus Autism Center, Emory University School of Medicine)
Abstract: Mands for information may be considered pivotal skills that are often deficient among children with autism. Previous research has demonstrated the efficacy of contriving motivating operations to teach children with autism to mand for information using, “What,” “Who,” “Where,” “Which,” and, “How”. However, literature evaluating acquisition of the mand, “When,” is comparatively limited. As an extension of Shillingsburg et al. (2014), we taught a child with autism to engage in differentiated mands for information regarding the availability of reinforcers, under alternating conditions in which either a contrived establishing operation (EO) or abolishing operation (AO) was present. Textual prompts and prompt delays were utilized to teach the child to ask a framed, “When”, question under EO conditions. Treatment resulted in differentiated mands for information under EO and AO conditions and correct use of the provided information. In addition, acquisition of the mand for information under EO conditions resulted in a significant increase in the proportion of the child’s tangible requests that resulted in reinforcement, compared to extinction. These findings further support the use of contrived motivating operations and prompt delays to teach mands for information and extend upon previous literature by demonstrating effective procedures promoting acquisition of the mand, “When.”
 
106. A Preliminary Investigation on Intraverbal Naming and the Emergence of Generalized Equivalence Classes
Area: VBC; Domain: Basic Research
ADRIENNE JENNINGS (California State University Sacramento), Charisse Ann Lantaya (California State University, Sacramento), Devin Galdieri (California State University, Sacramento), Amanda Chastain (California State University, Sacramento), Margaret Alvarez (California State University, Sacramento), Careen Suzanne Meyer (California State University, Sacramento), Caio F. Miguel (California State University, Sacramento)
Abstract: The purpose of the current study was to evaluate the effects of teaching baseline intraverbal relations in a statement format on the emergence of generalized equivalence classes. Eight undergraduates were exposed to tact training with three stimulus sets (A1B1C1, A2B2C2, and A3B3C3), listener testing, and baseline intraverbal training (A’B’ and B’C’). Formation of equivalence classes was assessed using visual-visual matching-to-sample (MTS) tasks and intraverbal tests for symmetrical (BA, B’A’, CB, C’B’) and transitive relations (AC, A’C’, CA, C’A’). Generalization MTS posttests were then presented for four untrained sets of stimuli. Five participants passed all MTS and intraverbal posttests. The remaining three required either tact or intraverbal remedial training in order to achieve passing criterion. During the vocal MTS posttest, all participants emitted either trained or abbreviated tacts and/or intraverbals for each trial and for two participants, performance improved. These findings show the efficacy of intraverbal training in the formation of generalized equivalence classes. Overall, results suggest verbal mediation strategies (i.e., intraverbal naming) may have facilitated MTS performance.
 
107. Comparison of Picture Exchange and Modified Sign Language Training to Establish Discriminated Mands
Area: VBC; Domain: Applied Research
CASSONDRA M GAYMAN (Marcus Autism Center), Sarah Frampton (Marcus Autism Center), Dianna Shippee (Marcus Autism Center), Emily Napier (Marcus Autism Center), Ashley Neitzer (Marcus Autism Center), Alice Alice Shillingsburg (Marcus Autism Center, Emory University School of Medicine)
Abstract: For some individuals, repeated failure to acquire vocal manding results in the teaching of alternative topographies such as modified sign language or picture based communication. In determining which topography of manding to teach, clinicians must consider a variety of factors; often overlooked is the correspondence between the mand and the motivating operation at strength. The current investigation compared two mand modalities using an adapted alternating treatments design, embedded into a multiple baseline across behaviors for an individual with autism. To assess correspondence between the mand and the motivating operation, the Pre-Test and Post-Test conditions included a discrimination check between the individual’s indicating response (i.e., reach), the picture selected or sign emitted, and the item consumed. Data show the participant acquired picture exchange more rapidly than modified sign language. Further, the discrimination checks in the Post-Tests revealed errors following the initiation of training for the third mand; suggesting that the mands were not discriminated until additional remedial training was conducted. This study extends the mand comparison literature through the inclusion of discrimination checks, ensuring the learner’s indicating response, mand response, and consumption correspond with each other. Further, the inclusion of maintenance phase demonstrated the strength of these responses in the individual’s repertoire over time.
 
108. The Effects of Multiple Exemplar Instruction Across Listener and Speaker Responses on the Acquisition of Naming in Three Children with Disabilities
Area: VBC; Domain: Applied Research
GABRIELLE SWEENEY (Teachers College Columbia University)
Abstract: We tested the effects of Multiple Exemplar Instruction (MEI) across listener and speaker responses on the acquisition of Naming in three preschool children diagnosed with disabilities. The experiment was conducted in a CABAS® classroom using a non-concurrent delayed multiple probe design across participants. Participants were selected for the study because they did not demonstrate full Naming during the initial Naming probe, required direct instruction on tacts, and required a high number of learn units to meet instructional objectives. The dependent variable was the acquisition of Naming, which consists of both listener (point to topography) and speaker (tact and intraverbal tact topographies) components, measured during Naming probes. The independent variable was MEI, in which match, point, tact, and intraverbal tact responses were rotated across multiple exemplars of stimuli within the same session. Upon completion of two intervention sets of MEI, all three participants demonstrated the Naming capability during the post intervention probes using the original set and novel sets. It was determined that Naming emerged for all three participants as a function of MEI across listener and speaker repsonses.
 
109. Teaching Recalling Past Events Using Tact and Echoic Prompts
Area: VBC; Domain: Applied Research
SARAH WYMER (Marcus Autism Center, Georgia State University), Sarah Frampton (Marcus Autism Center), Robin K. Landa (Marcus Autism Center), Jordyn Turner (Marcus Autism Center), Alice Alice Shillingsburg (Marcus Autism Center, Emory University School of M)
Abstract: Many children diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder (ASD), despite significant mand, tact, and listener repertoires, fail to develop a functional intraverbal repertoire beyond simple intraverbal behavior such as providing their names (Sundberg & Sundberg, 2011). Because intraverbal behavior is essential to academic and social skills, it is important to establish responding to more complex intraverbals (Partington & Bailey, 1993). One type of complex intraverbal is the ability to answer questions about events in the past. In the current investigation, two children with autism were taught to answer questions about what activities they had completed earlier in their treatment sessions at three different locations. Intervention consisted of echoic and tact prompts using pictures of the participant engaging in the activity, with reinforcement provided following correct responses on independent opportunities. Training was conducted immediately following activity completion and then throughout the instructional day using an increasing inter-trial interval to establish correct responding at the end of the day. Following training, both participants demonstrated increased accuracy when they recalled what activities they had participated at each location at the end of the day.
 
110. Referent-Based Verbal Behavior Instruction for Children With Autism
Area: VBC; Domain: Service Delivery
ANASTASIA SAWCHAK (The University of Texas at San Antonio), Stephanie Curtis (The University of Texas at San Antonio), Lee L. Mason (The University of Texas at San Antonio), Alonzo Andrews (The University of Texas at San Antonio)
Abstract: Skinner's (1957) analysis of verbal behavior deconstructed language according to stimulus control. Al- though the functional independence of these verbal operants has been empirically demonstrated, more commonly, a speaker's verbal behavior is induced by a convergence of controlling stimuli. However, circumscribed stimulus control may inhibit the development of complex verbal repertoires for some individuals, including those with autism spectrum dis- orders. For this reason, in the current paper, we propose a behavior analytic intervention with the overarching goal of establishing multiple control over verbal behavior through the conditioning of referent stimuli. Thirteen children received referent-based teaching at a university-based center for applied behavior analysis. Each participant received 90 minutes of referent-based instruction four days a week for 13 weeks. Instruction was individualized to the needs of the participant, but focused on the four primary verbal operants: mands, echoics, tacts, and sequelics. Using the Verbal Behavior Milestones Assessment and Placement Program (VB-MAPP; Sundberg, 2008) as a pre- and post-test, we analyzed the effects of RBT. A Wilcoxon Signed-ranks test indicated that, after one semester of RBT, participants scored significantly higher on the VB-MAPP post-test (Mdn = 65.5) than when initially assessed on the VB-MAPP pre-test (Mdn = 32.5), Z = -3.18, p = .001, r = .62. The results of this study will be discussed within the context of the limitations. Overall, however, referent-based teaching appears to be an effective method for increasing the language of children with autism.
 
111. An Evaluation of Extinction on Increasing Functional Vocal Language
Area: VBC; Domain: Applied Research
DIANNA M. SHIPPEE (Marcus Autism Center), William Walton (Marcus Autism Center), Alice Alice Shillingsburg (Marcus Autism Center, Emory University School of Medicine)
Abstract: Previous research has shown that extinction is effective at increasing vocalizations in non-vocal children with an established alternative mand topography, such as sign language (Valentino, Shillingsburg, Call, Burton, & Bowen, 2011). In this study, we evaluated the effects of extinction on promoting vocal language for a young child diagnosed with autism who failed to acquire an alternative functional mand topography. Four preferred items were identified and randomly assigned to one of two conditions. For each session, only one of the four items was available. In the baseline condition, indicating responses (i.e., reaching or pointing) and vocal word approximations for the item present were reinforced with access to that item. In the extinction condition, only word approximations for the item present were reinforced and indicating responses were not reinforced. Results found an increase in the rate of word approximations for one out of two items in the extinction condition and a decrease in the rate of indicating responses emitted; whereas in baseline, rates of word approximations remained stable and low.
 
112. Establishing Derived Textual Control in an Activity Schedule With an Adult With Down Syndrome
Area: VBC; Domain: Applied Research
Daniel Ortega (Trellis Center), SADIE L. LOVETT (Central Washington University), Paige Thornton (Central Washington University)
Abstract: Many adults with developmental disabilities rely on picture activity schedules for completing daily and vocational tasks. The use of text-based activity schedules better approximates the daily behavior of typical adults. This study extended the findings of Miguel et al. (2009) who used conditional discrimination training to transfer control from pictures to printed words in activity schedules for children with autism. In the current study, conditional discrimination training was used to teach one adult diagnosed with Down syndrome to select pictures and printed words when provided with their dictated names. This instructional arrangement was designed to promote the emergence of equivalence relations between the pictures and printed words, which were never directly paired during training. A multiple probe design across stimulus sets was used to evaluate the transfer of control from pictures to text. Following instruction, the participant successfully completed the activity schedule using printed words. He also orally named the textual stimuli in the absence of direct training for this skill.
 
113. Stimulus-Stimulus Pairing
Area: VBC; Domain: Applied Research
BRITTANY BARTLETT (Marcus Autism Center), Taylor Thompson (Marcus Autism Center), Alice Alice Shillingsburg (Marcus Autism Center, Emory University School of M)
Abstract: It has been estimated that 20-50% of those diagnosed with Autism Spectrum Disorder (ASD) do not develop functional vocal language (Graziano, 2002; Lord, Risi, & Pickles, 2004). In fact, language deficits are one of the most common presenting complaints of parents of children with ASD (De Giacomo & Fombonne, 1998). Stimulus-stimulus pairing (SSP), based on the principles of both respondent and operant conditioning, involves intensive and systematic pairing of adult produced vocalizations with identified preferred items. In this study, we evaluated the effects of stimulus-stimulus pairing for 3 minimally verbal children diagnosed with autism between the ages of 2 years and 3 years 11 months. Following baseline measures, treatment consisted of approximately 5 (10 minute sessions) per day, 5 days per week, for 6 weeks. A collection of assessments were administered every 3 weeks including the Early Echoic Skills Assessment (EESA) and language observations measuring the rate of sounds emitted during a 20 minute observation. Results found an increase in the EESA score for 3 out of 3 participants following 6 weeks of treatment. An increase in rate of sounds emitted was observed for 2 out of the 3 participants following 6 weeks of treatment.
 
114. Examination of the Explicit-Zero Effect Via Behavior-Behavior Relations
Area: VBC; Domain: Basic Research
PHILIP ERB (University of Florida), Jesse Dallery (University of Florida)
Abstract: Altering the format in which hypothetical discounting choices are presented has been found to influence discounting rate. For example, relative to the traditional format frame, significantly higher proportions of choices for the larger-later (LL) reward have been observed with each of the choice options presented in terms of a sequence – an effect termed the explicit-zero effect. Using a within-subjects design, undergraduate students completed the monetary choice questionnaire (MCQ), and a modified version of the MCQ with the choice options presented in the explicit-zero format frame. A concurrent think-aloud procedure was employed during each task administration. To date, the results replicate previous findings; a significantly higher proportion of LL choices was observed when the choice options were presented in the explicit-zero format, relative to the traditional format. Unfortunately, consistent relationships between discounting choices and participants’ verbalizations have not been identified. Given that these subtle alterations in the formatting of temporal discounting choices result in changes in discounting rate, and these changes presumably involve intervening mental processes and/or covert verbal behavior, the use of concurrent think-aloud methodology during the completion of temporal discounting tasks may help to isolate how these structural alterations are exerting their respective effects.
 
115. Language Outcomes of Nonvocal Children Following Intensive ABA Intervention
Area: VBC; Domain: Applied Research
RACHEL YOSICK (Marcus Autism Center), Hannah Robinson (Marcus Autism Center), Tylor Thompson (Marcus Autism Center), Caitlin H. Delfs (Marcus Autism Center), Alice Alice Shillingsburg (Marcus Autism Center, Emory University School of Medicine)
Abstract: It has been estimated that 20% of children with Autism Spectrum Disorder are “nonverbal,” defined as using fewer than five words per day (Lord, Risi, & Pickles, 2004). Traditionally, it was thought that if children had not acquired speech by age five, their prognosis for developing it in the future was poor (Ornitz, 1973). However, recent evidence supports the notion that many individuals over age five with significant language delays acquire useful speech (Wodka et al., 2013). The current study examined the outcomes of a large sample of children (n=98; average age 5.2 years, range 1-16 years) with language deficits who received intensive ABA intervention to address language deficits at an outpatient treatment facility (average months of intervention 16, range 3-59 months). Outcomes such as the development of functional language, spontaneous vocalizations, and an echoic repertoire were examined to determine possible predictors of these outcomes (i.e., age, treatment length, skills at admission, etc.). Results include the portion of the sample that achieved specific vocal language outcomes (%) and which demographic and treatment variables were predictive of these outcomes (odds ratios for significant predictors). Implications of results are discussed in light of demographic and treatment variables that influenced positive treatment outcomes.
 
 
 
Symposium #363
Investigating gambling problems: Through the behavioral analytic lens
Monday, May 25, 2015
1:00 PM–1:50 PM
006D (CC)
Area: EAB/TPC; Domain: Basic Research
Chair: Karl Gunnarsson (Southern Illinois University Carbondale)
Abstract: Gambling as a leisure activity has been gaining popularity in the past decades. Both positive and negative side effects of gambling have been observed. Societal and personal gains have been made for many, and for others the gains have only been aversive in nature. The aim of the current symposium is to present research that has been conducted by our team of investigators, and to presenting data we provide a conceptual discussion about how behavior analysts can contribute to the field of gambling research and at the same time expand our own. Our symposium will be diverse; we will look at basic research, discuss how to conduct research at gambling establishments, and also we will have a conceptual discussion on behavioral economics and the way behavioral economic research methods can improve current research and understanding of the variables that influence pathological gambling. This symposium is meant for anyone interested in gambling and behavior analysis, and anyone interested in lively discussions on important societal issues.
Keyword(s): Addiction, Behavioral-economics, Gambling
 
Direct observation of gambling behavior in gambling settings
MAUREEN O'CONNOR (Southern Illinois University Carbondale), Emily Durako (Southern Illinois University Carbondale), Karl Gunnarsson (Southern Illinois University Carbondale), Mark R. Dixon (Southern Illinois University)
Abstract: A common problem amongst gambling researchers is finding casino owners that will allow them to conduct research within their establishments. The reasons why casino companies do not allow researchers to conduct investigations at their establishments are many, both of financial origin, and ethical. The need still remains, that researchers have to understand gambling behavior in the context of gambling. One way to investigate gambling behaviors at casinos is to do direct observations of public behaviors. In the current study, our research team investigated happiness level of gamblers when playing slot machines, and compared it to gamblers playing table games. The results indicated that despite winning, the slot machine gamblers did not engage in overt behaviors indicative of happiness. Gamblers playing table games did engage in more overt behaviors indicative of happiness. The implications of the study are discussed with regard to pathological gambling and the effects of gambling on society.
 
Experimental and natural observation of the game of Craps
ALLISON RIBLEY (Southern Illinois University Carbondale), Karl Gunnarsson (Southern Illinois University Carbondale), Jomi Hirata (Southern Illinois University Carbondale), Brian Morgan (Southern Illinois University Carbondale), Jacob H. Daar (Southern Illinois University), Mark R. Dixon (Southern Illinois University)
Abstract: Various “expert” gamblers offer various strategies to novice gamblers with a promise of great gains of money. In the game of Craps there are many online “experts” that provide these strategies for free. In the current study the authors investigated the effectiveness of these strategies through a natural and experimental observation of gambling behaviors. Nine recreational gambles were trained on strategies and then observed utilizing them during a game of Craps. In order to evaluate the effects of differing strategies within subjects, the participants were presented with more than one strategy during gameplay. The results indicated that some strategies were superior to others in regard to monetary outcomes. With gambling becoming more popular as a leisure activity and with the presentation of gambling in popular media pathological gambling may become of greater concern in coming years. Implications of the results are discussed in regards to problem and pathological gambling.
 
The use of Behavioral economics in behavior analytic gambling research: A conceptual discussion
SARAH STERNQUIST (Southern Illinois University Carbondale), Karl Gunnarsson (Southern Illinois University Carbondale), Mark R. Dixon (Southern Illinois University)
Abstract: In the current behavior analytic literature on gambling there is ample space for behavioral economical investigations. The behavioral economical model could be effective in the analysis and identification of variables influencing pathological gambling. The current talk will be a theoretical discussion the value of behavioral economics in regards to gambling research and pathological gambling. We will demonstrate preliminary research that has been conducted at the Gambling laboratory at Southern Illinois University. The discussion will be aimed at providing an argument for how future research might be constructed in order to alter the factors commonly described as contributing to pathological gambling (i.e. contingencies, verbal behavior, and, motivating operations and setting events). This discussion will aim to shed some light on possible treatment procedures that can be derived from current and future researches and how a possible clinical model could be constructed.
 
 
Symposium #364
CE Offered: BACB
Advances in the Application of Motivating Operations with Children with Autism Spectrum Disorders
Monday, May 25, 2015
2:00 PM–2:50 PM
Grand Ballroom C2 (CC)
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Tonya Nichole Davis (Baylor University)
CE Instructor: Tonya Nichole Davis, Ph.D.
Abstract:

The manipulation of motivating operations can be an effective intervention component. In this symposium we present research regarding the application of motivating operations in assessment and treatment of individuals with autism spectrum disorders. The first paper evaluates the effects of systematically-identified durations of reinforcer access on task completion. Individualized durations of reinforcer access were identified based on the mean latency of satiation. Results indicate that this method can be utilized to identify a precise duration of reinforcer access to influence an evocative effect. The second paper evaluates the effects of a motivating operation-based treatment on escape-maintained problem behavior. After a trial based EO analysis confirmed that problem behavior was motivated by tasks with a low probability of correct responses, a high probably response sequence was successfully implemented to decrease problem behavior and increase skill acquisition. The third paper conducted a parametric evaluation of two variations of the implementation of the behavioral indicator of satiation method. Results identify not only a wide variation in latency to the first and subsequent displays of the behavioral indicator, but also that the selected method influences the abative effect on subsequent challenging behavior. Collectively, studies present innovative uses of the manipulation of motivating operations.

Keyword(s): abolishing operation, establishing operation, motivating operations
 
Examination of Pre-session Systematic Durations of Reinforcer Access
ALLEN MOM (Baylor Univeristy), Rachel Scalzo (Baylor University), Tonya Nichole Davis (Baylor University), Dana Leeper (Baylor Univeristy), Alicia Kobylecky (Baylor University), Jayden Conte (Baylor Univeristy)
Abstract: The current study examines an approach to systematically select a precise duration of reinforcer access that maximizes an evocative effect on task completion. Participants were given access to reinforcers to determine a mean latency to satiation. Systematic durations of reinforcer access were determined based on individual mean latency to satiation; specifically durations of time that equaled 3% and 75% of mean latency to satiation were utilized as pre-session reinforcer access. Participants were exposed to pre-session durations of reinforcer access that equaled 3% and 75% of the mean latency to satiation; immediately following the presession reinforcer access, work tasks were presented and access to the same tangible stimulus was provided as reinforcement on a fixed ration schedule. Results indicate that individualized durations of reinforcer access can be systematically identified and utilized to increase task completion. Clinical implications of the results will be discussed.
 
A Trial-Based Approach to Isolating Establishing Operations for Negatively Reinforced Challenging Behavior
JENNIFER NINCI (Texas A&M University), Mandy J. Rispoli (Texas A&M University), Stephanie Gerow (Texas A&M University)
Abstract: In this study we assessed a potential EO for escape-maintained challenging behavior with three boys with autism spectrum disorder. A pairwise functional analyses indicated participants’ challenging behaviors were at least in part maintained by negative reinforcement, in the form of escape from task demands. It was hypothesized that each participant engaged in more challenging behaviors when presented with difficult tasks in which there was a low probability of a correct response as compared to tasks with a high probability of a correct response. To evaluate this hypothesis, we implemented a trial-based EO analysis. Task demands were chosen and divided among two groups (high-probability and low-probability) for each participant based on prior performance observations and embedded within discrete-trial instructional sessions. Data were collected on ranges of criteria for correctness with corresponding percentages of challenging behavior. The EO analysis confirmed challenging behaviors were motivated by tasks that participants had relatively little history of performing correctly. An MO intervention based on these results showed high-probability request sequences were effective to reduce challenging behaviors in one participant and increase skill acquisition for two participants. Trial-based EO analyses may be a practical and efficient way to analyze the influence of EOs during instruction.
 

Analysis of Behavioral Indicators as a Measure of Satiation

RACHEL SCALZO (Baylor University), Tonya Nichole Davis (Baylor University), Kelsey Henry (Baylor University), Allen Mom (Baylor University)
Abstract:

Challenging behavior often occurs when access to a preferred item is restricted. For children with developmental disabilities these challenging behaviors can impede learning opportunities and decrease possibilities for social interaction, which are already severely diminished (Lang et al., 2010). One way to proactively address challenging behaviors is through the manipulation of motivating operations. This study examined behavioral indicators of satiation using the item rejection procedure developed by O’Reilly and colleagues (2009) with differing levels of criteria. All participants were diagnosed with a developmental disability and engaged in tangibly maintained challenging behavior. Specifically, this multi-element single subject research design compared the duration of a tangible session following pre-session access to tangibles. Pre-session access was ended after a participant engaged in one instance of rejection behavior, which was compared to sessions ending after three rejection behaviors were used. Results suggest differences between using one and three rejection behaviors as indicators of satiation. Implications for clinical applications will be discussed.

 
 
Panel #365
CE Offered: BACB
Activities and Activism for Cross-Cultural Dissemination of Behavior Analysis
Monday, May 25, 2015
2:00 PM–2:50 PM
204B (CC)
Area: CSE/PRA; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Robyn M. Catagnus, Ed.D.
Chair: Robyn M. Catagnus (Ball State University)
SAKURAKO SHERRY TANAKA (Mutlicultural Alliance of Behavior Analysts)
KOZUE MATSUDA (Children Center)
ELIZABETH HUGHES FONG (Fielding Graduate University)
Abstract:

All behavior analysts should be passionate about the dissemination of behavioral science as a way of creating solutions to important social issues. Traditional methods of sharing scientific information include written documents such as journal articles, but this approach is often insufficient to reach culturally diverse and international groups. We must seek more active and engaged ways of reaching our audiences. Panel members will discuss their personal activities and activism toward creating connections between research, practice, and policy. Examples will include research and practice, sharing behavioral applications in other fields, providing free trainings, creating alternate pathways to BCBA certification, expanding access to supervision and services internationally, cross cultural connections, collaborating actively with groups hostile to behavior analysis, networking with community leaders, translating behavioral information, becoming involved in global initiatives at the World Health Organization and participating in the United Nations. Ideas from the literature will be discussed and audience members will be invited to share the ways they are advancing the science of human behavior. Audience members will leave with new ideas and motivation for sharing our science with multi-cultural populations to change our world.

Keyword(s): alternate pathways, dissemination, international, multi-cultural
 
 
Invited Tutorial #366
CE Offered: PSY/BACB
Science is Not All Mathematics, Nor All Logic, but it is Somewhat Beauty and Poetry*
Monday, May 25, 2015
2:00 PM–2:50 PM
Lila Cockrell Theatre (CC)
Area: CSE/EDC; Domain: Theory
PSY/BACB CE Offered. CE Instructor: Travis Thompson, Ph.D.
Chair: Mark P. Alavosius (Prxis2LLC)
Presenting Authors: : TRAVIS THOMPSON (University of Minnesota)
Abstract:

Throughout the Renaissance, the arts and science were both often practiced by women and men of scholarship of all sorts. The very notion of a "Renaissance Man or Woman," speaks to the idea that today we have somehow lost our way, and expect divergence not integration. It was more common than not, that scientists also were practitioners of some form of painting or artistic writing, and the converse. From Leonardo da Vinci to B.F. Skinner, the two have more often than not been interwoven. The notion that the two are separate endeavors emerged after the Renaissance when science and the humanities diverged, reaching its culmination during and after World War II when C.P. Snow presented his famous Rede Lecture, "Two Cultures." The arts are integral features that create the context within which our practices as research and applied behavior analysts are conducted. Artistic factors also are behavioral variables in our analysis of behavior. They are also uniquely effective in creating the context for socio-cultural conditional learning and discriminations. As we look about us, we are compelled to ask, "Why do artists create art?" "Why can people with severe disabilities often create stunning artistic products while being unable to speak an intelligible sentence?" "Why do so many of us feel artistic activities are uplifting and add a dimension to our lives that exceed those of our science, alone?" "How can the concepts of the arts and sciences be integrated to mutual benefit?" In today's discussion, Dr. Travis Thompson will explore the intrerplay of artistic activities and behavior analytic endeavors, where they intertwine and separate. *The title is from a comment by the first American woman astronomer, Maria Mitchell in the 19th century.

Instruction Level: Basic
Target Audience:

Psychologists, behavior analysts, practitioners, and graduate students.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the presentation, participants should be able to answer:  Why do artists create art? (2) Why can people with severe disabilities often create stunning artistic products while being unable to speak an intelligible sentence? (3) Why do so many of us feel artistic activities are uplifting and add a dimension to our lives that exceed those of our science, alone? and (4) How can the concepts of the arts and sciences be integrated to mutual benefit?
 
TRAVIS THOMPSON (University of Minnesota)
Travis Thompson is professor of educational psychology and emeritus professor of psychology at the University of Minnesota, a Fellow of the ABAI, and recipient of the Society for the Advancement of Behavior Analysis Award for Impact of Science on Application. He has been a member of the ABAI Executive Council, distinguished scientist, clinical practitioner, author and lesser known, a visual artist and poet. He previously designed and constructed stained glass, has written essays on art glass, does watercolor paintings and writes engaging poetry. Among behavior analytic scientists he is one of the more effective in expressing the humanity of our science. His is the author or editor of 238 articles and chapters and 34 books, several written for practitioners and parents of children with autism. He is known to be especially effective in communicating with nonscientists about the importance of our work. He is the ABAI coordinator of the Behavior Analysis and the Arts Special Interest Group.
 
 
Symposium #367
Meaning, Scanning, Induction of Writing, and Equivalence
Monday, May 25, 2015
2:00 PM–2:50 PM
007A (CC)
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
Chair: Erik Arntzen (Oslo and Akershus University College )
Abstract: The present symposium focuses on meaning, scanning, induction of writing, and equivalence. The first paper by Hansen and Arntzen extracted additional knowledge from our eye-tracking data, the purpose of the following analysis is to expose the differential outcomes among eye-movement topographies (i.e., observing sequences during matching-to-sample performance and eye-movement length, or saccade speed) gathered with eye-tracking equipment that recorded eye-movements while establishing five 3-member classes as well as three 5-member in a concurrent training format, using the MTO, OTM, and LS training structures. Data reveal differences in eye-movement sequences to comparison stimuli, as a function of learning conditions, and in eye-movement lengths (i.e., saccade speed) as a function of not only learning but also motivation (see Figure 1). The second paper by Serna, Thanopoulos, and Fields In a potential 5-member stimulus-equivalence class of non-representational forms, ABCDE, past research has shown a high percentage (yield) of participants demonstrated equivalence relations if the C stimuli were meaningful (familiar pictures), but a low yield if all the stimuli are non-representational. The results will be discussed in terms of conditions that may be responsible for the high yield typically found when one set of stimuli are familiar pictures in similar experimental preparations, as well as the importance of pre-training and testing prior to the study of 5-member equivalence-class yield. (see Figure 2) The third paper by Spear and Fields presents Understanding statistical interaction, and interpreting and writing descriptions of complex graphs that depict interaction, is one of the more difficult tasks facing undergraduate Psychology majors. Such skills are also quite difficult to teach. The reported research used conditional discrimination training to establish such a writing repertoire, and the data presented indicate differential effects of this conditional discrimination training on the writing of descriptions of different features of such graphs (see Figure 3).
Keyword(s): instructional design, meaningfulness, stimulus equivalence
 
Pattern, Variability, and Speed in Eye-Movements and their Functional Relations to Learning and Motivation
STEFFEN HANSEN (Oslo and Akershus University College of Applied Sciences), Erik Arntzen (Oslo and Akershus University College)
Abstract: The use of eye-tracking technology to study observing behavior in Matching-to-Sample research is gaining in popularity. For example, the analysis of eye-movements during conditional discrimination training proposes that changes in topographically different measures, such as fixation duration and fixation rate, are a function of established conditional discriminations (i.e., learning), and therefore contribute with additional knowledge on the formation of stimulus equivalence classes, when trained with different training structures (e.g., Hansen & Arntzen, 2013, October; Hansen & Arntzen, 2014, May). Extracting additional knowledge from our eye-tracking data, the purpose of the following analysis is to expose the differential outcomes among eye-movement topographies (i.e., observing sequences during matching-to-sample performance and eye-movement length, or saccade speed) gathered with eye-tracking equipment that recorded eye-movements while establishing five 3-member classes as well as three 5-member in a concurrent training format, using the MTO, OTM, and LS training structures. Data reveal differences in eye-movement sequences to comparison stimuli, as a function of learning conditions, and in eye-movement lengths (i.e., saccade speed) as a function of not only learning but also motivation. Applied to 60 university college participants, divided into six groups, five 3-member classes as well as three 5-member classes, trained with MTO, OTM, and LS, respectively, we expect to provide differential results among eye-fixation sequences and eye-movement lengths as a function of learned conditional discriminations and changes in motivational operations.
 
The effects of three-member equivalence-class pre-training on subsequent five-member equivalence-class formation yield
RICHARD W. SERNA (University of Massachusetts Lowell), Katerina Thanopoulos (University of Massachusetts Lowell), Lanny Fields (Queens College, City University of New York)
Abstract: In a potential 5-member stimulus-equivalence class of non-representational forms, ABCDE, past research has shown a high percentage (yield) of participants demonstrated equivalence relations if the C stimuli were meaningful (familiar pictures), but a low yield if all the stimuli are non-representational. The present experiment investigated (1) variables that may contribute to this effect and (2) pre-training control conditions. Group 1 received pre-training in which C stimuli became part of an equivalence class (CFG) prior to ABCDE equivalence training and testing. Group 2 received equivalence pre-training and testing unrelated to ABCDE. Group 3 also received pre-training and testing (PFG), but P stimuli were familiar pictures that appeared in subsequent ABPDE equivalence training and testing with otherwise non-representational stimuli. The results showed relatively higher yields in Groups 1 and 3 than in Group 2. These results were contrasted with Group 4, an ABCDE group that received no pre-training and showed a low yield. The results will be discussed in terms of conditions that may be responsible for the high yield typically found when one set of stimuli are familiar pictures in similar experimental preparations, as well as the importance of pre-training and testing prior to the study of 5-member equivalence-class yield.
 
Statistical interaction, and interpreting and writing descriptions of complex graphs
JACK SPEAR (Queens College and the Graduate Center, City University of New York), Lanny Fields (Queens College, City University of New York)
Abstract: Understanding statistical interaction, and interpreting and writing descriptions of complex graphs that depict interaction, is one of the more difficult tasks facing undergraduate Psychology majors. Such skills are also quite difficult to teach. The reported research used conditional discrimination training to establish such a writing repertoire, and the data presented indicate differential effects of this conditional discrimination training on the writing of descriptions of different features of such graphs.
 
 
Symposium #368
CE Offered: BACB
Nonbehavioral Providers Using Time-Based Reinforcment to Decrease Problem Behaviors in School Settings.
Monday, May 25, 2015
2:00 PM–2:50 PM
210AB (CC)
Area: EDC/AUT; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Johanna Staubitz (Vanderbilt University)
Discussant: Johanna Staubitz (Vanderbilt University)
CE Instructor: Christina F. Noel, Ph.D.
Abstract: Students with emotional and behavioral disorders (EBD) or autism often receive low rates of positive attention in the classroom. Further, disruptive behavior exhibited by students with EBD or autism may elicit negative attention from teachers and peers and increase the likelihood the behavior will occur in the future. Two studies were conducted on using time-based, noncontingent statements to decrease problem behavior. The first was in an alternative school and the second was in an after-school program for students with autism. Each study used a single-subject, reversal design. Noncontingent attention reduced disruptive behavior and increased on-task behavior for all participants. Additionally, the teacher provided more praise and fewer reprimands during intervention phases. Social validity measures were given to the cooperating teachers to view the acceptability of the intervention. Results suggest NCA can decrease attention-maintained disruptive behavior, increase student engagement, and improve student-teacher dynamics in students with EBD and autism.
Keyword(s): autism, emotional behavior, school settings, time-based reinforcement
 
Using Noncontingent Reinforcement to Decrease Problem Behavior and Increase Appropriate Behavior in an Alternative Setting
CHRISTOPHER RUBOW (University of Florida)
Abstract: Students with emotional and behavioral disorders (EBD) often receive low rates of positive attention in the classroom. Further, disruptive behavior exhibited by students with EBD may elicit negative attention from teachers and peers. Using a withdrawal design, a teacher provided noncontingent attention (NCA) to a student with EBD with attention-maintained disruptive behavior. Noncontingent attention reduced disruptive behavior and increased on-task behavior. Additionally, the teacher provided more praise and fewer reprimands during intervention phases. Results suggest NCA can decrease attention-maintained disruptive behavior, increase student engagement, and improve student-teacher dynamics in students with EBD.
 
Using Time-Based Reinforcement to Increase On-Task Behaviors in an After-School Setting for Students with Autism Spectrum Diagnosis
JOHANNA STAUBITZ (Vanderbilt University), Christina F. Noel (Western Kentucky University)
Abstract: Students with an Autism Spectrum Disorder may have difficulty complying with class-wide instructions. Using a withdrawal design, three pre-service teachers provided noncontingent attention (NCA) to three students with attention-maintained disruptive behavior. Noncontingent attention reduced disruptive behavior and increased on-task behavior. The pre-service teachers were given a social validity questionnaire about the feasibility of the intervention. Results suggest NCA can decrease attention-maintained disruptive behavior, increase student engagement, and can be implemented with high levels of social validity.
 
 
Symposium #369
CE Offered: BACB
The Implementation of Interventions for Self-Directed Interventions to Promote Generalization for Postsecondary Students with Intellectual and Developmental Disabilities.
Monday, May 25, 2015
2:00 PM–2:50 PM
212AB (CC)
Area: EDC/DDA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Jennifer Marie Cullen (Ball State University)
Discussant: Christopher A. Tullis (Georgia State University)
CE Instructor: Jennifer Marie Cullen, Ph.D.
Abstract: Implementation of self-directed interventions can promote self-determination and generalization among individuals with intellectual and developmental disabilities in postsecondary settings such as education, employment, and the community. Postsecondary settings are a setting in which individuals with intellectual and developmental disabilities have historically been excluded. However, current initiatives have opened the doors to higher education for these students. Success in postsecondary settings requires the skills of problem-solving, self-management, and task completion. This symposium will present self-directed interventions to promote success in academic and daily living tasks, and look at generalization effects self-directed interventions have in these settings.
Keyword(s): daily living, generalization, postsecondary, self-determination
 

The Effects of a Self-Determination Intervention on the Performance of Academic and Social Behaviors of College Age Youth with Intellectual Disabilities in Postsecondary Settings

EVETTE A. SIMMONS-REED (Ball State University), Ralph Gardner III (The Ohio State University), Jennifer Marie Cullen (Ball State University)
Abstract:

Historically, youth with intellectual disabilities have poor postsecondary outcomes in the areas of employment, education, and independent living and lack the self-determination skills needed to become self-sufficient adults. Research indicates that the acquisition of skills related to self-determination improve the postsecondary outcomes and overall quality of life, including those with intellectual disabilities. In this study, the Self-determined Learning Model of Instruction (SDLMI) is used to determine the effects of the acquisition and performance of academic and social behaviors of college-age adults with intellectual disabilities in a multiple baseline design across behaviors. A problem solving questioning sequence will be used to teach goal attainment and planning through: (a) identification of the problem, (b) identification of possible solutions, (c) identification of potential barriers, and (d) the evaluation and reevaluation of their results. Generalization of behaviors will be assessed using behavior checklist and the Behavior Tracker Pro app on iPads in the participants audited courses throughout the study.

 

The Effects of Self-Directed Video Prompting on Generalization of Independent Living Tasks in Postsecondary Settings for Young Adults With Autism and Intellectual Disabilities

JENNIFER MARIE CULLEN (Ball State University), Evette A. Simmons-Reed (Ball State University), Lindy Weaver (Ohio State University)
Abstract:

Contributing factors to discrepancies among independent living for individuals with disabilities compared to those without are barriers in acquiring, maintaining, and generalizing daily living skills. Acquisition of daily living skills allows people with disabilities to meet their own needs without reliance on others. In addition, proficient daily living skills help people with disabilities increase their self-sufficiency and quality of life. Self-directed video prompting, in which individuals independently access prerecorded task instructions, is an innovative method for teaching daily living skills to individuals with disabilities, but generalization effects have been limited in the literature. . Using technology to teach daily living skills can increase participation in the community and improve independence by providing a level of task competence unattainable without these devices. In this multiple baseline across participants study, self-directed video prompting on an iPad using the My Pictures Talk application was used to help three young adults with intellectual and developmental disabilities in a postsecondary program acquire independent living tasks. Generalization tasks that differed by one, two, and three were measured intermittently throughout the study. All three participants demonstrated generalization to the three tasks. . Our working hypothesis was that study participants would demonstrate improved daily living skill performance and be able to generalize these skills to home and community environments.

 
 
Paper Session #370
Adopting Behavior Analysis to Improve Learning Outcomes
Monday, May 25, 2015
2:00 PM–2:50 PM
211 (CC)
Area: EDC
Chair: Katherine Kavanaugh (Florida Institute of Technology)
 
Evaluating Fluency Based Instruction with Mathematics Skills and Associated Generalized Outcomes: A Randomised-Controlled Trial
Domain: Applied Research
AOIFE MC TIERNAN (National University of Ireland, Galway), Jennifer Holloway (National University of Ireland, Galway), Olive Healy (Trinity College Dublin), Michael Hogan (National University of Ireland)
 
Abstract: A between-groups design was used to demonstrate the ability of a frequency-building curriculum to increase fluency with component mathematics skills. The effects of fluent responding on endurance, stability and application were evaluated. Standardised assessments of mathematical ability were conducted to assess the impact of learning component skills fluently on such measures. Statistically significant differences between an experimental and treatment as usual control group were found on measures of fluency, endurance, stability and one subtest of the standardised assessment of mathematical ability. Results indicate the efficacy of the curriculum for building fluency with component skills and the importance of such instruction.
 
Increasing School Readiness in Early Education Programs with a Behavior Analytic Approach
Domain: Service Delivery
KATHERINE KAVANAUGH (Florida Institute of Technology), Joshua K. Pritchard (Florida Institute of Technology)
 
Abstract: In 2004, due to the rising number of students inadequately prepared for Kindergarten the state of Florida initiated a Voluntary Prekindergarten program that would allow all students, regardless of ability to pay, access to free half-day preschool. This program increased rates of Kindergarten readiness rates by nearly 10% each year. However, when assessing letter identification and sounds, only 72% of students who did not attend VPK were ready and only 80% of students who attended VPK were ready. This means that almost 30,000 students entering kindergarten do not have the required skills to succeed. And that is only in the state Florida. Several other states also have a VPK program or similar. But surprisingly, 11 states do not have any state funded pre-kindergarten programs. Many studies demonstrate that children who enter Kindergarten that are prepared will be more likely to be successful throughout their schooling and children that are not adequately prepared tend to fall behind in kindergarten. This delay frequently continues throughout the rest of the student’s schooling. This paper introduces several procedures that could be used to increase kindergarten readiness and decrease negative implications for the individual, the family and society.
 

Teaching Generalized Action Verb-Referent Relations: An Application of Instructional Design to Equivalence-Based Instruction

Domain: Applied Research
ANUSHA SUBRAMANYAM (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), John W. Eshleman (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology)
 
Abstract:

The purpose of this study was to expand the applied research on establishing generalized equivalence classes to target concept formation. This study compared the effects of using static (i.e., picture) and dynamic (i.e., brief video clip) instructional formats to teach conceptual classes comprised of action word-referent relations. Verbsgiven their transitory, dynamic, and relational naturewere targeted as a conceptual class distinct from other grammatical classes. Instructional design features, including multiple exemplars and fluency criteria, were applied to a computerized match-to-sample procedure in order to target both equivalence class formation and concept formation given 24 actions involving an actor manipulating an object. Five elementary school students, between 5 and 6 years of age, were selected for participation in this study. Participants had no known diagnoses, but performed at below-average levels in both reading and vocabulary at the start of the study. A multiple treatments, multi-probe experimental design was conducted, during which students progressed through six phases of instruction then testing for emergent and generalized relations. The results provided (1) initial information on acquisition, generalization, and maintenance of verbs as concepts; and (2) information on the conditions that are sufficient for establishing generalized equivalence classes comprised of action word-referent relations.

 
 
 
Panel #371
PDS EVENT: Conversation Hour With Prominent Women in OBM
Monday, May 25, 2015
2:00 PM–2:50 PM
201 (CC)
Area: OBM; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Amber Marie Candido (University of Nevada, Reno)
MARIA E. MALOTT (ABAI)
RAMONA HOUMANFAR (University of Nevada, Reno)
LAURA L. METHOT (CLG, Inc.)
Abstract:

At this event, OBM-interested students will hear about challenges (and successes) faced by women in OBM who are either in academia and/or are practitioners.

Keyword(s): OBM, Women
 
 
B. F. Skinner Lecture Series Paper Session #372
CE Offered: BACB

Channel Your Inner Entrepreneur: There's More to Consulting Than "Hanging up a Shingle"

Monday, May 25, 2015
2:00 PM–2:50 PM
203AB (CC)
Area: OBM; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Julie M. Slowiak, Ph.D.
Chair: Julie M. Slowiak (University of Minnesota Duluth)
DARRYL WAHLSTROM (D.A.W. Organization Consulting Solutions)
Darryl A. Wahlstrom, Ph.D., is an expert and leader in organizational performance. During the past 20 years, he has partnered with a wide variety of workplace teams and leaders to help them identify and overcome critical roadblocks to improved performance. S&P and Fortune companies such as DENSO Manufacturing, Pfizer, Inc., and Zoetis have partnered with Dr. Wahlstrom to help achieve organizational goals. He believes coaching is a powerful, dynamic, and creative process. He provides direct, confidential assistance for executives, leaders, and managers to help them identify their strengths and what may be presently holding them back. Honest feedback and valuable guidance combine to help them craft a workable pathway for personal growth that is both goal-oriented and focused on specific outcomes. He is a certified provider of the pioneering organizational and leadership technologies from Bartell & Bartell, Ltd. He holds the Associate Coach Certification (ACC) credential recognized by the International Coaching Federation (ICF) and advanced certification in Organizational Development Human Resource Management from Columbia University. Dr. Wahlstrom earned his Ph.D. in education at the University of Michigan, with a multi-disciplinary focus on organizational psychology. He frequently speaks and contributes content on leadership and coaching. He is active in several professional organizations including Michigan Manufacturers Association (MMA), Society for Human Resource Management (SHRM), and Society for Industrial and Organizational Psychology (SIOP).
Abstract:

The Era of Big Work in which corporations recruited and retained qualified workers, metered productivity over a 40-hour week, and incented workers with total compensation packages is the historic norm for the U.S. economy. After the Great Recession (2007-09) and massive layoffs, predictably many professionals did not return to positions comparable to the ones they previously held because of the slow, protracted economic recovery. Many workers, instead, re-appraised their personal direction and took stock of market factors and emerging trends. They intentionally chose not to return to traditional corporate jobs and have pursued careers as freelancers, independent consultants, and contract workers. In fact, estimates suggest that about 42 million, or one-third of all U.S. workers, fall into this category and that by the end of the decade, the numbers will rise by 40% to 60 million people. These independents are often seen as entrepreneurs as if the label were all encompassing, one-size-fits-all, and their success is determined by the presence--or absence--of some elusive quality or trait. There is an opportunity to view entrepreneurism more broadly and, in doing so, support the journeys of a growing number of individuals in their personal and professional growth.

Keyword(s): consulting, entrepreneur
 
 
Symposium #373
CE Offered: BACB
An Analysis of Practice Changes Following the Professional and Ethical Compliance Code for Behavior Analysts
Monday, May 25, 2015
2:00 PM–2:50 PM
213AB (CC)
Area: PRA/TBA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Deirdre Lee Fitzgerald (University of Saint Joseph)
CE Instructor: Deirdre Lee Fitzgerald, Ph.D.
Abstract: As the field of Behavior Analysis evolves, our practice codes and guidelines have similarly undergone transformations in specificity, rigor, precision, and scope. The 2016 implementation of the BACB Professional and Ethical Compliance Code for Behavior Analysts will have widespread impacts for certificants, preparations and training programs, and practice sites. An analysis of needed changes in these applied domains will be presented. Specific attention to needed changes to content required to move from the Guidelines for Responsible Conduct for Behavior Analysts and the Professional Disciplinary and Ethical Standards to the new compliance code will be outlined. Methods of integrating the new Professional and Ethical Compliance Code for Behavior Analysts into graduate curricula will be identified with suggestions for instructional designers and program evaluators. Finally, applications of the new code to daily practice by certificants, supervisees, and individuals preparing for certification will be presented with a focus on activities and assessments that will address competency.
Keyword(s): Compliance Code, Ethics, Graduate Training, Practice Standards
 
Components of the New Professional and Ethical Compliance Code that May Change your Practice
DEIRDRE LEE FITZGERALD (University of Saint Joseph)
Abstract: A comprehensive look at the professional practice of Behavior Analysis from actively involved practitioners along with extensive data from certificants have driven changes in the standards of practice for Behavior Analysts. These changes bring clarity and coordination to the various rules of our profession and allow for the address of issues across constituencies that are important to us. An analysis of components of the Professional and Ethical Compliance Code for Behavior Analysts and implications for practice changes that they may produce will be discussed. Ways to integrate these elements into training of new practitioners and the practice or current certificants will be addressed.
 
Embedding the New Ethics in the Graduate Curriculum Effectively
Michael F. Dorsey (Endicott College), MICHAEL WEINBERG (Orlando Behavior Health Services, LLC)
Abstract: Over the past several months, a number of changes have occurred in the evolution of the ethical codes governing the profession of Applied Behavior Analysis. In particular, in a special issue of their newsletter, the Behavior Analysis Certification Board recently announced the 2016 implementation of the Professional and Ethical Compliance Code for Behavior Analysts, which will replace the Guidelines for Responsible Conduct. In addition, there are now over 20 states with licensing laws governing the profession of Behavior Analysis, some based in part or in whole on the BACB standards, while others have extended the BACB standards or promulgated regulatory standards idiosyncratic to their respective states. Incorporating this diverse body of knowledge, especially with the advent of on-line graduate programs serving students residing outside of the state/country in which the institution of higher education is located, is critical to the future success of students. The goal of this presentation will be to review these new standards, including suggestions of how to best incorporate the information onto a successful curricula.
 
Current Issues and Approaches to Certification Exam Preparation for the Revised BACB Ethical Standards
MICHAEL WEINBERG (Orlando Behavior Health Services, LLC)
Abstract: The BACB recently posted a revised Ethical Standards document in September, 2014 that will go into effect as of January, 2016. As of this year’s ABAI conference, BACB certification candidates must complete Task List 4 course requirements, requiring changes in exam preparation assistance and products provided to these candidates. Some major changes in the ethical standards have been made and to that end, efforts have been made to incorporate these into the exam preparation materials and ensuring an understanding of these, as well as competence as behavior analyst practitioners. Revisions and methods for exam review and ensuring competence as practitioners will be presented along with strategies for assisting those who are preparing to take the exam to increase chances of successfully passing the first time. Current efforts to work with university programs to enhance exam preparation and study will be addressed as a component of providing exam preparation services.
 
 
Panel #374
CE Offered: BACB
PDS EVENT: Standard Celeration Chart, Equal Interval Graphs, or Both? You Decide
Monday, May 25, 2015
2:00 PM–2:50 PM
214A (CC)
Area: PRA/TPC; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Megan Miller, M.S.
Chair: Megan Miller (The Ohio State University)
RICHARD M. KUBINA JR. (Penn State)
MICHAEL M. MUELLER (Southern Behavioral Group)
CLAIRE ELLIS (Navigation Behavioral Consulting)
Abstract:

Problem solving and decision making encompass one of the most important practices in service delivery for behavior analysts. Different options exist for engaging in this process such as Standard Celeration Charts and Equal Interval Graphs. Most service providers use one type of graphing method within their service delivery but this may be because of a lack of training or exposure to other graphing options. The purpose of this panel is to expose students and practitioners to each type of graphing method so they can make informed decisions regarding which method is more appropriate for the services they provide. Panelists will answer questions about the graphing methods they use to engage in effective problem solving and decision making, how they train others to use these graphing methods, and the benefits and disadvantages of these graphing methods. One panelist will focus on the use of the Standard Celeration Chart, one will focus on the use of Equal Interval Graphs, and one will focus on the feasibility of both types of graphs from a practitioner perspective.

Keyword(s): Decision Making, Graphing, Problem Solving
 
 
Invited Paper Session #375
CE Offered: PSY/BACB

Behavioral Economics of Sexual HIV Risk Behavior in Humans: Sexual Discounting

Monday, May 25, 2015
2:00 PM–2:50 PM
006AB (CC)
Area: SCI; Domain: Basic Research
Instruction Level: Basic
CE Instructor: Matthew W. Johnson, Ph.D.
Chair: Christine E. Hughes (University of North Carolina Wilmington)
MATTHEW W. JOHNSON (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine)
Matthew W. Johnson, Ph.D., is an associate professor of psychiatry at Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine. His behavioral economics research has applied delay discounting and demand analyses to addiction. Highly cited early contributions include validation of human delay discounting methods and approaches for evaluating discounting data. His research has indicated delay discounting of condom use to be a critical variable influencing sexual HIV risk. Dr. Johnson also has conducted human studies determining the acute effects of numerous drugs including cocaine, methamphetamine, nicotine, caffeine, GHB, alcohol, triazolam, ramelteon, psilocybin, dextromethorphan, and salvinorin A. His recent research has combined his areas of expertise by determining the effects of acute drug administration on the discounting of sexual outcomes. Dr. Johnson has published more than 50 manuscripts and chapters. He has been awarded more than $5 million as principal investigator from the National Institutes of Health. Dr. Johnson received the 2011 Young Psychopharmacologist Award from the Psychopharmacology and Substance Abuse Division of the American Psychological Association, and the 2014 Federation of Associations in Behavioral & Brain Sciences Early Career Impact Award. Dr. Johnson has been interviewed about the behavioral effects of drugs by CNN’s Wolf Blitzer Show, NPR’s Morning Edition, NPR’s Kojo Nnamdi Show, The New York Times, and The Washington Post.
Abstract:

Many studies have shown that greater delay discounting of money is associated with drug-use disorders. The Sexual Discounting Task was developed to determine the effect of delay on decisions to use condoms in casual sex contexts. Findings show that sexual discounting is typically hyperbolic, consistent with discounting results across species and outcomes. Data show sexual discounting to be: sensitivity to sexual partner desirability and likelihood of having a sexually transmitted infection (STI); related to self-reported recent sexual risk (contrasting with money discounting); greater in drug-dependent vs. nondependent individuals; and reliable at a one-week interval. Recently examined were the acute effects of drugs associated with sexual risk on the Sexual Discounting Task, including a novel probability discounting variation assessing the effects of uncertainty of STI contraction on condom use. Results suggest that cocaine, methamphetamine, and alcohol increase both delay and probability discounting of condom use. For methamphetamine, this increase was observed only for those individuals for whom methamphetamine increased sexual arousal ratings. These drugs showed no effect in changing money discounting. Collectively, these data suggest that delay and probability discounting are processes contributing to HIV risk behavior. The results also highlight the limitations of assessing discounting with only monetary outcomes.

Target Audience:

Psychologists, behavior analysts, practitioners, and graduate students.

Learning Objectives: At the conclusion of the event, participants should be able to: (1) identify similarities in results between the discounting of condom use and the discounting of money in humans and primary reinforcers in nonhumans; (2) describe the effects of methamphetamine, cocaine, and alcohol on the discounting of sexual and monetary outcomes; and (3) identify evidence indicating that monetary and nonmonetary tasks show differential relations with clinical variables of interest.
Keyword(s): drug-use disorders, risky behavior, sexual discounting
 
 
Symposium #376
CE Offered: BACB
Technological Innovations for the Teaching of Behavior Analysis in Colleges
Monday, May 25, 2015
2:00 PM–2:50 PM
206AB (CC)
Area: TBA; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Emaley Bladh McCulloch (Relias Learning)
CE Instructor: Dana R. Reinecke, Ph.D.
Abstract:

With the proliferation of new technology, there are more ways to teach behavior analysis than ever before. Technology allows us to reach students who would not otherwise be able to learn about behavior analysis due to geographical or other barriers. Additionally, technology provides inexpensive alternatives that allow students to have meaningful learning experiences that would otherwise be costly in terms of financial and other resources. The presentations in this symposium will discuss some recent innovations in the use of technology to teach behavior analysis at the post-secondary level, to graduate and undergraduate students in a variety of disciplines and at three different college and university settings in the US and in Mexico. Specifically, we will address the use of technology in online education in behavior analysis at the post-college level, a technology-based functional behavior assessment training protocol used to teach about behavior analysis to non-behavior analysis students, and the use of a readily-available hardware and software solution for student participation in operant conditioning laboratory exercises.

Keyword(s): online education, teaching BA, technology
 
Assessment of the Effectiveness of Virtual Functional Behavior Assessment Training on the Understanding of Functions of Behavior in Graduate Students
DANA R. REINECKE (The Sage Colleges), Cheryl Ostryn (The Sage Colleges)
Abstract: An understanding of the functions of behavior is beneficial in many fields. The availability of technology for virtual training in assessment of the functions of behavior presents unique opportunities to provide training in functions of behavior to students in human services outside of ABA. In the current study, students in a graduate-level dietetic internship program were provided with the opportunity to learn about functions of behavior through an online module, which included videos and guided activities for functional behavior assessment. Pre- and post-tests were presented, which provided case study materials relevant to their field, and asked specific questions to determine if there was a change in the students’ understanding of behavior from a functional assessment perspective. Blind reviewers scored pre- and post-tests on three variables, including descriptions of behavior, antecedents and consequences, and causes of behavior. Comparisons of pre- and post-test scores across these variables indicate modest improvements in use of objective, behavioral terminology to describe relevant behavior, environmental events, and possible functions of behavior.
 
Inexpensive Setup Based on Arduino and Visual Basic for Laboratory Courses on Operant Conditioning
ROGELIO ESCOBAR (National Autonomous University of Mexico), Carlos Alexis Perez Herrera (National Autonomous University of Mexico)
Abstract: Because of the increasing popularity of microcontroller boards, interfaces for controlling operant conditioning chambers can be built at low cost with barely any knowledge of electronics. One example is the Arduino board that can be programmed and controlled through one USB port of a laptop or netbook computer. These boards were used in combination with Visual Basic 2010 Express Edition programming for providing users with a “friendly” graphic interface in operant laboratories. Additionally, Visual Basic programs allowed storage and visual display of real-time data in digital counters and cumulative records. This Arduino-Visual Basic interface was used in two laboratory courses in the National Autonomous University of Mexico. Low-cost operant conditioning chambers were built and students connected the interface and uploaded the programs to the computers in the classroom. During the courses, the students conducted basic schedules of reinforcement using rats as subjects. The cost of each interface and experimental chamber was less than 60 dollars. This presentation will provide detailed instructions for setting up the equipment and will describe how the equipment was used. The portable setup developed for laboratory courses could be used without previous knowledge in electronics and in places where resources are an issue.
 
A Comparison of Two Reading Assignments on Quiz Performance by Online Students
CHERYL J. DAVIS (Institute for Behavioral Studies, Endicott College), Thomas L. Zane (Institute for Behavioral Studies, Endicott College)
Abstract: Online instruction continues to increase in popularity. However, just as in traditional classroom instruction, online education can be done well or be done poorly. The research literature on online instruction is fraught with problems that make establishment of learning principles for how to teach effectively online highly skeptical. This research base consistently lacks the application of a natural science methodology, such as the use of established research designs, operational definitions of key terms, and quantifiable and reliable measurement. What is needed in this field of online instruction, is well-developed research studies that experimentally test different factors that may (or may not) contribute to effective online instruction. The purpose of this study was to compare the influence of two different types of online assignments on weekly quiz scores in classes that were exclusively online. The dependent variable was the score on weekly quizzes. The independent variable was either written responses to study questions that targeted specific points for that week’s reading material, or a simple summary of the readings for that week. We used an alternating treatments design over 4 sections of graduate-level classes in applied behavior analysis. Results showed that study questions resulted in higher quiz scores than the reading summaries. Although students reported more time spent each week completing the study questions than reading summaries, they preferred the study questions, as those gave them a better “understanding” of the material.
 
 
Paper Session #377
Contingencies and Metacontingencies
Monday, May 25, 2015
2:00 PM–2:50 PM
007C (CC)
Area: TPC
Keyword(s): Contingencies
Chair: Diego Zilio (State University of São Paulo)
 

The Biggest Matching Law Study You Never Heard Of: A Behavior Analytic Appreciation of Barker and Wright's Lost Classic, Midwest and Its Children

Domain: Theory
JAMES T. TODD (Eastern Michigan University)
 
Abstract:

The history of behavior analysis is primarily one of keen attention given to the discrete responses of individual organisms under carefully controlled conditions. From this, we aspire to deal effectively with the totality of behavior under ordinary, undesigned conditions. One of our great advancements in getting to this goal is the matching law, which tells us that various measures of responding are proportional to various measures of reinforcement. This we usually ascribe to Herrnsteins basic experimental work in the early 1960s. Nowadays, however, when we want to prove the general worth of the matching law, we sometimes use it to explain scoring attempts in sports or the behavior of individual children in reasonably typical settings. However, more than half a century ago, in the early 1950s, the Ecological Psychologists were already attempting to relate rates of socially relevant classes of objectively measured behaviorin everyone in an entire cityto various objectively measured aspects of the physical environmentacross an entire city. One of the results of this effort was an anticipation of a matching-type analysis of the participation every inhabitant in a city in all of its response opportunities, as described in Roger Barker and Herbert Wright's lost classic, Midwest and Its Children (1954). The complexity and sophistication of this massive effort, and the attempts of Barker and Wright to graphically and mathematically organize the data, can serve as a lesson to behavior analysts looking to expand the relevance of their work from discrete responses in the lab to everyday behavior of great general import.

 

Homogenous and/or Pragmatic Reductionism: Comments on the Relation Between Contingency and Metacontingency

Domain: Theory
DIEGO ZILIO (State University of São Paulo), Kester Carrara (State University of São Paulo)
 
Abstract:

One of the main arguments for the defense of metacontingency as a model for explaining social phenomena is that it embraces another kind of selection (cultural selection) beyond natural and operant selection which, despite being emergent on operant processes, would not be reducible to operant selection. Therefore, for being in another level of analysis, cultural selection demands a conceptual framework of its own, hence the metacontingency. Our goal here is to discuss the argument of irreducibility through two models of reductionism: (a) Ernest Nagel's homogeneous reduction, according to which reduction is established when it's possible to derivate the reduced theory from the reductive theory without needing bridge laws; and (b) what we have called pragmatic reduction, which occurs when a theory situated at a lower level of analysis presents more parsimonious explanations as well as better conditions for prediction and control of phenomena supposedly occurring at a higher (emergent) level. Having these two models of reduction as our analytical framework, we will analyze the relations between two dyads present in the discussions regarding cultural selection: (a) individual social behavior and culture; and (b) contingency and metacontingency. We will suggest that although metacontingency seems to be reducible to contingency (and that we can explain social behavior in terms of operant behavior), from that does not necessarily follows that culture is reducible to individual social behavior.

 
Bridging the Gap Between a Science of Individual Behavior and a Science of Cultural Practices: From Social Behavior to Metacontingency
Domain: Theory
KALLIU COUTO (Oslo and Akershus University College), Ingunn Sandaker (Oslo and Akershus University College of Applied Sciences)
 
Abstract: Just as explanations of individual behavior based on three-term contingency benefit from knowledge of other levels of analysis (e.g. inter- and intra-species particularities), explanation of cultural practices also may benefit by incorporating knowledge from other levels. Behavior analysts adopt a selectionist approach when explaining behavior of human and nonhuman organisms. For human beings this selection process can be conceptually divided into three levels: phylogenetic, ontogenetic and cultural (Skinner, 1981). Although all levels of selection interact to determine human behavior, the focus of the field of behavior analysis has been on ontogenesis. The formulation of the metacontingency concept (Glenn, 1986, 1988; Glenn & Malott, 2004; Malott & Glenn, 2006) brought a tangible way of studying selection on the third level. However, as Mattaini (2006) postulates, the metacontingency concept might not capture all aspects of cultural selection. On the other hand, the three-term contingency concept on its own also may not capture all aspects of individual selection. It will be argued here that an alternative approach may be carried out by bridging the gap between science of individual behavior and science of cultural practices through better integration of knowledge from behavioural contingencies and interlocking contingencies into metacontingency.
 
Keyword(s): Contingencies
 
 
Panel #378
CE Offered: BACB
The Future of ABA Interventions for Children With Autism
Monday, May 25, 2015
2:00 PM–2:50 PM
217A (CC)
Area: VBC/AUT; Domain: Applied Research
CE Instructor: Mark R. Dixon, Ph.D.
Chair: Dermot Barnes-Holmes (National University of Ireland, Maynooth)
MARK R. DIXON (Southern Illinois University)
RUTH ANNE REHFELDT (Southern Illinois University)
ANDY BONDY (Pyramid Educational Consultants)
Abstract:

The field of applied behavior analysis has contributed greatly to the wellbeing of children with autism and related disabilities. Problematic behaviors have been reduced, social skills enhanced, and language repertoires established through the use of behavior analytic technologies and teaching strategies. While these successes have helped to improve the lives of children and families, critics of behavior analysis continue to assert that the repertoires established by behavior analytic treatments are narrow, lacking in generalization, and neglectful of important cognitive skills. In particular, verbal behavior approaches designed to instruct language skills have been criticized as lacking the necessary complexity required to develop genuine understanding or fluent conversation. The present panel will address this issue in the context of current research trends, available manualized treatment models, and issues related to the acceptance of behavior analytic treatment. Special emphasis will be placed on moving the field toward contemporary behavior analytic approaches that are designed to increase communication skills beyond elementary verbal operants.

Keyword(s): Autism, PEAK, PECs, Verbal Behavior
 
 
Symposium #379
CE Offered: BACB
Enhancing the Effectiveness and Efficiency of Instructional Procedures
Monday, May 25, 2015
2:00 PM–3:50 PM
217B (CC)
Area: AUT/EDC; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Regina A. Carroll (West Virginia University)
Discussant: Alison M. Betz (Florida Institute of Technology)
CE Instructor: Regina A. Carroll, Ph.D.
Abstract: Practitioners and researchers have effectively used a range of instructional techniques from applied behavior analysis to teach critical social, language, and academic skills to children with and without intellectual disabilities. The collection of studies in this symposium will explore how different variations in instructional procedures can influence the acquisition and generalization of skills. First, Casey Nottingham will present a study examining the effects of differential reinforcement on the acquisition of tacts for children with an autism spectrum disorder (ASD). Second, Brad Joachim will present a study evaluating the effects of different consequences for correct responses on skill acquisition for children with ASD during discrete trial instruction. Third, Brittany LeBlanc will present a study comparing the influence of errors of omission and commission on skill acquisition for typically developing children. Fourth, Marc Lanovaz will present a study comparing serial and concurrent training on the generalization of receptive identification skills for children with ASD. Finally, Alison Betz will discuss interesting components of each study, and describe future areas of research on skill acquisition.
Keyword(s): Autism, discrete trial, Skill acquisition
 
A Comparison of Differential Reinforcement Procedures on the Acquisition of Tacts in Children with Autism
CASEY NOTTINGHAM (Caldwell College), Brittany English (Caldwell University), Jason C. Vladescu (Caldwell College), Tiffany Kodak (University of Oregon), Paul Argott (EPIC School), April N. Kisamore (Caldwell College)
Abstract: Differential reinforcement is an operant procedure implemented to increase the occurrence of desired behavior while simultaneously decreasing the occurrence of undesired behavior. Although researchers and early interventions manuals have recommended the use of differential reinforcement arrangements during skill acquisition programming, the most appropriate means to using differential reinforcement to maximize unprompted responding remains unclear. The purpose of the current study was to extend the extent research by comparing the effects of multiple differential reinforcement arrangements and a nondifferential reinforcement arrangement the acquisition of tacts in children with autism. The current study is the first to include a manipulation of reinforcement magnitude and include a methodology to identify reinforcement values. The results demonstrate that differential reinforcement procedures are effective in increasing correct unprompted responding for some individuals.
 
A Comparison of Different Consequences for Correct Responses During Discrete Trial Instruction
BRAD JOACHIM (West Virginia University), Regina A. Carroll (West Virginia University)
Abstract: When a child is first learning a skill with discrete trial instruction (DTI), it is typically recommended that teachers provide brief access to highly preferred tangible items contingent on every correct responses. Few studies have systematically evaluated the effects of delivering different types of consequences for correct responses on skill acquisition during DTI. We compared the effects of four different consequences for correct responses on skill acquisition for three children with an autism spectrum disorder. Specifically, we compared skill acquisition when correct responses resulted in (a) access to praise and a preferred tangible item, (b) praise and a token exchangeable for access to a preferred tangible item at the end of the session, (c) praise only, and (d) no differential consequence. Next, we assessed participant’s preference for each of the teaching conditions using a concurrent-chains assessment. The results suggested that each participant acquired the target skills in one or more teaching conditions; however, the consequence that resulted in the quickest acquisition of target skills differed across participants. During the concurrent-chains assessment, participants preferred conditions that were also associated with the quickest acquisition of target skills. These results are discussed in terms of best practice for teaching children during DTI.
 
Comparing the Effects of Errors of Commission and Omission on Skill Acquisition
BRITTANY LEBLANC (University Of Oregon), Tiffany Kodak (University of Oregon), Samantha Moberg (University of Oregon), Jacqueline Kammer (University of Oregon), Shaji Haq (University of Oregon), Patricia Zemantic (University of Oregon)
Abstract: The current study extends DiGennero Reed, Reed, Baez, and Maguire (2011) by comparing the effects of errors of commission, errors of omission, and no errors on the acquisition of auditory-visual conditional discriminations with two typically developing children. We used an adapted alternating treatment design, and the dependent variable was the number of sessions to meet the mastery criterion. During errors of commission, the experimenter reinforced incorrect responses during 17% of the trials. During errors of omission, the experimenter failed to reinforce correct responses during 17% to 18% of the trials. Kyle’s results showed that he acquired targets in 7, 8, and 18 sessions for the no errors, errors of commission, and errors of omission conditions, respectively. Cassie acquired targets in the no errors condition in 4 sessions and 8 sessions in the errors of omission and commission conditions. Thus, both types of errors delayed acquisition, and errors of omission had a greater impact on acquisition for one participant. We will discuss the importance of empirical evaluations that compare different types and amounts of treatment fidelity errors and the impact these errors have on skill acquisition.
 
A comparison of serial and concurrent training on the generalization of receptive labeling
MARC J. LANOVAZ (Universite de Montreal), Marie-Michèle Dufour (Université de Montréal)
Abstract: Researchers have shown that serial and concurrent training both promote generalization of learned skills in children with autism spectrum disorders. However, few studies have compared both training strategies together, and to our knowledge, none of these comparisons involved receptive labeling. Thus, the purpose of our study was to compare the effects of serial and concurrent training on the generalization of receptive labeling in nine children with autism spectrum disorders. We taught one to three pairs of concepts to each participant. One concept within each pair was taught using concurrent training and the other using serial training. We alternated teaching sessions within a multi-element design and staggered the introduction of the subsequent pairs as in a multiple baseline design. Overall, five participants generalized at least one concept more rapidly with concurrent training, four participants generalized approximately simultaneously following both strategies, and none showed generalization more rapidly with serial training. Our results are consistent with other comparison studies on the topic and indicate that practitioners should prefer concurrent training over serial training when teaching basic concepts to children with autism spectrum disorders.
 
 
Symposium #380
CE Offered: BACB
Recent Research on Skill Acquisition in Children with Autism
Monday, May 25, 2015
2:00 PM–3:50 PM
Grand Ballroom C1 (CC)
Area: AUT/DDA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Erin Richard White (Alpine Learning Group)
Discussant: Amanda Karsten (Western New England University)
CE Instructor: Erin Richard White, M.A.
Abstract: This symposium will be comprised of four data-based presentations that describe innovative research on teaching skills to children with autism. The first study investigated the use of a procedure to decrease the inappropriate echolalia of the echoic prompt “say.” A pause was introduced between the say prompt and the echoic prompt and then systematically shortened in duration. Appropriate echoic responding increased for all participants following the pause procedure. The second presentation compared three procedures (i.e., vocal imitation training, stimulus-stimulus pairing, mand-model procedures) for establishing echoic repertoires. The results suggested that the most effective teaching procedure may differ across participants. The third study evaluated the eight-step prompting sequence outlined by Horner and Keilitz (1975) to teach self-case skills. They then investigated whether delivery of reinforcement for correct responses following general prompts increased the likelihood of prompt dependency. The results were idiosyncratic across participants. The final paper evaluated the effects of a 2-component monitoring response plus a prompting procedure on the differential motor imitation responses of two children with autism. The participants learned to imitate the model’s response only during trials in which a high-preference item was delivered to the model.
Keyword(s): Echoic, Echolalia, Observational Learning, Prompting
 
Use of a Pause Procedure to Teach Appropriate Echoic Responding Following the Instruction, “Say”
ANDRESA A. DE SOUZA (University of Nebraska Medical Center), Nicole M. Rodriguez (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Medical Center), Megan Ashley Levesque (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Medical Center), Jessica Niemeier (UNMC Munroe- Meyer Institute), Michelle Ocen (Center for Autism and Neuro-developmental Disabilities of Southern California, UC Irvine Medical Center)
Abstract: Children with autism spectrum disorders (ASD) often engage in indiscriminate echoic responding such as echolalia of the instruction “say” when prompted to repeat a word or phrase. Despite the prevalence of echolalia in ASD and its potential to interfere with the acquisition of functional language, few studies have addressed echolalia of instructions during language training (Ingvarsson, 2011; Kodak, 2012; Valentino, Shillingsburg, Conine, Powell, 2012). In the present study, we used a nonconcurrent multiple baseline to evaluate a procedure in which a pause was introduced between the say prompt and the echoic prompt and then systematically shortened in duration on inappropriate echolalia of the word “say” and appropriate echolalia of the echoic prompt. Three children diagnosed with an ASD and one diagnosed with Unspecified Adjustment Reaction Disorder participated. For all participants, zero or near-zero levels of correct responding were observed during baseline in which there was differential reinforcement for correct echoic responding but no pause. Appropriate echoic responding increased for all participants following the pause procedure, although some participants required an additional blackout procedure to produce desirable outcomes. Appropriate echoic responding maintained across new words, therapists, and settings.
 
A Systematic Comparison of Commonly Used Echoic Teaching Procedures
CATIA CIVIDINI-MOTTA CIVIDINI (New England Center for Children), Nicole Scharrer (The New England Center for Children), William H. Ahearn (New England Center for Children)
Abstract: There is limited investigation of procedures for establishing echoic responses. In this presentation we will be reviewing data from treatment comparisons of various iterations of vocal imitation training, stimulus-stimulus pairing, and mand-model procedures. Preference assessments were conducted to identify highly preferred items, including edibles and tangible items. At least two sets of three target sounds were then selected for each participant. Data were collected on target vocalizations emitted during training sessions and during play sessions completed prior to and after training sessions. These data, in addition to the participants’ performance during probes assessing the function of their vocalizations, were compared to assess the efficacy of each teaching procedure. Interobserver agreement data were collected on over 33% of all sessions above and have averaged above 90% agreement. The results suggested that the most effective teaching procedure may differ across participants. In addition, data indicated that the mand-model procedure may be more likely to be effective when prompts are provided for both errors of commission and omission. Finally, data from the first few comparisons showed that play sessions completed prior to and post-training sessions may be unnecessary, at least in cases when establishing echoic responses is the priority.
 
A Systematic Replication of the Horner & Keilitz Prompting Sequence
CATHERINE B SIMMS (University of Florida), Jonathan K Fernand (University of Florida), Sarah K. Slocum (University of Florida), Christopher Rubow (University of Florida), Timothy R. Vollmer (University of Florida)
Abstract: Horner and Keilitz (1975) used an eight-step prompting sequence to teach the self-care skill of tooth brushing to eight individuals with intellectual disabilities. The Horner and Keilitz study included responding to a “general” prompt and independent responding within the chaining task as “correct” responding. It is possible that the inclusion of a general prompt as a correct response may result in any step of the chain being prompt dependent, or at the very least, the initiation of the chain may be prompt dependent. Therefore, the purpose of the current project was to, first, evaluate the Horner and Keilitz (1975) eight-step prompting sequence by evaluating responding at each prompt level and, second, to investigate whether delivery of reinforcement for correct responses following general prompts increased the likelihood of prompt dependency. Three individuals with intellectual disabilities have participated. Thus far, participant responding has been idiosyncratic as to whether mastery of the chain was reached at the independent level or at the level of the general prompt.
 
Teaching Children with Autism to Differentially Imitate Observed Behaviors
PAULA GAGLIOTI (Caldwell College), Tina Sidener (Caldwell College), Kenneth F. Reeve (Caldwell College), Bridget A. Taylor (Alpine Learning Group)
Abstract: Imitation has been taught to children with autism using contrived procedures (e.g., stating “do this” prior to instruction); however, to date no studies have demonstrated effective procedures to teach imitation controlled by natural antecedents and consequences. The purpose of this study was to evaluate the effects of a 2-component monitoring response plus a prompting procedure on the differential motor imitation responses of two children with autism. Three types of trials were interspersed during each session: (1) model receiving a high-preference item contingent upon a motor response, (2) model receiving a neutral item contingent upon a motor response, and (3) model receiving nothing contingent upon a motor response. Generalization was assessed with a peer, novel stimuli and responses, and in the absence of the monitoring response. Both participants learned to imitate only during trials in which a high-preference item was delivered to the model. These results add to the literature an effective teaching procedure to increase imitation through observation using natural antecedents and consequences.
 
 
Symposium #381
CE Offered: BACB
Teaching Children with Autism and Developmental Disabilities Critical Safety Skills
Monday, May 25, 2015
2:00 PM–3:50 PM
217C (CC)
Area: AUT/DDA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: David Garcia (Behavior Analysis Inc.)
Discussant: Jack Scott (Florida Atlantic University)
CE Instructor: David Garcia, Ed.D.
Abstract: Children with autism often lack critical safety skills that put them at serious risk of injury or harm by others. Often the use of specialized teaching methods is required for children with autism to learn these important skills. At this time there is very limited research in this important area. This symposium will attempt to begin to fill this void by presenting a series of studies that address fire safety, navigating safely through parking lots, and safety skills related to social media. The first two studies will address fire-safety skills and will demonstrate simple to use, teaching methodologies consisting of modeling and rehearsal to teach children with autism to evacuate settings when hearing a fire-alarm and to notify an adult. These strategies also resulted in generalization across settings and different sounding alarms for most participants. The third study will show the effectiveness of video-modeling with in-situ feedback to teach several critical skills needed to navigate through parking lots. Lastly, a study will be presented that addresses social safety skills in a charter high school using behavioral skills training and video-modeling. Results and implications for future research and application will be discussed for all studies.
 
Using Modeling and Rehearsal to Teach Fire Safety to Children with Autism
DAVID GARCIA (Behavior Analysis Inc.), Charles Dukes (Florida Atlantic University), Michael Brady (Florida Atlantic University), Jack Scott (Florida Atlantic University), Cynthia L. Wilson (Florida Atlantic University)
Abstract: We evaluated the effectiveness of a modeling and rehearsal strategy to teach young children with autism to evacuate different settings when hearing a fire-alarm and to report it to an adult outdoors. A multiple baseline across participants design was used with three children between 4 and 5 years of age. Results showed that modeling and rehearsal were effective in teaching the fire safety skills to all children. Safety skills also maintained during a 5-week follow-up and generalized to novel settings for each participant. Furthermore, the skills maintained in the generalization settings 5-weeks following the conclusion of the study. This study demonstrates a simple-methodology that can be used by practitioners and teachers to teach children with autism. Implications of safety skill instruction for children with autism will be discussed with particular emphasis on the applied significance of the results as well as new directions for future research related to safety skill instruction.
 
Are Modeling and Rehearsal Both Necessary? Teaching Fire Safety Skills Without Modeling
JIMENA VAILLANT-MEKRAS (Florida Autism Treatment Centers), David Garcia (Behavior Analysis Inc.)
Abstract: A recent study conducted by Garcia et al. (2013) showed that modeling combined with rehearsal was an effective teaching methodology for teaching children with autism the necessary skills to evacuate different settings when hearing a fire-alarm and notifying an adult. Results also showed that the skills maintained and generalized across settings. However, the authors did not evaluate whether participants generalized the skills across different sounding alarms. The current study used a multiple baseline across participants design with 5 children with autism to evaluate whether rehearsal alone with most-to-least prompting would be sufficient to teach fire-safety skills without the need for a modeling component. Results showed that this methodology was effective in teaching the same fire-safety skills as in the Garcia et al. (2013) study without the need of a modeling component. Most participants showed maintenance and generalization of the skills across settings. Furthermore, one of the participants showed generalization across different auditory stimuli (different sounding alarms) and 3 participants showed generalization across alarms following brief multiple exemplar training. Implications for the simple use of this teaching methodology by caregivers and teachers will be discussed as well as suggestions for future research.
 
Using Video Modeling with In-Situ Video Feedback to Teach Parking Lot Safety to Individuals with Autism
TOBY J. HONSBERGER (Renaissance Learning Academy)
Abstract: Parking lots present a plethora of dangerous situations for pedestrians and require a unique set of skills to be navigated safely. Individuals with autism spectrum disorder often have poor pedestrian skills due to their insensitivity to subtle environmental cues and deficient problem solving in unfamiliar environments (Goldsmith, 2009; Jossman et al, 2008). The present study used video modeling to teach three individuals with autism spectrum disorder between the ages of 15 and 19 years old how to safely navigate a parking lot. Participants were taught to move through a parking lot using strategies based on the Radburn Principle, which emphasizes the separation of pedestrians and motor vehicles. The parking lot of a public charter school was the setting for the study, a location that was familiar to the participants and accessed regularly. In situ video prompting feedback was provided to participants immediately following any deviations from the target responses. A multiple probe across participants was utilized and revealed rapid acquisition by all participants. Maintenance probes will be collected to determine whether skills will be maintained over time.
 

School Based Social Safety Skills Program: A Community Application

JENNIFER AGGANIS (BCBA)
Abstract:

Teaching social safety skills using evidence-based practices in school and community settings has important implications to the overall safety of individuals with developmental disabilities. Social safety skills combine nonverbal communication, social reciprocity, social cognition, and self-awareness. The presenter will briefly review current literature on instructional methodologies for teaching social safety skills through the use of behavior skills training and video modeling. Instructional strategies, as well as general categories that can be used to create a solid base for teaching social safety skills in schools will also be presented. Preliminary data for several individuals with developmental disabilities will be provided consisting of baseline and in situ training of social safety skills. Baseline and in situ training was conducted in the community through collaboration with a local charter high school. The implications of the results will be addressed with particular emphasis on the utility of the teaching procedures by school staff. This study will address critical social safety skills that are necessary for any school age student to maintain their safety.

 
 
Symposium #382
CE Offered: BACB
Advancements in Skill Acquisition Research for Individuals with Autism Spectrum Disorders
Monday, May 25, 2015
2:00 PM–3:50 PM
217D (CC)
Area: AUT/PRA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Kimberly Sloman (Douglass Developmental Disabilities Center, Rutgers University )
Discussant: Thomas S. Higbee (Utah State University)
CE Instructor: Kimberly Sloman, Ph.D.
Abstract: The symposium includes four papers related to the effectiveness of various skill acquisition techniques for individuals with autism spectrum disorders (ASD). In the first paper, Rebecca Werle will present on a comparison of simple discrimination and conditional-only teaching methods in teaching receptive identification to individuals with ASD. In the second paper, Mariana Torres Viso will present on a comparison between speech output and no speech output conditions in teaching receptive identification to individuals with ASD. In the third paper, Shimin Bao will present on a comparison of three training sequences on acquisition of expressive and receptive skills for individuals with ASD. In the fourth paper, Shaji Haq will present on a comparison of massed and distributed practice in skill acquisition for individuals with ASD. Finally, Thomas Higbee will serve as the discussant for the four papers.
Keyword(s): autism, skill acquisition, treatment comparison
 
An analysis of the simple-conditional and conditional only methods
REBECCA WERLE (Florida Institute of Technology), Alison M. Betz (Florida Institute of Technology)
Abstract: Children with autism spectrum disorder often have difficulty in making conditional discriminations. As such, various teaching methods have been developed and evaluated to determine the best approach for teaching conditional discriminations for this population. The purpose of this study was to evaluate various extensions of the previous research that compared the efficacy of the simple-conditional and conditional-only methods on teaching receptive identification tasks (Grow et al., 2014) by: 1) modifying teaching procedures, 2) determining the extent to which there may be interaction effects in the experimental designs, and 3) evaluating the effectiveness of a modified simple-conditional method. Results will be discussed in limitations and practical application.
 
The Effects of Speech Output Technology on Skill Acquisition in Children with Autism Spectrum Disorder
MARIANA TORRES-VISO (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Kimberly Sloman (Douglass Developmental Disabilities Center, Rutgers University), Katelyn Selver (Douglass Developmental Disabilities Center, Rutgers University)
Abstract: Previous research on the use of voice output communication aids (VOCAs) has found a number of positive effects including that incorporating speech output into language learning tasks may result in more efficient learning (e.g., Schlosser et al, 1998). However, the relationship between speech output and skill acquisition has not yet been evaluated for individuals with autism spectrum disorders (ASD). The present study compared acquisition of receptive identification of stimuli with speech output (SO) to a no speech output (NSO) condition. Two individuals with ASD participated. For both participants, a multielement design along with a multiple baseline probe across sets was used to evaluate the conditions. Results showed higher rates of correct responding and lower rates of errors for targets were obtained in the SO condition across sets. Furthermore, participants generally met mastery criteria with SO targets in fewer sessions, indicating higher efficiency of the SO condition. Findings from this investigation provide strong preliminary evidence for the benefits of speech output in skill acquisition for children with ASD, both in terms of student accuracy and session efficiency.
 
The Effects of Receptive and Expressive Sequencing on the Acquisition of Feature, Function, and Class
SHIMIN BAO (University of Houston-Clear Lake), Taylor Sweatt (University of Houston-Clear Lake), Sarah Antal (University of Houston-Clear Lake), Sarah A. Lechago (University of Houston-Clear Lake)
Abstract: Many Early and Intensive Behavioral Intervention (EIBI) curricula recommend targeting receptive language skills prior to targeting the corresponding expressive skills (Leaf & McEachin, 1999; Lovaas, 2003). However, there is very little empirical support for this recommendation. Moreover, some of the research literature on this topic demonstrates that expressive language training may facilitate the acquisition of receptive language (Cuvo &Riva, 1980; Keller &Bucher, 1980; Smeets, 1978). Additional research is warranted to investigate the effects of receptive-expressive sequencing in teaching language to children diagnosed with autism (Petursdottir & Carr, 2011). This study contributes to this body of literature by comparing the effects of three training sequences: 1) expressive-receptive, 2) receptive-expressive, and 3) mixed expressive and receptive, on the acquisition of object feature, function, and class in three children diagnosed with autism. An alternating-treatments design was used to examine the total number of trials to the mastery criterion for both expressive and receptive targets. Thus far, the results demonstrate that targeting the expressive skills before targeting the corresponding receptive skills produces fewer total trials to the mastery criterion for all three participants. Additionally, there was greater emergence of receptive responding after training responses expressively than there was emergence of expressive responding after training responses receptively.
 
Comparing the Effects of Massed and Distributed Practice for Children with Autism
SHAJI HAQ (University of Oregon), Tiffany Kodak (University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee), Eva Kurtz-Nelson (University of Oregon), Marilynn Porritt (University of Oregon), Kristin Rush (University of Oregon), Tom Cariveau (University of Oregon), Vincent E. Campbell (University of Oregon), Traci Elaine Ruppert (University of Oregon)
Abstract: The ways that educators format instruction has implications for children's acquisition of skills. The frequency of practice opportunities that are provided in an instructional session, and the number of instructional sessions that are conducted per week, are two ways to format instruction. Massed practice is an instructional format in which many practice opportunities are provided in an instructional session on one day during the week. In contrast, distributed practice involves presenting fewer practice opportunities in sessions that are conducted across several days per week. The current study replicated and extended Haq and Kodak (in press) by comparing massed and distributed practice on the acquisition of tacts, textual, and intraverbal behavior for children with autism using an adapted alternating treatments design. Dependent measures included total trials, minutes, and weeks to mastery. The results showed that distributed practice led to faster acquisition for all participants. Future research and implications for practice will be discussed.
 
 
Symposium #383
CE Offered: BACB
Get Moving: Behavior Analysis of Physical Activity for Health and Fitness
Monday, May 25, 2015
2:00 PM–3:50 PM
Texas Ballroom Salon B (Grand Hyatt)
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Matthew P. Normand (University of the Pacific)
Discussant: Raymond G. Miltenberger (University of South Florida)
CE Instructor: Matthew P. Normand, Ph.D.
Abstract: The widespread prevalence of physical inactivity in both adults and children presents a problem of great social significance in this country and around the world. The behavioral assessment and promotion of physical activity is an emerging area of research in which behavior analysis is well suited to undertake. Continued research in the assessment and promotion of physical activity is necessary for developing useful strategies to combat an increasingly sedentary population. The four papers in this symposium address the problem of physical activity in the following ways: 1) using contingency management to increase physical activity with adults, 2) comparing function-based interventions for children to interventions based on CDC and WHO recommendations, 3) assessing the effect of activity context on physical activity and activity preference with children with developmental disabilities, and 4) evaluating the ways that physical activity data are best analyzed and depicted.
Keyword(s): data analysis, fitness, health, physical activity
 

Increasing Physical Activity Deficiencies with Deposit Contracts in Healthy Adults

WENDY DONLIN WASHINGTON (University of North Carolina Wilmington), Derek McMullen (University of Central Florida), Amanda Devoto (University of North Carolina Wilmington), Lilian Hatcher (University of North Carolina Wilmington), Bryan Acton (Virginia Tech)
Abstract:

Monetary reinforcers, or financial incentives, are often effective at increasing physical activity, but are expensive. To facilitate dissemination, costs must be reduced. Deposit Contracts require participants to invest money in a treatment, which can be earned back by meeting goals. We compared the efficacy of a $50 program on walking when either $0 (N=9) or $25 (N=10) had been deposited by the participant. Nineteen healthy adults who were deficient walkers (<10,000 steps/day on average), wore a Fitbit accelerometer during all waking hours for 5-6 weeks. For a 1-2 week baseline, participants reported stepcounts but received no programmed reinforcers. During a 3-week intervention, $1.50 per day could be earned for meeting individualized stepcount criteria, with bonuses ($2.65) awarded for meeting criteria on three consecutive days. In the final week, a return to baseline condition included no reinforcers or goals. Sixteen participants (84%) increased average daily stepcounts by at least 1600 steps/day (> 1mile). Of those with a treatment effect, nine (56%) relapsed to baseline levels of walking when the reinforcer contingency was removed. A RMANOVA revealed significantly higher stepcounts during the reinforcer condition. Monetary deposit amount did not affect stepcounts or sensitivity to the reinforcers.

 
A Comparative Analysis of Physical Activity Interventions for Young Children
HEATHER ZERGER (University of South Florida), Matthew P. Normand (University of the Pacific)
Abstract: Evidence suggests that physical inactivity is increasingly prevalent among young children. A common recommendation provided to parents suggests that they become actively involved in increasing their child’s physical activity. However, this recommendation does not specify how a parent should become involved. Further, the evaluation of parental involvement in children’s physical activity has yet to be conducted. The purpose of the current study was to conduct a functional analysis to identify a social, environmental variable that would engender a higher level of physical activity in young children. Once a social consequence was identified, reinforcement provided contingently on higher levels of physical activity and according to a fixed-time schedule was compared in an intervention analysis. The overall results of the study indicated that children were most active when receiving a form of social reinforcement contingent on higher levels of physical activity. These results suggest that parents of young children should become involved in increasing their child’s physical activity by providing attention or physical engagement contingent on higher levels of physical activity.
 
The Effect of Activity Context on Physical Activity and Activity Preference Displayed by Children with Developmental Disabilities
SHARI M. PINCUS (University of Maryland Baltimore County), Nicole Lynn Hausman (Kennedy Krieger Institute), John C. Borrero (University of Maryland, Baltimore County), SungWoo Kahng (University of Missouri)
Abstract: The purpose of the current study was to determine the effects of different environmental contexts on the level of moderate-to-vigorous physical activity displayed by children with intellectual and developmental disabilities, and to subsequently determine individual preference for sedentary activities versus more physically active alternatives. An adapted version of The Observational System for Recording Physical Activity in Children (OSRAC) was used to define the test conditions and various levels of physical activity. Individual preference for sedentary and activity contexts was then assessed. If necessary, a differential reinforcement of alternative behavior (DRA) intervention was implemented to increase engagement in moderate-to-vigorous physical activity. Results indicated that the fixed-activity condition produced the highest levels of moderate-to-vigorous physical activity. Only one participant required the addition of the DRA component, as the other participants demonstrated a clear preference for the physical activity context. Although the intervention phase was successful in increasing moderate-to-vigorous physical activity for this participant, results of the final preference assessment indicated that participant preference for the sedentary activity context remained unchanged.
 
Evaluating Methods for Enhancing Data Display and Analysis in Physical Activity Research
DIEGO VALBUENA (University of South Florida), Bryon Miller (University of South Florida), Andrew L. Samaha (University of South Florida), Raymond G. Miltenberger (University of South Florida)
Abstract: Recent research has focused on increasing physical activity levels in sedentary individuals. Physical activity is measured through mechanical devices (pedometers and accelerometers) that record activity while they are worn by individuals throughout the entire day. Because of the daily differences in participants’ routines, daily step or activity data varies substantially from day to day. Consequently, traditional visual analysis of these data is difficult given their lack of stability and high variability. The purpose of this study is to evaluate different methods (Phase mean lines, daily average step total per week, weekly cumulative step totals, moving average, proportion of baseline, change-point detection, and confidence intervals) for analyzing and depicting daily activity data in ways that facilitates visual analysis without altering results. This was achieved by performing the analysis and displays on a representative data set of daily step counts. The different methods are compared to the raw data time series, and advantages and limitations of each method are discussed.
 
 
Symposium #384
CE Offered: BACB
What the Flex: Exploring Behavioral Conceptualizations of Psychological Flexibility and Implications for Assessment
Monday, May 25, 2015
2:00 PM–3:50 PM
Texas Ballroom Salon C (Grand Hyatt)
Area: CBM; Domain: Theory
Chair: Skylar Fusilier (University of Louisiana at Lafayette)
Discussant: Michael Bordieri (University of Mississippi Medical Center)
CE Instructor: Michael Bordieri, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Psychological flexibility has been posited as a fundamental aspect of psychological well being and as a mechanism of change in clinical behavior analysis. A mid-level term, psychological flexibility is often defined in the clinical context as involving open, ongoing awareness to private events in such a way as to decrease avoidance and facilitate effective, values-based behavior. This symposium includes four papers, each linking mid-level conceptualizations of psychological flexibility with basic behavioral principles. The first paper considers a number of behavioral concepts that seem fundamental to psychological flexibility. The second paper explores how those trained in psychological flexibility tact their experience. The third paper examines psychological flexibility and inflexibility in terms of appetitive and aversive control, and introduces a measure of body image flexibility based on this conceptualization. The last study explores qualities of derived relational responding as indicative of flexibility and inflexibility investigates the IRAP as a tool for predicting inflexibility in certain domains of living.

Keyword(s): acceptance, assessment, mindfulness, Psychological flexibility
 
Bringing Back the Basics: Relating Basic Behavioral Processes to the Psychological Flexibility Model
GRAYSON BUTCHER (University of Louisiana at Lafayette), Emily Kennison Sandoz (University of Louisiana at Lafayette)
Abstract: Among contextual behavioral scientists, psychological flexibility is proposed to be a unified model of human functioning (Hayes, Strosahl, & Wilson, 2012). The aim of this inductive mid-level model is to simultaneously summarize mechanisms of psychopathology, psychological health, and psychological interventions. Psychological flexibility is described as the ability to engage in valued behaviors, even in the presence of unwelcome thoughts, emotions, and experiences, and is typically conceptualized as comprising six coherent processes (being present, cognitive defusion, experiential acceptance, perspective taking, values, and committed action). This paper will review the roots of the psychological flexibility model from early radical behaviorism to Relational Frame Theory, relating basic principles to the behavioral phenomena being described with this mid-level term, psychological flexibility. Amongst the literature reviewed will be delay discounting, aversive vs. appetitive control, contingency adduction, the variation and selection of behaviors, rule governed behavior, and discriminant generalization. Implications for behavioral assessment of psychological flexibility and for psychological flexibility-based interventions will be discussed.
 
Modeling Body Image Flexibility Using the Concepts of Transfer of Function and Competing Sources of Control
NOLAN WILLIAMS (University of Louisiana at Lafayette), Gina Quebedeaux Boullion (University of Louisiana at Lafayette), Jessica Auzenne (University of Louisiana at Lafayette), Emmie Hebert (University of Mississippi), Shelley Greene (University of Louisiana at Lafayette), Michael Bordieri (University of Mississippi Medical Center), Emily Kennison Sandoz (University of Louisiana at Lafayette)
Abstract: Body image can be painful and cause disruption in valued life domains. This disruption might be most likely when the body experience is painful and avoided (i.e., when body image is aversive). Over time, an increasing number of stimuli acquire aversive body image functions, making life more and more difficult. Body image flexibility involves remaining in contact with the full range of experience and serving chosen values, even when painful experiences might help to mitigate this dysfunction. This multi-part project centers around an effort to create a behavioral measure of body image flexibility by using RFT to model 1) the process by which stimuli come to acquire aversive body image functions, 2) the process by which stimuli come to acquire values functions, and 3) varying levels of control that body image or values functions might have over the repertoire at any one moment. Various ways of quantifying participant performance on this task will be discussed in conjunction with different ways of conceptualizing body image flexibility.
 

Use Your Words: An Examination of Student Writing in Response to Experiential Learning Exercises Targeting Psychological Flexibility

EMILY ALLEN (University of Louisiana at Lafayette), Emmy LeBleu (University of Louisiana at Lafayette), Ryan Albarado (University of Louisiana Lafayette), Bronwyn Frederick (University of Louisiana at Lafayette), Jada Horton (University of Louisiana at Lafayette), Alaina Kiefner (University of Louisiana at Lafayette), Lauren Griffin (University of Louisiana at Lafayette), Emily Kennison Sandoz (University of Louisiana at Lafayette)
Abstract:

College students are often faced with a number of transitions across important domains of life. For many students, academic demands, living conditions, financial status, primary relationships and social activities undergo repeated changes during the course of their college education. Psychology of Adjustment is a course designed to teach non-majors fundamental concepts of psychological health. As currently taught, the course includes primarily experiential interventions in which students learn the concepts of psychological adjustment by practicing psychological flexibility in and out of class. Informal student evaluations suggest that these methods not only ensure intellectual grasp of the concepts but also improve students psychological adjustment more broadly. The current qualitative study examines the content of students journal assignments in order to identify ways in which the class impacts psychological flexibility and college adjustment. Preliminary thematic analysis of 157 students journal assignments has revealed the following themes: the identification and clarification of values, observable changes in valued domains of life, the realization that everybody struggles, the awareness of psychological inflexibility and its consequences, willingness to experience painful thoughts and feelings, and gratitude for newfound presence in everyday experience. Implications for future research and course development will be discussed.

 
This Is How We Do: Use of Word-level IRAP Analyses to Identify Relative Flexibility & Inflexibility with Specific Verbal Stimuli
EMMIE HEBERT (University of Mississippi), Kate Kellum (University of Mississippi), Kerry C. Whiteman (University of Mississippi), Kelly G. Wilson (University of Mississippi)
Abstract: The Implicit Relational Assessment Procedure (IRAP) has most often been used to examine differences between the performances of groups of people with a particular set of stimuli and between specific trial-types. The present study is a continuation of a previous study that examines the possibility of using analyses of individual words in the IRAP to identify relatively strong verbal repertoires. These repertoires may be clinically relevant for the participating individual or for his/her community. They may also be seen as areas of psychological inflexibility. This paper examines multiple methods for examining IRAP outputs at the word level. Additionally, the workability of stimuli (e.g. using “not” with a stimulus versus a new opposing word) will also be discussed. Undergraduate students who participated for course credit showed marked variability in IRAP performance across words within trial types. The discussion focuses on the potential to predict and develop interventions for specific domains for individuals where high levels of bias, rigidity, or fusion are present.
 
 
Symposium #385
Increasing the Safety of Pedestrians with Behavioral Interventions
Monday, May 25, 2015
2:00 PM–3:50 PM
204A (CC)
Area: CSE/OBM; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Ron Van Houten (Western Michigan University)
Discussant: Miles K. Bennett (Western Michigan University)
Abstract:

Increasing motorist yielding right-of-way to pedestrians in crosswalks reduces the number of collisions between motorists and pedestrians. One very cost effectively technology, which has recently been demonstrated to increase the safety of pedestrians, is the use of a gateway configuration of the in-street yield to pedestrian sign. In the first series of three studies supported by Michigan Department of Transportation examined variables that influenced the efficacy of this sign and determined how to use this treatment most effectively. These studies also examined the effectiveness of various configurations of this treatment that could increase the survival of the treatment in the roadway. In a fourth study supported by the Federal Highway Administration we examined variables related to the efficacy of the countdown pedestrian signal to determine ways to improve their effectiveness. This study examined whether pedestrians could accurately discriminate how much time they needed to cross roadways of various widths, which change interval signal was most clearly understood by pedestrians, and pedestrians with low vision uses countdown pedestrian signals. These studies will inform the use of these technologies across the country.

 

The Effects of the Symbol Sign and the Use of City Posts on the Efficacy of a Gateway Configuration of the In-Street Sign

MILES K. BENNETT (Western Michigan University)
Abstract:

This study examined whether sign message contributed to the effectiveness of the gateway configuration of the in-street sign at two sites using a reversal design. The percentage of driver yielding right-of-way to pedestrians was consistently low at both sites during baseline conditions. The installation of the gateway configuration increased the yielding to very high levels. The use of the gateway treatment with blank signs. signs that only contained the background reflective yellow green material produced only half as much yielding as the treatment with the sign message present. These data show that the results could not be explained entirely by the perceived narrowing of the road. This study also examined whether replacing the sign element most likely to be struck by vehicles with a robust city post which can withstand many more high speed hits could increase yielding. The results showed that this configuration produced results that were somewhat inferior to that produced by the use of in-street signs in each position.

 

A Comparison of the Efficacy of a Wide and Narrow Configuration of the In-Street Sign on Driver Yielding to Pedestrians

JONATHAN HOCHMUTH (Western Michigan University)
Abstract:

This study examined whether the width of the gateway configuration of the in-street sign influenced the efficacy of the treatment. Data were collected at there sites with a narrow and a wider gateway configuration. The gateway treatment was more effective in the narrow configuration then the wide configuration at two of the three sites and made little difference at the third site. Contextual variables appeared to be related to whether the narrow or the wide configuration were more effective. These data showed that perceived narrowing was a variable influencing the efficacy of this treatment. These data were interpreted in terms of behavioral principles.

 

A Comparison of Edge Signs Alone, Lane Lines Alone and a Full Gateway Treatment on Driver Yielding Right-of-Way to Pedestrians

JONATHAN HOCHMUTH (Western Michigan University)
Abstract:

This study compared the use of edge lane in-street signs alone, lane line use of in-street signs alone and the full gateway (edge lane and lane line signs used together on driver yielding behavior to pedestrians. The edge line alone and lane line alone configurations produced marginal increases over baseline levels of yielding behavior while the full gateway configuration lead to a marked increase in yielding behavior at this site. These data were explained using behavioral principles.

 
Countdown Pedestrian Signals Legibility and Comprehension without Flashing Hand
GREGORY DELAERE (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: Van Houten, LaPlante, & Gustefson (2012)’s previous research on the addition of a Countdown Pedestrian Signal (CPS) to the Flashing Don’t Walk (FDW) display has shown a reduction in pedestrian crashes. Due to the proposed change in meaning to the CPS with a FDW display, the present study attempted to systematically replicate the findings of Singer and Lerner (2005), who investigated the comprehension of the CPS alone display and the CPS with the FDW display and found the comprehension of the CPS alone more closely matched the proposed change in meaning. Additionally, this study investigated the comprehension of a CPS with a WALK signal. Following the comprehension study, another study was conducted to measure the judgment abilities of pedestrians. This study asked additional subjects to cross a simulated crosswalk at their normal walking speed so that they finished their crossing when the CPS reached zero. The results are similar to the results of Singer and Lerner, with the CPS with the WALK signal showing even greater comprehension. Results also indicated pedestrians are able to reliably judge the amount of time needed to cross multiple crosswalk lengths, or will adjust their walking speed accordingly. Future research should investigate the removal of the FDW from the CPS’s effect on low vision pedestrians as well as replicate the field study conducted by Singer and Lerner with longer crosswalks.
 
 
Symposium #386
CE Offered: BACB
Training the Next Generation of Behavior Analysts: Striving for Excellence in Graduate Instruction and Pre-Professional Training
Monday, May 25, 2015
2:00 PM–3:50 PM
205 (CC)
Area: TBA/PRA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Jonathan J. Tarbox (Autism Research Group, Center for Autism and Related Disorders (CARD))
Discussant: Darlene E. Crone-Todd (Salem State University)
CE Instructor: Jonathan J. Tarbox, Ph.D.
Abstract:

The continued health and vitality of the science and practice of behavior analysis depends on providing top-quality graduate and practical training to current and future generations of new behavior analysts. This symposium brings together four papers that describe programs for such training, as well as discussing and critiquing strengths and limitations of how behavior analysis is traditionally taught. The symposium begins with a paper on arrogance by Jonathan Tarbox. The second paper, by Grace Cascone, applies Skinners analysis of self-control to designing learner behavior that enhances the quality of graduate education in behavior analysis. The third paper, by Taylor Hill, describes a system for designing behavioral classrooms as teams to enhance graduate education. The final paper, by Cheryl Young-Pelton, describes a program for training pre-professional skills and includes preliminary program evaluation data. The symposium will conclude with a discussion by Dr. Darlene Crone-Todd.

Keyword(s): graduate instruction, interdisciplinary collaboration, pre-professional skills
 
Behavioral? Great! Arrogant? Not so Great
JONATHAN J. TARBOX (Autism Research Group, Center for Autism and Related Disorders (CARD))
Abstract: Behavior analysis is a highly specialized discipline, with unique cultural practices, including rites of passage, values statements, and almost-religiously-held beliefs and rules. The way that we behavior analysts talk about ourselves and our field, and the relative value of our field in comparison to others, is one such cultural practice. In many respects, behavior analysis is superior to other disciplines. In particular, the conceptual foundation of behavior analysis is more scientifically rigorous than many other disciplines. In addition, the treatment effects obtained by applied behavior analytic treatments are more robust and more empirically supported than those of many other disciplines. Being aware of and standing up for the many strengths and virtues of the field of behavior analysis is important. However, as a group, we tend to foster a sense of arrogance or superiority that has many potential negative side effects. This presentation will describe what we believe is a systemic problem in the behavior analytic culture and will provide practical suggestions for how we might make behavior analysts better at respecting and interacting with others. Actively valuing others and being respectful of others is not merely an ethical imperative. We will argue that behavior analysts “playing nicely” with others (or failing to) has very serious practical consequences for the health and vitality of the discipline of behavior analysis, particularly with respect to the field’s ability to affect change on a broader, more mainstream level. Practical suggestions will be made for how to train current and future generations of behavior analysts to be more effective in their interactions with those outside of the discipline, while simultaneously maintaining hardcore behavioral philosophical, scientific, and practical repertoires.
 
Making Students Make You Better: Self-Control in the Learning Environment
GRACE CASCONE (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), Jamine Dettmering (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), Megan Durocher (Chicago School of Professional Psychology), Danika Stone (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), Scott A. Herbst (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology)
Abstract: Teachers are accountable for creating an environment in which students meet learning objectives. They structure content, organize its delivery, create contingencies to manage student behavior, and design assessments to evaluate effectiveness. In a sense, teachers are the environment in which learning occurs. However, when class is in session, the students are the environment that support effective or ineffective teaching behavior. This paper will examine Skinner’s (1953) notion of self-control as a response (the controlling response) that alters the environment in such a way as to alter the probability of another response (the controlled response). This analysis will be applied to the behaviors of teaching, and the authors will review several fun and educational exercises that motivate students to behave in ways that evoke engaging behavior from the teacher. Attendees will have the opportunity to participate in one of these exercises and then have the rest of ABAI to use what they learned to make the conference better for everyone.
 

Everybody Gets an "A": Using Teams and Teamwork in the Classroom

TAYLOR HILL (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), Nathaniel Lachica (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), Allison Bihler (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), Ashley Anderson (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), Scott A. Herbst (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology)
Abstract:

In a classroom environment, learning is rarely an individual phenomenon. At one level, there is a student/teacher interaction in which the teacher manages the contingencies that influence the students behavior. Beyond that, there are student/student interactions that have an additional influence on learning. Students talk to each other during breaks, form study groups, become friends, and the conversations they have with each other influence their development as behavior analysts. Creating structures that encourage and facilitate these student to student interactions can bring a new level of intentionality to the learning environment. This paper will review a method for promoting intentional, supportive interactions among students that is being used across three sections of a Basic Concepts and Principles in Behavior Analysis Class. The method involves creating the class as a team playing a common game. The authors will outline the use of assessments as scoreboards, methods to promote leadership and cooperation within the student body, and coaching practices to empower struggling students.

 
Pre-Professional Behavior Analyst Competencies Demonstrated by Graduate Students Enrolled in a University-Supervised Intensive Practicum
CHERYL A. YOUNG-PELTON (Montana State University in Billings)
Abstract: Graduate students have the opportunity to enroll in a three-semester university intensive practicum course to complete the necessary hours to meet their BACB supervision requirement. In 2013, a comprehensive curriculum of skill competencies for this course was developed and implemented. This curriculum was developed based on feedback from student evaluations and the need to observe and document professional behavior analytic behaviors. The third semester competencies emphasize pre-professional skills like “getting along with therapists from other professions,” and “working with difficult people.” This paper will present outcome measures generated from triangulated sources (university supervisor, graduate intern, and site supervisor). These measures include: student evaluation of course assignments, site supervisor’s rating of student’s professional dispositions, and university supervisor ratings of pre-professional competencies from the curriculum. Data will be analyzed semester-by-semester. A comparison of data will be conducted before and after implementation of the professional skill competencies. Discussion of these outcome measures will be highlighted.
 
 
Panel #387
PDS EVENT: A Select Guide to Parent Training
Monday, May 25, 2015
3:00 PM–3:50 PM
Grand Ballroom C2 (CC)
Area: AUT/EDC; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Joseph Hacker (McNeese State University)
ROBERT K. ROSS (Beacon ABA Services)
MARY JANE WEISS (Endicott College)
PATRICK E. MCGREEVY (Patrick McGreevy, Ph.D., P.A. and Associates)
Abstract:

Providing services for individuals with behavioral deficits can be complex, with many problem behaviors having been reinforced intermittently throughout their entire lives. Time has shown that these services have proven to be quite effective at dealing with those problem behaviors, increasing in their effectiveness the more time these individuals spend receiving them. Parent training is an integral, and often disregarded, part of the process. Most of the time these individuals receiving services will be around their families more than those giving the services; therefore, making sure everyone is on the same page is vital to the treatment of these behavioral deficits. When the parents of these individuals have been properly trained, they can bring many of the treatments their loved ones are receiving into their home life and the increased support and exposure to the treatment reinforces it effectiveness. This panel will discuss the benefits of parent training in addition to showing why it is a necessity to truly effective behavioral therapy: as well as, discuss ways in which parent training can be effectively conducted.

Keyword(s): ABA, autism, behavioral deficits, parent training
 
 
Symposium #389
CE Offered: BACB
Antecedent Interventions to Increase Toleration to Aversive Situations
Monday, May 25, 2015
3:00 PM–3:50 PM
007B (CC)
Area: EAB/CBM; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Jill Marie Harper (Melmark New Englnad)
CE Instructor: Jill Marie Harper, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Behavioral interventions might consist of altering antecedent events, consequences, or both antecedents and consequences. This symposium consists of three data-based presentations that will focus on the manipulation of antecedent events to increase toleration to aversive situations. The first study evaluates the effects of preference and choice of products (tooth paste and tooth brush) on the completion of an oral-hygiene routine for individuals with developmental disabilities. The second study recruits undergraduate participants to examine tolerance of a recorded infant cry when distracting activities are either restricted or available. The final study analyzes pausing during transitions between tasks associated with relatively rich and lean schedules of reinforcement for three individuals diagnosed with Autism Spectrum Disorder, as well as the participants preference for the availability of schedule-correlated stimuli during such transitions. These three studies attempt to reduce the aversive characteristics and, therefore increase toleration to three distinct aversive situations through the use of antecedent interventions.

Keyword(s): Activity Transition, Antecedent Intervention, Choice Preference, Infant Care
 

Effects of Preference and Choice on Completion of an Oral Hygiene Task

KIMBERLY L. DUHANYAN (Melmark New England), Jill Marie Harper (Melmark New Englnad), Nicole Heal (Melmark New England)
Abstract:

The American Academy of Pediatrics and the National Institute of Health have identified a trend of poor oral hygiene in individuals with developmental disabilities and Down syndrome (Fenton, Hood, Holder, May, & Mouradian, 2003). Poor oral hygiene may result from difficulty acquiring necessary skills or interfering behavior during such tasks. Previous research has shown that choice making opportunities among task materials or reinforcers both increase performance and decrease challenging behavior. This study examined the effects of preference and choice of products on completion of, and levels of challenging behavior during an oral hygiene routine. Preference assessments were conducted to determine low- and high-preferred toothbrushes and toothpastes. Completion of the routine and levels of challenging behavior were then examined under low-preference no choice, high-preference choice, and high-preference no choice conditions within a mutlielement design. Initial data indicate similar rates of completion across the high-preference choice and high-preference no choice conditions, as compared to the low-preference no choice condition for two participants and similar levels of performance across the low-preference no choice, high-preference choice and high-preference no choice conditions for the second participant. Challenging behaviors were not observed during any conditions for either participant. Interobserver agreement was collected during 66.7% of sessions, and mean agreement was 97.9%.

 
Do Distracting Activities Increase Tolerance of an Infant Cry?
KATHRYN ROSE GLODOWSKI (Western New England University), Rachel H. Thompson (Western New England University), Erica Clayton (Western New England University), Cassandra Hilpert (Western New England University)
Abstract: Golton and St. James-Robert (1991) demonstrated young infants cry about 2 hours each day, and Michelsson et al. (1990) found that one episode of crying could last at least 30 min despite attempts to provide care. Experts recommend that caregivers engage in a distracting activity when an infant engages in prolonged periods of crying (Barr et al., 2009; Deyo et al., 2008), but no one has previously evaluated whether distracting activities are helpful for caregivers. We examined tolerance of a recorded cry when distracting activities were differentially available. We recruited 29 undergraduates to participate; 24 tolerated the recorded cry for more than 5 min without distracting activities. For the remaining participants, distracting activities increased tolerance of the recorded cry for 2 participants but had no effect for 3 participants. An independent observer collected data during at least 30% of sessions for each participant, and reliability ranged from 86% to 100%.
 
Pausing and Preference in Transitions between Relatively Rich and Lean Reinforcement Contexts
BERGLIND SVEINBJORNSDOTTIR (New England Center for Children), Chata A. Dickson (New England Center for Children)
Abstract: Transitions between activities commonly are reported to be challenging for individuals with developmental or intellectual disabilities. Three young men with Autism Spectrum Disorders who were students at a residential school for children with autism served as participants in two translational studies of behavior in activity transitions. In Study 1 we measured pausing in transitions between tasks associated with relatively rich and lean schedules of reinforcement. Pausing was greatest in transitions from richer to leaner contexts, as compared with that in transitions from rich to rich, lean to lean, and lean to rich contexts. In Study 2 participants chose whether schedule-correlated stimuli would be presented. The upcoming lean schedule component, however, was inescapable. To date, one participant has demonstrated preference for a condition with no schedule-correlated stimuli in the transition from the richer to the leaner context. In this case, it appears that stimuli correlated with an upcoming lean schedule component were aversive. These studies are two in a line of research designed to provide recommendations for practitioners in selecting strategies for presenting activity transitions to their clients with developmental or intellectual disabilities.
 
 
Panel #390
CE Offered: BACB
PDS EVENT: Life After Graduation: Academic and Clinical Careers
Monday, May 25, 2015
3:00 PM–3:50 PM
211 (CC)
Area: EDC/PRA; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Mirela Cengher, M.A.
Chair: Mirela Cengher (City University of New York, The Graduate Center), Mariam Chohan (CUNY Graduate Center)
TERRY S. FALCOMATA (The University of Texas at Austin)
HENRY S. ROANE (State University of New York Upstate Medical Unive)
JOHN CLAUDE WARD-HORNER (Beacon ABA Services)
LAUREN KRYZAK (Queens College, City University of New York)
Abstract:

After graduation, doctoral-level behavior analysts typically emerge in either an academic or a clinical career. This panel will focus on identifying pros and cons, as well as discussing competencies and experiences that can make one a successful candidate for each. The discussion will be grounded in the experiences accrued by our panelists, who are prominent behavior analysts with expertise in both academic and clinical settings.

 
 
Symposium #391
Recent Research on Performance Feedback in OBM: From Telemedicine to Laboratory Studies
Monday, May 25, 2015
3:00 PM–3:50 PM
201 (CC)
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Carl Merle Johnson (Central Michigan University)
Abstract: Performance feedback in organizational behavior management research and practice is pervasive; however, a clear understanding of necessary and sufficient conditions under which feedback improves performance is still absent. The first study explored performance feedback in a telemedicine setting using an ABACAC multi-component reversal design. Results indicated a combined intervention of corrective feedback with contingent movie theatre gift certificates produced greatest change in accuracy of daily notes and treatment integrity in five behavior line technicians. The second study was a 2 X 2 group design that explored contingent vs. independent and supportive vs. critical performance feedback in a laboratory setting. Results suggested that contingent evaluative feedback improved performance relative to independent feedback (supportive or critical). The third study was a group design that explored exaggerated (tripled), underreported (one-third), accurate performance feedback, compared to no feedback in a laboratory setting. Results suggested that accurate and exaggerated (tripled) performance feedback may lead to better performance than underreported (one-third) or no feedback. Clearly performance feedback is not a simple stimulus; it is multidimensional and extremely complex. Organizational behavior management has much more to learn about its most commonly used intervention component.
Keyword(s): Feedback, Feedback Accuracy, Telemedicine
 
Differentiated and Combined Effects of Corrective Feedback via Telemedicine and a Group Contingency on Treatment Integrity and Behavior Note Accuracy
GREGORY R. MANCIL (Louisiana Tech University)
Abstract: An ABACAC multi-component reversal design was used to examine the effects of a group reinforcement contingency and corrective feedback intervention via telemedicine on the behavioral accuracy of daily notes and treatment integrity. Five behavior line technicians participated in this study with a total of 20 clients. The workers chose gift certificates for a movie theater as the reward. Results demonstrate a small change from baseline to corrective feedback delivered via telemedicine. However, results indicate a greater change from baseline to combined intervention (group contingency plus corrective feedback) to 100%. Upon removal of the intervention, the pinpoint objectives (i.e., TI and daily note accuracy) decreased below intervention levels. In addition, pinpoint objectives increased when the intervention was reintroduced.
 
The Role of Accuracy and Type of Evaluation in Feedback Delivery
RACHAEL TILKA (Western Michigan University), Jessica Rocheleau (Western Michigan University), Douglas A. Johnson (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: Performance feedback remains a commonly implemented and successful intervention within organizational behavior management, but a comprehensive understanding of the components that influence the effectiveness of feedback tends to be lacking. The present study sought to contribute by analyzing the variables of accuracy (contingent or independent of performance) and evaluation type (supportive or critical judgments) on performance using a simulated work environment. Seventy-five undergraduate students were randomly assigned to one of four experimental conditions: (a) contingent and supportive feedback, (b) contingent and critical feedback, (c) independent and supportive feedback, or (d) independent and critical feedback. Outcomes suggested that contingent feedback improved performance relative to independent feedback, however, no differences were found between supportive and critical types of feedback. The need for additional research into the functional and formal elements of effective feedback will be discussed.
 
A comparison of accurate and inaccurate performance feedback on college students doing data entry tasks
MICHAEL PALMER (Central Michigan University), Carl Merle Johnson (Central Michigan University)
Abstract: Performance feedback is ubiquitous in Organizational Behavior Management. It has been assumed that performance feedback must be accurate, but this assumption has not been empirically validated. This experiment tested objective feedback from previous performance, provided immediately before the next session, to determine if feedback must be accurate to improve future performance. A repeated measures between-groups design was conducted with college students engaging in a simulated bank-check-processor task. Six 45-minute sessions were carried out with the first session serving as a baseline before different types of feedback were presented to the experimental groups. The number of correctly completed checks and time off-task served as the primary dependent variables. The type of performance feedback served as the independent variable: accurate, 1/3 actual performance, triple actual performance, and no feedback. All earned pay for participating. Results indicated accurate and tripled feedback improved performance over the control and one-third feedback groups. Performance feedback also reduced time off-task across all feedback conditions compared to the control group. Survey responses indicated many participants could not detect the false feedback. Results suggest not underreporting performance and that data need multi-faceted analysis to fully understand performance feedback research.
 
 
Symposium #392
CE Offered: BACB
Efforts Toward More Practically Sensitive Functional Analyses and Efficient Treatments for Problem Behavior.
Monday, May 25, 2015
3:00 PM–3:50 PM
213AB (CC)
Area: PRA/AUT; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Stephanie A. Hood (Briar Cliff University )
CE Instructor: Stephanie A. Hood, M.S.
Abstract: This symposium covers refinements in the assessment and treatment of problem behavior. Hood et al. evaluated methodological modifications to functional analyses to be able to identify attention functions when it was difficult for therapists to eliminate stimulus changes following problem behavior (e.g., flinching or blocking.). The results demonstrated differential responding with a concurrent-operant arrangement. In a second presentation, the effect of therapists wearing protective equipment on the outcomes of functional analyses of aggression was assessed (Oropeza et al.). The results demonstrated that the use of protective equipment did not alter conclusions from the functional analysis. Fernand et al. conducted a functional analysis of problem behavior maintained by interrupting ritualistic behavior. Following functional communication training, they evaluated the extent to which systematic delay-fading steps were necessary. The results demonstrated that FCT plus delay fading was effective at reducing problem behavior, and, for some participants, progression across delay-fading steps may not be necessary.
Keyword(s): Functional Analysis, Problem behavior
 
Concurrent-Operant Functional Analysis of Aggressive Behavior Maintained by Attention
STEPHANIE A. HOOD (Briar Cliff University), Nicole M. Rodriguez (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Medical Center), Wayne W. Fisher (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Medical Center), Kevin C. Luczynski (University of Nebraska Medical Center's Munroe-Meyer Institute), Todd M. Owen (University of Nebraska Medical Center)
Abstract: Certain forms of aggression may be difficult to completely ignore resulting in physical reactions from the therapist. Controlling when putative reinforcers are and are not available is integral to identifying the function of behavior. In the current study, we evaluated a concurrent-operants arrangement for assessing whether attention maintains problem behavior when it was difficult for therapists to eliminate stimulus changes following problem behavior. For one participant, an initial pairwise functional analysis (FA) resulted in undifferentiated responding, with relatively more responding in the control condition, and, for a second participant, an initial trial-based FA resulted in relatively more responding during the control component. For one participant, we added protective equipment in an attempt to increase procedural integrity with reactions following problem behavior but responding decreased to zero. Differential levels of responding were observed for both participants in a second FA in which two therapists were concurrently available but associated with the presence (vocal attention plus animated physical reactions) versus near absence (no vocal attention and minimal physical reactions) of attention. A function-based treatment resulted in low levels of responding. The concurrent-operant arrangement provides a method for assessing the function of behavior when eliminating stimulus changes in the control condition proves difficult.
 
Effects of Protective Equipment in Functional Analysis of Aggression
MANUELLA OROPEZA (University of Houston Clear Lake), Jennifer N. Fritz (University of Houston-Clear Lake), Melissa Nissen (University of Houston-Clear Lake), Lauren Phillips (University of Houston – Clear Lake), Amy Terrell (University of Houston – Clear Lake)
Abstract: The effects of protective equipment (PE) on functional analysis (FA) outcomes for aggression were evaluated. Each condition of the FA was assessed with PE and without PE in a multielement design. Results showed that there was no difference in the identified function of participants’ aggression during the FA in which the therapist wore PE compared to the FA in which the therapist did not. These results suggest that therapists should be able to protect themselves with PE during FAs of aggression and reduce risks posed by the problem behavior without negatively influencing the results of the assessment.
 

An Evaluation of Delays to Reinforcement in the Treatment of Problem Behavior Maintained by Access to Routines

JONATHAN K FERNAND (University of Florida), Timothy R. Vollmer (University of Florida)
Abstract:

Behavioral characteristics of individuals diagnosed with autism can include difficulty adjusting to novel situations or changes in routines, insistence on sameness, and repetitive movements (i.e., stereotypy). Research has shown that individuals often emit problem behavior when access to engaging in repetitive behavior is interrupted. The purpose of the current study was to evaluate procedures to assess and treat problem behavior when interrupting the ritualistic behavior displayed by three children with autism. All participants engaged in repetitive item manipulation as well as aggression when routines were interrupted. Following a functional analysis, we replicated and extended prior functional communication training research that employed delays to reinforcement (Rispoli et al., 2014) by assessing if all steps in a delay-fading procedure were necessary in the treatment of these particular ritualistic behaviors. Results indicated that functional communication training drastically reduced problem behavior, and delay fading may not always be necessary for every case. Further, the necessity of a signaled versus unsignaled extinction contingency for problem behavior was idiosyncratic for the current participants.

 
 
Symposium #393
CE Offered: BACB
Teaching Parents and Interventionists to Increase Communication and Decrease Challenging Behavior in Children with Autism
Monday, May 25, 2015
3:00 PM–3:50 PM
206AB (CC)
Area: TBA/DDA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Mandy J. Rispoli (Texas A)
Discussant: Wendy A. Machalicek (University of Oregon)
CE Instructor: Mandy J. Rispoli, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Innovations in preparing families and educators to implement high quality behavioral interventions are critical for enhancing the capacity of natural change agents to serve children with autism spectrum disorder. Research shows that children with autism spectrum disorder often require intensive, individualized intervention to treat core features of the disorder, such as social-communication skills and repetitive, restrictive interests or behaviors. Yet few families or service providers are skilled in implementing these research-based interventions. This session will present two papers which address this issue. The first paper presents results of a Pyramidal Training model delivered using telepractice (video conferencing, email, and file sharing) in teaching service providers to implement incidental teaching with young children with ASD. The second paper presents a model for teaching parents to implement a differential reinforcement procedure with their child with ASD. Data on maintenance and generalization of parent implementation from the training location to the home are reported. Following the paper presentations, Dr. Wendy Machalicek will offer a discussion regarding the potential impact of coaching delivered via telepractice on service providers intervention skills. She will also reflect on factors that may enhance the generalization and maintenance of parent implemented behavioral interventions.

Keyword(s): DRO, incidental teaching, parent, telepractice
 

Implementation of Pyramidal Training via Telepractice to Prepare Interventionists in Incidental Teaching

LESLIE NEELY (Texas A&M University), Mandy J. Rispoli (Texas A&M University)
Abstract:

A recent focus on the use of telepractice to disseminate behavioral interventions has demonstrated the utility of technology in preparing parents and educators as interventionists for children with autism spectrum disorder (ASD). However, to date, there has not been an evaluation of pyramidal training delivered via telepractice. The purposes of this study are: (a) to examine the use of pyramidal training to prepare interventionists to implement incidental teaching (b) to investigate the effectiveness of implementing pyramidal training via telepractice and (c) to assess the generalization of interventionists skills to untrained settings. Training procedures include an online module, self-evaluation, and feedback on participants self-evaluation delivered via videoconferencing. A multiple-probe across participants design was employed to evaluate the effects of the training package on therapists implementation fidelity, as measured by the percentage of procedural steps completed and the number of communication opportunities offered. The effect of the therapists use of incidental teaching on their students subsequent manding behaviors was also obtained. After training, the effectiveness of the training procedures will be evaluated based on the ease of acquisition of the procedures (as measured by trials to criterion) and the social validity of the training procedures. Implications for practice as well as future research will be discussed.

 
Assessing Maintenance and Generalization of Parent Treatment Fidelity Following Parent Training
STEPHANIE GEROW (Texas A&M University), Mandy J. Rispoli (Texas A&M University), Leslie Neely (Texas A&M University)
Abstract: There is a growing body of literature on the importance of training parents in behavioral interventions. The presentation will present a case study assessing the generalization and maintenance of parent treatment fidelity following parent training. One parent-child dyad participated in the study. A 4-year-old female with autism and her mother participated. The case study consisted of an AB design, with the baseline (A) phase consisting of typical parent-child interactions. Next, the parent was trained on procedures to increase requesting (mands). The training consisted of written instructions, verbal instructions, and answering questions. During the performance feedback (B) phase, the parent received immediate performance feedback in a clinic setting. Generalization to the home setting was assessed during the A and B phases. No parent training was conducted in the home setting. Results indicated that parent treatment fidelity and child requests increased following parent training, generalized to the home setting, and maintained after three weeks. These data suggest that parents may be able to generalize the implementation of an intervention from the training setting to the home setting. However, these results need to be replicated using a multiple baseline design with other participants. Data collection is ongoing and more participants are being recruited.
 
 
Symposium #394
CE Offered: BACB
A Neuroplasticity Centered Approach to the Intersection of Neuroscience and Behavior Analysis
Monday, May 25, 2015
3:00 PM–3:50 PM
007C (CC)
Area: TPC/EAB; Domain: Theory
Chair: Teresa C Kolu (Cusp Emergence)
CE Instructor: Teresa C Kolu, Ph.D.
Abstract: The fields of neuroscience and behavior analysis have established rich bodies of independent knowledge. Despite the separation of their respective levels of analysis, the two fields are intrinsically connected: environment-behavior relations involve an organism endowed with a nervous system, and that nervous system is structurally determined in part by environment-behavior relations. Of the many approaches to neuroscience, the study of brain adaptation and change (neural plasticity) provides the most likely point of intersection with behavior analysis. This subfield seeks to account for both common structural specializations in the brain and the highly variable and malleable nature of many of those specializations by elucidating the range of conditions under which they develop rather than simply specifying their typical form. Highly compatible with the selectionist approach advocated by Skinner and others, a focus on plasticity opens the door to parsimonious explanations of a range of phenomena. In this symposium, we will highlight the distinction between neuroplasticity-centered and other approaches to studying structural specialization in the brain. We will then explore a few brain regions which become engaged in plastic processes in meaningful ways during behaviorally relevant events
Keyword(s): behavioral neuroscience, neuroscience, plasticity
 
Essentialism and Selectionism in the Neurosciences
DANIELE ORTU (University of North Texas)
Abstract: Within neuroscientific research it is possible to distinguish between two approaches: the neuropsychological perspective - concerned with mapping cognitive processes to specific brain areas - and the neuroplasticity approach, focused on the mechanisms of neural change and adaptation. Experimental evidence is typically used in neuropsychology to ‘dissociate’ processes. For instance, when brain Area X is necessary for carrying out Operation A but not Operation B, and brain Area Y is required for Operation B but not Operation A, neuropsychologists use that evidence to extrapolate that there is a ‘double dissociation’ of the processes involved, i.e. different processes supported by different areas are engaged across experimental conditions. Conversely a neuroplasticity approach might investigate under which conditions Area X can carry out Operation A or B, and Area Y can carry out Operation B or A, searching for each area's adaptive boundaries. The difference between the two perspectives is not just a discrepancy in methods, but lies deep into the contrast between an essentialist and a selectionist philosophical approach. We propose that essentialistic descriptions of the neocortex may be masking its adaptive qualities, as demonstrated by the flexibility in which many neocortical operations are carried out.
 
Neuromodulation, Brain Plasticity and Behavior Analysis
APRIL M. BECKER (The University of Texas Southwestern Medical Cente)
Abstract: This presentation will focus on the relationship between modulated neural plasticity and behavior analysis and will submit basic research that could lead to clinical applications of such knowledge. “Functional” neural plasticity, or specific changes in patterns of cellular activation in relation to stimuli and responses, often occurs during learning. A wide body of research reveals that both neural plasticity and behavior change are linked to the activation of deep brain structures where many cells are capable of firing in phase with one another and in response to behaviorally important events such as reinforcement. This coordinated firing delivers transmitters capable of modulating the rules for neural changes (neuromodulators) across large portions of the brain; these neuromodulators include dopamine, acetylcholine, norepinephrine and serotonin. The traditional descriptions used by neuroscientists to describe the function of these systems in terms of their associated psychological processes such as mood and attention, are unnecessary when investigating their role in learning and plasticity. The effects of the manipulation of neuromodulatory systems reveal interesting insights into that role, and present potential targets for optimizing functional and behavioral change during interventions in clinical settings.
 
The Role of Behavioral Interpretations in the Investigation of Brain Function
CALEB D. HUDGINS (Rutgers University)
Abstract: Accumulating evidence suggests the hippocampus is necessary for learning Pavlovian trace fear conditioning, but not delay fear conditioning. To further complicate this issue, general deficits in learning trace versus delay conditioning have been debated since the procedures were investigated by Pavlov. The major procedural difference is the insertion of a temporal gap between the offset of the CS and onset of the US in trace conditioning. The learning differences between these two tasks has historically been attributed to this temporal gap, with common interpretations invoking hypothetical mechanisms ranging from the “neural trace,” to storage and retrieval of neural representations and memories. Such interpretations suggest the animal is ultimately learning the same CS-US contingency in both tasks, just to a lesser extent in trace conditioning; however, a more rigorous behavior analysis suggests otherwise. Our findings suggest that organisms learn two critically different stimulus-stimulus contingencies within the two tasks, and that it is not the temporal gap per se but the differences between these contingency arrangements that may differentially engage the hippocampus. These data have implications for how we interpret the role of the hippocampus in trace conditioning, suggesting a role for variables contributing to contextual conditioning.
 
 
Panel #395
PDS EVENT: The Intersection of Verbal Behavior and Derived Relational Responding
Monday, May 25, 2015
3:00 PM–3:50 PM
217A (CC)
Area: VBC; Domain: Theory
Chair: Colleen Yorlets (RCS Behavioral & Educational Consulting)
JUDAH B. AXE (Simmons College)
GRETCHEN A. DITTRICH (Simmons College)
KENNETH F. REEVE (Caldwell College)
Abstract:

Skinner's analysis of verbal behavior remains largely a theoretical endeavor. However, recent research in the areas of stimulus equivalence, relational frame theory, the naming hypothesis and joint control suggest that derived relational responding (i.e., the emergence of complex and untrained stimulus-stimulus relations) may be a viable explanation for the acquisition and maintenance of verbal behaviors. This panel will discuss Skinner's verbal behavior in the context of this research. Of particular import will be the degree to which each of these lines of research can account for the emergence of untrained and novel verbal behaviors. Additionally, the panel will discuss how stimuli that were documented to be under a specific form of stimulus control in one context (e.g., echoic or tact control) can come under the control of other forms of stimulus control (e.g., mand or intraverbal control) in another in the absence of direct training. Finally, the panel will discuss the role of the listener in the emergence of derived relational verbal behaviors, an area that may be viewed as under-investigated by verbal behavior researchers.

Keyword(s): derived relations, RFT, stimulus equivalence, verbal behavior
 
 
Paper Session #396
Ethics in ABA: Longstanding and Contemporary Concerns
Monday, May 25, 2015
3:00 PM–4:50 PM
204B (CC)
Area: CSE
Keyword(s): Ethics
Chair: Robert D. Holdsambeck (Calaba)
 
Ethics and Autism: Seven Deadly Sins and Fifty Shades of Grey
Domain: Service Delivery
ROBERT D. HOLDSAMBECK (Calaba)
 
Abstract: Providing services to people on the Autism Spectrum raises some unique ethical challenges for Psychologists and for Behavior Analysts. Drawing from over 35 years of clinical experience, Dr. Holdsambeck will discuss those challenges in terms of those situations that are very clear (the deadly sins) and those that are more nuanced (fifty shades of grey). Distinctions and commonalities will be discussed in terms of Legal, Moral and Ethical codes of conduct including the guidelines for responsible conduct for behavior analysts and the APA Ethical guidelines. The seminar will conclude with some suggestions for enhancing our compliance to the ethical guidelines while meeting the unique challenges of working with children and adults with Autism.
 
Multicultural Considerations in Applied Behavior Analysis Services
Domain: Service Delivery
TERRENCE BRYANT (Kaplan University)
 
Abstract: A major challenge faced by many mental health practitioners lie in the provision of effective services to individuals from groups that are ethnically and culturally different from themselves. From an ethical standpoint, it is important for the practitioner to recognize these differences and as well as the potential for bias based on these differences. There has been a proliferation of recent research on the provision of services to culturally diverse population. The purpose of this paper is to review the research on barriers that exist for mental health professionals, particularly behavior analysts, in the delivery of effective services to culturally diverse populations. A review of traditional cultural practices, family values, and worldview of various ethnic minority groups is highlighted to facilitate understanding of cultural identities. A review of the literature on behavior analysis services with minority populations is conducted and implications for ABA practitioners are presented as well as recommendations for increasing cultural competence. In addition, a review of ethical considerations in the practice of ABA with culturally-diverse individuals and families is considered.
 

CANCELLED: The Application of the Ethical Guidelines for Behavior Analysts to Dog Training

Domain: Theory
ADRIA KARLSSON (Dog Willing)
 
Abstract:

Graduate students in applied behavior analysis programs often choose to use their dogs as subjects for projects. This is a concern, due to the fact that many do not realize that the ethical guidelines should apply as stringently to animal subjects as to human subjects. Furthermore, students often lack experience in how to apply behavioral change tactics and the principles of behavior analysis to dogs. A survey of graduate students revealed a tendency towards the use of punishment and the lack of implementations of differential reinforcement of alternative behaviors. There are few research-based resources available through traditional research routes to help them learn how to create behavioral change programs for their dogs. It is vital that programs help students to generalize what they are learning about behavior to use with animal clients as well.

 
Keyword(s): Ethics
 
 
Symposium #397
Delay Discounting of Different Commodities: Opportunity Costs, Fungibility, and Alcohol
Monday, May 25, 2015
3:00 PM–4:50 PM
006D (CC)
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
Chair: Brent Kaplan (The University of Kansas)
Discussant: David P. Jarmolowicz (The University of Kansas)
Abstract: Discounting the process by which an outcome loses its value based on a number of contextual factors such as the delay to or likelihood of receiving the outcome. Further, different outcomes are discounted to different extents, especially when humans are the population under study. Much is unknown, though, regarding the extent of delay discounting of commodities other than money and the boundary conditions (e.g., fungibility) that result in different rates of discounting. This symposium will attempt to address some of these questions. The first talk examines the degree of discounting when opportunity costs are either present or absent. That is, during imposed delays to reinforcement, participants could either obtain reinforcement by doing other things or were required to complete minimal tasks. The next two talks investigate discount rates of various commodities and their fungibility, or the degree to which an outcome can be exchanged for alternatives. In these talks, both money and monetary alternatives (e.g., gift cards) and money and non-monetary alternatives are discounted to different extents, shedding light on the utility of various reinforcers. The last talk examines discount rates of alcohol and its relation to alcohol demand among college aged students using an individualized discounting assessment.
Keyword(s): Alcohol, Delay Discounting, Fungibility, Opportunity Costs
 
Opportunity Costs of Reward Delays and the Discounting of Hypothetical Money and Cigarettes
PATRICK S. JOHNSON (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine), Evan Herrmann (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine), Matthew W. Johnson (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine)
Abstract: Humans are reported to discount delayed rewards at lower rates than nonhumans. However, nonhumans are studied in tasks that restrict reinforcement during delays, whereas humans are typically studied in tasks that do not restrict reinforcement during delays. In nonhuman tasks, the opportunity cost of restricted reinforcement during delays may increase delay discounting rates. The present within-subjects study used online crowdsourcing (Amazon Mechanical Turk) to assess the discounting of hypothetical delayed money (and cigarettes in smokers) under four hypothetical framing conditions differing in the availability of reinforcement during delays. At one extreme, participants were free to leave their computer without returning, and engage in any behavior during reward delays (modeling typical human tasks). At the opposite extreme, participants were required to stay at their computer and engage in little other behavior during reward delays (modeling typical nonhuman tasks). Discounting rates increased as an orderly function of opportunity cost. Results also indicated predominantly hyperbolic discounting, the “magnitude effect,” steeper discounting of cigarettes than money, and positive correlations between discounting rates of these commodities. This is the first study to test the effects of opportunity costs on discounting, and suggests that procedural differences may partially account for observed species differences in discounting.
 
A Test of the Economic Concept of Fungibility: Temporal Discounting of Money and Gift Certificates
TODD L. MCKERCHAR (Jacksonville State University), James E. Mazur (Southern Connecticut State University), Timothy Marshall (Jacksonville State University), Freeman Cumming (Jacksonville State University), Cassidy McDougale (Jacksonville State University)
Abstract: The economic concept of fungibility predicts the utility of an outcome should be positively correlated with the amount of exchange opportunities it allows. From this view, money is highly fungible and thus should have greater value than monetarily equivalent rewards with fewer exchange options (e.g., $100 gift certificate). We conducted a test of the fungibility hypothesis with 51 college students by comparing their temporal discounting of small and large amounts ($200 and $25,000) of money, “supercenter” gift certificates (e.g., Target), and grocery store gift certificates (e.g., Publix). The discounting of all outcomes was very well described by a hyperboloid (R2 > .95). Area-under-the-curve analyses revealed that the larger outcomes were discounted significantly less than smaller outcomes. Furthermore, there was a significant effect of outcome type: money was discounted less than supercenter and grocery store certificates. These findings provide some support for fungibility as an explanation for the commonly observed differences in discount rates across outcomes. However, future work should compare the discounting of outcomes that vary more in their fungibility (as many of our participants indicated that they did their grocery shopping at a supercenter).
 
Delay Discounting for Money and Personalized Non-Money Rewards
Allison Stuppy (Center for Addictions, Personality, and Emotion Re), Kayla Tormohlena (Center for Addictions, Personality, and Emotion Re), RICHARD YI (University of Maryland)
Abstract: Abundant evidence suggests primary rewards (e.g., food and drugs) are discounted more than monetary rewards. This finding is commonly attributed to money's high degree of fungibility. The purpose of the present study was to contrast, within-individual, delay discounting (DD) of monetary rewards and non-monetary non-fungible rewards. One hundred forty-six (146) undergraduate students completed all study assessments for course credit. Following a conventional DD for hypothetical money task in session 1, participants were asked about their intentions for spending all immediate and delayed money rewards. Participants returned one week later to complete a personalized DD for a non-fungible non-money task based on their stated intentions from session 1. A conventional hypothesis test revealed no significant difference between DD of money and non-money rewards. A more rigorous test of statistical equivalence indicated that while DD of money and non-money were not equivalent, this was due to lower rates of DD for non-money. Given that the DD for the non-money task assessed DD for less-fungible commodities (than money), the present results suggest that higher rates of DD for primary rewards observed in previous research are not due to the degree of fungibility. Potential interpretations will be discussed.
 
On the Relation Between a Novel Measure of Beer Discounting, Demand for Alcohol, and Alcohol-Related Problems in College Students
SHEA M. LEMLEY (The University of Kansas), David P. Jarmolowicz (The University of Kansas), Brent Kaplan (The University of Kansas), Alexandria Darden (University of Kansas), Derek D. Reed (The University of Kansas)
Abstract: Consumption of alcohol by college students is common and has the potential to result in a variety of problematic consequences. However, traditional behavior economic approaches to study alcohol use present some difficulties, including the cumbersome administration and scoring of many discounting tasks and the time consuming aspects of these measures. The present study examined a novel beer discounting questionnaire, and its relation to money discounting, an alcohol purchase task, and the Young Adult Alcohol Consequences Questionnaire (YAACQ), a scale assessing self-reported occurrences of alcohol-related problems in college students. Participants from a lower level undergraduate course at a large Midwestern university completed these surveys during an in class session. A total of 105 participants were included in data analysis. Orderly relations were observed between beer and money discounting, demand for alcohol, and scores on the YAACQ and several of its subscales.
 
 
Symposium #398
CE Offered: BACB
Factors Affecting Response Relapse and Resurgence
Monday, May 25, 2015
3:00 PM–4:50 PM
006C (CC)
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
Chair: Claire C. St. Peter (West Virginia University)
Discussant: Timothy A. Shahan (Utah State University)
CE Instructor: Claire C. St. Peter, Ph.D.
Abstract: When a differential reinforcement procedure is suspended or disrupted, previously extinguished behavior often returns. This phenomenon, termed "resurgence," has been demonstrated under a wide array of conditions, including in non-human laboratories and during the treatment of challenging behavior. Despite the robust array of situations in which resurgence occurs, little is understood about the factors that may exacerbate or mitigate this relapse phenomena. In this symposium, we will explore factors that influence the extent to which responding recurs (resurges) when a differential-reinforcement procedure is disrupted. Although most the studies were typically conducted in highly controlled contexts, we will discuss the implications of these studies for treatment of challenging behavior.
Keyword(s): differential reinforcement, relapse, resurgence
 
Teaching Multiple Response Alternatives to Mitigate Resurgence: A Human-Operant Demonstration
Travis Carrasquillo (Southern Illinois University), JOEL ERIC RINGDAHL (Southern Illinois University)
Abstract: A common approach to the assessment and treatment of problem behavior is to a) identify the reinforcer maintaining problem behavior (a process that requires contingent presentation of that reinforcer following problem behavior), and b) placing problem behavior on extinction while providing the functional reinforcer for some alternative, appropriate response. Unfortunately, this process may result in treatment relapse if reinforcer delivery for appropriate behavior is disrupted. For example, if appropriate behavior is placed on extinction, there may be resurgence of problem behavior. The current study tested the potential of teaching multiple response alternatives to mitigate resurgence of a target response. This relapse in treatment effects can have deleterious effects for the person exhibiting problem behavior or their care providers. In the current, human operant study, two experimental arrangements were alternated. In one component, a target response was reinforced, then an alternative response was reinforced while the target response was placed on extinction. In the final phase, both responses were placed on extinction. In the second component, a target response was reinforced, then four alternative responses were reinforced while the target response was placed on extinction. In the final phase, all responses were placed on extinction. Six of nine participants demonstrated lower resurgence of the target response following reinforcement of multiple response alternatives. The results of this study suggest teaching multiple response alternatives is a possible treatment strategy to mitigate response resurgence.
 
Effects of Initial Reinforcement Schedule and Type of Response-Reinforcer Disruption on Resurgence
DWIGHT LASTINGER (West Virginia University), Claire C. St. Peter (West Virginia University)
Abstract: Resurgence refers to the reemergence of previously extinguished responding when an alternative response is also placed on extinction. Resurgence may occur to varying extents based on initial reinforcement schedules and the type of disruption in the response-reinforcer dependency. The present study examines the interaction between initial reinforcement schedules (fixed-ratio 1 or fixed-interval 5”) and subsequent resurgence during fixed-time or extinction phases. We used a group design to evaluate this 2x2 interaction. Initial results indicate less resurgence occurred for participants who experienced fixed-interval reinforcement schedules than fixed-ratio reinforcement schedules, regardless of disruptor type, F(1, 7) = 6.48, P < .05. Disruptor type had no significant effect on resurgence, extinction tests did not produce greater resurgence than did fixed-time tests, F(1, 7) = 3.84, P > .05. There was no significant interaction between initial reinforcement schedule and disruptor type, F(1,36) = .34, P > .05. These results suggest that the initial schedule is the main determinant of the level of resurgence, and providing response-independent reinforcement on a fixed-time schedule dies not reduce that level.
 
Do Shifts in the Magnitude or Quality of Alternative Reinforcement Produce Resurgence?
Rusty Nall (Utah State University), ANDREW R. CRAIG (Utah State University), Ciara Marshall (Utah State University), Timothy A. Shahan (Utah State University)
Abstract: Differential-reinforcement-of-alternative-behavior based interventions often are used to decrease undesirable behavior. When these interventions are suspended, however, resurgence of the original behavior is common. Some investigators have tried to prevent resurgence by gradually thinning alternative-reinforcer rate, but this component of treatment is not always successful. In the current experiments, we examined effects of thinning alternative-reinforcer dimensions other than rate (magnitude and quality) on response suppression during alternative reinforcement. In Experiments 1 and 2, groups of rats pressed levers for four- and six-pellet reinforcers, respectively, according to variable-interval 15 s schedules. Next, lever pressing was extinguished while chain pulling produced reinforcers of the same magnitude according to the same schedule as baseline. Finally, alternative reinforcement was suspended or decreased to one pellet in each experiment. Alternative-reinforcer magnitude was halved for an additional group in Experiment 2. Shifts to zero and one pellet produced comparable resurgence in both experiments. However, halving alternative-reinforcer magnitude in Experiment 2 produced less resurgence than the other manipulations. We investigated effects of alternative-reinforcer quality (i.e., delivery of 32%-sucrose vs. 4%-sucrose solutions) in Experiment 3. Shifts in alternative-reinforcer quality did not produce resurgence. Practical and theoretical implications of these findings will be discussed.
 
Relations between Reinforcer Potency and the Resurgence of Problem Behavior
PATRICK ROMANI (Munroe Meyer Institute), David P. Wacker (The University of Iowa), Nicole H. Lustig (The University of Iowa), Deva Carrion (University of Iowa)
Abstract: We present data from one participant enrolled in the current investigation. Inter-observer agreement was assessed for 30% of sessions and averaged 90%. Phases 1, 2, and 3 were conducted within a multiple schedules design. During Phase 1, a baseline condition was conducted in the demand context. Problem behavior was reinforced with escape from demands according to a fixed ratio (FR) 1 schedule and compliance was placed on extinction. During Phase 2, compliance was reinforced with either toys with attention or toys alone according to an FR-1 schedule and problem behavior was placed on extinction. Once an 80% reduction in problem behavior occurred, a reinforcer potency analysis was conducted according to a progressive ratio arrangement and reversal design. The purpose of the reinforcer potency analysis was to evaluate the reinforcer (toys with attention or toys alone) that maintained the highest levels of compliance (i.e., most potent reinforcer). Phase 2 was re-implemented following the reinforcer potency analysis. Compliance and problem behavior were placed on extinction in Phase 3 to evaluate resurgence of problem behavior. Results will be discussed in terms of their clinical and translational implications.
 
 
Symposium #399
Equivalence Classes: Determinants, Neural Correlates, Meaning, and Language
Monday, May 25, 2015
3:00 PM–4:50 PM
007A (CC)
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
Chair: Erik Arntzen (Oslo and Akershus University College )
Abstract:

The present symposium focuses on some important findings with the area of derived relations. The first paper by Arntzen and Nartey investigated the effect of the use of familiar pictures on the expansion of equivalence classes. After training to form two different sets of three 3-member classes with the linear series training structure, twenty children were then trained to connect the two middle nodes in the two different sets of classes. Participants were then tested for the formation of the expansion of these classes into three 6- member equivalence classes. Regardless of condition, when all the stimuli were familiar pictures, seven participants formed the six-member classes while only three participants formed classes using only abstract stimuli (see Figure 1). The second paper by Fields and Arntzen summarize the results of seven published experiments that have documented the effects of each of these variables. The class enhancement effects of meaningful stimuli were mimicked by an initially meaningless stimulus when laboratory training was used to establish one of the afore-mentioned stimulus control functions with that stimulus. Its subsequent inclusion in a set of other meaningless stimuli enhanced the formation of equivalence classes by that set. The third paper by Soares Filho, Clavijo-Alvarez, da Silva Barros, and Tomanari present on experiment that investigated the effects of positive and negative reinforcement on the acquisition of conditional discriminations and equivalence class formation in humans (see Figure 2). The fourth paper by Vaidya and Ortu, asked whether laboratory-generated conditional relations among stimuli would show properties commonly attributed to linguistic behavior. Investigations, both empirical and conceptual, are currently underway to further evaluate these two intriguing properties (see Figure 3).

 
Variables Influencing Expansion of Equivalence Classes
ERIK ARNTZEN (Oslo and Akershus University College), Richard Nartey (Oslo and Akershus University College)
Abstract: The study investigated the effect of the use of familiar pictures on the expansion of equivalence classes. After training to form two different sets of three 3-member classes with the linear series training structure, twenty children were then trained to connect the two middle nodes in the two different sets of classes. Participants were then tested for the formation of the expansion of these classes into three 6- member equivalence classes. Using pictures as the nodes while the rest of the stimuli were abstract, half of the participants were exposed to a serialized introduction of the baseline conditional relations as the other half had the baseline conditional relations introduced on a concurrent basis. Six of ten participants formed the six-member classes following the serialized arrangement while three of ten did so following the concurrent arrangement. Thus, large equivalence classes were readily formed following serialized training of baseline relations than a concurrent training. In both conditions, those who formed the 6-member classes were then exposed to the formation of new six-member equivalence classes through the expansion of two different three 3-member classes involving only abstract stimuli while those who did not form classes attempted the formation of new 6-member classes involving familiar pictures only. Regardless of condition, when all the stimuli were familiar pictures, seven participants formed the six-member classes while only three participants formed classes using only abstract stimuli. Thus, the formation of large equivalence classes was enhanced with the use of familiar pictures as class members than when only abstract stimuli were used as class members.
 
Behavioral functions of meaningful stimuli that enhance equivalence class formation
LANNY FIELDS (Queens College, City University of New York), Erik Arntzen (Oslo and Akershus University College)
Abstract: The inclusion of a meaningful stimulus in a set of other meaningless stimuli enhances the likelihood of forming an equivalence class from the stimuli in that set. Typically, the enhancement is attributed to the connotative properties of the meaningful stimulus. A meaningful stimulus however, also serves a number of behavioral stimulus control functions: a simple simultaneous discriminative function, a simple successive discriminative function, and the overtraining of the successive discriminative function. It can also serve as a member of an identity conditional relation, an arbitrary conditional relation, a number of such relations, and these relations on a simultaneous or a delayed basis. Finally, a meaningful stimulus can be functioning as a member of other equivalence classes or resemblance based classes. Thus, any or all of these stimulus control functions can account for the class enhancing effect of including a meaningful stimulus as the member of a to-be-formed equivalence class. The presentation will summarize the results of seven published experiments that have documented the effects of each of these variables. The class enhancement effects of meaningful stimuli were mimicked by an initially meaningless stimulus when laboratory training was used to establish one of the afore-mentioned stimulus control functions with that stimulus. Its subsequent inclusion in a set of other meaningless stimuli enhanced the formation of equivalence classes by that set. Thus, much of the class enhancing effects of meaningful stimuli was accounted for in terms of their acquired stimulus control functions instead of their connotative functions.
 

Do Equivalence Relations have Linguistic Properties? Behavioral and Neurophysiological Correlates of Emergent Symmetry

MANISH VAIDYA (University of North Texas), Daniele Ortu (University of North Texas)
Abstract:

The last half of the 20th century can be described as a period of progressive growth in our understanding of language and language-related phenomena. This growth is due to important developments in key areas of language-related research. One of these developments comes from the electrophysiological study of brain activity (e.g., evoked reaction potentials or ERP) and another comes from the behavioral study of generative learning (e.g., stimulus equivalence or SE). In the current set of studies, we asked whether laboratory-generated conditional relations among stimuli would show properties commonly attributed to linguistic behavior. In Experiment 1, we documented the semantic priming effect with geometric stimuli embedded laboratory-generated equivalence relations. In Experiment 2, we documented the N400 effect with similar stimuli in laboratory-generated equivalence relations. These results suggest two intriguing possibilities: First, that laboratory-generated equivalence relations are effective models of behaving linguistically or second, that properties commonly attributed to linguistic behavior are in fact more broadly characteristic of associative relations generally. Investigations, both empirical and conceptual, are currently underway to further evaluate these two intriguing properties.

 
 
Symposium #400
CE Offered: BACB
Assessing and Teaching Academics with the Morningside Model of Generative Instruction
Monday, May 25, 2015
3:00 PM–4:50 PM
212AB (CC)
Area: EDC/AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Kent Johnson (Morningside Academy)
Discussant: Charles T. Merbitz (Behavior Development Solutions)
CE Instructor: Kent Johnson, Ph.D.
Abstract:

The Morningside Model of Generative Instruction (MMGI) is a research based protocol for teaching elementary and middle school learners. Over 140 schools and agencies in the US and Canada have successfully implemented MMGI with typically developing students who struggle in school. Recently the Haugland Learning Center has implemented MMGI with students with Autism Spectrum Disorders. In the first presentation, Andrew Kieta will present annual growth in student learning at Haugland, demonstrating its success with this new population. He will focus on writing performance. In the second presentation, Morningside Academy's school psychologist, Julian Gire, will present new approaches to monitoring the progress of writing performance throughout the school year, in order to make teaching interventions that will guarantee at least two years' annual growth. In the third presentation, Marianne Delgado and Nicole Erickson will present procedures for increasing application of newly taught vocabulary words in student writing. In the fourth presentation, Kathy Fox will present the effects of a teacher coaching protocol on both teacher and student performance.

Keyword(s): academic skills, assessment, generative instruction
 

Growth In Writing Performance in Children with Autism with the Morningside Model of Generative Instruction

ANDREW R. KIETA (Haugland Learning Center)
Abstract:

Entering our 5th year of collaboration, Haugland Learning Center and Morningside Academy have transitioned from discovering whether students on the Autism spectrum could demonstrate Generativity through contingency adduction, to designing procedures to make generative learning more dynamic and efficient. This process marked the first attempted implementation of the Morningside Model of Generative Instruction with a student population in which every student is on the Autism spectrum. Past presentations indicated that generative outcomes are achievable with students with autism spectrum disorders through systematic programming, quality instruction, and population specific supports. This session will focus on how extensions in writing instruction have helped develop student repertoires more likely to be recruited into generative combinations, and will highlight what weve learned in implementing a large-scale assessment framework. Performance data will demonstrate the growth exhibited by students to underscore how we continue to develop and implement successful learning technologies with a population different from those served at Morningside Academy and in the typical public school classrooms that have previously implemented the model.

 

Meta level assessment: Progress monitoring of written expression

JULIAN GIRE (Morningside Academy)
Abstract:

At Morningside Academy student progress is monitored through a multi-level system of assessment and evaluation. The initial, or Macro, level consists of norm and/or criterion referenced tests. The second, or Meta, level directly deals with progress monitoring through the use of Curriculum Based Measures/Curriculum Based Assessments (CBM/CBA). The third, or Micro, level are Standard Celeration Charts that document student in class progress as well as guide instruction and intervention. The focus of this presentation will be to describe procedures, specifically, for progress monitoring of written expression. A general description of Meta level of assessment will be presented as well along with evidence supporting the importance of this type of assessment. Several different methods of writing assessment will be presented along with data and commentary on the pros and cons of each method. Participants will leave with a general understanding of progress monitoring, procedures for, and current trends in, the monitoring of writing skill progress.

 

Vocabulary Acquisition with Both Corrective Decoding Students, and Middle School Students Performing Independent Research

MARIANNE DELGADO (Morningside Academy), Nicole Erickson (Morningside Academy)
Abstract:

Two teachers at Morningside Academy explored the application of correctly defined words in novel situations. Students learned vocabulary with two methods. One method was SAFMEDS, a flash card memorization and fluency program. The second was student-generated definitions program, which included exploring word forms, context clues, connotations, and usage. During the baseline phase, each group was administered 3 sets of flash cards, with 8 words in each set. After definition mastery was shown, application of new vocabulary was tested using 12-minute quick writes of essays. After 3 rounds, the classes moved to 4 different student generated activities, with sets of 8 words. Nicole Erickson will be presenting the performance of her students, ages 9-12, with corrective decoding skills ranging from third through seventh grade. Marianne Delgado will be presenting the performance of her middle schoolers transitioning from teacher-directed literature classes to student-run project based learning groups. Data will be presented on Standard Celeration Charts. Pre and post versions of Pro-Eds Word Test 2 and 3 were used to determine the entry level skills of each group, and assess the acquisition of normative vocabulary skills. Substantial data have been collected in these studies to date.

 

The Effects of Teacher Coaching on Both Teacher and Student Performance

KATHY FOX (Haugland Learning Center)
Abstract:

Research has shown that quality instruction is an important factor in student learning. It is often shown to be more important than more commonly discussed factors such as race, socioeconomic status, technology in the classroom, and class size. Haugland Learning Center is a chartered, non-public school for students with autism spectrum disorders in Columbus, Ohio where teachers in the Aspire program are coached not only to perform traditional teacher duties such as progress reporting and data collection, but also to implement research based best practices in instruction, and The Haugland Model of Classroom Management. The Aspire program attempts to replicate The Morningside Model of Generative instruction and works closely with Morningside Teacher?s Academy to train staff in important pieces of the model, provide them with necessary support to implement the model, and develop coaching strategies that will help develop high performing teachers. All staff receive feedback weekly and may be coached several times per week based on performance data. With continued development and data evaluation, we show that behavior analytic performance management and coaching strategies can improve teacher performance and student outcomes.

 
 
Symposium #401
CE Offered: BACB
Current State of SAFMEDS: Summary Data, Procedural Evaluations, Mulitiple Exemplars and Formatting Effects
Monday, May 25, 2015
3:00 PM–4:50 PM
210AB (CC)
Area: EDC/TBA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Shawn Patrick Quigley (University of New Mexico Medical Group)
Discussant: John W. Eshleman (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology)
CE Instructor: Shawn Patrick Quigley, Ph.D.
Abstract: SAFMEDS was developed by Lindsley in the late 1970’s to enhance the typical use of flashcards (Graf & Auman, 2005). A review of SAFMEDS research indicates it has been utilized with children, college students and older adults with and without disabilities. The literature also indicates the SAFMEDS procedures used are not well documented or have multiple variations limiting practitioners’ ability to know what procedure to use and when. The purpose of this symposium is to provide data regarding the evaluation of SAFMEDS across multiple dimensions.
Keyword(s): Fluency, SAFMEDS, Stimulus Control
 
Learning From 5 Years of SAFMEDS Data
CLAY M. STARLIN (Tending Loving Communities™ (TLC) Project)
Abstract: This presentation will summarize 5 years of SAFMEDS data (100+ charts) from a graduate special education course. Data will be shared relating to the following: variation in learning pictures based on student selected chunking decisions, impact of lower passing criteria (35 correct/ minute) but extra credit for above 35/minute and data relating to SAFMEDS retention.
 
Using SAFMEDS within an Undergraduate Research Course: Student Contingencies, Instructor Training and Effects of Formatting on Fluency.
KIMBERLY PECK (Western Michigan University), Jessica E. Frieder (Western Michigan University), Shawn Patrick Quigley (University of New Mexico Medical Group), Anthony Kennedy-Walker (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: SAFMEDS is a precision teaching technique that promotes fluent responding (Bower & Orgel, 1981; Eshleman, 1985; Korinek & Wolking, 1984). Limited research has been conducted regarding SAFMEDS and stimulus control, but available research suggests irrelevant stimuli affect student responding during a SAFMEDS timing (Meindl, Ivy, Miller, & Neef, 2013). Meindl and colleagues questioned whether fluency of SAFMEDS cards could be affected by altering stimulus features on the card (i.e., location of the words on the card). Results indicated that on testing days, accuracy and fluency of responding decreased when identical terms were presented with the only difference being the location of the term on the card. This investigation replicated and expanded on the work done by Meindl and colleagues. Specifically, the word formatting was be altered to determine if it affected student accuracy and fluency when using the SAFMEDS procedure as a study technique. Additionally, information regarding the use of SAFMEDS within an undergraduate research methods course will be shared.
 
A Comparison of Single and Multiple SAFMEDS Definitions on Generalization to Novel Examples for Graduate Students
DAVID BERGMARK (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), John W. Eshleman (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), Fawna Stockwell (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology)
Abstract: This study, an extension of Meindl, Ivy, Miller, Neef, & Williamson (2013), examined the effects of multiple exemplar SAFMEDS on responding during a flashcard generalization probe using examples of the terms and definitions studied. The participants used massed practice over the course of one or two days to achieve the fluency aim with two training decks. Each training deck had 20 cards, 10 different terms or concepts, and two cards per term. Half of the terms included two cards with the same definition, and half of the cards displayed two terms with different but equivalent definitions. Participants then completed timings with the two probe decks, and instead of definitions on the front, the cards had an example of the term or concept on the back. Probe Deck Same had the terms from both training decks with two cards with the same definition, and Probe Deck Different had the terms from both training decks with cards with two different but equivalent definitions. Results showed the that using SAFMEDS decks with multiple definitions per term can potentially lead to better generalization for learners.
 

An Evaluation of Various SAFMEDS Procedures

SHAWN PATRICK QUIGLEY (University of New Mexico Medical Group), Stephanie M. Peterson (Western Michigan University), Jessica E. Frieder (Western Michigan University), Anthony Kennedy-Walker (Western Michigan University)
Abstract:

Lindsley developed Say-All-Fast-Minute-Every-Day-Shuffled, or SAFMEDS, in the late 1970s to enhance the typical use of flashcards (Graf & Auman, 2005). The acronym was developed specifically to guide the learners behavior when using flashcards. A review of SAFMEDS research indicates it has been utilized with children, college students and older adults with and without disabilities. The literature also indicates the SAFMEDS procedures used are not well documented or have multiple variations limiting practitioners ability to know what procedure to use and when. Furthermore, future SAFMEDS research is hampered by variations in the independent variable (i.e., SAFMEDS). The purpose of this study was to evaluate a basic SAFMEDS procedure and four supplementary SAFMEDS procedures. Results of the study suggest the basic SAFMEDS procedure was not sufficient for developing fluent responding with Chinese characters or Russian words, but all of the supplementary procedures led to increases in the number of correct responses per 1-min timing. Further research evaluating differences in performance across the supplementary procedures is warranted.

 
 
Symposium #402
CE Offered: BACB
Extending the Practical Utility of the Trial-based Functional Analysis: Assessment and Intervention Considerations and Applications
Monday, May 25, 2015
3:00 PM–4:50 PM
214A (CC)
Area: PRA/AUT; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Joseph Michael Lambert (Vanderbilt University)
Discussant: Sarah E. Bloom (University of South Florida)
CE Instructor: Joseph Michael Lambert, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Perhaps due to its adaptability in natural environments, trial-based functional analysis (FA) methodology has received some attention as a viable alternative when traditional FAs are not feasible. Despite a small but promising collection of published studies indicating that trial-based FAs can both be accurate and can inform effective function-based interventions, the generality of the assessment's utility, the training necessary to implement it with fidelity, and the optimal sequence of component experimental segments is still relatively unknown. In the first presentation the speaker describes a preliminary investigation evaluating the effect of an automated interactive training on pre-service behavior analysts' implementation of trial-based FA methodology. In the second presentation the speaker presents data on two procedural variations of trial-based FAs related to the sequencing of test and control segments and the dependent variable used. The speakers in the final two presentations describe studies outlining variations of the methodology appropriate for identifying the functions of a response topography (i.e., elopement) that presents unique challenges to a valid functional assessment.

Keyword(s): Elopement, Functional Analysis, Training, Trial-based
 

Effect of an Automated Training Presentation on Pre-Service Behavior Analysts' Implementation of Trial-Based Functional Analysis

Joseph Michael Lambert (Vanderbilt University), Blair Lloyd (Vanderbilt University), Johanna Staubitz (Vanderbilt University), Emily Weaver (Vanderbilt University), CHELSEA JENNINGS (Vanderbilt University)
Abstract:

The trial-based functional analysis (FA) is a useful alternative to the traditional FA in contexts in which it is challenging to establish environmental control for extended periods of time. Previous researchers have demonstrated that others can be trained to conduct trial-based FAs with high procedural fidelity by providing a didactic presentation, small-group instruction, and then a performance evaluation. However, one barrier to replicating this training sequence is that didactic presentations are not standardized and presentations can vary considerably across different groups of trainers or researchers. We designed an automated didactic presentation with video models embedded throughout for trainers and researchers to use when training others to conduct trial-based FAs. The purpose of this study was to evaluate the effect of this presentation on participant fidelity to trial-based FA procedures. Results demonstrate improved fidelity following the presentation. However, the presentation alone was insufficient to establish consistently high levels of fidelity across all conditions for all participants. Thus, additional training components are required when teaching others to conduct trial-based FAs.

 
Trial-Based Functional Analysis: Procedural Variations and Data Interpretation
BLAIR LLOYD (Vanderbilt University), Emily Weaver (Vanderbilt University), Crystal Finley (Vanderbilt University)
Abstract: The trial-based functional analysis (FA) is a practical variation of the standard FA with a small but growing evidence base (Rispoli et al., 2014). Since the original study describing the trial-based FA method (Sigafoos & Saggers, 1995), variations of the original procedures have been used among different research groups. Two of these variations relate to (a) the sequence of test and control segments within trials, and (b) the measurement of problem behavior within trials. The purpose of this presentation is to discuss how each of these variations may impact data interpretation. Two trial-based FA data sets allowing a comparison of each variation will be presented: one targeting physical aggression in a home setting for a child with Cri-du-chat syndrome and another targeting disruptive stereotypy in a reading clinic for an adolescent with autism spectrum disorder. Specifically, across both trial-based FAs, control segments were implemented both before and following test segments. In addition, problem behavior was measured using both occurrence/nonoccurrence and latency measures. Results highlight potential advantages and disadvantages of each procedural variation and directions for future research on trial-based FA methodology.
 
Correspondence Between Latency-Based and Trial-Based Functional Analysis of Elopement and Accompanying Intervention
CRYSTAL FINLEY (Vanderbilt University), Joseph Michael Lambert (Vanderbilt University), Carmen Caruthers (Vanderbilt University)
Abstract: The trial-based functional analysis (FA) is a practical alternative to traditional FA methodology because experimental trials can be embedded into normally scheduled daily activities in a client’s natural environment. Although research suggests that trial-based FAs can be accurate when assessing commonly studied topographies of problem behavior, no research has evaluated whether this methodology is appropriate for assessing response topographies such as elopement; which presents unique challenges to valid assessment outcomes. Thus, the purpose of Study 1 was to evaluate whether results from a trial-based FA of the elopement of an adolescent diagnosed with an autism spectrum disorder would correspond to the results of a latency-based FA of the same behavior. The purpose of Study 2 was to evaluate the validity of Study 1 findings by incorporating trial-based FA outcomes into an effective function-based intervention (i.e., differential reinforcement of an alternative behavior) for the adolescent’s elopement. Results of this preliminary investigation suggest that trial-based FAs can be useful when assessing and treating elopement.
 
Trial-based Assessment and Treatment of Elopement and Flopping When Walking Near or Leaving a Playground
MELISSA BOWEN (University of Nebraska Medical Center, Munroe-Meyer Institute), Wayne W. Fisher (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Medical Center)
Abstract: Trial-based functional analyses (FA) have been successful in determining the variables maintaining problem behavior (Bloom, Iwata, Fritz, Roscoe & Carreau, 2011; Lambert & Bloom, 2010) and the results have corresponded to traditional FAs (Larue, et. al., 2010). The current study utilized a trial-based FA to assess problem behavior when participants walked near and left a playground. During a pre-assessment, two 3-year old boys with autism eloped to access a playground. When we attempted to remove them from the playground, they flopped to the ground. We then conducted an analysis where trials alternated between the child being lead past a playground, the child being prompted to leave the playground following brief access, and a control trial where the child had free access to the playground. Results showed increased elopement we brought each child near the playground and elevated levels of flopping when we prompted him to leave the playground. For both participants, two functional communication responses were taught to functionally replace the child’s elopement and flopping. Elopement and flopping both reduced to zero levels in their respective test conditions. For one participant, treatment was successfully extended to teach the child to tolerate when the functional communication response would not be honored.
 
 
Invited Symposium #403
CE Offered: BACB
Is There a Home for EAB in Applied Training Programs?
Monday, May 25, 2015
3:00 PM–4:50 PM
006AB (CC)
Area: SCI/EAB; Domain: Basic Research
Chair: Derek D. Reed (The University of Kansas)
Discussant: Claudia L. Dozier (The University of Kansas)
CE Instructor: Derek D. Reed, Ph.D.
Abstract:

The 2015 Guidelines for the Accreditation of Graduate Programs in Behavior Analysis put forth by the Association for Behavior Analysis International (ABAI) includes the addition of coursework in the Experimental Analysis of Behavior (EAB). These new additions (one EAB course for master's programs;two EAB courses for coctoral programs) constitute a substantial push to increase the relevance and rigor of training in basic behavior analysis in ABAI-accredited programs. However, the addition of EAB courses may prove difficult for applied training programs that must already maintain approved course sequences through the Behavior Analysis Certification Board, or accreditation from other organizations (e.g., American Psychological Association, National Association of School Psychologists). The 2015 ABAI accreditation guidelines may thereby put graduate training directors in a difficult position to choose whether ABAI accreditation is worth curricular changes or additional hiring of EAB faculty. This panel discussion will begin with brief comments from experts in the field who have a vested interest in integrating basic behavior analysis into applied training programs. Discussants will describe the importance of EAB in applied training programs, in addition to providing tips and strategies for meeting ABAI's accreditation guidelines. The floor will then be opened to discussion from attendees.

Keyword(s): accreditation, EAB, teaching
 

The Role of Basic Behavior-Analytic Concepts and Principles in BACB-approved Course Sequences

JAMES E. CARR (Behavior Analyst Certification Board)
Abstract:

For more than a decade, the BACB has operated an Approved Course Sequence system through which a university's defined behavior-analytic coursework can be formally identified as meeting course-content requirements for BACB certification. There are currently more than 500 Approved Course Sequences (ACSs) at over 500 institutions around the world. Dr. James E. Carr will present data on the growth of ACSs over time, as well as the core coursework and instructor requirements to become an ACS. Chief among these requirements is course content (currently 45 hours) in basic behavior-analytic concepts and principles, which all applicants for BACB certification must successfully complete. Questions on BACB certification examinations are all based on the BACB Fourth Edition Task List, which is a content validated list of job competencies of behavior-analytic practitioners. A portion of the task list document (Foundational Knowledge) is devoted to basic concepts and principles. Dr. Carr will describe the roles these basic underpinnings play in BACB coursework requirements and examinations and how they might be expanded or further highlighted in the BACB Fifth Edition Task List.

James E. Carr, Ph.D., BCBA-D, is the chief executive officer of the Behavior Analyst Certification Board. His professional interests include behavior analyst credentialing, behavioral assessment and treatment of developmental disabilities, verbal behavior, and practitioner training. Dr. Carr has published more than 120 scientific articles on these and other topics. Dr. Carr is a Fellow of the Association for Behavior Analysis International. He is the editor-in-chief of the journal The Analysis of Verbal Behavior and has served on the editorial boards of 10 other behavior analysis journals, including four appointments as associate editor. Dr. Carr is past president of the Mid-American and Alabama Associations for Behavior Analysis. He received his doctorate in 1996 from Florida State University under the mentorship of Dr. Jon Bailey and previously served on the behavior analysis faculties at University of Nevada-Reno (1996-1999), Western Michigan University (1999-2008), and Auburn University (2008-2011).
 

Being Basic in an Applied World

CHRISTOPHER A. PODLESNIK (Florida Institute of Technology)
Abstract:

Dr. Christopher A. Podlesnik is a basic researcher with interests in understanding how fundamental learning and behavioral processes influence the effectiveness of behavioral treatments. Although interested in translational research for some time, he is currently receiving his first real clinical training in Applied Behavior Analysis in severe-behavior and early-intervention clinics. This experience taught him the value of understanding fundamental learning and behavioral processes, theoretical frameworks, and conceptual systems of behavior for guiding treatment decisions. Assessments, analyses, and treatments in Applied Behavior Analysis are powerful tools for addressing behavioral deficits and excesses. However, these methods are applied in so many different circumstances, the particulars of these methods must always change. Understanding fundamental processes provides behavioral clinicians with yet another, more general, tool for better aligning features of clinical tools with a given case and to anticipate avenues to exploit for improving those tools. His ongoing struggle is with how to convey the importance and usefulness of investing the extensive time it takes to understand complex literatures and theoretical frameworks to the point it can be applied by busy students primarily interested in practical issues of behavior change.

Christopher A. Podlesnik was born and raised in Latrobe, PA. He received his B.A. in psychology from West Virginia University, his master's degree and Ph.D. in psychology from Utah State University, and gained postdoctoral research experience in behavioral pharmacology at the University of Michigan. He was a faculty member at the University of Auckland in New Zealand and still holds a position of honorary academic there. In 2014, Dr. Podlesnik moved to Florida with his wife, Corina; two kids, Porter and Vera; and his dog, Frankie; and accepted a position as associate professor at the Florida Institute of Technology. His research and teaching interests mainly involve the importance of understanding basic learning processes when developing behavioral treatments. His initiation in the implementation of applied behavior analysis involves training currently under way for Behavior Analyst Certification Board certification at the Scott Center for Autism Treatment at Florida Institute of Technology. He is currently an associate editor and formerly on the Board of Editors for the Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior. He also is a board member for the Society for the Experimental Analysis of Behavior and Society for the Quantitative Analysis of Behavior, and received the B. F. Skinner Early Career Award from Division 25 of the American Psychological Association. Dr. Podlesnik plays the guitar poorly and used to mountain bike a lot before moving to Florida.
 

Strategies for Integrating EAB into an Applied Master's Program

DOROTHEA C. LERMAN (University of Houston-Clear Lake)
Abstract:

University of Houston-Clear Lake's current master's program in behavior analysis is the result of evolving changes and improvements to the curriculum since 2004. Many of these improvements were possible because of changes in the requirements for accreditation and certification. In this presentation, Dr. Dorothea C. Lerman will describe strategies used to meet changes in these requirements and to integrate more basic behavior analysis into the UH-CL curriculum. Suggestions will be given for faculty and program directors who are training practitioners and have a limited number of faculty lines.

Dorothea Lerman is currently a professor of psychology at the University of Houston-Clear Lake, where she coordinates a master's program in behavior analysis and serves as director of the UH-CL Center for Autism and Developmental Disabilities. She received her doctoral degree in psychology from the University of Florida in 1995, specializing in the experimental analysis of behavior. Her areas of expertise include autism, developmental disabilities, early intervention, functional analysis, teacher and parent training, and treatment of severe behavior disorders (e.g., aggression, self-injury). Dr. Lerman's graduate students serve as behavioral consultants for school districts in the Houston area and provide services to children and families through an on-campus clinic. Dr. Lerman has published more than 60 research articles and chapters, served as associate editor for the Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis and Research in Developmental Disabilities, was the founding editor of Behavior Analysis in Practice, and recently completed a term as editor-in-chief of the Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis. She has secured more than $1.5 million in grants and contracts to support her work. She was the recipient of the 2007 Distinguished Contribution to Applied Behavioral Research Award and the 2001 B. F. Skinner Award for New Researchers, awarded by Division 25 of the American Psychological Association. She also was named a Fellow of the Association for Behavior Analysis-International in 2008. Dr. Lerman is a licensed psychologist and a Board Certified Behavior Analyst-Doctoral.
 

Building a Behavior-Analytic Foundation

CHRISTINE E. HUGHES (University of North Carolina at Wilmington)
Abstract:

Is there a home for the Experimental Analysis of Behavior (EAB) in applied-training programs? There has to be because EAB is the foundation of the behavior-analytic home. What has made behavior analysis such a strong discipline is that our practice is never really separated from our science and philosophy. Without training in and knowledge of the basic principles of behavior, an applied behavior analyst is at a severe disadvantage as a practitioner. Dr. Christine E. Hughes will discuss the program at the University of North Carolina at Wilmington as an example of a successful and strong program in both basic and applied behavior analysis, while having to meet separate state requirements for practicing psychology.

Dr. Christine Hughes received her M.S. and Ph.D. from the University of Florida in behavior analysis and completed a post-doctoral fellowship at the University of North Carolina Chapel Hill. She currently is an associate professor and graduate coordinator in psychology at the University of North Carolina at Wilmington, where there is a master's program in applied behavior analysis. Dr. Hughes conducts translational research in the areas of punishment, schedules of reinforcement, and behavioral pharmacology, specifically the effects of prescription drugs on impulsive choices and on punished behavior. Dr. Hughes has been program chair for Behavioral Pharmacology and Toxicology for ABAI, program chair, secretary, and president of the Southeastern Association for Behavior Analysis, and President of Division 25--Behavior Analysis of the American Psychological Association. She also was an associate editor of the Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior and is a member of the Society of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior Board.
 
 
Symposium #404
CE Offered: BACB
Assessing and Addressing Practical and Vocational Repertoires of Adults and Adolescents with Autism
Monday, May 25, 2015
4:00 PM–4:50 PM
Grand Ballroom C1 (CC)
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Jaime DeQuinzio (Alpine Learning Group)
Discussant: Peter Sturmey (The Graduate Center and Queens College, City University of New York)
CE Instructor: Jaime DeQuinzio, Ph.D.
Abstract: Responding to a fire alarm and assessing vocational preference prior to beginning employment are two practical yet important areas to consider when programming for adolescents and adults with autism. In the two studies presented, success and challenges with addressing both skills are highlighted. In the first study, three adults with autism were taught to respond to an audio-taped recording of a fire alarm using manual prompts, graduated guidance, and reinforcement. Correct responding to simulated fire alarms reached criterion however, generalization to the actual fire alarm was limited. In the second study, preference assessments identified high and low preference vocational tasks with two adolescents with autism about to begin supported employment. However, these tasks were not reliably associated with higher and lower levels of engagement possibly indicating that preference might not be predictive of performance for certain individuals. Both studies provide directions for future research and implications for practice with adolescents and adults with autism.
Keyword(s): adolescents, adults, fire safety, vocational preference
 
Teaching Adults with Autism to Independently Respond to Fire Alarms
ERIN RICHARD WHITE (Alpine Learning Group), Helene Cierzo (Caldwell College), Bridget A. Taylor (Alpine Learning Group)
Abstract: There is little research in the area of teaching fire safety skills to adults with developmental disabilities. The purpose of this study was to teach adults with autism to independently respond to a fire alarm. A multiple-probe design was used to assess the effects of prompting and reinforcement on leaving the building within 1 min of the activation of a fire alarm. During baseline, none of the participants responded during the actual fire drills or simulated drills. During intervention, the experimenter played an audio-taped recording of the alarm. Initially, manual guidance was provided to prompt the participant to stop the current activity and leave the building. Prompts were faded using graduated guidance until the experimenter was no longer in the room. Correct responses were reinforced on an FR 1 schedule using edibles identified during a preference assessment. Once the learner demonstrated mastery with the experimenter positioned outside of the room, reinforcers were provided on an FR 3 schedule. Sessions were then conducted twice a month. Generalization to untrained rooms and to the scheduled monthly fire drills was assessed. Results indicted all three participants demonstrated the skill during teaching sessions and generalized to novel rooms. Responding appropriately during regularly-scheduled monthly fire drills was inconsistent.
 
Assessing Vocational Task Preferences of Adolescents with Autism Prior to Beginning Supported Employment
KELLY DELLA ROSA (Alpine Learning Group), Tina Sidener (Caldwell College), Ruth DeBar (Caldwell University), Bridget A. Taylor (Alpine Learning Group), Jaime DeQuinzio (Alpine Learning Group)
Abstract: Measuring preference is an area of increasing interest in the literature. Despite the vast amount of research on identifying reinforcer preferences for individuals with autism, there is an overall lack of research on identifying vocational preferences .Additionally, prior research has focused almost entirely on identifying vocational preferences in adult populations with a variety of diagnoses. The purpose of the present study was to assess the vocational preferences of adolescent learners diagnosed with autism. During the vocational preference assessment, a multiple stimulus without replacement assessment was conducted in which participants selected a vocational task and then engaged in that task for 1 min. Following implementation of the preference assessments, a most- and least-preferred vocational task was identified. During engagement assessments, participants were prompted by a text cue in their daily schedule to engage in the assigned high-preference task and assigned low-preference task and duration of engagement was measured. MSWO preference assessments were administered every two engagement sessions. Results demonstrated that despite differences in preference, participants engaged with both the least and most-preferred tasks equally and engaged in zero occurrences of problem behavior, contradicting past research that high preference tasks are associated with higher engagement than low preference tasks. Social validity measures demonstrated that clinicians found the procedures feasible, useful and were likely to use them. Areas for future research include increasing session length, assessing engagement without the instructor present, and investigation of characteristics of jobs that make them more or less preferable.
 
 
Symposium #405
CE Offered: BACB
An Analysis of Discrete Trial Teaching: Corrective Feedback, Informative Feedback, and Observational Learning
Monday, May 25, 2015
4:00 PM–4:50 PM
217D (CC)
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Kate E. Fiske Massey (Douglass Developmental Disabilities Center, Rutgers University )
Discussant: Mitchell T. Taubman (Autism Partnership)
CE Instructor: Justin B. Leaf, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Discrete trial teaching is a systematic and effective method of teaching children with autism various skills. Discrete trial teaching consists of three components: (a) an instruction (discriminative stimulus), (b) a response by the learner, and (c) a consequence following the childs response. Although discrete trial teaching is a commonly implemented procedure to teach individuals diagnosed with autism there still remains several questions which should be addressed through empirical investigation. For example it is not known how individuals respond when corrective feedback is provided, the level of observational learning that occurs during group instruction, and the utility of informative feedback. The presentations in this symposium will help address these issues. The first presentation will provide an analysis on the type of corrective feedback that is provided and how students responded to the corrective feedback. The second presentation will provided data on the effects of discrete trial teaching implemented in a group instructional format where informative feedback was provided. Both clinical recommendations and areas for future research will be discussed.

Keyword(s): corrective feedback, discrete trial, informative feedback, observational learning
 
An Analysis and Evaluation of Corrective Feedback Provided to Individuals Diagnosed with Autism Spectrum Disorder
ERIN MITCHELL (Autism Partnership), Justin B. Leaf (Autism Partnership Foundation), Donna Townley-Cochran (University of North Texas), Ronald Leaf (Autism Partnership), John James McEachin (Autism Partnership), Mitchell T. Taubman (Autism Partnership)
Abstract: Corrective feedback is commonly provided for both incorrect responding during learning tasks and as a way to decrease aberrant or off task behaviors. Although corrective feedback is commonly provided to individuals with autism, there have been debates on the utility of corrective feedback; many researchers and clinicians believe that corrective feedback may result in an increase in aberrant behaviors and lead to more errors during learning. The purpose of this study was to evaluate the clinical use of corrective feedback for sixteen children diagnosed with autism. The researchers evaluated ten thirty-minute clinical sessions for each of the participants and evaluated corrective feedback across many dimensions. Some of the dimensions evaluated were: why the teachers provided corrective feedback (e.g., skill acquisition or off task behavior), the type of corrective feedback provided (e.g., verbal feedback, token loss, loss of reinforcement), and the participant’s reaction to receiving corrective feedback. We conducted various statistical analyses to evaluate how participants responded to corrective feedback, if there were differences in how participants responded based upon how the corrective feedback was provided, and if there were differences correlated with various demographics of the participants. Both clinical recommendations and areas for future research will be discussed.
 
An Evaluation of Group Discrete Trial Teaching and Informative Feedback on Tacting and Observational Learning
ADITT ALCALAY (Autism Partnership), Donna Townley-Cochran (University of North Texas), Justin B. Leaf (Autism Partnership Foundation), John James McEachin (Autism Partnership), Mitchell T. Taubman (Autism Partnership), Ronald Leaf (Autism Partnership)
Abstract: We evaluated a group implemented discrete trial teaching procedure to teach expressive labeling for nine individuals diagnosed with autism. The discrete trial teaching procedure consisted of: (a) a discriminative stimulus provided by the teacher; (b) the behavior from the participant, (c) social praise for correct responding; (d) corrective feedback for incorrect responding; and (e) informative feedback provided either after the social praise or the corrective feedback. We evaluated if the participants were able to learn the expressive labels directly taught to them, if they were able to learn the expressive labels taught to other members of their group (i.e., observational learning), if they were able to learn the additional information provided directly to them during the informative feedback, and if they were able to learn the additional information provided to the other members of the group during the informative feedback. A multiple baseline design across participants was utilized. Results showed that the participants were able to learn the information directly taught to them, were able to observationally learn skills taught to other group members, and that participants were able to learn the information targeted by the informative feedback. Both clinical recommendations and areas for future research will be discussed.
 
 
Symposium #406
CE Offered: BACB
Pairing and Response Interruption and Redirection. Experimental Refinements of Commonly Implemented Procedures in Clinical Practice
Monday, May 25, 2015
4:00 PM–4:50 PM
217C (CC)
Area: AUT/PRA; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Katie A. Nicholson (Munroe Meyer Institute)
CE Instructor: Tara Olivia Loughrey, Ph.D.
Abstract: Pairing is a commonly used procedure when working in an early intervention setting or when working with a new client in attempts to establish behavior therapists as conditioned reinforcers. The current research focuses on whether pairing prior to an instructional session decreases problem behavior during instruction and whether participants demonstrate a preference for pre-session pairing. In the second presentation, research will be presented on whether discrimination training is an effective procedure to pair praise as a reinforcer with young children. Response Interruption and Redirection (RIRD) is a common intervention for the treatment of stereotypy. The third presentation demonstrates the utility of discriminative stimuli to signal the RIRD condition when stereotypy is inappropriate. The present study evaluated discriminative stimuli to signal RIRD to decrease motor and vocal stereotypy exhibited by two adult males with autism. Using an alternating treatments design, results show that these stimuli were effective in establishing stimulus control. Stereotypic behavior occurred less in SDPcondition compared with the SD condition. Generalization sessions in a work setting are presented demonstrating generality of the intervention.
 
Child Preference for Pre-session Pairing and Alternative Therapeutic Conditions
Ashley Lugo (Munroe Meyer Institute), PAIGE MCARDLE (Munroe Meyer Institute), Melissa L. King (University of Nebraska Medical Center), John Lamphere (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Medical Center), Andrew Petty (University of Nebraska)
Abstract: Pre-session pairing is procedure referenced by professional literature on the Verbal Behavior Approach to build rapport and increase compliance of children with autism. (e.g., Sundberg & Partington, 1998; Barbera & Rasmussen, 2007; McGreevy, 2009). The procedure involves the therapist delivering (i.e., pairing) free access to preferred items or activities with the sight or presence of the therapist. There is limited empirical evidence establishing specific pre-session pairing procedures as well as a scarcity of data demonstrating the effects on child behavior. The purpose of this case study was to assess participant preference for therapeutic conditions occurring immediately prior to discrete trial teaching (DTT). To evaluate the effects of antecedent manipulation of therapeutic conditions on preference for conditions, a concurrent chain protocol was used. The participant was presented with a link to three conditions: pre-session pairing with a therapist prior to DTT, free play alone prior to DTT, and DTT only. Secondary measures such as compliance and problem behavior were also measured. Baseline data showed variable rates of compliance during DTT. Data on allocation of responding to conditions and compliance with mastered instructions will be presented. Implications for future research will be discussed
 
Establishing Praise as a Reinforcer Using the Operant Discrimination Training Procedure
ASHLEY LUGO (Munroe Meyer Institute), Therese L. Mathews (UNMC), Ana M Cathcart (UNO/UNMC), Melissa L. King (University of Nebraska Medical Center), John Lamphere (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Medical Center)
Abstract: Social deficits are a hallmark of autism spectrum disorder (ASD). Socially mediated consequences, such as praise, may not function as a reinforcer for individuals with ASD. Given the frequency with which praise is used as a programmed consequence in empirical research and in clinical practice, it is necessary to explore procedures that could condition praise to function as reinforcers. Operant Discrimination Training (ODT) has emerged as a promising procedure to condition stimuli to acquire reinforcing properties. Four children diagnosed with ASD participated in this study. A nonconcurrent multiple baseline design across participants was used to evaluate the ODT procedure in conditioning praise as a reinforcer. Results indicated that the ODT procedure can demonstrate immediate effects on behavior, but extinguish within 3-5 sessions. Implications for future research and conceptual issues surrounding stimulus pairing will be discussed.
 
Discriminative Stimuli with Response Interruption and Redirection to Decrease Stereotypy
TARA OLIVIA LOUGHREY (The Victory Center for Autism and Related Disabilities), Maria Soto (The Victory Center for Autism and Related Disabilities), JoAnna Lynn Rojas (The Victory Center for Autism and Related Disabilities), Jocelyn Rodriguez (The Victory Center for Autism and Related Disabilities)
Abstract: Response Interruption and Redirection (RIRD) has been characterized as a variation in response blocking using a series of demands and redirecting the individual to engage in a more appropriate response. RIRD has been demonstrated to be an effective intervention to decrease motor and vocal stereotypy (Martinez & Betz, 2014). Few studies have evaluated RIRD with the inclusion of stimulus control procedures. Incorporating signals may increase the probability for generalization of treatment effect (Rapp et al., 2009). The present study evaluated discriminative stimuli with RIRD to decrease motor and vocal stereotypy exhibited by two adult males diagnosed with autism. Using an alternating treatment design, signaled RIRD was compared to a signaled ignore condition during independent work. A colored card in addition to a verbal rule served as discriminative stimuli to signal the RIRD condition. The removal of the card signaled the ignore condition. During RIRD condition, the researcher interrupted the target response with three motor imitation tasks followed by a gestural prompt to resume independent work. During the ignore condition, the researcher did not interrupt stereotypy. Results show that these stimuli were effective in demonstrating stimulus control. Stereotypy occurred less in SDP condition compared with the SD condition. Generalization probes in a community setting are presented demonstrating generality of the intervention.
 
 
Symposium #407
Further Development in the Use of Activity Schedules and Script Fading with Children with Autism
Monday, May 25, 2015
4:00 PM–4:50 PM
217B (CC)
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Azure Pellegrino (Utah State University)
Abstract: Activity schedules and script fading have been used to teach children with autism a variety of independent and social skills. This symposium investigates extending the research in these interventions. Specifically, the populations who implement script fading procedures, the settings in which activity schedules are used, and the modalities of activity schedules are discussed. Akers, Higbee, Reinert, and Pollard assessed the fidelity of a script fading intervention for children with autism implemented by their typically developing siblings during play, as well as the comments made by the children with autism. Akers, Higbee, Pollard, Gerencser, and Pellegrino examined the use of activity schedules on appropriate play of children with autism in a playground setting. Markham, Giles, and Kanoujiya investigated acquisition of activity schedule skills using tablet-based or book-based activity schedules in children with autism, in addition to their preference for each modality. Implications for future research and practice are discussed.
Keyword(s): activity schedule, play skills, script fading, technology
 
Sibling-Implemented Script Fading to Promote Play-Based Statements in Children with Autism
JESSICA AKERS (Utah State University), Thomas S. Higbee (Utah State University), Kassidy Reinert (Utah State University), Joy Pollard (Behavior Change Institute)
Abstract: Children with ASD have deficits in the area of social communication; this includes a lack of appropriate communication during play. Script fading is a technology that has been used to teach a variety of social skills to children with ASD. Parents have accurately implemented this procedure with their children and this resulted in an increase in commenting during play. The current study extends these findings to examine if typically developing siblings can implement this intervention with fidelity and if the child with ASD will make more comments after the intervention is initiated. Three toy sets were used in the study and scripts were provided for only one of the toys. Results for the first participant support the claim that typically developing siblings can accurately implement the script fading procedure and the comments made by the child with ASD increased after this training was initiated.
 
An Evaluation of Photographic Activity Schedules to Increase Independent Playground Skills in Young Children with Autism
AZURE PELLEGRINO (Utah State University), Jessica Akers (Utah State University), Thomas S. Higbee (Utah State University), Joy Pollard (Behavior Change Institute), Kristina Gerencser (Utah State University)
Abstract: Children with autism have difficulty learning to play appropriately due to their deficits with social skills and their excessive engagement in repetitive behaviors. Photographic activity schedules have been used to teach children with autism to independently complete a sequence of activities. Activity schedules may be an effective method to teach appropriate play on the playground since many children with autism engage in repetitive play or self-stimulatory behavior during recess instead of completing a variety of playground activities. The purpose of the study is to evaluate the effectiveness of a photographic activity schedule to increase appropriate play skills in young children with autism on the playground. The results for the first participant show that when the activity schedule was present the child with ASD engaged in more activities than when the schedule was absent.
 
Comparing Book- and Tablet-Based Picture Activity Schedules: Acquisition and Preference
VICTORIA MARKHAM (University of South Wales), Aimee Giles (University of South Wales), Asha Kanoujiya (University of South Wales)
Abstract: Picture activity schedules (PAS) consist of a sequence of images which represent the tasks or activities the person is to follow and the order in which they should be completed. Following training on PAS, individuals with learning disabilities have increased independent task engagement (Banda & Grimmet, 2008; MacDuff, Krantz, & McClannahan, 1993). Picture activity schedules have traditionally been presented in a book format (e.g., Bryan & Gast, 2000; MacDuff et al., 1993). However, PAS have recently been evaluated on devices such as an iPod™ touch (Carlile, S. Reeve, K. Reeve, & DeBar, 2013). The present study compared the efficiency of PAS acquisition on book- or tablet-based schedules. In addition, participant preference for each PAS modality was assessed. Three boys attending a university-based clinic for children with autism participated. Participants were taught to follow the schedules using both book- and tablet-based modalities. Following acquisition in each condition, a concurrent-chains preference assessment was conducted to evaluate participant preference for each modality. For two participants, the book-based PAS was acquired in fewer training sessions compared to the tablet-based PAS. For the third participant, the tablet-based PAS was acquired faster. Preference for book- or tablet-based PAS were idiosyncratic across participants.
 
 
Symposium #408
CE Offered: BACB
Incentives & Health: The Application of Reinforcement in Health Promotion
Monday, May 25, 2015
4:00 PM–4:50 PM
Texas Ballroom Salon B (Grand Hyatt)
Area: CBM/BPH; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Kenneth Silverman (Johns Hopkins University)
CE Instructor: Kenneth Silverman, Ph.D.
Abstract: Incentives have been used to address a range of health problems, but behavior analysts have not been involved in many of these applications, the incentive interventions have frequently failed to employ optimal parameters, and they have not always produced desired outcomes. This symposium will review three behavior-analytic research programs on the use of incentives or reinforcement in health promotion. Silverman will review research on the application of reinforcement in the treatment of heroin and cocaine addiction, and will focus on a recent study that evaluated the effects of employment-based reinforcement in treating out-of-treatment injection drug users. Dallery will review research on the use of technology in health promotion, and will focus on a recent study that evaluated the effects an internet-based contingency management intervention to promote smoking cessation. Madden will review research on the use of reinforcement to encourage children to eat fruits and vegetables, and will focus on recent research that evaluated game-based rewards in promoting fruit and vegetable consumption. These presentations illustrate how behavior analysts have applied reinforcement principles to promote health. Behavior analysts could use similar approaches to address a range of serious health problems.
Keyword(s): drug addiction, health incentives, healthy eating, smoking
 
The Application of Reinforcement in the Treatment of Heroin and Cocaine Addiction
KENNETH SILVERMAN (Johns Hopkins University), August F. Holtyn (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine)
Abstract: Drug addiction can be a chronic problem that can be difficult to treat. Abstinence reinforcement can initiate drug abstinence, but high magnitude reinforcement is needed to promote abstinence in refractory patients and many patients relapse after the intervention ends. Abstinence reinforcement can be maintained to promote long-term abstinence, but practical means of implementing high magnitude and long-term abstinence reinforcement are needed. The therapeutic workplace was designed to address this practical problem. Under the therapeutic workplace, participants must provide objective evidence of drug abstinence or medication adherence to work and earn wages. Several randomized controlled trials have shown that the therapeutic workplace can initiate and maintain cocaine abstinence in methadone patients, and promote adherence to addiction medications. This presentation will focus on a study that evaluated the effectiveness of the therapeutic workplace in out-of-treatment injection drug users, a population that has been difficult to treat effectively and that is at risk for adverse health outcomes because of their continued drug use, most notably HIV. That study showed that the therapeutic workplace was effective in promoting abstinence from heroin and cocaine in out-of-treatment injection drug users. Workplaces could be effective vehicles for the maintenance of therapeutic reinforcement contingencies including for treatment-refractory individuals.
 
A New Frontier: Integrating Information and Behavioral Technology to Promote Health Behavior
JESSE DALLERY (University of Florida)
Abstract: Modifiable behavioral risk factors such as cigarette smoking, physical inactivity, and obesity contribute to over forty percent of premature deaths in the United States. Advances in digital and information technology are creating unprecedented opportunities for behavior analysts to assess and modify these risk factors. Technological advances include mobile devices, wearable sensors, biomarker detectors, and real-time access to therapeutic support via information technology. Integrating these advances with behavioral technology in the form of conceptually systematic and empirically validated procedures could usher in a new generation of effective and scalable behavioral interventions targeting health behavior. In this talk, I will outline a case study in integrating information technology with behavior analytic principles and procedures to promote health behavior. The case study involves an Internet-based contingency management intervention to promote smoking cessation. I will also discuss results from a recent clinical trial involving smokers from across the United States. Technology can substantially increase access to cost-effective, scalable, behavior analytic interventions to promote health.
 
Using Game-Based Non-Tangible Rewards to Improve Dietary Decision-Making
GREGORY J. MADDEN (Utah State University), Brooke Ashley Jones (Utah State University), Heidi Wengreen (Utah State University), Sheryl Aguilar (Utah State University)
Abstract: A decade or more of research on the Food Dudes program has demonstrated that tangible reinforcers can produce large increases in healthy eating among elementary school children. Rendering this technology of behavior affordable for US public elementary schools is a challenge. The approach that we explored combines game-design principles (e.g., compelling narrative, autonomy) with behavior-analytic principles (e.g., contingent reinforcement, shaping) so that non-tangible, game-based outcomes can be used to reinforce healthy eating. This talk will summarize the results of two alternating-treatment design studies conducted in public charter schools. In both schools, game-based rewards were contingent upon the school consuming (as a group) more than the 60th percentile of their fruit or vegetable consumption over the last 10 days. In both schools, fruit and vegetable consumption significantly increased when the alternating contingency was placed on the target food (fruit or vegetables). Data collected on individual student’s consumption suggested that those consuming the least in baseline posted the largest increase in healthy eating during the game-based intervention.
 
 
Symposium #409
Music and Psychological Flexibility: Data from Empirical Studies and Directions for Future Research
Monday, May 25, 2015
4:00 PM–4:50 PM
Texas Ballroom Salon C (Grand Hyatt)
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Garret M Cantu (University of Louisiana at Lafayette)
Discussant: Maureen Flynn (University of Texas-Pan American)
Abstract: Although music is present in the daily lives of millions of individuals, knowledge about the multiple effects and functions of music is incomplete. The current symposium presents two different empirical studies on music and psychological flexibility conducted at the University of Louisiana at Lafayette. The first talk will present data from a correlational study, examining the relationship between various musical preferences and psychological flexibility. Subjects responded to several music-related questions with respect to multiple genres of music, as well as filling out the Acceptance and Action Questionnaire – Second edition (AAQ-II). The second talk will present results from a music-related experiment conducted at UL Lafayette. This study will examine whether distraction-based coping strategies as opposed to acceptance-based coping strategies will predict levels of psychological discomfort when depressed mood is induced followed by the presentation of depression-inducing musical tracks. Data will also be collected from the AAQ-II to assess whether previous measured psychological inflexibility could also predict the dependent variables. Both of the presentations in this symposium are intended to spark discussion and future studies in psychological music research.
Keyword(s): experiential avoidance, music preference, psychological flexibility
 
Looking for Musical Connections: Exploratory Data on Music Preferences and Psychological Flexibility.
ERIC BAQUET (University of Louisiana at Lafayette), David R. Perkins (University of Louisiana at Lafayette)
Abstract: The way that music interacts with the individual lives of listeners may vary as a function of musical genre, and may at different times evoke either greater psychological flexibility or inflexibility. This study is an early attempt at exploring these questions, as well as providing general descriptive data that may facilitate future research designs. In this study, participants were asked to rate 31 music genres (e.g. Heavy Metal) on a 1-10 scale for six different questions. For example, the sixth question asks the participant “On a scale of 1-10, would you be interested in listening to something new from this type of music?” To examine possible relationships with general psychological flexibility, subjects were also asked to complete the Acceptance and Action Questionnaire – Second edition (AAQ-II). Based on early data, no strong correlation was detected between AAQ-II scores and any of the six questions averaged across genre. More in-depth analysis of the complete data set will be reported in this presentation, including specific relationships between genre and psychological flexibility, as well as implications for future research.
 
The Effects of Emotional Avoidance on the Behavior of the Listener of Evocative Music
BRENTON ABADIE (Eastern Michigan University), David R. Perkins (University of Louisiana at Lafayette), Eric Baquet (University of Louisiana at Lafayette), Garret M Cantu (University of Louisiana at Lafayette), Gino Vallecillo (University of Louisiana at Lafayette)
Abstract: Experiential avoidance is a concept that has been the focus of clinical and theoretical interest to clinical behavior analysis for decades. It has been described as "the tendency to alter the type, length, or occurrence of negative private events (thoughts, feelings, memories, somatic sensations, etc.) and the situations in which they may occur" (Gird & Zettle, 2009, p. 537), and has been proposed as a possible underlying factor of numerous psychological problems and subjective distress. Recent research has investigated the possible relationship of emotional avoidance to the subjective experience of physical pain, uncomfortable perceptual experience, and dysphoric mood. While these studies have shed some light on the effects of emotional avoidance, additional research may be helpful to investigate how it may impact the experience of, and response to, complex psychological events. One specific possible direction may be a precise and thorough study of the effects of emotional avoidance on the behavior of the listener of evocative music. Pilot data suggests that there is a meaningful effect of music listening on the self-reported experience of depression in participants. These results are as yet not significant, but more complete data shall be included in our discussion.
 
 
Symposium #410
CE Offered: BACB
Behaviorally Approaching and Solving Ethical Challenges
Monday, May 25, 2015
4:00 PM–4:50 PM
204A (CC)
Area: CSE/TPC; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: David J. Cox (University of Florida)
Discussant: Joshua K. Pritchard (Florida Institute of Technology)
CE Instructor: Joshua K. Pritchard, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Ethical and professional guidelines for behavior analysis are stringent; applied behavior analysis (ABA) often involves the delivery of services by multiple individuals, some of whom may not be certified and have varying experience levels. Because of this, ethical concerns that arise often involve supervisees or supervisors. Just as done with the behaviors of individuals receiving ABA services, behavior analysts must take a behavioral approach to analyzing and solving ethical concerns. Behavioral contingencies surrounding behaviors related to ethical challenges must first be identified before ethical concerns can be absolved using the best possible method. Responding to unethical behaviors without first analyzing their function or without first taking a behavioral approach in its solution may be an ineffective means at evoking more desirable, ethical behaviors by practitioners. As such, this symposium will analyze variables surrounding unethical behaviors and subsequently propose behaviorally sound solutions to common ethical scenarios encountered by clinicians in the field.

Keyword(s): ethics, performance management, professionalism
 

Behaviorally Approaching Ethical Challenges

TIFFANY N. KILBY (The Behavior Station)
Abstract:

A behavioral approach should be used when analyzing ethical scenarios involving the behaviors of supervisees or supervisors, just as done with client behaviors. A behavior analyst should not focus on viewing other practitioners as "ethical" or "unethical". Instead, just as done with clients, behavior analysts should focus on particular behaviors emitted by other practitioners. With that, the scope of what characterizes behaviors as "ethical" within the realm of behavior analysis services must be explored. This presentation will also assess common ethical scenarios that arise in supervisory relationships while providing behavioral services, and how to take a behavioral approach to analyzing such ethical scenarios. Relevant topics include: identifying function, determining potential antecedents and consequences, considering response effort. Taking these behavioral approaches could help practitioners with determining more effective ways to overcome ethical challenges. This presentation will precede a presentation about potential solutions for addressing ethical scenarios based on the behavioral approach suggested in this presentation.

 
Behavioral Solutions to Ethical Challenges
KELSEY BALLEW (Progressive Behavioral Science)
Abstract: In developing solutions to unethical behaviors exhibited by colleagues, employees, supervisors, supervisees, and even bosses, behavior analysts must use knowledge from behavioral principles. Many behavior analysts, whether newly minted or experienced, struggle with the correct approach to take when they are faced with ethical concerns, especially when the concerns are presented by someone in a more prominent position. It is our responsibility as behavior analysts not only to abide by and model ethical behaviors to those with whom we work, but also to adequately absolve unethical behavior observed, and to do so in a tactful, professional manner. Using behavioral technology to facilitate ethical behaviors and decrease the occurrence of unethical behaviors can lead to more effective and ethical services provided to our consumers. This presentation will propose behaviorally oriented solutions to the ethical scenarios presented in the first talk of the symposium. Solutions proposed will be based on the analysis of contingencies surrounding the engagement in both ethical and unethical behaviors.
 
 
Symposium #411
CE Offered: BACB
Behavior Analysis meets Biomedical Research: Advances in Interdisciplinary Research
Monday, May 25, 2015
4:00 PM–4:50 PM
007B (CC)
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
Chair: Maria Isabel Munoz Blanco (Universidad de Guadalajara)
CE Instructor: Christina M. Peters, M.Ed.
Abstract: Interdisciplinary study should be cooperative and reciprocal, in which neither of the disciplines is reducible to another or of less importance (Kantor, 1968). This aim is particularly challenging when understanding psychological events with respect to their biological correlates. Biomedical research is the broad area of science that looks for ways to prevent and treat diseases that cause illness and death in people and in animals (New Jersey Association for Biomedical Research, 2014). This area of study includes the understanding of diseases, the development of treatments, and techniques to reduce pain, all of which involve behavioral changes. An interdisciplinary collaboration between biomedicine and behavior analysis seems particularly relevant given behavior analysis’ characteristic refinement of tools and instruments for the measurement of behavioral change in both animals and humans. The present symposium presents several cases of interdisciplinary research, an animal model of autism, behavioral measurements of an animal surrogate for DMD, and an examination of behavioral impairments in a mouse model of Parkinson’s Disease, in which behavioral results complement biomedical research without compromising the integrity of both disciplines.
Keyword(s): Animal Research, Biomedical Models, Interdisciplinary Research
 
The Effects of Inflammation on the Neuropathology of Autism
MARIA ISABEL MUNOZ BLANCO (Universidad de Guadalajara), Kenneth Hunter (University of Nevada School of Medicine), Linda J. Parrott Hayes (University of Nevada, Reno)
Abstract: A great deal of biomedical research has provided experimental evidence of the function of specific neuropeptides in the development of autistic symptomatology. There is evidence that individuals diagnosed with autism exhibit histological changes in the hippocampus (Bauman & Kemper, 1994; Bailey et al, 1998; Kemper & Bauman, 1998). Part of the research on neuropathology includes the study of inflammatory changes in the brain (Welch et al. 2005). The Maternal Immune Activation project (MIA) was created to investigate the notion that the neuropathology of autism is caused at least in part by the brain’s response to inflammation. This was accomplished by providing a behavioral account of the most characteristic symptoms of autism. Behavioral measurements were selected as a follow up from research on behavioral characteristics observed in children with autism (i.e. Bijou & Ghezzi, 1999; Spandin & Brady, 1999; Szabo, 2013), which included social deficits, learning and habituation deficits. The results of this research in which significant differences were found between experimental and control groups of mice will be presented. These results set the stage for a conversation on the importance of interdisciplinary research in this area as a means to provide a more comprehensive understanding of autism.
 
A Behavior Analytic Assessment of “Cognitive" Deficits in a Mouse Model of Duchenne Muscular Dystrophy
CHRISTINA M. PETERS (University of Nevada, Reno), Matthew Lewon (University of Nevada, Reno), Linda J. Parrott Hayes (University of Nevada, Reno)
Abstract: In recent years, geneticists have engineered animal models for several diseases that commonly afflict humans. One of these models is known as the MDX mouse, a genetically modified mouse used in research as a surrogate for Duchenne muscular dystrophy (DMD). While the MDX mouse has been utilized effectively to research various cellular and muscular deficits associated with DMD, non-behavior analytic researchers have attempted to identify and study “cognitive" deficits of the MDX mouse with limited success. A careful review of the procedures utilized towards such ends reveals imprecise and misguided procedures to measure what researchers consider to be cognition. Utilizing a delayed non-matching to position (DNMTP) task and a conditioned suppression task, the authors of the present study seek to obtain more precise data regarding the overt behaviors of interest. Data from these efforts will be presented, and the issue of making the findings of the present study more “palatable" to an audience familiar with far less precise measures (e.g. T-maze, Object Recognition tests) will be discussed. The talk will conclude with a consideration of future directions for research and a commentary on the potential impact of this type of interdisciplinary research.
 
Executive function deficits in a progressive MPTP mouse model of Parkinson's Disease
SUZANNE H. MITCHELL (Oregon Health & Science University), Katherine Stang (Oregon Health & Science University), Vanessa B. Wilson (Oregon Health & Science University), Lacy Pflibsen (Portland VA Medical Center), Michelle Sconce (Portland VA Medical Center), Charles Meshul (Oregon Health & Science University; Portland VA Medical Center)
Abstract: Behavioral alterations in Parkinson’s Disease (PD) are not limited to tremor and slowed movement. Increasingly cognitive impairment, including limited attentional processes, is recognized as a cardinal sign of the disorder. Further, reports suggest that these deficits can be experienced even in the early stages of the disorder. Research examining cognitive impairment from a behavior analytic standpoint is lacking, providing the focus for this research. One widely-used model to progressively induce the loss of dopaminergic neurons characteristic of PD onset, involves administering mice a neurotoxin, 1-methyl-4-phenyl-1,2,3,6-tetrahydropyridine (MPTP), over several weeks in increasing doses. To examine alterations in response to signals indicating the availability of positive reinforcement (attention), we developed a simple operant task in which mice responded in one of three nose-poke holes to earn a sucrose-solution reinforcer. The location of the criterion hole varied during the session but was signaled by a light above the manipulandum. Compared with animals receiving saline injections, performance on the task declined progressively as MPTP dose increased, despite mice exhibiting normal feeding patterns outside the operant environment. The hypothesis is explored that early-PD cognitive impairment may reflect the reduced ability to respond appropriately to discriminative stimuli and an increased avoidance of initiating potentially nonreinforced responses.
 
 
Symposium #412
CE Offered: BACB
Advancing Academic, Self-Management, and Social Repertoires in a General Education Inclusive Setting - The Accelerated Independent Learner Model
Monday, May 25, 2015
4:00 PM–4:50 PM
211 (CC)
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: JoAnn Pereira Delgado (Teachers College, Columbia University)
CE Instructor: JoAnn Pereira Delgado, Ph.D.
Abstract:

The Comprehensive Application of Behavior Analysis to Schooling, Accelerated Independent Learner Model applies tactics and protocols rooted in science and principles of behavior to learning for students in general education school settings. Students with diverse backgrounds and needs are served within this model, including students with special needs, students from socio-economically disadvantaged backgrounds, and students without disabilities. Tactics based in principles of behavior analysis are applied to students self-management and social repertoires, in addition to learning math, problem solving, reading and writing. Teachers continuously analyze data on students academic responding in order to maximize students learning and teacher efficacy. Students are also taught critical organization and self-management skills for independent learning, including data collection and graphing. Problems in learning are remediated by implementing behavioral tactics and key verbal developmental protocols based in Verbal Behavior Developmental Theory. This symposium will show data from Accelerated Independent Learner classrooms across subjects and grade levels (K-5). The aim of this model is to scientifically and systematically provide students from any background with critical instructional histories to become independent lovers of learning.

Keyword(s): AIL, General Education
 
Setting Up for Success: Self-Management and Social Repertoires in Accelerated Independent Learner Classrooms
JENNIFER LEE (Teachers College, Columbia University), JoAnn Pereira Delgado (Teachers College, Columbia University), R. Douglas Greer (Columbia University Teachers College and Graduate School of Arts and Sciences)
Abstract: Students in Accelerated Independent Learner classrooms are taught self-management and organization repertoires to maximize efficiency and learning time in the classroom. Tactics based in behavior principles and reinforcement contingencies are used to teach classroom behavior expectations. Students self-monitor appropriate behavior, collect and graph data on learning, and deliver learn units in peer tutoring. Group reinforcement contingencies teach students appropriate line behavior and routines. Students also set their own goals for social or academic progress and earn reinforcement for their class in a hero contingency. Students in these classrooms have a variety of backgrounds and needs, including appropriate social repertoires and audience control. Social Listener Reinforcement, a protocol based in Verbal Behavior Developmental Theory, gives students an exact instructional history, which serves to condition listening to peers as a reinforcer. Examples and data from class-wide reinforcement contingencies, self-monitoring data, and results of research in Social Listener Reinforcement will be shown in this symposium presentation. These contingencies and protocols seek to teach students the self-management repertoires required to be independent learners regardless of their backgrounds and diagnoses.
 
The Advancement of Reader and Writer Repertoires in Accelerated Indpendent Learner Classrooms
JENNIFER WEBER (Teachers College, Columbia University), JoAnn Pereira Delgado (Teachers College, Columbia University), R. Douglas Greer (Columbia University Teachers College and Graduate School of Arts and Sciences)
Abstract: The Verbal Behavior Development Theory experimentally identified cusps and cusps that are capabilities that lead to an individual becoming truly verbal and gaining repertoires necessary for children to acquire higher order operants. In the Accelerated Independent Learner Classrooms, the acquisition of higher order operants include a range of reader and writer repertoires. Students shift from textually responding (learning to read) to reading to learn for comprehension. In writing, students learn to write to have an effect on the behavior of a reader. Children with more advanced repertoires will be able to acquire new operants as a function of reading. These students are also able to participate in a Personalized System of Instruction (PSI). Students in the AIL classrooms come from a variety of backgrounds. Children that are missing certain reading prerequisites will participate in Direct Instruction curriculum that utilizes AIL tactics in order to bridge the reading gap that has been identified at the upper elementary levels. We present research on protocols that expand functional and technical writing repertoires, such as, writer immersion and peer editing. These interventions teach children the reading and writing repertoires that they may be missing.
 

Mastering Math: Elementary Mathematics Instruction in Accelerated Independent Learner Classrooms

KELLY MERCORELLA (Teachers College Columbia University), JOANN PEREIRA DELGADO (Teachers College, Columbia University), R. Douglas Greer (Columbia University Teachers College and Graduate School of Arts and Sciences)
Abstract:

Currently, the United States is performing significantly below the international average in mathematics. This disparity in performance has been attributed to the inability of students in the United States to successfully complete tasks that require higher-level mathematical problem solving. In order to allow student?s to make greater gains in this area, the Accelerated Independent Learner Model of Instruction (AIL?) focuses on teaching students the foundational mathematical skills needed for higher-level problem solving to mastery and fluency, as well as incorporating functional writing into instruction. All responses are rotated between written and vocal responses using tactics such as choral responding, response boards and independent practice. Each student?s responses to instruction are recorded, graphed, and individually analyzed using learning pictures, in order to maximize academic gains through the implementation of tactics to increase learning outcomes. The goal of the AIL? model is to create independent learners driven by the need to know and a love of learning through the use of tactics based on the principles of behavior. This paper aims to explain the tactics implemented to increase learning outcomes , display math data across AIL? grade levels, and highlight the importance of teaching mathematical skills to mastery.

 
 
Invited Paper Session #413
CE Offered: BACB

How can we Increase the Impact of Behavior Analysis in Solving Problems in new Areas?

Monday, May 25, 2015
4:00 PM–4:50 PM
Lila Cockrell Theatre (CC)
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
CE Instructor: Ron Van Houten, Ph.D.
Chair: Sigurdur Oli Sigurdsson (Florida Institute of Technology)
RON VAN HOUTEN (Western Michigan University)
Dr. Ron Van Houten received his B.A. from the State University of New York at Stony Brook and his M.A. and Ph.D. from Dalhousie University, where he received training in the experimental analysis of behavior. He is currently a professor of psychology at Western Michigan University. Dr. Van Houten has published extensively in the Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis on a wide variety of problems, ranging from the education of inner city youth and children with "learning disabilities," the treatment of children and adults with developmental delays, the treatment of clinical problems in children, traffic safety, energy conservation, and aviation safety. Currently, Dr. Van Houten is a member of the Transportation Research Board and a member of the National Committee for Uniform Traffic Control Devices. He is a past assistant editor for the Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis and a Fellow of the ABAI. Dr Van Houten is also an avid pilot flying power aircraft and gliders and a flight instructor.
Abstract:

Behavior analysis is a powerful tool that could ameliorate many of society's problems. One of the first problems that was seriously addressed with a behavior analytic approach was the treatment of autism. Although a behavioral approach yielded promising results from the start, it took many years before the behavioral approach was accepted as the treatment of choice for autism. Although promising data also have been obtained from applications of behavioral technology to many other social problems, these applications have not yet been widely accepted or disseminated. Skinner envisioned behavior analysis as a technology that would address a wide variety of societal challenges. Initially behavior analysts were highly enthusiastic about society adopting our approach in areas such as education, but many people already working in these fields were resistant to a behavioral approach. This paper will examine a number of areas where behavior analysis could make a difference, and explore ways to overcome obstacles and accelerate the acceptance of our approach.

 
 
Symposium #414
The Effects of Different Variables on Preference for Choice-Making Opportunities
Monday, May 25, 2015
4:00 PM–4:50 PM
207A (CC)
Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Courtney Laudont (University of Houston-Clear Lake)
Discussant: Lindsay M. Knapp (St. Cloud State University)
Abstract:

Providing choices as an antecedent manipulation has been effective for decreasing problem behavior and increasing appropriate behavior, and has become a popular treatment option across many settings. One reason providing choices may be so effective it that choice-making opportunities are reinforcing in itself. In fact, previous research has shown that many populations have a preference for choice-making opportunities; however, it is possible that some variables associated with choices (type of reinforcers or task presented) may be an important variable for determining that preference. It may be that, depending on the preference of the different stimuli, a preference for choice-making opportunities may be more evident. In the current symposium, researchers will discuss how they replicated and extended previous research by evaluating whether the preference level of the reinforcers available or the tasks presented has an effect on typically developing children�s preference for choice-making opportunities.

Keyword(s): choice, preference, reinforcer, task
 

An Evaluation of the Effects of Task Preference on the Value of Choice in Typically Developing Preschool Children

ROCIO CUEVAS (Pennsylvania State University), Julie A. Ackerlund Brandt (St Cloud State University)
Abstract:

Providing choices has been a successful intervention for increasing appropriate and decreasing inappropriate behaviors in work and classroom settings; however, the mechanism responsible for this success is unknown. Choice may be a preferred condition, in and of itself, and that preference may decrease the how aversive an individual may find a work environment. If this is true, the opportunity to choose may be more valuable in situations in which less-preferred tasks are available. The current study replicated and extended previous research on the reinforcing value of choice by evaluating the effects of task preference in isolation to determine if there is an effect on participants preference for making choices. Results suggest that when the tasks presented are of moderate- and low-preference, the participant selected the child-choice option at a high frequency and at a more moderate frequency when the tasks presented were high-preferred. This indicates that although being given the opportunity to choose is a reinforcer across contexts, it may be more valuable in situations in which the tasks are less-preferred.

 

An Evaluation of the Effects of Reinforcer Preference on the Value of Choice in Typically Developing Preschool Children

MEGAN RHETT (Penn State Harrisburg), Julie A. Ackerlund Brandt (St Cloud State University)
Abstract:

Recent research on choice has shown that it, in itself, is a reinforcer. However, there is little research on variables that may affect the reinforcing efficacy of it. One variable may be the preference level of the reinforcers provided. Providing choices may be more reinforcing, or only reinforcing, if the items provided are high-preferred items. The current study replicated and extended previous research on the reinforcing value of choice by evaluating the effects of reinforcer preference in isolation to determine if there is an effect on participants preference for making choices. Results suggest that when the reinforcers presented are of moderate- and low-preference, the participant selected the child-choice option at a high frequency and at a low frequency when the reinforcers presented were high-preferred. This indicates that choosing may be more valuable in situations in which the reinforcers provided are less-preferred. One reason may be that when low- and moderate-preferred items are available, the participant has learned the act of choosing their reinforcer increases the likelihood that the reinforcer consumed will be better than when someone chooses for them.

 
 
Symposium #415
CE Offered: BACB
Clinical Expertise: An Essential Component of the Ethical Practice of Applied Behavior Analysis
Monday, May 25, 2015
4:00 PM–4:50 PM
213AB (CC)
Area: PRA/TPC; Domain: Service Delivery
Chair: Timothy A. Slocum (Utah State University)
Discussant: Patrick C. Friman (Boys Town)
CE Instructor: Katie Wolfe, Ph.D.
Abstract: Practitioners of applied behavior analysis make numerous clinical decisions on a daily basis. In an evidence-based practice framework, those decisions are influenced by (a) scientific evidence, (b) client values and context, and (c) the clinical expertise of the practitioner. The Behavior Analyst Certification Board has acknowledged each of these sources of influence in both the Guidelines for Responsible Conduct and the 4th Edition Task List, suggesting that the ethical practice of applied behavior analysis includes a consideration of these three factors. In this symposium, we will explore the topic of clinical expertise in applied behavior analysis by proposing a definition of clinical expertise and describing the role of clinical expertise in the evidence-based practice of applied behavior analysis. In addition, we will describe a functional assessment of clinical expertise that delineates variables that may influence this critical repertoire. Finally, we will recommend strategies for supporting practitioners in the development and maintenance of clinical expertise in applied behavior analysis.
Keyword(s): clinical expertise, decision making, evidence-based
 
Clinical Expertise: Inevitable and Necessary for Clinical Decisions
RONNIE DETRICH (The Wing Institute)
Abstract: Practitioners must make many clinical decisions daily. The basis for those decisions has come under scrutiny in recent years. Evidence-based practice (EBP) has been characterized as a decision-making framework in which decisions are influenced by three inputs: (1) best available evidence (2) clinical expertise (3) client values and context. To date most of the scholarly attention on EBP has been devoted to best available evidence. In this paper, we examine the construct of clinical expertise and its role in decision making. By recognizing expertise as a variable, the field can begin to talk explicitly about it and consider methods for improving it. We argue that judgments are inevitable in a field as complex as applied behavior analysis. Without judgment there is no analysis and practitioners become technicians implementing off-the-shelf interventions. Drawing from other disciplines, we propose a definition that is relevant to behavior analysts. We then argue that responsible professional conduct requires practitioners be explicit about the rationale for their recommendations. Formulating this rationale requires an understanding of the variables that influence decisions including biases and preferences.
 
A Functional Assessment of Clinical Expertise in Applied Behavior Analysis
KATIE WOLFE (University of South Carolina)
Abstract: Clinical expertise is a critical component of evidence-based practice and the effective, ethical practice of applied behavior analysis. The central role of clinical expertise suggests the importance of identifying variables that influence the development and maintenance of this repertoire. This paper will provide a functional assessment of clinical expertise, including motivating operations, discriminative stimuli, and consequences that influence clinical expertise. We will discuss organizational variables that impact behavior-analytic practice such as the Behavior Analyst Certification Board Guidelines for Responsible Conduct, state and national policies, rules and contingencies of the clinician’s employing organization, as well as client outcomes, and the clinician’s training program. Methods for improving clinical expertise will also be discussed, including 1) altering contingencies at the organizational and policy levels, 2) supporting constant practitioner contact with and analysis of client outcome data, and 3) directly targeting the development of clinical expertise in training programs through coursework and supervised fieldwork.
 
 
Symposium #416
CE Offered: BACB
Arranging Contingencies to Promote University Student Success: Decreasing Procrastination and Increasing Homework Completion
Monday, May 25, 2015
4:00 PM–4:50 PM
206AB (CC)
Area: TBA/EDC; Domain: Applied Research
Chair: Traci M. Cihon (University of North Texas)
CE Instructor: Traci M. Cihon, Ph.D.
Abstract:

Behavior Analysts have long been interested in the application of basic principles and procedures in the educational setting as evident in teaching technologies such as the Teaching Machine and Personalized System of Instruction. Behavior analysts have successfully employed many strategies to increase student participation within the classroom such as Active Student Responding and Interteaching. Many have even been successful at arranging contingencies to promote completion of course activities outside of the classroom (i.e., homework) and to decrease student procrastination. However, the contingencies arranged by the instructor are often not sufficient to compete with the contingencies associated with other outside of class activities that are available to students. In fact, many students are coming to university increasingly unprepared in core academic areas and/or are lacking the skills necessary to arrange their own contingencies to ensure academic success. This symposium includes three papers in which the authors sought to arrange contingencies to increase the probability of student success by either promoting homework completion outside of scheduled course times or to decrease student procrastination for undergraduate and graduate students, respectively. The results will be discussed in terms of the correlation between the interventions and measures of academic success (e.g., quiz scores) and the implications for instructional design for university instructors.

Keyword(s): college teaching, homework completion, procrastination
 
The Effects of Homework Sessions on Undergraduate Students’ Homework Performance
Elissa Forand (University of North Texas), TRACI M. CIHON (University of North Texas)
Abstract: Experimenters evaluated the effects of a homework session on undergraduate students’ homework performance through an adapted alternating treatments design in two introduction to behavior analysis courses. Several participants attended homework sessions; however, homework submission and homework mastery did not vary as a function of homework session attendance or availability. Homework submission remained high throughout the experiment regardless of attendance at or availability of a homework session. Many participants responded that they were not interested in or did not need homework sessions. Participants who attended homework sessions rated them as neutral or helpful overall, with longer time and different time as the most common suggestions for improvement.
 

Would You Do Your Homework in Order for a Chance to Earn More Points on Your Quiz

KARL ZIMMERMAN (University of North Texas), Traci M. Cihon (University of North Texas)
Abstract:

Students who complete homework generally do better on measures of academic performance such as quizzes, exams, and overall course grades (Harris & Sherman, 1974; Ryan & Hemmes, 2005). We examined the effects of contingent access to second quiz attempts on the percentage of undergraduate students completing homework to mastery. The study was conducted in an Introduction to Behavior Analysis course that, historically, had only 70% of students on average completing homework. An adapted multiple baseline design across sections was used for four sections of the course. Students could access a second quiz attempt contingent by meeting the following criteria: the student received a 16 out of 20 on the first quiz attempt or by meeting the mastery criterion of the homework (45 out of 50). We also examined the relation between homework accuracy and scores on first quiz attempts. Two sections did not show a difference in homework completion with and without the second quiz attempt contingency. One section showed more sensitivity toward the contingency once it was withdrawn, and one section never had the removal of the contingency and had the highest percentages of students completing their homework. When analyzing the relation of homework accuracy to the corresponding first quiz attempts, homework accuracy appeared to be related to higher scores on first quiz attempts across all sections. Quiz scores were typically a letter grade higher for students who completed homework compared to students who did not complete homework to mastery. Although there are limitations to the current study, the results suggest the second quiz contingency may impact homework completion.

 
Effects of Contingent and Noncontingent Access to Study Materials on Procrastination of Graduate Students’ Studying
JENNIFER CASALE (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), Jessica Gamba (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), Diana J. Walker (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology), Jennifer Klapatch (The Chicago School of Professional Psychology)
Abstract: The present study examined the effects of contingent and noncontingent access to online practice quizzes on the distribution of graduate students’ studying and on weekly, in-class quiz scores. An alternating-treatments design was implemented across two sections of a course, with contingent and noncontingent access rotating weekly and counter-balanced across sections. In the noncontingent access condition, one online practice quiz became available per day. In the contingent access condition, one quiz became available per day, and participants were required to complete prior quizzes before access to each subsequent quiz was available; as a result, putting off taking the quizzes till later in the week resulted in some quizzes not becoming available at all. During the majority of the noncontingent access weeks, distribution of studying using the online practice quizzes was concentrated during the last two days of the week, whereas during the contingent access condition studying occurred more consistently across the week, with one quiz being accessed every 1-2 days. There was no clear evidence that one condition produced higher in-class quiz scores compared to the other. The contingent access condition helped to regulate students’ studying and may be useful for retention, which should be assessed in future research.
 
 
Panel #417
CE Offered: BACB
The New Face of Education: Exploring Various Facets of Online Education Within the Field of Applied Behavior Analysis
Monday, May 25, 2015
4:00 PM–4:50 PM
205 (CC)
Area: TBA/TPC; Domain: Service Delivery
CE Instructor: Dipti Mudgal, Ph.D.
Chair: Dipti Mudgal (Ball State University)
VERONICA J. HOWARD (University of Alaska Anchorage)
KIM MARTELL (Ball State University)
JULIA T. O'CONNOR (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
Abstract:

We live in a society where technology is readily available to help bridge gaps. We can do banking online, reserve tickets online, visit with friends and family online, watch live games online, and also get educated online! It is wonderful to know that many who could not afford education due to financial or time restraints are now able to avail the same (and sometimes better) education online. The field of Applied Behavior Analysis is also seeing an emergence in online education. Programs are now offered that allow students to take core classes and proceed towards BACB certification. Programs utilize a variety of multimedia modes of instruction to not only best simulate an in-person class but also ensure that the students are well rounded in their learning. The goal of this panel discussion is to bring instructors from two different programs (online and hybrid) and discuss how each is setup in providing this learning. Moreover, our experiences as instructors and the successes and challenges faced as part of this teaching will also be discussed. Broad ethical and philosophical issues with regards to the role of online teaching in training future behavior analysts will also be discussed.

Keyword(s): Hybrid Programs, Online education, Teaching
 
 
Special Event #418
CE Offered: BACB
Presidential Address: Behavior Analysis Without Borders
Monday, May 25, 2015
5:00 PM–5:50 PM
Lila Cockrell Theatre (CC)
Instruction Level: Basic
Chair: Linda J. Parrott Hayes (University of Nevada, Reno)
CE Instructor: Martha Hübner, Ph.D.
 

Presidential Address: Behavior Analysis Without Borders

Abstract:

Under the leadership of its Executive Council, ABAI has been crossing geographical borders for the past four decades, disseminating behavior analysis around the world through grants and awards, support of chapters on five continents, and conferences that welcome participation from behavior analysts across the globe. The consistent and unique epistemology of behavior analysis means that geographical borders need not be impediments to the advancement of our field. Paradoxically, however, the domains within behavior analysis (basic research, applied research, service delivery, and theory and philosophy) have created borders that have not been easy to cross or navigate, although many authors have pointed out that such navigation is critical. The ABAI Program Committee has been suggesting to presenters who primarily do basic research to discuss the applied implications of their work, and vice versa. Nevertheless, many behavior analysts still see our field as fragmented. What are the contingencies that make interaction among the different domains of behavior analysis so difficult? What are the contingencies that control the wrong assumption that some domains are more important than others? These contingencies will be analyzed, and recent data and data from the literature will be presented.

 
MARTHA HÜBNER (University of São Paulo)
 
Dr. Hübner is a professor of experimental psychology at the Institute of Psychology, University of São Paulo, and was coordinator of the graduate program in the experimental department from 2004 to 2010. She is also past president of the Brazilian Association of Psychology and of the Brazilian Association of Behavioral Medicine and Psychology. She conducts research at the Laboratory for the Study of Verbal Operants involving managing processes in the acquisition of symbolic behaviors such as reading, writing, and verbal episodes. She is currently immersed in three areas of research: investigating the empirical relations between verbal and nonverbal behavior, analyzing the processes of control by minimal units in reading, and studying verbal behavior programs for children with autism spectrum disorders.
 
Target Audience:

Psychologists, behavior analysts, practitioners, and graduate students.

Learning Objectives: Forthcoming
 
 
 
Business Meeting #419
Behaviorists for Social Responsibility and Editorial Board, Behavior and Social Issues, Joint Meeting
Monday, May 25, 2015
6:00 PM–6:50 PM
214A (CC)
Chair: Mark A. Mattaini (University of Illinois at Chicago)
Presenting Authors:
Behaviorists for Social Responsibility and the Editorial Board of Behavior and Social Issues will meet to review our current status and identify objectives and plans for the coming year for supporting global political liberation and human rights; social, environmental, and restorative justice; and sustainable and aesthetically rich lifestyles through contributions from behavior analytic and behavioral systems analytic science for practice, advocacy, activism, media outreach, and publications. We will also review our efforts over the past year to advance our digital presence and next steps to extend those efforts. Extended conversation following the meeting will be encouraged, as will regular social media contacts over the coming year. Students are particularly encouraged to attend.
Keyword(s): environmental action, human rights, social justice, social responsibility
 
 
Business Meeting #420
Verbal Behavior Special Interest Group
Monday, May 25, 2015
6:00 PM–6:50 PM
216AB (CC)
Chair: Judah B. Axe (Simmons College)
Presenting Authors:
The purpose of the VB SIG business meeting is to update members on current activities of the SIG, including updates from the treasurer, website coordinator, and other officers. We will present awards to the winners of the VB SIG Student Research Competition, the VB SIG Student Grant Competition, and the Jack Michael Award. Attendees may become members prior to attending the meeting or at the front door. We will provide all attendees with a new issue of the VB SIG newsletter, VB News.
 
 
Business Meeting #421
History of Behavior Analysis Special Interest Group Business Meeting
Monday, May 25, 2015
6:00 PM–6:50 PM
209 (CC)
Chair: Edward K. Morris (The University of Kansas)
Presenting Authors:

The purpose of the business meeting is to review the SIG’s current status, that is, how well it is addressing its purpose, mission, and objectives (e.g., its Listserv) and (b) consider new activities that may further advance them (e.g., a web site, ABAI HoBA symposia, an awards program).

 
 
Business Meeting #422
Behavior Analysis Online (Journals) SIG Meeting
Monday, May 25, 2015
6:00 PM–6:50 PM
214B (CC)
Chair: Michael Lamport Commons (Harvard Medical School)
Presenting Authors:

This Special Interest Group of ABAI supports the Behavior Analyst Online Journals. This is the annual meeting. The new editors of Behavior Analysis: Research and Practice (BARP) will be introduced in the meeting. http://www.apa.org/pubs/journals/bar/ will be introduced. We will discuss our new relationship with American Psychological Association (APA) and Division 25 of APA. As of January 1, 2015, the American Psychological Association (APA) becomes not only the owner but also the publisher of the two Behavior Analysis Online Journals. As these two journals get up and running under APA, they will be in all the databases and will have an impact rating. Google Scholar has data on how often articles from the journals have been cited now. We will discuss how to submit papers, videos, charts, programs, etc for publication. We will also like to see our reviewers and prospective reviewers Behavioral Development Bulletin (BDB). http://www.apa.org/pubs/journals/bdb/ Co Editor: Michael Lamport Commons Commons@tiac.net Co Editor: Martha Pelaez pelaeznm@gmail.com, pelaeznm@fiu.edu> BDB is interested in articles that are intersections of behavioral methods and development. Behavior Analysis: Research and Practice (BARP) http://www.apa.org/pubs/journals/bar/

Keyword(s): BAO
 
 
Business Meeting #423
Evidence-Based Practice Special Interest Group Business Meeting
Monday, May 25, 2015
6:00 PM–6:50 PM
214D (CC)
Chair: Susan Wilczynski (Ball State University)
Presenting Authors:
The business meeting of the Evidence Based Practice Special Interest Group (EBP-SIG) of ABAI will serve as our annual meeting. We will discuss our progress on a range of committees at this meeting and set our agenda for the coming year. Our current goals involve increasing membership. Members agreed that developing a website should be priority one, as it would serve to both increase membership and streamline administrative tasks inherent in an expanding organization. We will review our existing website and discuss the value of altering our format. In addition, we will discuss the use of other social media (e.g., Facebook, Twitter) as a means of reaching a larger membership. Members will review our efforts to increase involvement in committee activities. We will also review conference events, symposia that are evidence based, current and past issues of the EBP-SIG quarterly newsletter, a portal for joining the SIG, and highlights of research activities of members. The business meeting will also serve as an opportunity to discuss changes in officer membership for the organization. Students are strongly encouraged to become members of the EBP-SIG because the intersection of these fields involves important professional and financial implications for future academicians and practitioners. Students may also be interested in becoming a student representative, a position that has been developed in the last year and this role may serve to enhance students connections with leaders in EBP and ABA.
 
 
Business Meeting #424
Dissemination of Behavior Analysis Special Interest Group Annual Meeting
Monday, May 25, 2015
6:00 PM–6:50 PM
214C (CC)
Chair: Amanda N. Kelly (Keiki Educational Consultants)
Presenting Authors:
The mission of the Dissemination of Behavior Analysis Special Interest Group is to disseminate the science of human behavior to the public at large, through the use of easy to understand explanations. Our goal is to promote behavior analysis in a positive and accurate light, to help society realize the potential of our science. Current activities of the DBA-SIG include disseminating information about behavior analysis on social media, publication of Behavior Analysis Digest International, presentation of the Skinner Journalism Award, and webinars where members can earn CEUs for free or at reduced rates. The purpose of this meeting is for officers to update members regarding SIG activities during the previous year, answer questions about the DBA-SIG, discuss plans for future activities , and gather information for new ideas about how to effectively disseminate behavior analysis. Association of Behavior Analysis International members who are interested in the dissemination of the science of behavior analysis are encouraged to attend this meeting to learn more about the DBA-SIG.
Keyword(s): Dissemination
 
 
Business Meeting #425
New York State Association for Behavior Analysis (NYSABA)
Monday, May 25, 2015
6:00 PM–6:50 PM
217A (CC)
Chair: Frank R. Cicero (Eden II Programs)
Presenting Authors:

The NYSABA business meeting is held so that representatives of the NYSABA Board can update attendees on the activities of NYSABA over the past year and goals and activities for the future. Topics discussed include committee reports, legislative issues, NYSABA activities at the ABAI conference, NYSABA activities throughout the state, ongoing CEU opportunities as well as other topics affecting behavior analysts in the state of New York. Audience questions will be encouraged.

 
 
Business Meeting #427
Behavior Analysis and the Arts
Monday, May 25, 2015
6:00 PM–6:50 PM
211 (CC)
Chair: Travis Thompson (University of Minnesota)
Presenting Authors:
To review SIG progress and plan for the 2014-15 year
 
 
Poster Session #428
BPH Monday PM
Monday, May 25, 2015
7:00 PM–9:00 PM
Exhibit Hall C (CC)
1. The Differential Effects of Abilify on Escape and Automatically Maintained Problem Behavior
Area: BPH; Domain: Applied Research
CHELSEA R. FLECK (New England Center for Children), Jason C. Bourret (New England Center for Children), Christine Gates (New England Center for Children), Jonathan Seaver (New England Center for Children), Cormac MacManus (New England Center for Children)
Abstract: The purpose of this analysis was to evaluate the effects of gradually increasing dose of Abilify on aggression maintained by escape from therapist proximity and head-directed self-injury maintained by automatic reinforcement. When the participant was not on Abilify, rates of self-injury were high and variable, and rates of aggression were low and stable. With each increase in the drug, we observed systematic increases in escape-maintained aggression while automatically reinforced self-injury was reduced to near zero levels. When a reversal from 12 mg to 10 mg was conducted, aggression was reduced to the level of behavior observed in the previous 10-mg phase, suggesting that the changes in drug dose were directly related to changes in behavior. Interpretation of these findings suggests that Abilify affected the value of escape from therapist proximity as a reinforcer for aggression as well as the value of automatic reinforcement for head-directed self-injury, consistent with a behavioral account of medication effects as establishing operations.
 
2. The Utility of Saliva Cotinine as a Measure of Abstinence in Contingency Management for Smoking Cessation
Area: BPH; Domain: Applied Research
CYNTHIA J. PIETRAS (Western Michigan University), Catherine M. Gayman (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: The present study will investigate the effectiveness of monitoring saliva cotinine twice weekly in a contingency management treatment for cigarette smoking. Delay discounting tasks will also be given to measure the effects of nicotine abstinence on impulsivity. Participants will be randomly assigned to one of two groups: a contingent reinforcement (CR) group or a non-contingent reinforcement (NCR) group. Phase 1 (5 days) will consist of baseline phase. During Phase 2 (4 days), a contingency management procedure will be initiated in which participants from the CR group can earn draws from a cash lottery for decreasing breath CO samples. During Phase 3 (3 weeks), participants in the CR group can earn draws by submitting negative saliva cotinine and breath CO samples twice per week. It is anticipated that participants in the CR group will deliver more negative breath CO and saliva samples than those in the NCR group. Impulsivity may also decrease in individuals who stay abstinent. Data collected so far indicate that breath CO and saliva cotinine levels decreased more in the CR group during Phases 2 and 3. We expect greater relapse rates in the NCR group to become more apparent as more participants complete the study.
 
3. The Alcohol Purchase Task and Academic demands: the effects of gender, age, major, and hometown
Area: BPH; Domain: Basic Research
Callie Horton (University of Wisconsin-Whitewater), Kayla Fleck (University of Wisconsin-Whitewater), Amanda Terrinoni (University of Wisconsin-Whitewater), Jennifer Schwantz (University of Wisconsin-Whitewater), Elizabeth Osborn (University of Wisconsin-Whitewater), MATTHEW E. ANDRZEJEWSKI (University of Wisconsin-Whitewater)
Abstract: Economic demand for alcoholic beverages can be assessed using the Alcohol Purchase Task (APT) where participants hypothetically buy drinks at escalating prices. The APT allows for detailed behavioral economic analyses including elasticity and breakpoint. Previous research has demonstrated that hypothetical academic demands decrease certain measures of demand. However, the roles of gender, age, academic major, and hometown have not been assessed. Using undergraduate volunteers at a Midwestern university, we employed a version of the APT that included academic demands. In addition to replicating earlier studies demonstrating the effects of academic demands, preliminary analyses also indicate that alcohol purchases by undergraduate students differ based on the legal drinking age. That is, students of legal drinking age (n=24) appear to have higher average break points and higher average Omax and Pmax when compared to underage students (n=40). We plan to fully characterize the effects of gender, hometown, and academic major, as well, and if they interact with academic demands on alcoholic purchases.
 
4. The Alcohol Purchasing Task and Binge-Drinking Behavior
Area: BPH; Domain: Basic Research
Kayla Fleck (University of Wisconsin-Whitewater), Callie Horton (University of Wisconsin-Whitewater), Amanda Terrinoni (University of Wisconsin-Whitewater), Jennifer Schwantz (University of Wisconsin-Whitewater), Elizabeth Osborn (University of Wisconsin-Whitewater), MATTHEW E. ANDRZEJEWSKI (University of Wisconsin-Whitewater)
Abstract: The Alcohol Purchasing Task is a validated measure of demand for alcoholic beverages. It asks participants to hypothetically purchase alcoholic beverages at escalating prices. Hypothetical academic demands (e.g. an exam the next day at 8:30 am) have been shown to decrease certain measures such as break point (the price that suppresses alcohol purchases to zero) and Pmax (the price associated with maximum alcohol expenditure). In addition to asking our Upper Midwestern university undergraduates to complete the APT, we asked questions regarding binge-drinking behavior. Preliminary results from our study show a high correlation between binge-drinking behavior and a willingness to purchase alcoholic beverages at a higher cost. Elasticity will be an important measure to consider within this study and will be a main point of comparison between binge-drinking and non binge-drinking student hypothetical purchases. In addition to elasticity, break point and Pmax, this study will also consider Omax and intensity when separating binge-drinking and non binge-drinking undergraduates. Findings have the possibility to help understand alcohol purchasing and behavioral economics of a novel population.
 
5. Serial Position Effects in Social Learning: Do a Cholinergic Antagonist Produces State Dependent Learning?
Area: BPH; Domain: Basic Research
Jonathan Castillo-Alfonso (Universidad del Bosque), Angela Mari­a Hermosillo-Garcia (Facultad de Estudios Superiores Iztacala, Universidad Nacional Autónoma de México), José Eduardo Pérez-Reyes (Facultad de Estudios Iztacala Universidad Nacional Autónoma de México), Verónica Viviana Romero-Luna (FES Iztacala Universidad Nacional Autónoma de México), Guadalupe Ortega-Saavedra (FES Iztacala UNAM), Sara E. Cruz-Morales (FES Iztacala UNAM), J.C. PEDRO ARRIAGA-RAMIREZ (UNAM FES Iztacala)
Abstract: Studies in social transmission of food preference have shown reliable serial position functions in rats. Functions may show primacy or recency. Studies in behavioral pharmacology have shown that cholinergic antagonists may produce deficits in acquisition and recall in different tasks. In this study, we assessed if state dependent learning would be produced in a group under the effect of scopolamine both during acquisition and during testing. In this Experiment, we compared four groups. Control and Saline Groups compared to a group that received a dose of scopolamine before demonstration and before testing and to a group that received a dose of the drug after demonstration. Testing was made after 24 hr. The groups had 12 observers that interacted with a list of three demonstrators that have eaten different flavored foods, with position counterbalanced. Results showed a non-significant quadratic contrast for serial position F (1, 44) = 3.26, p = .08 and a small effect size r = .15. A reliable linear interaction of group and position F (3, 44) = 3.114, p = .036. No state dependent learning was observed, State group performed similar to 8 mg/kg group, both different from control and saline groups.
 
6. Examination of the Sex Differences in the Acute Response to Haloperidol
Area: BPH; Domain: Basic Research
DANTON SHOEMAKER (University of North Texas), Jonathan W. Pinkston (University of North Texas)
Abstract: Women receiving antipsychotic drug therapy tend to have a greater number and more severe side effects than men. The purpose of the present study is to examine sex-differences in response to antipsychotics using a force-based licking task. Prior research has shown that the force-based licking task is a sensitive predictor of motor side-effects associated with antipsychotics, but this has only been studied in male rats. Four male and four female Sprague Dawley were trained to lick a disk mounted atop a force transducer. Licking produced continuous access to an 8% sucrose solution. Sessions terminated after 15 min. To date, we have collected baseline data on several quantitative dimensions of licking between males and females. In general, male rats lick more than female rats, but these differences disappear when body weight is considered. Additionally, quantitative features of licking, such as the maximal (peak) force exerted during licking or the total force expenditure (i.e., time-integral of force) are not different between males and females. In the next phase of the study, set to begin in the next 1-2 weeks, we will begin dosing rats bi-weekly with a range of doses of haloperidol to determine if sex affects its motoric side effects.
 
7. Reinforcement Schedule Effects on Impulsivity during a Contingency Management Smoking Cessation Trial
Area: BPH; Domain: Basic Research
SAMANTHA SALDANA (University of Texas at San Antonio), Paul Romanowich (The University of Texas at San Antonio), Richard Lamb (University of Texas Health Science Center San Antonio)
Abstract: Previous research shows that impulsivity decreases when people stop smoking, as measured through a delay discounting procedure. However, impulsivity changes have typically been measured between groups and not within groups. In two separate contingency management smoking cessation clinical trials breath carbon monoxide (CO) was measured daily to detect smoking over 60 visits. In addition, delay discounting questionnaires were administered at intake and visit 60. In experiment 1 participants were randomly assigned to either an escalating, percentile, or non-contingent breath CO reinforcement schedule. In experiment 2 participants were randomly assigned to either an escalating, fixed-magnitude, or non-contingent breath CO reinforcement schedule. In experiment 1 all three groups were more impulsive at visit 60, relative to intake (see Figure 1; p < 0.05). In experiment 2 a similar pattern was observed, except for the escalating group, which showed no change (see Figure 2). In contrast to previous between-group studies, impulsivity did not decrease with extended smoking abstinence. Therefore, the time frame for impulsivity to change after smoking abstinence may be much longer than the 60 visits experienced by the current participants.
 
8. Reinforcement Schedule Effects on Craving during a Contingency Management Smoking Cessation Trial
Area: BPH; Domain: Basic Research
BRYAN DIMLER (University of Texas at San Antonio), Paul Romanowich (The University of Texas at San Antonio), Richard Lamb (University of Texas Health Science Center San Antonio)
Abstract: Smokers who report increased craving following smoking cessation show poor treatment outcomes. However, no study has examined whether reinforcement schedule influences self-reported craving. We examined whether escalating and fixed-magnitude reinforcement schedules would have a differential effect on self-reported craving in treatment seeking pack-a-day smokers. Escalating participants received $5.00 for their BCO sample < 3 ppm, with a $0.50 increase for each consecutive sample. Fixed-magnitude participants received $19.75 for each BCO sample < 3 ppm. Sixty-three participants were able to maintain abstinence (breath carbon monoxide (CO) < 3 ppm) for at least 20 consecutive visits. Results showed that fixed-magnitude participants reported higher levels of craving starting on the first day of abstinence, relative to escalating participants (p = .055). This group difference for craving increased as abstinence continued (see Figure 1). Thus, even when the amount of smoking abstinence was controlled for, craving differences occurred. The current experiment was not powered to detect long-term outcome differences. Therefore, future research should examine whether these craving differences are both reliable and result in treatment outcome differences.
 
9. Unpredictable Availability as a Determinant of Cocaine Choice in Rhesus Monkeys
Area: BPH; Domain: Basic Research
SALLY L. HUSKINSON (University of Mississippi Medical Center), James Rowlett (University of Mississippi Medical Center), Nancy M. Petry (University of Connecticut School of Medicine), Kevin B. Freeman (University of Mississippi Medical Center)
Abstract: Changing the responses required and reinforcer magnitude for drug and non-drug reinforcers can alter drug choice. These effects have been demonstrated primarily with fixed schedules and magnitudes of reinforcement. However, among humans and relative to non-drug reinforcers, illicit drugs may be less predictable in terms of availability, quality, location, time, and price. Thus, predictability may be an important aspect of reinforcement that differs for illicit drugs relative to other alternatives. We hypothesized that cocaine would be a more potent reinforcer in rhesus monkeys when the responses required and magnitude of each dose were unpredictable. Male rhesus monkeys chose between doses of cocaine. In control conditions, schedule and cocaine dose were fixed. In other conditions, the schedule, dose, or both were made variable on one lever while all aspects on the other lever remained fixed. Sessions consisted of 6 sample and 12 choice trials, each followed by a 20-min timeout. Three of four subjects chose the variable over the fixed schedule, two of four subjects chose the variable over the fixed dose, and three of three subjects chose the variable alternative when both schedule and dose were variable. Not all subjects reliably chose the unpredictable schedule or dose alone. However, across conditions and subjects, the variable alternative was chosen in eight of eleven cases, suggesting that unpredictable cocaine availability may increase its potency and value as a reinforcer. Unpredictability may be an important aspect of drug choice, especially for illicit drug abusers.
 
10. Neurobehavioral Screening of n-Hexane Chronic Exposed Workers in Soybean Mills
Area: BPH; Domain: Basic Research
DAVID A. ECKERMAN (University of North Carolina, Chapel Hill), Rodrigo de Oliveira (University of Brasilia), Vanessa Menezes (Federal University Of Goiás at Jataí), Katrine Silva (Federal University Of Goiás at Jataí), Raphael Cardoso (Pontifical Catholic University Of Goiás), Diane Rohlman (University Of Iowa), Andr� A. Bravin (Federal University Of Goi�s at Jata�), Lincoln S. Gimenes (University of Brasilia)
Abstract:

Hexane is a solvent used in extraction of soybean oil. Little is known about the behavioral effects of chronic and low concentration exposure. The aim of this study was to do a neurobehavioral screening using the Behavior Assessment and Research System and the Romberg Test, to verify if workers might have neurobehavioural impairments. 81 exposed (n=35) and control (n=45) workers participated. The screening occured at the beginning of their work week. Confounding factors were analyzed by surveys. Two statistical approaches were used. Permutation tests (PT): compared control and exposed groups for confounds and neurobehavioral outcomes. Linear regression (LR): compared outcomes adjusted for age and education. For PT, the groups did not differ on confounders; exposed workers showed a lower sway latency on Romberg (p<0,05), and a slight increase in one measure of Simple Reaction Time (p<0,05). For LR, there was no statistical difference between the groups for any neurobehavioral outcome. However, most neurobehavioral measures typically related to solvent exposure were lower for the exposed group, raising concern for worker risks. These concerns should be addressed in follow up studies.

 
11. Gestational Exposure to a High-Fat Diet and Polyinosinic: Polycytidylic Acid in Mice: Effects on Spatial and Visual Discrimination
Area: BPH; Domain: Basic Research
STEVEN R BOOMHOWER (Auburn University), Megan Arnold (Auburn University), M. Christopher Newland (Auburn University)
Abstract: Obesity during pregnancy is associated with learning deficits in humans. The mechanism through which maternal obesity may affect behavioral flexibility in offspring is unclear, but increases in inflammation that result from prenatal high-fat diet exposure may be one possibility. The present experiment was designed to assess the degree to which gestational exposure to a high-fat diet and polyinosinic:polycytidylic acid (poly I:C, a pro-inflammatory drug) affected spatial and visual discrimination in mice. C57BL/6 mice were exposed to three dietary conditions (n=15 male and n=15 female in each)standard chow, high-fat diet, and high-fat diet + glycan (an anti-inflammatory drug)and three inflammation conditions (n=10 male and n=10 female in each)saline, poly I:C, and poly I:C + glycanduring gestation. As adults, mice were trained on a spatial discrimination procedure followed by a visual discrimination procedure (i.e., an extradimensional shift). In general, mice exposed to poly I:C omitted fewer trials than controls and poly I:C + glycan mice in both procedures and made more errors in the transition from spatial to visual discrimination. A similar pattern occurred with mice prenatally exposed to a high-fat diet, but only in the visual discrimination task.
 
12. Methoxetamine's Behavioral Effects on a Multiple FR 30 FI 240s Schedule
Area: BPH; Domain: Basic Research
MICHAEL MATHEWS (Univeristy of North Carolina Wilmington), Wendy Donlin Washington (University of North Carolina Wilmington)
Abstract:

The present study attempted to establish a useful dosing recommendation for methoxetamine, a drug previously unstudied in controlled behavioral studies. We evaluated the effects of methoxetamine on responding of rats under a multiple Fixed Interval 240 sec Fixed Ratio 30 schedule. The two schedules alternate, allowing for sensitivity to various effects. Four rats responded under the schedule with drug doses of 0.1, 0.3, 0.6, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, and 3.0 mg/kg. This study partially replicated Wenger and Dews (1975), which evaluated effects of phencyclidine, ketamine, d-amphetamine, and pentobarbital on schedule controlled behavior in mice under a multiple FR 30 FI 300 sec schedule. The Fixed Interval had lower response rates, was more variable, and had an ED50 between 1-2 mg/kg. The Fixed Ratio had higher response rates, and had a higher ED50 between 2-2.5 mg/kg. Results suggest doses ranging from 0.6 3.0 mg/kg could be used in a future dosing regimen.

 
13. The sequential administration of drug abstinence contingencies: A method to promote polydrug abstinence
Area: BPH; Domain: Applied Research
AUGUST F. HOLTYN (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine), Anthony DeFulio (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine), Kenneth Silverman (Johns Hopkins University)
Abstract: We examined the sequential administration of employment-based abstinence contingencies as a method to promote polydrug abstinence among people who inject drugs. People who inject drugs were invited to work in the Therapeutic Workplace, a model employment-based program for drug addiction. Participants (n=33) could work for 4 hr every weekday for 30 weeks and earn about $10 per hr. During a 4-week induction, participants could work and earn maximum pay independent of their treatment status and drug use. After induction, access to the workplace was contingent on enrollment in methadone treatment. After participants met the methadone enrollment contingency for three weeks, participants had to provide opiate-negative urine samples to maintain maximum pay. After participants met those contingencies for three weeks, participants had to provide opiate- and cocaine-negative urine samples. The percentage of urine samples that were negative for opiates and cocaine remained stable until the abstinence reinforcement contingency for each drug was applied. The percentage of opiate- and cocaine-negative urine samples increased abruptly and significantly after the opiate and cocaine abstinence contingencies, respectively, were applied. Employment-based abstinence reinforcement can increase opiate and cocaine abstinence among people who inject drugs. The sequential administration of abstinence contingencies may be a viable method to address polydrug abuse.
 
14. Naltrexone but not baclofen treatment during abstinence attenuates reinstatement of alcohol self-administration in baboons
Area: BPH; Domain: Applied Research
AUGUST F. HOLTYN (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine), Barbara J. Kaminski (Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine), Elise Weerts (Johns Hopkins University)
Abstract: Alcoholism is a chronic, relapsing disorder with many individuals returning to alcohol abuse after detoxification and abstinence. Baclofen, a GABAB receptor antagonist, may be a viable medication to help prevent relapse. We examined whether baclofen and naltrexone (as a positive control) treatment initiated and maintained during alcohol abstinence would attenuate the increase in alcohol seeking and self-administration upon return to alcohol access (the alcohol deprivation effect or ADE) and decrease alcohol seeking and self-administration across the treatment period. Four baboons self-administered alcohol under a three-component chained schedule of reinforcement. Each component was associated with distinct stimuli and behavioral contingencies, which modeled periods of anticipation (Component 1), seeking (Component 2), and consumption (Component 3). No behavioral contingencies were in effect during Component 1. Responses in Component 2, required to gain access to Component 3, provided indices of seeking behavior. The opportunity to self-administer alcohol was only available in Component 3. Baclofen (0.1-1.8 mg/kg), naltrexone (1.0-5.6 mg/kg), or vehicle was administered daily beginning on Day 1 of a 5-day forced abstinence period and treatment was continued for 5 days of alcohol access (i.e., 10 days of treatment). Stable baseline self-administration was then reestablished and maintained for at least two weeks before the next treatment-abstinence period. When compared to vehicle, baclofen did not prevent ADE on Day 1 and did not reduce alcohol seeking or self-administration across the treatment period. In contrast, naltrexone attenuated ADE on Day 1 and reduced alcohol seeking and self-administration across treatment days. Although baclofen is under investigation as a potential alcohol use disorder treatment to prevent relapse, the present findings do not support the use of baclofen to reduce relapse to heavy drinking.
 
 
 
Poster Session #429
EAB Monday PM
Monday, May 25, 2015
7:00 PM–9:00 PM
Exhibit Hall C (CC)
15. Interval Timing in Zebrafish (Danio rerio)
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
KAZUCHIKA MANABE (Nihon University), Robert Dooling (University of Maryland), Matthew Roesch (University of Maryland), Shinichi Takaku (Nihon University)
Abstract: In Experiment1, six zebrafish were trained to approach a response target under three fixed interval reinforcement schedules (FI 20S, FI 40S and FI 60S; i.e., food delivered after a fixed time interval) and one variable interval schedule (VI 60S; i.e., food delivered after a variable interval). In FI schedules, post-reinforcement pause (PRP; i.e.,defined as the period of no response after reinforcement) increased as a function of the inter-reinforcement interval (IRI). The breakpoint where the response rate changed from lower rate state to higher rate state was also proportionally related to the IRI under FI schedules. Compared to FI schedules, shorter pauses and steady state responses were found in VI schedule. These results are similar to those described in other species, such as pigeons and rodents. In Experiment 2, interval timing of eleven zebrafish were examined using a peak procedure. In the peak procedure, sixty-second-probe trials were mixed with FI 20S trials. In the probe trials, no reinforcer was presented regardless of whether or not the fish responded. As in other species, some fish did show a response distribution peaking around 20S. These results suggest that zebrafish are sensitive to temporal cues within a range of interval timing.
 
16. Using a Microprocessor-Controller for Measures of Foraging Behavior by Free Roaming Eastern Fox Squirrels Sciurus niger
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
BRADY J. PHELPS (South Dakota State University), Chris Varnon (Oklahoma State University)
Abstract: Measures of the foraging behavior of free-roaming Eastern Fox Squirrels were obtained from feeders modified to include microswitches and interfaced with an automated microprocessor-controller. The apparatus enabled measures of feeding and foraging with two main behaviors: Lid Lifts and Platform Sits. The animals have to raise the lid of the feeder to access the food for a Lid Lift and sit on the front of the feeder, for a Platform Sit. With the automated apparatus, different behavioral dimensions could be assessed from early morning hours till sunset-dusk: the total number of Lid Lifts and total occurrences of Platform Sits, the total accumulated duration of each behavior, as well as the inter-response time for each behavior. The latency to the onset of the first recorded instance of either behavior is also able to be determined. Data collection began in early November 2014, on a daily basis. The response effort required to raise the lid of a feeder as well as the type and quality of the food-reinforcer were manipulated as independent variables.
 
17. Tracking the relation between fear and avoidance over time in humans.
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
SCOTT SOLOMON (University Of North Texas), Madonna L. Ludlum (University of North Texas), Adam Brewer (Texas Tech University), Sandy Magee (University of North Texas), David M. Richman (Texas Tech University), Simon Dymond (Swansea University), Michael W. Schlund (University of North Texas)
Abstract: Anxiety is characterized by chronic negative bias and avoidance. Many theories of anxiety propose that chronic avoidance is maintained by fear or perceived threat, such that cues predictive of aversive events elicit fear which in turn drives avoidance. However, few investigations have considered that the relationship between avoidance and fear (i.e., physiological measures of skin-conductance responses, SCRs) may change over time. To examine this issue, nineteen subjects underwent threat conditioning in which levels on a ‘threat meter’ (ranging from 1 to 10) were paired with increasing probabilities of money loss. Next, subjects completed an approach-avoidance task during three 10 min sessions where threat levels were individually presented and subjects chose between (a) earning 10 cents but facing a $1 loss at the current threat level or (b) reducing the threat level and avoiding loss entirely. We consistently found that increasing threat was associated with increasing avoidance and ratings of fear and loss expectancy. Most importantly, SCRs were initially greatest to low threats but declined over sessions---so fear declined while avoidance remained stable. These findings have considerable translational value by highlighting a dissociation between fear and avoidance which is at odds with many traditional perspectives of anxiety disorders.
 
18. Avoidance helps to preserve renewal of fear and threat in humans.
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
MADONNA L. LUDLUM (University of North Texas), Kay Kay McElwrath (University of North Texas), Scott Solomon (University Of North Texas), Sandy Magee (University of North Texas), Michael W. Schlund (University of North Texas)
Abstract: Many people who receive exposure-based treatments for anxiety disorders exhibit a return of fear (relapse). Research on fear conditioning (FC) and renewal have been instrumental in helping us understand relapse. In FC, pairing a cue (CS+) with an aversive event (shock) in context A elicits fear. When the CS+ is presented without shock in context B during extinction fear diminishes. Many studies have shown that subsequent reintroduction of the (now) CS- back in context A produces a ‘return of fear’. However, renewal tests under extinction are often brief and renewal can decline rapidly, which represents a significant challenge to explaining relapse. In this investigation, we examined the hypothesis that avoidance may play a central role in prolonging renewal. We employed a traditional ABA renewal paradigm but added contingencies to support approach and avoidance responding. A renewal test was performed by presenting extinguished CSs back in context A. Our results showed approach responses to CS-s and renewal (relapse) in the form of avoidance responses to CS+s in most subjects (13/16). These findings have considerable translational value by revealing how avoidance based coping in anxiety disorders may function to prolong renewal.
 
19. Is avoidance behavior reinforced by the stimuli it produces? An experimental comparison between individuals with low and high obsessive-compulsive behavior
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
Ioannis Angelakis (University of South Wales), CHARLOTTE SLATER (Swansea University)
Abstract:

Obsessive-Compulsive disorder is characterized by behaviors repetitive in character. These behaviors initially are strengthened due to the termination of aversive events. However, the appearance of these behaviors can persist even after long periods where the presentation of aversive events have ceased. This phenomenon often is attributed to the termination of dysfunctional thoughts. The present study provides additional support of the two-factor theory with the addition of a third factor that of safety signals, which postulates that avoidance behavior also is reinforced by the production of safety periods. In a simulated game, four participants with high levels of obsessive-compulsive behavior (OCB) learned to avoid losing treasure by pressing a pedal, which produced a period free of punishers together with a blue sidebar. Next, they were exposed to two conditions where they were given either stable blue or yellow sidebars, while pedal depression changed the sidebar to the opposite color. Results showed that blue and yellow sidebars maintained pedal depression. These results were compared with the results of six participants with low OCB. Participants with high OCB were unable to discriminate between experimental conditions retaining stable pedal pressing in both conditions. The clinical implications of these findings are discussed.

 
20. Effects of Feedback Intervention on Smartphone Usage
Area: EAB; Domain: Applied Research
Hyunji Choi (Yonsei University), KYONG-MEE CHUNG (Yonsei University), Uichin Lee (KAIST (Korea Advanced Institute of Science and Tec), Junehwa Song (Korea Advanced Institute of Science and Technology)
Abstract: Smartphone overuse becomes important social issue, but its effective intervention has not been well established. Feedback intervention has been shown effective in treating addiction problems, yet its usage as an intervention to reduce smartphone overuse has not been examined. The study 1 examined the feedback program 1, smartphone application that shows smartphone usage time and frequency when it is implemented by users. For this experiment, 76 Korean undergraduates were recruited. After 2 weeks of baseline period, experimental group used the feedback program 1 for 4 weeks and control group didn’t. Their smartphone usage was compared by weeks using ANCOVA(analysis of covariance), controlling usage of baseline period. As a result, no significant difference was found in their smartphone usage time and frequency. The study 2 examined feedback program 2, which is smartphone application that notices usage time for every 10 minutes, and frequency of mobile messenger use for every 10 times automatically. For this experiment, 53 Korean undergraduates were recruited and the methods and the way of analysis were same as study 1. As a result, experimental group showed less smartphone usage time at 1st, and 2nd weeks than control group. No significant difference was found in mobile messenger usage frequency.
 
21. Reinforced Behavioral Variability is Resistant to Change Under Extinction and Reinstatement
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
ANN GALIZIO (Utah State University), Jonathan E. Friedel (Utah State University), Brooke Smith (Utah State University), Charles Frye (Utah State University), Sarah McIntyre (Utah State University), Amy Odum (Utah State University)
Abstract: Twelve pigeons emitted four-peck sequences across two keys (e.g., LRRL) under a multiple schedule with two components. One component operated on a variability (lag-10) contingency (VARY component), in which a sequence was reinforced with food only if it differed from the previous ten trials. In the other component, reinforcers were delivered on a yoked schedule (YOKE component) using the probability of reinforcement from the preceding VARY component. After this baseline phase, responding in both components was extinguished. The final phase was reinstatement (response-independent food delivery at the beginning of each component). In extinction, responding in both components was disrupted and the number of trials emitted was reduced dramatically. Trial emission returned to baseline levels in the reinstatement phase. The probability of meeting a lag-10 contingency was used as our primary measure of variability (Neuringer, Kornell, & Olufs, 2001). Levels of behavioral variability in the VARY component were higher than in the YOKE component for all conditions, showing that the variability contingency was effective. Levels of behavioral variability were largely unaffected by extinction and reinstatement, consistent with previous studies showing that behavioral variability is difficult to disrupt (e.g., Doughty & Lattal, 2001; Odum, Ward, Barnes, & Burke, 2006).
 
22. Exploring Methods by Which to Study Sensitization and Habituation in the Madagascar Hissing Cockroach
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
JACOB APLAND (Saint Cloud State University), Mary Halbur (Saint Cloud State University), Lisa Weyer (Saint Cloud State University), Benjamin N. Witts (St. Cloud State University)
Abstract: A series of trials were conducted to evaluate putative startle-eliciting stimulus in the Madagascar Hissing Cockroach. In addition, an evaluation of potentially measurable startle responses resulting from exposure to putative eliciting stimulus was conducted. The resulting experiment using these findings consisted of the application of alternating tactile stimulation to the midsection of three adult male Madagascar Hissing Cockroaches, and measuring startle response through observation of potential turning or shifting reactions. Habituation was evaluated through measurement of the persistence of startle responses elicited by alternating tactile stimulation delivered every 30 seconds. Sensitization was evaluated by means of altering the background conditions of two of the cockroaches, and comparing inter-subject differences in delay to habituation with a control cockroach that remained in the same condition across all trials. The results suggest 80 dB background noise reduced relative time to habituation compared to control, and therefore was an inefficient means of producing a sensitization effect. Altering the environment across trials increased the relative time to habituation compared to control, which suggests this condition caused a sensitization effect. The implications of these findings to potential future research with invertebrates are discussed.
 
23. An Evaluation of Characteristic Responses to Putative Aversive Stimuli in Madagascar Hissing Cockroaches Gromphadorhina portentosa
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
MARY HALBUR (Saint Cloud State University), Jacob Apland (Saint Cloud State University), Lisa Weyer (Saint Cloud State University), James Heys (Saint Cloud State University), Benjamin N. Witts (Saint Cloud State University)
Abstract: Conditions of escape and avoidance are frequently used in basic research demonstrations. However, little is known on how Madagascar Hissing Cockroaches respond to putative aversive stimuli. The present experiments investigated characteristic responses to cold and warm water mists and pressurized air pulses as putative aversive stimuli in 3 male and 2 female Madagascar Hissing Cockroaches in an effort to build a taxonomy of potential escape/avoidance responses to use for research. Cockroaches received sprays of cold or warm water within experiment 1 and pulses of compressed air in experiment 2. Results from experiment 1 suggest that more escape responses occur in the first half of session when cold water is an aversive stimulus, and a subsequent phase indicated that warm water mists produced greater escape responses over an entire session as compared to cold water. Experiment 2 demonstrated that the effect of compressed air pulses into a sealed apparatus with only one hole produced a curl motion from the MHC, whereas in an unsealed apparatus with more holes a curl motion does not occur. These findings indicate that behavioral research shows possible invertebrate species-specific defense reactions to aversive stimuli, as well as behavioral differences in escape behavior across conditions.
 
24. Conditioning an Orienting Response in Madagascar Hissing Cockroaches to aid in Visual Stimulus Discrimination Tasks
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
JAMES HEYS (St Cloud State University), Elizabeth Harri-Dennis (St Cloud State University), Marie Erickson (St Cloud State University), Benjamin N. Witts (St Cloud State University)
Abstract: The purpose of the current study was to establish a conditioned orienting response towards the presentation of a 10% sucrose solution with two male Madagascar Hissing Cockroaches Gromphadorhina portentosa that were found to have a preference for the reinforcer. It was then determined whether or not two male subjects would be able to discriminate between left and right turns in a T-Maze in the presence of two alternating visual discriminative stimuli; red and blue colors of light. Over the course of all conducted discrimination trials subject G engaged in 48.27% correct selection and subject H engaged in 10% correct selection. Based on the results of this study it can be concluded that given the provided conditions that the male gender of the species was unable to discriminate between two different colors of light. However, the limited number of discrimination sessions may suggest that the behavior may take a larger number of sessions to master.
 
25. Extinction and Reinstatement of Side Preference in the Madagascar Hissing Cockroach Gromphandorhina portenosa
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
TRISTA LINN (St. Cloud State University), Mary Halbur (St. Cloud State University), James Heys (St. Cloud State University)
Abstract: The present experiment evaluated the preference for dark or light conditions for a Madagascar Hissing Cockroach Gromphandorhina portenosa, the effects of extinction when the preferred lighting condition was removed and of reinstatement when that condition was reinstated prior to each trial. An initial phase found that there was no side turning preference in a brightly lit T-maze which was followed by a phase that demonstrated preference for the darkened goal arm. Subsequent phases included repeating the condition of the first phase to evaluate the rate of responding during extinction and finally priming the holding chamber with the preferred, darkened, condition. The results of this study suggest that the cockroach showed a preference for dark over light conditions and when the darkened goal arm was removed, responding to the goal arm that was the previous location of the preferred condition decreased below levels demonstrated in the first and second phases. Finally, when the holding chamber was primed, responding to the previously reinforcing arm increased to levels near those demonstrated in the second phase.
 
26. Affordable Custom Research Equipment Using 3D Printers and the Propeller Experiment Controller
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
CHRIS VARNON (Oklahoma State University), Christopher Dinges (Oklahoma State University), Charles I. Abramson (Oklahoma State University)
Abstract: A common theme throughout research in learning and behavior is the need for experimental equipment. Unfortunately, commercial equipment is often expensive and primarily focuses on only the most popular species and paradigms. When specialized equipment is required, 3D printed devices may be a practical solution. A second major requirement of behavioral research is systems to automate experiments. Again, commercial equipment can be expensive and limiting. Fortunately, modern microcontrollers, such as the Parallax Propeller, are powerful yet affordable devices that can control equipment and collect data in a variety of research paradigms. We designed the Propeller Experiment Controller software around the capabilities of the Propeller and the needs of behavioral researchers. Together, 3D printed equipment and the Propeller Experiment Controller make research with non-traditional species or methods an affordable possibility. This presentation will provide an overview of the 3D printing process, from model development to the final printed product. We will discuss some specific examples useful for behavioral research such as pigeon hopper feeders, syringe pumps, and infrared beam-break response devices. We will also provide an overview of the capabilities of the Propeller Experiment Controller and how it can be used with 3D printed equipment.
 
27. Conditioned Approach Response to Scent in Madagascar Hissing Cockroaches Gromphadorhina portentosa
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
ELIZABETH HARRI-DENNIS (St. Cloud State University), Benjamin N. Witts (St. Cloud State University), James Heys (St. Cloud State University)
Abstract: The purpose of this study was to determine if preference for scent could be conditioned with only an appetitive US in the Madagascar Hissing Cockroach (MHC) and measured by a conditioned approach response. Previous studies (Balderrama, 1980; Watanabe & Mizunami, 2006) have demonstrated differential conditioning in the cockroach, however none of these studies can conclusively demonstrate responding to a CS+ alone. By demonstrating sufficient incentive salience for the US prior to conditioning, reversing initial scent preference through a delay conditioning procedure with one scent and leaving the other unpaired, and implementing a reversal of the conditioning procedure, control over responding can be demonstrated. The motivating properties of the US potentially influenced increased preference for the CS+, but limited controls and excessive handling of the subjects confounded results. Potential future studies including further exploration of excitatory unconditioned stimuli, and confounding properties of neutral stimuli are discussed.
 
28. Super-Resurgence: ABA Renewal Increases Resurgence
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
TYLER NIGHBOR (West Virginia University), Stephanie L. Kincaid (West Virginia University), Jacob Spence (West Virginia University), Kennon Andy Lattal (West Virginia University)
Abstract: Previously extinguished operant responding recurs under both resurgence and renewal procedures, but the effects of combining these procedures on recurrence has not been studied. Because renewal and resurgence are known to independently produce response recurrence, we hypothesized that more resurgence would be observed if the resurgence procedure was combined with an ABA renewal procedure, relative to a resurgence procedure without contextual changes. Three pigeons were exposed to a concurrent resurgence procedure in which key colors served as contextual stimuli. In the Training phase, reinforcement for pecking two keys was scheduled on concurrent variable-interval (VI) 120-s VI 120-s schedules, each correlated with different key colors. In the Alternative Reinforcement phase, reinforcement occurred when neither key was pecked for 20 s (a differential-reinforcement-of-other-behavior [DRO] 20-s schedule). During this phase, one of the key colors was changed (ABA key), while the other key color remained constant (AAA key). In the third phase, reinforcement was not provided and the color of the ABA key was changed back to the color in effect during Training while the same color remained in effect on the other key. Greater resurgence occurred on the ABA renewal key, showing that a superimposed ABA renewal procedure can increase resurgence.
 
29. Headbanging by Pigeons: III. Extension of an Animal Model of Psychopathology
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
Darin Casler (Northern Michigan University), Alex Schlee (Northern Michigan University), PAUL THOMAS THOMAS ANDRONIS (Northern Michigan University)
Abstract: Headbanging is a self-injurious behavior commonly associated with many forms of developmental and personality disorders, and major mental illnesses. Accordingly, Layng, Andronis, & Goldiamond (1997) demonstrated that such behavior in pigeons could be established, maintained, and otherwise modified as operant behavior, not very different from keypecking, lever-pressing, treadle-pressing, or other commonplace behaviors typically regarded as “normal.” These findings were systematically replicated by Hahn (2010). The present work extends the findings of those studies to include a history of behavioral contingencies involving only conditioned reinforcement of headbanging, during both establishment and maintenance of the behavior, strengthening the heuristic value of this animal model for the study of self-injurious behavior. Three experimentally naïve White Carneax pigeons were trained to bang their heads against a chamber wall equipped with a sensor grid that registered instances of the behavior and brought them into contact with experimentally arranged contingencies of reinforcement. The current study demonstrated control by a contingency in which headbangs produced only change in a discriminative stimulus associated with a response-independent VT schedule of food delivery.
 
30. Effects of Varied Reinforcement on Responding and Resistance to Change: Comparing Complementary and Substitute Reinforcers
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
Alma López (National Autonomous University of Mexico), ALEJANDRA LERDO DE TEJADA (National Autonomous University of Mexico), ALICIA ROCA (National Autonomous University of Mexico)
Abstract: In applied research it has been suggested that delivering varied reinforcers is effective to maintain target behaviors. Although using varied reinforcers is a common practice, there are few studies in which the effects of varied and constant reinforcers were compared, and the findings are mixed. Such mixed results could have resulted from the interactions among the stimuli used as reinforcers, particularly if the reinforcers were complements or substitutes. The analysis of the literature suggests that varied reinforcement is effective if the reinforcers serve as complements. The effects of varied versus constant reinforcers on responding and resistance to change were compared in the present study. Four children were exposed to a multiple schedule of reinforcement fixed ratio (FR) 10 FR 10. During the first component, responses on a button resulted in the delivery of one constant reinforcer and during the second component responses resulted in varied reinforcers. In successive conditions, complementary or substitute reinforcers were used. Each condition was followed by three distraction sessions (resistance to change tests). During both conditions, responding maintained by varied reinforcers was lower but more resistant to change than responding maintained by constant reinforcers. The findings are discussed in terms of their implications for behavioral interventions.
 
31. Resurgence of Chicks’ Key-Peck Responses Reinforced by either an Imprinted Stimulus or Food
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
SATOSHI OBATA (Tokiwa University), Lisa Kazama (Tokiwa University), Tetsumi Moriyama (Tokiwa University)
Abstract: Resurgence is defined as reoccurrence of previously reinforced behavior when recently reinforced behavior was extinguished. The present study investigated whether resurgence could occur for newly hatched chicks’ operant behaviors reinforced by either an imprinted stimulus or food. Ten chicks were imprinted to a moving cylinder after hatching. After the imprinting, their key-peck responses were shaped in a two-key operant chamber by using either the imprinted stimulus or food as a reinforcer. After the shaping, we studied resurgence in the following order; reinforcement, alternative reinforcement, and resurgence phases. At the first reinforcement phase, the chicks must peck only the left key according to VI 3-s for either food or the imprinted stimulus as a reinforcer. At the second alternative reinforcement phase, they must respond only the right key according to the same schedule as that in the first phase for each reinforcer. At the third phase, all chicks’ responses to both keys were extinguished. Although all chicks whose responses were reinforced by food showed clear resurgence of the first key peck responses in the third phase, only some chicks for the imprinted stimulus did so. The reinforcing properties of the imprinted stimulus may be different from those of food.
 
32. Water Deprivation as a Motivating Operation for the Osmoregulatory Behavior of the Red Claw Crayfish, Cherax Quadricarinatus
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
CALEB STANLEY (Southern Illinois University), Jordan Belisle (Southern Illinois University), Kelti Owens (Southern Illinois University), Alexis Washa (Southern Illinois University), Mark R. Dixon (Southern Illinois University)
Abstract: Osmoregulatory behaviors involve the movement of an organism across osmotic mediums to maintain a relative state a cellular homeostasis. The purpose of the present study was to evaluate the effect of an establishing operation in the form of water deprivation on the osmoregulatory behavior of the red claw crayfish (Cherax quadricarinatus) across varying lengths of a one arm maze. There was a decrease in time to complete the maze as time spent out of the maze was parametrically increased, and this effect was observed at maze lengths of 2” (F (1,28) = 18.57, p < .001), 12” (F (1,28) = 4.60, p = .041), and 24” (F (1,28) = 6.93, p = .014). The effect was observed across crayfish, and a logarithmic regression model provided a good fit for the data. In addition, longer maze lengths led to greater rates of responding (F (2,1) = 5.32, p = .022), which is in line with an economic prediction of responding over successive response requirements.
 
33. Percentile Schedule Select for Long Inter-Response Times at the Expense of Rate of Reinforcement
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
ERIC JAMES FRENCH (Central Michigan University), Mark P. Reilly (Central Michigan University)
Abstract:

The purpose of the current study was to train Sprague-Dawley rats to tolerate increasing inter-response times (IRTs) using a percentile schedule. This procedure employed a percentile schedule to differentially reinforce longer intervals between a left response and right response. At the beginning of a trial the left stimulus light illuminated. A left response extinguished the left light, began the interval timer and illuminated the right light. A right response would then extinguish the right light, terminate the timer and either result in a reinforcer or a 2-s blackout. If the interval satisfied the criterion arranged by the percentile schedule (i.e., longer than six of the last eleven trails) a reinforcer was produced immediately following the right lever press. Inter-response times systematically increased for all subjects. However, three rats continued responding on the left lever into the target interval despite the responses having no programmed consequence. These data suggest that rats are learning to produce longer left-right IRTs at the expense of a concomitant decreased reinforcer rate. Additionally, an analysis of the post-reinforcer pauses (time prior to first left response) indicated that despite the systematic increase in inter-response times, the post-reinforcement pauses (PRPs) remained relatively constant -- suggesting little induction between the target IRT and the PRP.

 
34. Time Effects on the Recovery of Learning the Response of Pressure Bar in Old Rats
Area: EAB; Domain: Basic Research
LUANA ANGÏ¿½LICA JANOTA DE CARVALHO (Universidade Metodista de Sao Paulo), Adriana Rubio (Universidade Metodista de Sao Paulo), Thalma Ariane Freitas (Universidade Metodista de Sao Paulo)
Abstract: Recent studies have shown that there is an increase in aging time of motor response due to structural and functional modifications of the organism. The aim of this study was to investigate the effects of time on site reconnaissance and resurgence of an ancient learning in adult and old rats. Seventeen male rats were used in the experiment divided into three groups: Senile (12 m), Adult (9 m) and Young (6 m). All animals were subjected to procedures of modeling and reinforcement of lever press. Following the acquisition of response, the animal was kept in a vivarium until the expiration of the time for replacement of the animal box (time determined according to the group). Fifteen of seventeen animals showed recognition of the site and had the response taught elapsed after six, nine and twelve months. The two rats that did not show the response were due the adult group, in which the animals were six months without experimental manipulation. Can conclude that, independent of time, the learned response resurge in any situation that is conducive to the occurrence of this animal to answer since there is recognition of the location and the response has been well reinforced at the time of acquisition.
 
35. Task-Engagement of Children in an Individualized Teaching Program for Reading with and without Additional Consequences
Area: EAB; Domain: Applied Research
DHAYANA VEIGA (Federal University of São Carlos), Deisy das Graças De Souza (Universidade Federal de Sao Carlos)
Abstract: The individualized teaching program Learning to Read and Write in Small Steps has been systematically developed and successfully applied with thousands of children in Brazil. However, anecdotal observations identified eventual lack of engagement of children throughout the program. The purpose of the present analysis was to describe task-engagement across the routines of the Program under two conditions: 1) Standard-Procedure (7 participants): sound effects and praise used as consequences for correct responding; 2) Token-Procedure (6 participants): points added to a counter combined with standard consequences in correct trials; points were exchanged for video access at the end of session. Participants were 3rd and 4th grades non-reader students (9 boys, 4 girls) from a public elementary school, aged 8 to 10 years. Each participant was observed (10-second partial interval recording procedure) in five randomly selected sessions. The target behaviors were children’s On-Task and Off-Task, and experimenter’s Task Assistance and On-Task Request. Under both procedures, all participants systematically engaged in the teaching tasks and most of them required very few interventions from the experimenter. Off-task behaviors occurred intermittently and apparently did not interfere with task performance; those behaviors seemed to be mostly an artifact of the discrete-trial procedure structure, occasioned by intertrial interval.
 
 
 
Poster Session #430
CBM Monday PM
Monday, May 25, 2015
7:00 PM–9:00 PM
Exhibit Hall C (CC)
36. Development and Validation of a Measure of Religious and Spiritual Flexibility
Area: CBM; Domain: Basic Research
Taylor Lincoln (University of North Texas), Daniel Steinberg (University of North Texas), ETHAN LESTER (University of North Texas), Amy Murrell (University of North Texas)
Abstract: Prescriptive and proscriptive elements of religion often suggest how a life ought to be lived in order to avoid difficulties - both in the here and now, and following death. Multiple studies show, however, negative consequences of rule-following in an overly rigid manner (e.g. Worthington & Sandage, 2001; Worthington et al., 1996; Rose, Westefeld, & Ansley, 2001). The current study sought to develop and validate a measure of religious and spiritual flexibility. Using suggestions by Devellis (2003), an initial 53-item measure of religious and spiritual flexibility (the MRSF; Schmalz & Murrell, 2013) was developed. The 53-item MRSF and measures theorized as similar to and discrepant from it were completed in an online survey format by undergraduate participants (N = 654) at a large university in the southcentral United States. After an initial exploratory factor analysis indicated a single factor was the best fit, a confirmatory factor analysis yielded a 6-item single factor structure with adequate absolute fit (RMSEA = .10). Convergent and discriminant validity, as well as clinical and scholarly implications for the measure’s use, will be discussed.
 
37. The Role of Experiential Avoidance and Aspects of Trauma
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
ERIN HOGAN (University of North Texas), Sarah Pepper (Veterans Affairs, North Texas Healthcare System), Daniel Steinberg (University of North Texas), Amy Murrell (University of North Texas)
Abstract: Research suggests experiential avoidance (EA), or efforts to avoid, dismiss, or change experiences such as emotions, overt behaviors and thoughts, can be problematic in multiple ways (Hayes et al., 2004).While the role of EA after traumatic events has been documented in the development of psychopathology, (e.g., PTSD; Jakupcak & Tull, 2005) the specific role of EA to aspects of trauma are still unclear. The current study aimed to further understand and broaden the knowledge of the role of EA in regard to trauma, substance abuse, aggression, and impulsivity by examining EA as a mediator and a moderator. Substance abuse, as well as aggression and impulsivity, were related to higher levels of EA among college students (N = 360) who participated in the study via online survey. EA was found to partially mediate the relationship between the number of traumatic experiences and PTSD symptoms, (β = .255; p < .001) as well as between substance abuse and PTSD, (β = .098; p < .05). EA was found to moderate the relationship between PTSD symptoms and aggression, (R2 = .31, p < .001). Implications of these findings, as well as differences in types of avoidance, will be discussed.
 
38. Stretching our Understanding: The Relationships Among Two Types of Flexibility and Psychological Symptoms
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
Rawya Al-Jabari (University of North Texas), TERESA HULSEY (University of North Texas), Melissa L. Connally (University of North Texas), Erin Hogan (University of North Texas), Amy Murrell (University of North Texas)
Abstract: Various forms of psychopathology are related to limitations of flexibility in response to one’s environment (Kashdan & Rottenberg, 2010). Two possible types of flexibility are psychological flexibility and cognitive flexibility. Psychological flexibility refers to a stance toward emotional experiences; psychologically flexible individuals tend to be willing to experience and accept their emotions and related thoughts. They are often present-moment focused (Kashdan & Rottenberg, 2010). Cognitive flexibility refers to fluidity in problem solving and related tasks (O’Keefe & Delia, 1982). Neither the relationship between psychological and cognitive flexibility, nor their relationships with psychological outcomes, had been investigated prior to this study. A sample of 82 undergraduate students completed self-report measures of psychological flexibility (Avoidance and Fusion Questionnaire for Youth, AFQ-Y, Greco, Murrell, & Coyne 2005), cognitive flexibility (Candle Task, Dunker, 1945), and psychological symptoms (Symptom Checklist-90-R, SCL-90-R, Derogatis, 1994). Results indicated that psychological flexibility (r = -.58, p < 0.001) and cognitive flexibility (r = -.24, p < 0.05) were negatively correlated with psychological symptoms. Additionally, psychological flexibility was found to be a better predictor of psychological symptoms than cognitive flexibility (z = - 2.67, p < 0.01). Implications regarding the relationship between psychological and cognitive flexibility, and their roles as negative predictors of psychological symptomatology will be discussed.
 
39. An Examination of Cognitive Fusion in Hispanic Indivduals
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
LOUELYNN ONATO (University of Texas-Pan American), Maureen Flynn (University of Texas-Pan American)
Abstract: Cognitive fusion refers to a tendency to be over-regulated and influenced by thoughts. Acceptance and Commitment Therapy (ACT) uses interventions that target cognitive fusion so individuals have greater choice in their behavior. Cognitive defusion is one of 6 core processes in ACT theorized to increase psychological flexibility, which in turn mediates treatment outcomes. In predominately Caucasian samples from the United Kingdom, cognitive fusion, as measured by the Cognitive Fusion Questionnaire (CFQ), was associated with variables such as job satisfaction, depression, and thought control. The CFQ also aided in the prediction of psychological distress above and beyond general psychological flexibility and rumination. The purpose of the current study was to examine cognitive fusion and the psychometrics of the CFQ in Hispanic individuals. Participants consisted of Hispanic undergraduates at a university on the Texas/Mexico border. Higher cognitive fusion was negatively associated with life satisfaction and mindfulness, and positively associated with measures of distress, automatic negative thoughts, strategies aimed at controlling cognitions, and psychological inflexibility. The CFQ also significantly added to the prediction of psychological distress over and above general psychological flexibility, mindfulness, and thought suppression but not to the prediction of life satisfaction.
 
40. The Role of Weight-related Psychological Flexibility in Disordered Eating Among Hispanic Individuals
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
MARINA IBARRA (University of Texas-Pan American), Maureen Flynn (University of Texas-Pan American)
Abstract: There is a growing amount of evidence suggesting that psychological flexibility influences a variety of psychological difficulties, including obesity. The Acceptance and Action Questionnaire for Weight-Related Difficulties (AAQ-W) is a measure psychological flexibility for weight-related issues specifically. Previous studies have shown that the AAQ-W is psychometrically sound and has mediated treatment outcomes. Weight-related flexibility has yet to be studied using in Hispanic populations. The purpose of the current study was to examine weight-related flexibility and the psychometrics of the AAQ-W in a Hispanic sample. Hispanic undergraduate students from a university on the Texas/Mexico border completed a battery of web-based assessments. Weight-related inflexibility was significantly associated with greater levels of depression, bulimic behaviors, general psychological inflexibility, emotional eating, and concerns about eating, body shape, and weight (p < .01 for all). Additionally, weight-related inflexibility was significantly related to lower levels of mindfulness and obesity-related quality of life (p < .01 for all). No associations were found between weight-related inflexibility and sex, body mass index (BMI), or self-reported physical activity. Weight-related flexibility also added to the prediction of bulimic behaviors, dieting, and obesity-related wellbeing above and beyond BMI, general psychological flexibility, mindfulness, and depression (p < .01 for all models)
 
41. Cultural Applicability of Psychological Flexibility: An Examination of the Construct Among Hispanic College Students
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
TRISHA MALDONADO (The University of Texas - Pan American), Maureen Flynn (The University of Texas - Pan American)
Abstract: General psychological flexibility has been linked with a wide-range of psychological difficulties such as depression, anxiety, and lower quality of life in clinical and nonclinical samples (e.g., college students). General psychological flexibility and the measure typically used to assess psychological flexibility, the Acceptance and Action Questionnaire-II (AAQ-II), have not yet been examined using Hispanic samples. The aim of the current study was to examine psychological flexibility in Hispanic college students. Consistent with previous studies, the AAQ-II fit a one-factor structure but different method effects had to be used. The AAQ-II also had excellent internal consistency and good test-retest reliability. High psychological inflexibility was associated with higher symptoms of depression, anxiety, and stress and lower levels of life satisfaction and mindfulness, demonstrating good concurrent validity. The AAQ-II added to prediction of satisfaction with life above and beyond measures of mindfulness but did not add in the prediction of psychological distress. The current study provides initial evidence that psychological flexibility may be a useful construct for Hispanic individuals and that the AAQ-II may be a valid and reliable measure of psychological flexibility in Hispanic college students.
 
42. The Role of Psychological Flexibility in Disordered Eating Among Hispanic Individuals
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
LEONILO GONZALEZ (University of Texas - Pan American ), Denisse Carreon (University of Texas - Pan American ), Ana Ramirez (University of Texas Pan American), Maureen Flynn (University of Texas Pan American)
Abstract:

Body image flexibility, as measured by the Body Image-Acceptance and Action Questionnaire (BI-AAQ), has been shown to uniquely predict disordered eating and moderate the relationship between body image dissatisfaction and disordered eating. Hispanics are underrepresented in this research, however, despite having similar levels of body dissatisfaction as Caucasians. The aims of this study were to examine the psychometrics of the BI-AAQ and the role of body image flexibility in disordered eating among Hispanic college students. Results indicate the BI-AAQ has a one-factor structure and good internal consistency and concurrent validity. Although body image flexibility did not uniquely predict disordered eating after controlling for sex, BMI, body image dissatisfaction, and general psychological flexibility, it did moderate the relationship between body image dissatisfaction and food preoccupation/bulimia. These results suggest that greater body image flexibility may be a protective factor against the deleterious relationship between body image dissatisfaction and food preoccupation/bulimia in Hispanic college students.

 
43. Living Well: An Examination of a Values Writing Intervention for Promoting Healthy Living in a Hispanic Sample
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
VALERIA HERRERA (University of Texas - Pan American), Maureen Flynn (University of Texas - Pan American)
Abstract: A growing body of literature demonstrates that ACT interventions have been beneficial for weight loss and behaviors related to healthy living (e.g., Forman, Butryn, Hoffman, & Herbert, 2009; Goodwin, Forman, Herbert, Butryn, & Ledley, 2012). To date, there are no published studies examining ACT's effectiveness in this area using a Hispanic sample. Mexican Americans (40.4%) and Hispanics (39.1%) have higher obesity rates compared with non-Hispanic whites (34.3%; Flegal, Carroll, Kit, & Ogden, 2012). This study aimed to contribute to literature by examining the effectiveness of a brief, online values writing intervention aimed at promoting healthy living related behaviors (i.e., physical activity, eating, and sleep) in a Hispanic sample. One hundred twenty-two Hispanic undergraduates were randomized to receive the values condition or a control condition. Two weeks following the intervention, participants in the values condition reported making significantly more positive changes to their eating and sleep behavior and being more satisfied with their eating and sleep behavior than those in the control condition. This study suggests that having people write about their values may help promote healthy living-related behaviors.
 
44. An Examination of Physical Activity-Related Acceptance as a Predictor of Exercise in Hispanic College Students
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
DENISSE CARREON (University of Texas - Pan American ), Leonilo Gonzalez (University of Texas - Pan American ), Maureen Flynn (University of Texas Pan American)
Abstract:

Engaging in exercise has been shown to have many positive physical and mental health benefits, yet only 25% of Americans engage in the recommended amount. The acceptance of discomfort related to exercise, as measured by the Physical Activity Acceptance Questionnaire (PAAQ), has been associated with higher levels of exercise. The purpose of the current study was to examine physical activity-related acceptance and the psychometrics of the PAAQ in Hispanic individuals because no published study has examined this yet. Participants consisted of Hispanic undergraduates from a university on the Texas/Mexico border. Results showed that physical activity-related acceptance was significantly correlated with higher levels of vigorous exercise and obesity-related wellbeing and fewer identified barriers to exercise (p < .05 for all). The PAAQ was not significantly associated with body mass index (BMI), moderate physical activity, general experiential avoidance, depression, or mindfulness. Physical activity-related acceptance added to the prediction of vigorous exercise above and beyond BMI, general experiential avoidance, mindfulness, and depression (p < .001). These results suggest that physical activity-related acceptance plays a role in engaging in vigorous exercises and it may be beneficial for future studies to examine interventions with components targeting physical activity-related acceptance.

 
45. Correlation between Self-Esteem and Psychological Flexibility
Area: CBM; Domain: Basic Research
ELIINA NOVAMO (University of North Texas), Taylor Lincoln (University of North Texas), Nina Laurenzo (University of North Texas), Rawya Al-Jabari (Student at University of North Texas), Amy Murrell (University of North Texas)
Abstract: Prior to the current study, the relationship between psychological flexibility and self-esteem had not been examined. However, there was research that suggested a relationship between avoidance coping, a component of low psychological flexibility, and self-esteem (Dykman, 1998). In addition, there was research that using defusion to increase psychological flexibility decreased negative thinking about the self (Hinton & Gaynor, 2010). The present study directly explored the relationship between psychological flexibility and self-esteem. The study included 82 undergraduate psychology students who were administered the Avoidance and Fusion Questionnaire for Youth (AFQ-Y) and the Rosenberg Self-Esteem Scale (RSES). A Pearson’s product moment correlation was conducted between the total scores of the AFQ-Y and the RSES (r = -0.60, p = < 0.001). The results suggest a negative relationship, indicating that those with lower self-esteem reported higher psychological flexibility or vice-versa. The findings of the current study will be discussed and suggestions for further research on psychological flexibility and self-esteem will be provided.
 
46. Evaluating efficacy of Behavior Analytic Therapy in adults.
Area: CBM; Domain: Applied Research
ADSSON MAGALHAES (University of Sao Paulo), Katie E Treu (La Universidad Veracruzana), Martha Hübner (University of Sao Paulo)
Abstract:

Functional Analytic Psychotherapy (FAP) is a therapeutic intervention based in the Behavior Analysis that focuses on the functional relationships of individual behaviors. It creates conditions for the individuals? modification and expansion of their behavioral repertoires, solving their complaints and alleviating their suffering. FAP works with the individual behaviors that occur during the sessions, denominated clinically relevant behaviors (CRBs). This study aimed to evaluate the use of FAP in patients from an outpatient clinic at the University Hospital at the University of S?o Paulo. Nine adults patients were treated (mean=34.8 years; SD=10.4) for eight months. Their behavior changes were evaluated every four weeks with the behavioral inventories of Adult Self-Report (ASR) and Adult Behavior Check-List (ABCL) and changes in indicators of depression and anxiety with the Beck Depression Inventory and Beck Anxiety Inventory, respectively . It was also assessed the quality of life (WHOQOL-brief), the general health status (General Health Questionnaire) and medication adherence (Morisky-Green Test). All sessions were recorded for the measurement of CRBs. The statistical analysis was performed with the SPSS (Statistical Package for Social Science). As we expected, previews analysis shown an improving in quality of life and decreasing of indicators of depression and anxiety behaviors.

 
47. Individual Differences in Behavior Excesses as a Function of Parent and Older Adolescent Experiential Avoidance
Area: CBM; Domain: Theory
MEAGHAN LEWIS (Western Michigan University), Tamara Loverich (Eastern Michigan University)
Abstract: A common research finding is the observation that problematic behaviors co-occur and may serve a common function despite differences in form. As such, researchers are adopting a focus on factors that may explain propensity to engage in multiple problematic behaviors. One proposed framework pertains to experiential avoidance. Factor-analytic research has demonstrated greater experiential avoidance predicts excessive engagement in problematic behaviors and relationships among topographically dissimilar problematic behaviors (Kingston et al., 2010). This research group found that experiential avoidance explained covariation between aggression, deliberate self-harm, internet overuse, sexual promiscuity, binge eating, restrictive eating, substance use, nicotine use, alcohol use, and excessive exercise. These results suggest that a number of problem behaviors, regardless of form, could be explained as a result of a unifying functional pathway. The present study sought to further this hypothesis through investigating different forms of experiential avoidance in the recently validated Multidimensional Experiential Avoidance Questionnaire (MEAQ) as well as the Acceptance and Action Questionnaire-II (AAQ-II) as predictors of engagement in the aforementioned problematic behaviors among a sample of parents and their older adolescents. Overall, the AAQ-II was the strongest predictor of engagement in problematic behavior for both parents and their older adolescents. Interestingly, differences in form of experiential avoidance emerged on the MEAQ in strengthening the predictive model to problematic behaviors. Experiential avoidance was a stronger predictor of problematic behaviors for parents than it was for their older adolescents. Results suggest learning history for adopting an experientially avoidant response style may strengthen as history of reinforcement evolves.
 
48. Taking ABA to "Mainstream" Users: Robustly "Harnessing the 'Gifts' " of ADD/ADHD by Systematically Using the "Antecedent/Behavior/Consequence" Paradigm Within an Applied Behavioral Medicine Framework
Area: CBM; Domain: Service Delivery
RICHARD COOK (Penn State)
Abstract: Applied Behavior Analysis is ideally suited for helping to develop behavior change in the child or adult diagnosed with ADD/ADHD, yet most so diagnosed never encounter true behavioral approaches that systematically utilize these powerful principles. Some clinicians never bother to ensure the patient with ADHD has a wristwatch or a daily calendar. Factors can be physiological, environmental, social, and vary in the time of most effective impact. This paper highlights a plethora of such basic infrastructural elements which can have an impact, if the clinician is mindful of them, including approaches to assess the sensitive issue of the use, or even obviate the use, of medications within the context of other aspects of an individuals situation. This paper presents the use of an Antecedent/Behavior/Consequence paradigm to highlight within each of those areas concepts and factors to address, serving as an objective platform to remind therapist, patient, and parent alike that typical ADHD treatment as implemented by most practitioners fails to consider many of these factors and potential interventions, thus preventing the dramatic behavior change made more likely by a robust, balanced palate of A, B, and C interventions, methodically derived, objectively reevaluated, and continuously revised, as applied behavior analysts are trained to do routinely, and well. The majority of the clinicians treating ADD/ADHD patients by definition do not have the applied behavioral background, and as a result simply fail to identify and address many potential factors, the adjustment of which could have major impacts in habits developed and behaviors emitted. Patients therefore rarely get the systematic evaluation which is done daily by behavior analysts for other clinical diagnoses, and thus have a treatment plan that typically is narrowly focused on one or two modalities, as opposed to one methodically identifying areas of intervention and implementing changes within multiple domains of the patient's life. As ABA claims to want to apply these powerful principals to more mainstream applications, ADD is clearly one of those areas, well suited for ABA. Applied behavior analysts can, and arguably, should, be the leaders in applying ABA to the ABCs for ADD! This paper highlights general techniques, and arguably, responsibilities, for doing so to the benefit of patients, practitioners, and the discipline of ABA itself.
 
 
 
Poster Session #431
OBM Monday PM
Monday, May 25, 2015
7:00 PM–9:00 PM
Exhibit Hall C (CC)
49. Precision Teaching via eLearning:A Comparison of the Efficacy of 2 Evidence Based Teaching Methods Against a Traditional Training in a Classroom of 20 Blue-collar Workers
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
Alessandro Valdina (AARBA), FABIO TOSOLIN (AARBA), Gaia Arrigotti (AARBA), Maria Gatti (AARBA), Paola Silva (AARBA)
Abstract:

Precision Teaching is a method widely experimented with clear evidences of advantages for trainees. The present experiment aims to confirm its superior efficacy against traditional training in the teaching of technical contents: the experiment compares the learning occurred in 2 groups of 10 people under 2 different experimental/control conditions. Assessment: 20 students (unemployed Spanish workers from 20 to 50 years old) underwent a pre-test about 2 subjects: 1) recognition of wood types, their family and color: 36 questions; 2) recognition of varnishing defects, related likely cause and solution: 27 questions. Researchers split 20 students in 2 groups with similar average in accuracy in the 2 tests. Results: In the 1st experiment, students in the experimental group, trained with hour of PT via eLearning about varnishing defects, learnt averagely about 2X in terms both of accuracy and fluency against the control group, trained with a classical lessons supported with slides and pictures held by an expert technician. Accuracy improve averagely of 12.2 correct answer in the PT group, against the 6.0 in the traditional training group (27 questions). In the 2nd experiments, the control group followed a frontal lesson about wood recognition made of choral responding: the technician provided pictures and questions to students by following some training paradigm as shaping, fading, and chaining (in 2 words, programmed instruction). The exercises were identical to the one provided in PT via eLearning. The results show that PT via eLearning is slightly more effective than the choral responding. The experiment has been conducted within the Tell Me project, a wide innovation program financed by European Commission.

 
50. Research Assistants. Curse or Blessing?
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
MARLIES HAGGE (Western Michigan University), Joshua Turske (Western Michigan University), Mark Daly (Western Michigan University), Ron Van Houten (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: Research assistants are a vital part of every experimental research and play many roles in literature reviews and other aspects of a smooth running laboratory. Their roles vary in regards to tasks, responsibility depending on their experience. Recruiting, managing and mentoring undergraduate and graduate research assistants takes up substantial amount of time from graduate students or professors, yet is crucial for success in research. This poster will discuss how to approach and organize these tasks and suggests handy tools to minimize effort and challenges. Creating a research assistant system and applying process design tools as well as performance management is crucial in accomplishing major research undertakings with a large number of students. The benefits and challenges of working with a large number of research assistants are discussed. These topics are presented based on a case study in which 30+ undergraduate research assistants have assisted with data collection and analysis for a dissertation project on Behavior Based Safety.
 
51. Data Collection and Management Solutions. Incorporating technology and templates into the data process.
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
MARLIES HAGGE (Western Michigan University), Kellie Skiba (Western Michigan University), Kelsey Haverkamp (Western Michigan University), Ron Van Houten (Western Michigan University)
Abstract: Collecting, organizing and analyzing data are essential for the evaluation of data driven experiments. Data collection can be facilitated by using means of technology such as applications or website forms that can easily be accessed remotely via the internet. This electronic data collection has its advantages in providing interactive, adaptive and guided data collection and immediate analysis tools. Possible disadvantages lie in the availability and functionality of programs including false security of data reliability. Organizing the data and in-depth analysis of large data samples can be aided by excel templates and research assistants, but the human factor and potential error is a continuum that remains present. Reliability between the original and the manipulated data is a crucial component in ensuring accurate data analysis. These challenges and opportunities are discussed based on a case study in which 30+ undergraduate research assistants have assisted with data collection and analysis for a dissertation project on Behavior Based Safety.
 
52. The Beginning Phases of a Program in Organization Behavioral Management
Area: OBM; Domain: Theory
NADIA ASHOUR (University of Nevada, Reno), Norah Al-Subaie (university of Nevada, Reno), Molli Luke (University of Nevada, Reno)
Abstract: The effectiveness and maintenance of an organizational behavior management (OBM) program or intervention, has shown to be not only dependent upon the intervention but also upon other aspects of the program development, such as involving staff in the design and having staff implementing the program (Siggurdson & Austin, 2006). Similarly, Redmon (1991), articulated a concern with the lack of emphasis on the early phases of organizational behavior management consulting, which he termed the “entry” and “organizational entry” phases. Although both articles pointed to the value of these early phases in successful interventions, there is still a focus in the OBM research on the implement phase of an intervention and little focus or evaluation is conducted on the work conducted prior the implementation. Therefore, this poster will highlight the importance of research on these early phases, discuss the research that has been conducted thus far, and develop an outline of these phases as a means for future research.
 
53. Promotion of accurate narrative A-B-C recording by staff in a Japanese children’s home
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
GINGA SASAKI (University of Tsukuba), Fumiyuki Noro (University of Tsukuba)
Abstract: It is an important issue to implement accurate descriptive analysis that develops effective intervention plans for children. In the present study, we evaluated the accuracy of narrative A-B-C recording for children’s support targets by staff in a Japanese children’s home. We used the data tool that recorded in narrative A-B-C formats and automatically displayed in the pop-up window for the definitions of A-B-C recording during the baseline. As the intervention for the accuracy of A-B-C recording, we conducted on-the-job training that classified the statements for children’s support targets by staff into three items of A-B-C recording during the monthly meetings. Result, the accuracy of “Behavior” was low during the baseline, and then the accuracy of all items for A-B-C recording improved during the intervention. The accuracy decreased, however, when the children’s support targets were changed. Therefore, our findings showed that the effects were different according to the characters of support targets that were recorded, though the classification of the statements for children’s support targets was effective for improving the accuracy of narrative A-B-C recording.
 
54. A Survey of Staff Training and Performance Management Practices: The Good, The Bad, and The Ugly
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
AMY J. HENLEY (The University of Kansas), Florence D. DiGennaro Reed (University of Kansas)
Abstract: Research has shown that important consumer outcomes (e.g., quality of life, Jahr, 1998; consumer engagement, Szczech, 2008) may be compromised when staff receive poor training and insufficient performance management practices, underscoring the importance of ensuring that direct-care staff are well-trained. A host of empirically supported training and performance management practices exist, however, the extent to which organizations adopt these practices is unknown. This study documented staff and supervisory training and performance management procedures offered to 382 Behavior Analysis Certification Board® certificants and aspirants working in applied settings who responded to an anonymous online survey. Participants were asked questions regarding demographic information, pre-service training, ongoing training, the use of incentives, and if applicable, supervisory training. Notably, only 54.71% of respondents indicated they received an initial orientation or training before working independently, a majority (71%) indicated their current place of employment offers ongoing training, roughly 25% indicated their employer offers incentives, and 66.30% of respondents reported their employer did not provide training about effective supervision practices. Identifying practices adopted by organizations may inform ways to address the research-to-practice gap and possibly stimulate research to tackle the real-world needs of practitioners.
 
55. An Evaluation of Pyramidal Training to Teach Implementation of the Picture Exchange Communication System
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
NICOLE MARTOCCHIO (University of Massachusetts Lowell), Rocio Rosales (University of Massachusetts Lowell)
Abstract: Pyramidal training is a method of teaching in which one experienced professional teaches a skill to a group of individuals, who then teach that skill to another group of individuals. This model has been successfully used to teach parents, teachers, and direct care staff to use behavioral procedures including the implementation of preference assessments, functional analyses, and specific behavioral intervention programs. The purpose of the present study was to extend the application of pyramidal training to teaching the implementation of the first four phases of the Picture Exchange Communication System (PECS) to university students. Eight graduate and undergraduate students comprised three tiers of our pyramidal training model. We used a multiple baseline across participants design (Tier 1 and 2) and a non-concurrent multiple baseline design (Tier 3) to demonstrate the efficacy of this model. Results indicate that pyramidal training is an effective method to teach implementation of PECS. To demonstrate reliability of our results, interobserver agreement data was collected and an overall mean agreement of 92% (range, 60-100%) was obtained. Implications of our results and suggestions for future work will be discussed. Keywords: pyramidal training, picture exchange communication system, university students, behavioral skills training
 
56. Training and Event-Related Factors Affect Observer Error When Using an Interval Sampling Method
Area: OBM; Domain: Applied Research
MATTHEW A. TAYLOR (The National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention), Oliver Wirth (The National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention)
Abstract: Observation-based interval sampling methods are commonly used to estimate duration of a target event; however, it is unclear to what extent the observer introduces error into the estimates by scoring events incorrectly. In the current study, participants used computer software (Praxis PinPoint) to score video material using a momentary-time sampling procedure with 30-s intervals. During each interval, participants were shown body segments (e.g., knee, elbow, neck, or wrist) in ergonomic postures that were defined as either safe or at-risk. Variations in the postures were quantified in degrees of joint angles, which allowed for a fine-grained assessment of observer error (i.e., incorrect classification of safe and at-risk postures). Observer error was assessed across two levels of training: minimal and rigorous. With minimal training, participants were simply shown a diagram of the safe and at-risk zones of posture. With rigorous training, participants were required to classify many examples across the range of safe and at-risk postures with 100% accuracy. Observer error was also assessed across other factors, such as range of motion and joint angles associated with the postures, how close the target postures appeared to the observer, and the duration of the target postures. Findings show that observer error was consistently greatest with minimal training and when differences in joint angles were small. Additional findings will be reported and discussed. Overall, the results suggest that observer error was most affected by training and event-related factors that made discrimination difficult.
 
 
 
Poster Session #432
EDC Monday PM
Monday, May 25, 2015
7:00 PM–9:00 PM
Exhibit Hall C (CC)
57. Comparison of two modes of handwriting to decrease self-injurious behavior maintained by negative reinforcement
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
RYAN FARMER (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Med), Patrick Romani (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Med), Amanda Zangrillo (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Medical Center)
Abstract: Writing is a cornerstone of academic behavior, and thus academic success. For an 11-year-old child, handwriting via traditional pen and paper evoked high-risk self-injury maintained by negative reinforcement. The purpose of this evaluation was to evaluate whether an alternative method for producing a written permanent product (i.e., an iPad touch-typing app) would result in higher item completion and lower rates of problem behavior. In order to mediate the potential risk of the assessment, a replacement behavior was taught as a rule and practiced prior to baseline; 95% of all problem behavior recorded matched the topography of the replacement behavior, thus mitigating the risk of the assessment. An ABAB reversal design in conjunction with a concurrent operant comparison of pen and paper versus iPad writing demonstrated the effectiveness of the iPad as a writing tool for the participant. Item completion rates were nearly 100% during all iPad sessions, while 100% of problem behavior recording during the course of the assessment occurred during handwriting via pen and paper sessions. Discussion will focus on use of the reversal and concurrent operants design as a viable method for evaluating the effectiveness of treatment components and school-based recommendations.
 
58. The Effectiveness of Direct Instruction in Teaching Students with ASD to Answer "Wh-" Questions
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
JESSICA CADETTE (Florida Atlantic University)
Abstract: Teachers of students with autism spectrum disorders (ASD) often struggle to find effective instructional methods to use with their students on a daily basis. The characteristic verbal, social, and behavioral limitations of children with ASD make finding effective teaching methods difficult. Though some intensive intervention methods, such as discrete trial teaching (DTT), have numerous studies demonstrating their effectiveness with students with ASD, the required one-on-one format makes it impractical to use in a classroom setting on a regular basis. Direct Instruction (DI) appears in the literature as a promising intervention for students with developmental disabilities. One benefit of DI is that, unlike DTT and similar interventions, it can be implemented in a group format. This group format provides a practical alternative for classroom teachers to use with their students with ASD. This study utilized a multiple probe across behaviors design to further investigate the use of DI to teach high school students with ASD how to answer “wh-” questions. The researcher used the SRA Reading Mastery language program, which is a DI program designed to develop language skills. Three high school students with ASD participated in instructional sessions four times a week for approximately 25 minutes each session. Data were collected on the each participant’s accuracy in answering “wh-” questions during baseline, acquisition (teaching), and maintenance conditions. The results indicate that DI was effective in helping participants acquire the language skills necessary to accurately respond to “what”, “where”, and “who” questions.
 
59. Preference for and behavior during computer-based versus paper-pencil based activities in children with autism spectrum disorders (ASD)
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
REBECCA BEIGHTS (Texas Tech University - Burkhart Center for Autism Education and Research), Jennifer K. Gilbert (Texas Tech University), Adam Brewer (Florida Institute of Technology), Wesley H. Dotson (Texas Tech University - Burkhart Center for Autism Education and Research)
Abstract: As technology-based instructional methods become more present in academic programming for students with autism spectrum disorders (ASD), researchers are called upon to examine the effectiveness of these methods over “treatment as usual” or traditional educational strategies. Computer-based activities represent one technology-based method with an emerging empirical base; however, the majority of peer-reviewed studies on computer-based studies focus on limited dependent variables of interest without direct comparison to another instructional method (e.g., Bosseler & Massaro, 2003; de Bruin, Deppeler, Moore, & Diamond, 2013; Everhart, Alber-Morgan, & Park, 2011; Moore & Calvert, 2000; Ramdoss et al., 2011). The current study expands the computer-based literature base with a comprehensive examination of four dependent variables relevant to how children with ASD interact with instructional materials. Accuracy, engagement (i.e., on-task behavior), rate of completion, and preference were evaluated using a within-subjects treatment design. Eight school-age participants with ASD completed mathematics problems via both computer and paper-pencil worksheet conditions. Results illustrated differences in computer-based and worksheet conditions that appeared slightly counter-intuitive, particularly data regarding accuracy and preference. Given the results, future directions for technology-based instruction should aim to clarify the effective components of computer-based methodology, including factors related to technology, feedback, learner functioning, and subject domain.
 
60. An Adapted Shared Reading Program Implemented in Inclusive Pre-School Classrooms
Area: EDC; Domain: Service Delivery
ANDREA GOLLOHER (UC Berkeley/San Francisco State)
Abstract:

The Pathways to Literacy reading program (Lee, Mims, & Browder, 2011) is a task-analytic approach to addressing engagement, comprehension, and communication during shared reading for students with exceptional needs. Previous research on Pathways to Literacy has been limited to students in segregated elementary classrooms rather than preschool classrooms, which is when shared reading is usually emphasized. The program has been heavily critiqued due to the lack of generalization data available, with critics claiming students would be unable to engage with new books. The current study adds to the literature by investigating the use of the reading program in inclusive preschool settings. Three questions were addressed. First, using a multiple baseline design, the question of whether the reading program remained effective for preschool students in inclusive classrooms was asked. Second, teachers? perceptions of the reading program were explored through pre- and post-intervention interviews. Finally, generalization to new books was investigated. Results suggest the reading program was effective in increasing engagement, comprehension, and communication for the targeted students. Social validity data suggest the teachers found the procedures were generally appropriate for preschool students, although they did recommend changes to the protocol. Finally, all participants generalized their new skills to new books.

 
61. Comparison of Video Modeling Intensity in Multi-disability Classrooms
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
MARIA GILMOUR (Wynne Solutions)
Abstract: The current survey study examines different intensity levels of video modeling in the classroom to teach language to pre-school aged students with disabilities. Thirty-one students from five multi-disability classrooms were included in the case study. Assessors measured baseline language skills through individual probes of words that were the targets presented in the video modeling program during intervention. The teachers presented the video modeling program using low, medium or high intensity levels characterized by the length of time and frequency of video viewings, repetition of targets, and adult assistance during viewings. Results suggest that all procedures promote language skill acquisition. Results also indicate that the high intensity classes made the most gains and further analyses of these practices are warranted for systematic measurement of the effects.
 
62. Autism Spectrum Disorder and Transition to Full Inclusion: Josh’s Case Study
Area: EDC; Domain: Service Delivery
MELINDA GRIFFIN (STEPS Center for Excellence in Autism), Jacqueline Sura (Steps Center for Excellence in Autism), Sadaf Ameen (STEPS Center for Excellence in Autism)
Abstract: Numerous federal laws such as the Americans with Disabilities Act (1990), the Individuals with Disabilities Education Act (1990), and the No Child Left Behind Act (2001), have emphasized the importance of full inclusion. Full inclusion occurs when students with disabilities receive the services and supports appropriate to their individual needs within the general education environment. In this case study we will describe the transition of Josh, currently a 13 year old boy diagnosed with Autism Spectrum Disorder, in a general education classroom at Academy of St. Adalbert in Berea, Ohio, since the age of 9. From year one till year four (present), Josh has manifested a decline in problem behaviors (aggression to self and others, removal of clothing, noncompliance, elopement, throwing items), and is fully included in all subject classes, lunch, and recess, other than Reading and Math. The interventions used included visual supports like “Mind the Gap” that detailed the choices available to Josh and the consequences each choice would produce; non-contingent gross motor breaks throughout the day, token board with response cost; and a visual 5-point scale which helped him stay focused and regulate his emotions. We will describe all relevant interventions and modifications used for Josh year by year which assisted his smooth transition to be fully included in the general education classroom.
 
63. Implementing Direct Instruction curricula in a special education setting: Practical considerations and data trends
Area: EDC; Domain: Service Delivery
SHAWN BRYANT (Evergreen Center), Mark P. Groskreutz (Evergreen Center)
Abstract: Direct Instruction (DI) curriculum (e.g., language for learning) has a wealth of research studies demonstrating its effectiveness with the general population. Despite this success, there are substantially fewer examples of research or descriptions of DI used with individuals with moderate to profound disabilities (e.g., autism spectrum disorders). This study looks at the use of DI in a private, residential and day school for students with disabilities that currently uses 13 DI curricula administered by trained staff. Data will be presented on trends in student performance. Additionally, a review of the modifications that have been made to help students access the curriculum is presented. Finally, an overview of the training and treatment integrity systems will be provided. Data analysis will include mean sessions to mastery for each lesson. The examination of results will include discussion of student differences and DI progress, highlighting particular lessons or topics that require more time to master, and modifications that have been used to address common challenges.
 
64. Effect of Stimulus Pairing Procedure for Students with Intellectual Disabilities on Kanji Reading
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
WATARU NODA (Osaka Kyoiku University)
Abstract: In Japan, 4.5 % of students in regular classrooms have been reported to exhibit academic difficulty (Ministry of Education, Culture, Sports, Science & Technology, 2012). The present study examined the effect of stimulus pairing procedure (Omori & Yamamoto, 2013) for elementary school students with intellectual disabilities on the acquisition of Kanji reading. Two students with intellectual disabilities in Japanese 4th grade special education classroom participated in the study. The author used a multiple-probe design across three sets of materials for each student. Throughout the study, we measured the percentage of correct words. The author prepared stimulus pairs consisting of picture stimuli that the students could name along with a corresponding Kanji character that they could not read. Classroom teacher conducted the intervention in their class. During the stimulus pairing procedure, students saw each stimulus pair (Kanji character, a spoken word, and a picture). Each pair of stimuli was presented on the computer simultaneously, and all the stimulus pairs were presented successively. After finishing a stimulus pairing procedure, participants completed a Kanji reading test for the trained pairs. The results showed that students improved their Kanji reading. In addition, their Kanji reading skill maintained for one month.
 
65. Effects of Student Instruction when using Video Modeling Compared to Video Prompting for Adolescents with an Intellectual Disability
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
SALLY B SHEPLEY (The University of Georgia), Liliana Wagner (University of Georgia), Kevin Ayres (University of Georgia)
Abstract: Video based student-directed instruction can be classified as pivotal skill since the learner is not dependent on an additional instructor to acquire a skill, and the skill can produce collateral effects in untrained environments (Koegel, Koegel, Harrower, & Carter, 1999). This study evaluated the effects of video modeling (VM) and video prompting (VP) when presented as student-directed instruction on skill acquisition for four adolescent females with an intellectual disability. Throughout the study, the participants used an iPhone to self-instruct. During history training, they were taught to navigate the phone, view a video, and compete a novel task. An adapted alternating treatments design with baseline, comparison, replication, and best (if applicable) conditions was used to compare the two procedures. Results indicated that VP was more efficient for all of the participants, resulting in fewer trials-to-criterion in the comparison condition. The replication condition, in which the control skill received treatment, was followed by the best treatment condition, in which tasks previously taught with VM, were taught using student-directed VP. Implications for use with student-directed instruction and future research are presented.
 
66. Establishing Instructional Control Utilizing a Stimulus Stimulus Pairing Conditioning Procedure
Area: EDC; Domain: Applied Research
Matthew C. Howarth (Verbal Behavior Associates), Elizabeth Sarto (CABAS, Columbia University), KERRY UDO (Verbal Behavior Associates), Catherine E. Pope (Verbal Behavior Associates)
Abstract: A delayed pre- and post-probe design across participants was utilized in this study to assess the effectiveness of a stimulus-stimulus pairing procedure on the rate of acquisition for both Listener and Speaker skills in three students diagnosed with language and developmental delays. The study was conducted in each participant’s home environment within a major metropolitan area. Participants were selected after pre-intervention baseline measures indicated low rates of acquisition across bother Listener and Speaker skills. The dependent variable in this experiment was the rate of acquisition across Listener and Speaker skills. The independent variable in this study was the delivery of a stimulus-stimulus pairing procedure in the form of contingent vocal praise, edibles, tactile reinforcement, and play. The results for Participant A, B, & C are pending completion of the conjugate reinforcement intervention.
 
 
 
Poster Session #433
AUT Monday PM
Monday, May 25, 2015
7:00 PM–9:00 PM
Exhibit Hall C (CC)
67. Using Structural Analysis to Inform Peer Support Arrangements for Students with ASD
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
HEARTLEY B. HUBER (Vanderbilt University)
Abstract: Peer support arrangements have been shown to increase social interactions for students with autism, addressing needs related to a core deficit. In this study, we used an ABC within multiple-probe across participants design to examine the effectiveness of structural analysis (i.e., the systematic examination of environmental variables that may influence the likelihood of a behavior occurring) as a means of individualizing peer support arrangements for three students with ASD in general education high school classrooms. Peer support strategies involve arranging for one or more peers to provide ongoing social and academic support to their classmates with disabilities in a single inclusive classroom, after receiving initial orientation and ongoing guidance from school staff members who are also present the classroom. We used the structural analysis procedure to examine non-critical components of peer-support interventions (i.e., elements of the intervention that can be changed without affecting the fidelity of implementation), as a means of making data-based decisions for individualizing the intervention. Results of structural analyses for all three participants indicated a combination of variables that increased the likelihood of social interaction. Preliminary results indicate increases in social interaction and/or decreases in variability of social interactions for participants.
 
68. Getting to Group Instruction: Evaluating the ability of learners with autism to work in small groups
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
HELENA L. MAGUIRE (Melmark New England), Catherine Judkins (Melmark New England), Katrina Grandelski (Melmark New England)
Abstract: It is widely known that learners with autism do well with one on one instruction. However, the provision of one to one instruction on a long term basis is not efficient or realistic. Funding streams, particularly in adulthood, do not support this level of staffing. Furthermore, the ability to follow instructions delivered to a group is essential to successful integration in school, vocational, and community settings. An instructional protocol to assess a learner's performance in individual and group instruction was designed. Research focused on examining the learner's differential performance in individual and dyad learning situations with mastered skills as well as novel skills. Variables assessed included the ability to learn new material, levels of engagement in independent activities, rates of challenging behavior, and maintenance of mastered targets in individualized and group instructional arrangements. Initial data collected using this protocol demonstrates that a learner continued to learn novel skills while maintaining previously mastered skills in small group instruction. Data also demonstrates that the learner engaged in low level problem behavior while engaging in adaptive skills such as functional communication, leisure and waiting skills. Follow-up data will be demonstrated with a focus on the expansion of this protocol for larger periods of the instructional day.
 
69. Guidance for Autistic Children with Intellectual Disability to Play "Musical Chairs"
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
AYAKO OKA (Kwansei Gakuin University Graduate School of Humanities)
Abstract: Many autistic people with intellectual disabilities have problems with the maintenance of interaction.It is necessary in order to maintain interaction not only to transmit communication information, but to act in arrangement with the received communication information.I thought that guidance which used the procedure of conditional discrimination was effective, in order to act in arrangement with the received communication information.In this study, I used guidance to play the game “musical chairs” for autistic children with intellectual disabilities.The supporter stopped clearly as a discriminative stimulus and gave prompts by speaking to the participated children. Since the participated children liked the game “musical chairs”, they made an effort in order to continue the game sitting in a chair at the certain times.As a result, the participated children could sit in a chair spontaneously when the music stopped. In conclusion, I thought it is an effective guidance using the conditional discrimination to continue and maintain the interaction of autistic children with intellectual disability.
 
70. The Effects of a Self-Mangement Intervention on Academic Engagement for High School Students with ASD
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
GARRETT ROBERTS (The University Texas at Austin), Min Kim (East Tennessee State University), Briana Steelman (Bastrop High School), Colleen Reutebuch (The University of Texas at Austin), Gavin Watts (The University of Texas at Austin)
Abstract: Self-management is considered an emerging and effective evidence-based practice with strong effect sizes. It has been successful in improving social skills, independent work skills, student engagement, and social interactions. It has also been successfully implemented across both general education and special education settings. In this study, a multi-component self-management system was used in a special education classroom in a public high school with two students with autism spectrum disorder (ASD). An ABAB withdrawal design was used to assess whether a self-management and video modeling intervention could improve academic engaged time with the research question of: what is the effect of a multi-component self-management intervention on academic engaged time for two high school students with ASD? Results suggested that using self-management strategies improved high school students with ASD’s academic engaged time through measures of level, slope, variability, and immediacy of effect. Teacher social validity measures found the intervention feasible and beneficial. Implications from these findings suggest that the use of a multi-component intervention in a high school setting can both improve academic engaged time and be feasible to implement.
 
71. A Mother’s Views About Discrete Trial Teaching Who Has A Child with Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
YESIM GULEC-ASLAN (Sakarya University), Hande Cihan (Sakarya University)
Abstract: Discrete Trial Teaching (DTT) is an evidence-based method for teaching skills to children with autism spectrum disorder (ASD). In this poster presentation we are going to present the views of a mother about DTT, whose child diagnosed with autism. In this context we implemented DTT on the teaching of matching skills to a boy with autism and we made interviews with his mother during and after the implementation. In these interviews we gave information about the DTT implementation process and made her watch video records belong to this process. At the end, qualitative data gathered from the interviews were analysed descriptively. The results showed us according to the mother, her son learned matching skills quickly with DTT and her son’s problem behaviors diminished. Also she added that she found this method very usefull which she could implement at home by herself. Results were discussed in accordance with the literature.
 
72. Prompting Procedure Comparison: Most-to-Least, Least-to-Most, or Both?
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
CAILIN M OCKERT (The BISTÅ Center)
Abstract: This study compared most-to-least prompting, least-to-most prompting, and a criterion-based combination of the two procedures for teaching skills to children with autism. Using a parallel treatments design, experimenters taught receptive and expressive skills to participants using all three styles of prompting. Most-to-least prompting hierarchy consisted of an experimenter providing the most intrusive prompt when an error is made by the participant, and then systematically fading the intrusiveness of the prompt as the participant becomes more and more successful with the target response. Least-to-most prompting hierarchy consisted of an experimenter providing the least intrusive prompt when the participant errors, and then systematically increasing the intrusiveness of the prompts until a correct response is made. The criterion-based combination consisted of using most-to-least procedures until the participant reaches 70% accuracy with the target, and then using least-to-most until mastery criteria is met. Mastery criteria for all targets was set at 80% accuracy, or higher, for three successive sessions. Preliminary results indicated that the criterion-based combination prompting procedure is more effective in teaching acquisition targets to all participants. Results were compared for number of errors made per session, trials to mastery, maintenance of targets over time, and occurrence of problem behaviors.
 
73. Do students with autism spectrum disorders really need to spell repeatedly to learn new words?
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
MIKIMASA OMORI (The National Center of Neurology and Psychiatry), Masumi Inagaki (The National Center of Neurology and Psychiatry)
Abstract: Students with autism spectrum disorders (ASD) often show the spelling difficulties. Our previous research suggested that stimulus pairing procedure is effective for Japanese students with ASD to learn English words. However, we still do not know whether stimulus pairing procedure is more effective than repeated writing procedure. In this study, we examined which of two procedures would be easier for two students with ASD to learn new English words. A multiple-probe with alternative treatment design was used. During the baseline and probe, students spelled 12 English words when the corresponding Japanese word was presented. Training began with either of the procedures. In repeated writing procedure, students copied the six English words, which were presented on the paper with its representative picture. In the stimulus pairing procedure, six words stimulus pairs of the word, spoken sound, and picture were presented sequentially. Students were instructed to observe the presented stimuli. The results indicated that two students successfully learn the new English word through both procedures. However, both students showed faster learning and higher maintenance after stimulus pairing procedure than repeated writing. Results suggested that students with ASD can learn the English spelling not with writing repeatedly but with simply observing.
 
74. Teaching Young Children with Autism Spectrum Disorders ti Engage in Variations to Rigid Routines
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
JACKIE MOHLER (Family Outreach), Ann N. Garfinkle (University of Montana)
Abstract: Children with Autism Spectrum Disorders (ASD) by definition have deficits in the area of restricted repertoire. One aspect of a restricted repertoire is a strict adherence to routines and a difficulty moving away from routines. Further, parents and teaches report that this adherence to these routines restricts the child's ability to access novel and typical settings. Further, when attempting to move children away from these rigid routines, children often engage in challenging behavior. Despite the wide-spread existence of the challenges around inflexible routines and the importance of engaging in flexible behavior, there is a paucity of information about how to teach children with ASD to increase their flexibility while at the same time decreasing their challenging behavior. The present study identifies routines in which children with ASD are inflexible and then seeks to help children engage in a variation of that routine. Once the inflexible routine has been identified, variations of that routine are determined. For example, if the inflexible routine is that the only way the child will play with the ball is by throwing the ball, variations of the routine may be kicking the ball or bouncing the ball. Symbols for these routines are then attached to a 4-inch cube and the child is asked to toss the cube. No prompts other then the symbol on the cube were used. At baseline (no cube) children engaged in challenging behavior and non-compliance when asked to perform the variation to the rigid routine. In intervention (with the dice) children readily performed the variation to the routine and engaged in lower rates of challenging behavior. Inter-observer data were taken in both baseline and intervention and were across study phases, children and rigid routines. Additionally a pre- and post- measure on flexibility was performed as well as a video-based social validity measure. All measures indicate that the intervention is effective, and acceptable to consumers
 
75. Teaching a 10 year-old Boy with High-Functioning Autism to Plan Afterschool Activities
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
Kristin Wilkinson Smith Smith (Organization for Research and Learning), Angela Engbrecht (Organization for Research and Learning), MEAGHAN KEMP (O.R.L. Inc), Kelly J. Ferris (Organization for Research and Learning (ORL))
Abstract: Children with autism often display deficits in executive functioning (Bergh et. al, 2014), which causes difficulty when identifying the necessary components needed to complete a given task. These deficits often burden parents and caregivers with extra responsibilities or position them in the role of monitoring and reminding. The instructional team sought to liberate a parent from this responsibility as well as grant a young man the planning skills to increase his self-sufficiency. This poster will present data on an in-home instructional program designed to teach a ten-year-old boy with high-functioning autism to identify materials necessary to complete various tasks (for example, homework and personal routines) to promote greater independence during afterschool activities. The intervention employed fluency-based instruction: daily improvement goals combined with a differential reinforcement of higher rates of behavior (DRH) schedule. The poster will present progress data demonstrating skill acquisition across multiple tasks will be displayed on Standard Celeration Charts.
 
76. Evaluating Learner Preference for Discrete Trial Teaching versus Incidental Teaching
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
DESDALIN BLACK (Beacon ABA Services), John Claude Ward-Horner (Beacon ABA Services), Robert K. Ross (Beacon ABA Services)
Abstract: Previous research comparing discrete-trial teaching (DTT) with incidental teaching (IT) indicates that the former is more efficient and produces faster acquisition but the latter results in greater generalization. Both teaching methods however appear effective at improving student performance, regardless of their respective benefits. Some authors have suggested that learners with and without autism spectrum disorders (ASD) prefer more naturalistic settings for instruction. The current study used the concurrent chain paradigm to compare student preference for IT versus DTT. Results obtained across free choice sessions from four participants indicate that two participants demonstrated a preference for IT as compared to DTT. These results were not replicated in the forced choice condition. Two other participants demonstrated a stable preference for DTT across both assessment conditions. These data suggest that preference for one condition over another may be subject to histories of reinforcement with each condition and task rather than some variables that are inherent to the learner.
 
77. A Comparison of Two Assessments for Evaluating the Reinforcing Value of Tokens
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
ROBERT W. ISENHOWER (Douglass Developmental Disabilities Center, Rutgers University), Kate E. Fiske Massey Massey (Douglass Developmental Disabilities Center, Rutgers University), Meredith Bamond (Douglass Developmental Disabilities Center, Rutgers University), Lauren Alison Pepa (Douglas Develomental Disabilities Center, Rutgers University)
Abstract: Progressive-ratio (PR) schedules of reinforcement have been used to evaluate the potency of a reinforcer using successively higher ratio requirements. Critics note that the procedure is lengthy and may be aversive for some individuals (e.g. Poling, 2010). Smaby et al. (2007) describe a reinforcer assessment that rapidly alternates between extinction and reinforcement conditions to compare rates of responding. The extent to which these two reinforcer assessments achieve commensurate results, and the comparative efficiency of each, is unknown. In the current study, two students with autism participated in a full analysis of tokens and primary reinforcement using both a PR schedule (Roane et al., 2001) and the rapid reinforcer assessment (Smaby et al., 2007). For both students, the PR analyses indicated that primary reinforcement produced the highest rates of responding and that tokens were variably reinforcing. In contrast, for one student the rapid reinforcer assessment indicated that tokens were nearly as effective as primary reinforcement in maintaining high response rates. For the second student, tokens appeared to have a suppressive effect on responding. The rapid assessment was significantly faster to conduct than the PR schedule. Implications for the use of reinforcer assessments in clinical practice will be discussed.
 
78. Validity of the Dyadic Parent-Child Interaction Coding System for Children with Autism Spectrum Disorder
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
Kimberly Zlomke (University of South Alabama), GARET EDWARDS (University of South Alabama), Sarah Bauman (University of South Alabama)
Abstract:

Due to the specific symptomology associated with autism spectrum disorder (ASD), interactions between parents and children with ASD are often different than those of typically developing children. The Dyadic Parent-Child Interaction Coding System-III (DPICS-III; Eyberg, Nelson, Duke, Boggs, 2010) is a standardized observation system consisting of coded categories for observed verbal and physical behavior that occur during parent-child interactions. The DPICS-III is frequently used to assist clinicians in measuring treatment changes and progress in Parent-Child Interaction Therapy (PCIT). With the increased use of PCIT for children with ASD, empirical research is needed in order to determine the validity of the DPICS-III when used with this population. Participants for this study included 85 mother-child dyads (46 ASD, 39 Typical), who each completed the 20 minute DPICS-III interaction tasks. Frequencies of parent and child behavior as well as child compliance were collected during the structured observations. Significant differences on multiple categories were revealed with predominately moderate effect sizes (labeled praises, commands, questions, & criticisms). Results from the current study suggest that the DPICS-III demonstrates discriminative validity for typically developing children and children with ASD symptomology and future research on the DPICS with children with ASD is warranted.

 
80. Developing Eye Contact in a Child With Autism Using a Graduated Prompting Procedure
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
MELISSA KRABBE (University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee), Jeffrey H. Tiger (University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee)
Abstract: Eye contact is an important prerequisite for many early learner skills targeted in autism intervention, but there is surprisingly little research on how to teach this foundational skill. The current data set is a case study in which eye contact following a name call was taught using a novel, 6-step, graduated-prompting procedure with a child with autism who failed to develop eye-contact given exposure to previously established treatments (e.g., stimulus fading, shaping, positive practice overcorrection). Initially, the child required a full physical prompt to make eye contact. However, the stimulus control of the physical prompt was transferred to the calling of the participants name over the course of 28, 10-trial sessions.
 
81. Shaping Visual Regard in Children With Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
Gladys Williams (David Gregory School), KAREN J. CIHLAR (David Gregory School), Maria DeMauro (The David Gregory School), Maridsa Reyes (David Gregory School), Richard Laitinen (Educational and Developmental Therapies, Inc.)
Abstract: The purpose of this study was to analyze the effectiveness of a shaping procedure that incorporated joint attention as a main component of the training to increase visual regard. Three children with autism with ages ranging between three and five participated in this study. The initial probe indicated that all three students lacked visual regard and joint attention. During training we reinforced instances of eye contact where the learner looked at the instructor and then looked at the reinforcer in the instructor�s hand. We shaped gaze shifting with increments of one-second to three seconds and then generalized the skill to other instructors. The results indicated that visual regard was acquired with this specific shaping procedure. The results also indicated that some children may acquire the skill faster than other children.
 
82. Teaching Young Children with Autism to Respond to a "You Go There" Gesture
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
KARLYN GIBBS (The Child Development Center), Jamie Eff (Child Development Center), Jenny Vickhammer (Child Development Center), Ann N. Garfinkle (University of Montana)
Abstract: By definition, children diagnosed with Autism Spectrum Disorder (ASD) have deficits on social-communication skills. These deficits include a lack of understanding of understanding gestures. However, parents and teachers of young children frequently use gestures to communicate important information to children such as "stop", "come" and "you go there". Despite the core nature of the deficit in understanding of gestures and the common use of gestures used by people while communicating, there is a paucity of information about teaching young children diagnosed with ASD to attend to and understand the meaning or required response when presented with a gesture. The present study focuses on the "you go there" gesture, which consists of point at the child to communicate "you" and then pointing at a chair five feet from the child communicating "go there". Using a Constant Time Delay the children are prompted to the chair. Study data indicate that the children learn the skill quickly and are able to generalized the skill to novel targets (i.e., the chair in a new location, a place where there is no chair) and with novel interventionists. Additionally one children learn the skill, parents and teachers of the children report that the child can also perform the behavior in novel (untrained environments). Inter-observer agreement was taking in each phase with each child and was consistently high. A fidelity measure was also performed and was likewise high. Finally, several social-validity measure were conducted including a more traditional survey and a novel video-based approach. Social validity measures taken together suggest that parents and practitioners both agree that the intervention is effective, efficient and acceptable
 
83. Training Peer Models to Teach Social Skills to Children with Autism Spectrum Disorders
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
Therese L. Mathews (UNMC), Christopher Vatland (University of South Florida), Ashley Lugo (Munroe Meyer Institute), Elizabeth Koenig (Munroe Meyer Institute), SHAWN PATRICK GILROY (Rowan University, Temple University)
Abstract: Social skills training programs have increasingly enlisted typical, same-age peers as instructors in the teaching of social skills to children with an autism spectrum disorder (ASD). The inclusion of typical peers in the teaching process has been found to be a critical component in these programs, as skills taught and established by adults are unlikely to generalize to same-age peers without substantial training. Despite strong support for incorporating same-age peers in social skills programs, there are few guidelines for training same-age peers to implement these teaching procedures. The present study examined behavioral skills training with school-aged children implementing a Peer Model Education Curriculum with peers having an ASD. A multiple baseline design across behaviors research design was implemented using components of behavioral skills training to teach (a) initiating verbal interactions, (b) prompting for targeted skills, and (c) delivery of praise. The peer models quickly acquired the skill of initiating verbal interactions; however, posting of data, prompting, and additional contingencies were needed to maintain and generalize prompting for targeted skills and delivery of praise with novel children.
 
84. Mentoring for Children and Youth with Autism: Is Behavioral Mentoring a More Accurate Description?
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
JACK SCOTT (Florida Atlantic University), Melissa Stiksma (Florida Atlantic University), Darius Murray (Florida Atlantic University)
Abstract: Mentoring for youth with vulnerabilities is seen as a proactive approach to help promote success and avoid problems. In an organized mentoring program, carefully screened adults are recruited to work with youth. The Florida Atlantic University Center for Autism and Related Disabilities (CARD) has begun a mentoring program for youth with autism. A critical feature of this program are efforts to match the child with autism with an adult who shares the special interests of that youth. Mentoring is typically conceptualized within a framework of community psychology. However, it becomes apparent that behavior analytic principles and practices are not only common in such programs but also fundamental. Most obvious are the reliance on positive reinforcement, modeling to teach valuable skills and promote a positive long term vision for success, extinction on the part of the mentor to deal with digressive youth interests, and an understanding and, at times, manipulation of relevant motivational variables among others. In this poster we have analyzed the critical elements of quality mentoring programs and place them squarely within their proper behavior analytic context. We believe the vast majority of evidence-based and successful mentoring programs should most accurately be described as behavioral mentoring programs.
 
85. Post-Secondary Occupations Attained by Individuals in the Autism Spectrum Disorder
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
GLEIDES LOPES RIZZI (The Ohio State University), Bryan Droesch (Haugland Learning Center), Christina A. Rouse (Haugland Learning Center), Amanda Fishley (Haugland Learning Center)
Abstract: The current special education law (i.e., Individuals with Disabilities Education Improvement Act, 2004) mandates that transition services for individuals with disabilities to be in full effect by an individual’s sixteenth birthday. However, practitioners, teachers, and service providers have limited guidance related to the planning, program development, implementation, and outcomes of these transition plans for individuals with disabilities in the literature. For individuals with an Autism Spectrum Disorder, less data can be found regarding post-secondary transition efforts and results. The extent to which planning, programing, and implementation of transition services will be successful is dependent upon the understanding of how to best prepare these individuals for transition, which can only be achieved by identifying and evaluating the possible outcomes. The outcomes (e.g., occupation, employment, education) guide the transition programming. This study examines experimental research in which the dependent variable includes post-secondary outcomes (e.g., paid employment, unpaid volunteering, and paid or unpaid internship/trainingship) of transition services for youth with Autism Spectrum Disorder from 1997 to 2015 with the purpose of identifying channels to tailor unique transition programing to successful community opportunities and long term transition. Implications for practice and suggestions for future research are included.
 
86. The Use of Applications for Tablet to Teach Individuals with Autism: A Systematic Review
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
LUIZA GUIMARÃES (Universidade Federal de São Carlos), Vanessa Pereira-Ayres (Universidade Federal de São Carlos), Marlon Oliveira (Universidade Federal de São Carlos), João S. Carmo (Universidade Federal de São Carlos)
Abstract: Advances in technology have enabled not only the development of electronic devices such as Tablets (hardware), but also the development of applications (software) that can be used in educational programs. This study presents a systematic review that includes studies which uses applications (software) for Tablets to teach individuals with autism. The search was conducted in the databases: PubMed, PsycINFO, Web of Science, Scopus, Science Direct, and SAGE journals. The combinations of descriptors were "AUTISM" and "iPad" or "AUTISM" and "TABLET". We selected only empirical studies, in English, and which have participants diagnosed with Autism Spectrum Disorder. Information about the articles was submitted to analysis of agreement between observers. Seventeen articles were selected. The results showed that the first article that used applications for tablet to tech individuals with autism were published in 2012, two years after the first tablet. The following year, in 2013, that number rose up from three to ten studies. The researchers who published most in this period were JB Ganz and J. Sigaffos, both published four articles each other. In total, eight different journals published studies listed in this review and participants also included individuals with intellectual disability, multiple disabilities, complex needs of speech, speech delay, Asperger's Syndrome, and Hyperactivity Disorder. Nine of the 17 articles, report studies with children under 7 years old. Considering the method used to teach skills to individuals with autism, we found the follow strategy: (1) voice outputs as an alternative communication tool, (2) use of videos (video modeling), (3)visual cues and (4)comparative studies. The most frequent teaching strategy was the use of applications that provide voice outputs as an alternative communication tool to teach non-verbal individuals. The application that was more cited throughout the research was the Proloquo2Go, used in six articles. From the 17 articles found, nine had applications with voice outputs in education programs. Analyzing the results in terms of learning, ten studies showed positive results with reach of criteria for learning, and seven had mixed results.
 
87. Incorporating Specialized Interests Into Educational Interventions
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
ALICIA KOBYLECKY (Baylor University)
Abstract: Autism spectrum disorder (ASD) is characterized by difficulties with social interaction and restricted or repetitive behaviors. These restricted or repetitive behaviors can include the pursuit of specialized interests. Specialized interests are activities, objects, or themes with which individuals with ASD engage in an unusually focused or intense manner. A systematic search was conducted to identify studies that incorporated the specialized interests of children and adolescents with autism spectrum disorders into educational interventions focused on social skills or play skills. Results were analyzed in terms of (a) study design, (b) participant characteristics, (c) intervention setting, (d ) dependent variable, (e) method of determining special interest area, (f) independent variable, (g) measurement of social validity and (h) results. The majority of studies had positive findings and showed increases in social skills or play skills that were the focus of the intervention.
 
88. Visual Supports for Improving Transitions of Individuals with Autism Spectrum Disorders: A Review of Recent Literature
Area: AUT; Domain: Basic Research
Jeffrey Michael Chan (Northern Illinois University), Jessica Biller (Northern Illinois University), KAITLIN BROWN (Northern Illinois University)
Abstract: When transitioning from one activity to another, individuals with autism spectrum disorder (ASD) sometimes display off-task and/or challenging behaviors. The purpose of the current literature review was to analyze recent peer-reviewed journal articles (2010-present) that examined the use of visual supports to improve the transition behaviors of individuals with ASD. We included 5 articles in the review, and the following information was analyzed: participant characteristics, setting, intervention implementer, type of intervention, research design, and results. Additionally, we analyzed the inclusion of generalization, maintenance, treatment fidelity, and social validity data in all of the studies. Results of the synthesis indicate that a variety of intervention methods were utilized, including video modeling, video self-modeling, and picture schedule. Additional methods such as least-to-most prompting, DRO, and extinction were also used. Studies were conducted primarily in school environments with school-aged participants. Researchers reported positive results in 4 out of 5 studies. Implications for practice and future avenues for research will be discussed.
 
89. A Review of the Use of Functional Communication Training in Public Classroom Settings
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
SAMANTHA GUZ (Texas A&M), Mandy J. Rispoli (Texas A&M), Emily Gregori` (Texas A&M), Samantha Templeton (Texas A&M)
Abstract: Functional Communication Training (FCT) is a commonly implemented intervention aimed to improve the communication of children with autism spectrum disorder (ASD) while simultaneously decreasing challenging behavior. FCT is commonly implemented in public schools by a special educator instructor. Additionally, the majority of children with ASD enter the public school system and receive a large part of their behavioral treatment from the public school system. Thus, the purpose of this literature review is to reflect upon the effectiveness of FCT implemented in public schools, encourage future research involving the implementation of FCT in classrooms and provide educators with a systematic summary of how FCT is implemented in a classroom.
 
90. Autism Propaganda or Professional Conformity: Why do BCBAs use contemporary unsupported treatments?
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
YENUSHKA KARUNARATNE (Penn State Harrisburg), Kimberly A. Schreck (Penn State Harrisburg), Thomas L. Zane (Institute for Behavioral Studies, Endicott College), Heather Wilford (Penn State Harrisburg)
Abstract: As autism continues its rise, with the latest estimate being quoted as 1 in 68 (Baio, 2014), parents have been relying upon professionals to recommend the most effective treatment for their children. Historically, even professionals trained in scientifically supported treatments (i.e., Applied Behavior Analysis: ABA; NationalAutism Center, 2009) have been recommending non-scientifically supported treatments (Schreck & Mazur, 2008). This study replicated and extended Schreck & Mazur (2008) by surveying certified behavior analysts to determine what treatments (i.e., scientifically supported and non-scientifically supported) were used by BCBA-D’s (n=138), BCBA’s (n=646) and BCaBAs (n=66). Factors contributing to behavior analysts’ use of the treatments included media-based propaganda, a-priori beliefs about the treatments, and persuasion by colleagues, parents and instructors to conform. Self-report of reinforcers for using treatments (e.g., verbal praise, monetary gain, etc.) according to treatment support categories (i.e., established, emerging, unestablished, ineffective/harmful) indicated that behavior analysts may be partially influenced to continue to use both scientifically supported and non-scientifically supported treatments by the reinforcement they get from using them. Results indicated that behavior analysts continue to use a variety of non-scientifically supported treatments, including those that have been deemed ineffective and harmful to people with autism.
 
91. Teaching Identifying, Recording, Reporting the Occurrence of Novel Events with Adults with Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
MICHELLE MCDERMOTT (Temple University), Gregory S. MacDuff (Princeton Child Development Institute), Saul Axelrod (Temple University)
Abstract: Identifying and reporting novel events is an important life skill that improves the quality of interactions for individuals with Autism Spectrum Disorder. People with Autism Spectrum Disorder, who engage in this skill, may build significant professional relationships with their co-workers and instructors and more meaningful relationships with their family members by having more substantial conversations regarding relevant and interesting events that occur in their lives. A multiple-probe across-participants research design was used to investigate the effects of a treatment package that assessed the skills of three adults with Autism Spectrum Disorder in identifying, recording and reporting novel events. The participants ranged in age from 21-35 years, with a mental age of 8-3, 6-3, and 5-10 as determined by the Peabody Picture Vocabulary Test. The participants used a note, written after identifying the event, to respond to the question, How was your day? The treatment package consisted of a progressive time-delay procedure to implement scripts, manual prompts and a verbal prompt. All three participants quickly acquired the target skills and independently identified, recorded and reported the occurrence of novel events following intervention. The skills generalized across settings with conversation recipients who were not part of the teaching intervention.
 
94. Does the Tau Non-Overlap Effect Size Measure Up to Visually Analyzed Indicators?
Area: AUT; Domain: Theory
JENNIFER NINCI (Texas A&M University), Leslie Neely (Texas A&M University), Ee Rea Hong (Texas A&M University), Margot Boles (Texas A&M University), Whitney Gilliland (Texas A&M University), Jennifer Ganz (Texas A&M University), John Davis (Texas A&M University), Kimberly Vannest (Texas A&M University)
Abstract: Attention to methodological rigor in addition to the use of credible effect sizes is current state of the art in meta-analysis of single-case research. As the most widely accepted method for data interpretation of single-case research is visual analysis, validity of effect sizes can be gleaned by comparing them against indicators of visually analyzed evidence. In the context of a meta-analysis of single-case studies targeting functional living skills among individuals with autism spectrum disorder, this study evaluated convergent and divergent validity of visual analysis criteria with the Tau effect size by testing categorized ratings on visually analyzed evidence indicators as moderators. Rated indicators between phases corresponded with Tau, demonstrated by large and statistically significant discrepancies of effects between variables (i.e., presence versus absence of sufficiently low overlap and presence versus absence of overall effects). In analyses between three rated levels of experimental control, tests produced large and statistically significant discrepancies between both strong versus weak evidence and moderate versus weak evidence variables, but failed to produce disparate effects between moderate versus strong evidence. This study appears to be the first to analyze the validity of an effect size through determining convergence and divergence of it with various visually analyzed indicators.
 
95. Is Autism Caused by Innate or Early Acquired Difference in the Effectiveness of Social and Sensory Reinforcers?
Area: AUT; Domain: Theory
SVEIN EIKESETH (Oslo and Akershus University College), Lars Klintwall (Oslo and Akershus University College)
Abstract: The social deficits exhibited by children with autism has for some time been considered primary when attempting to understand the disorder. Recently, the social motivation hypothesis has been proposed positing that the autism is caused by an inborn lack of social motivation. Children without social motivation lack the incentives to acquire social skills such as joint attention, theory of mind, pretend play or pragmatic language. The social motivation hypothesis has been supported by recent research suggesting that children with autism show less interest in social stimuli as compared to typical children. A recent study showed that toddlers with autism as young as 14 months spent significantly more time looking at dynamic geometric images as compared to same aged children with developmental delay and typically developing children (Pierce et al., 2011). The latter children preferred looking at the social images. A limitation of the social motivation hypothesis is that social motivation is a construct that is difficult to measure and manipulate. Also, it is difficult to find neural correlates and a genetic basis for the postulated motivation deficit. We argue that the social motivation hypothesis can be phrased more precisely, by postulating that autism is caused by innate or early acquired differences in the effectiveness of certain reinforcers. In the study just described, the stimuli the children preferred locking at may have been reinforcers, and there may be differences in which type of stimuli that function as reinforcers for the behavior of autistic children compared to typically developing children. These reinforcers may be primary or early acquired, and they may explain why some children develop autistic behaviors and some typical behaviors. Also, research has demonstrated that primary reinforcers are genetically coded, and genetics together with other neurobiological factors is known to be the causes of autism. The slightest difference early on in life in this relative reinforcer strength may have cascading effects on the establishment of secondary reinforcers, and thus large effects on the subsequently developing behavioral repertoire. Given early detection of high-risk infants, a behavioral or pharmacological intervention targeting this core deficit in autism could potentially prevent some cases altogether.
 
96. Increasing Implementation of Effective Teaching: A Professional Development Model of Least-to-Most Supports for Special Educators
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
MEAGHAN MCCOLLOW (Central Michigan University), Carol Ann Davis (University of Washington)
Abstract: Professional development serves as means of transferring skills and knowledge to in-service educators (Reid, 2010) and of aiding practitioners in maintaining a current knowledge base (Grimes, Kurns, & Tilly, 2006; Jacobson, 1990). Much remains unanswered regarding how to enhance professional development and increase implementation of evidence-based practices in order to improve student outcomes (Guskey & Yoon, 2009; Odom, 2008). This study utilized a non-concurrent multi-element within a multiple-baseline across participants design to investigate the effects of a least-to-most system of supports for professional development to increase implementation of discrete trial training (DTT). Three special educators of young children with autism participated in the study. Results were varied across each participant but indicated a relationship between number of DTT components implemented, closed learn units (or teaching loops), and behavior-specific praise and the professional development activities (i.e., online module, self-monitoring, coaching). In addition, teachers reported the activities were informative and valuable.
 
97. Assessment and Treatment of Elopement in Young Children With Autism
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
IVETTE ANDRADE (University of Texas - Pan American), Zina A. Eluri (The University of Texas-Pan American)
Abstract: Elopement, leaving a caregivers side without permission or supervision, is a behavior that is more prevalent among children with autism as compared to their typically developing peers. With potentially fatal consequences (e.g., drowning, being run over, abducted), it is reported to cause high levels of stress for caregivers. In the present study, the assessment and treatment of elopement is evaluated using a multicomponent treatment package to address the multiple functions of elopement. The treatment consisted of an antecedent control procedure, blocking and differential reinforcement of other behaviors with extinction (DRO w/ EXT). An ABAB reversal design was utilized to assess treatment effectiveness. A significant reduction of elopement following the first phase of treatment was observed for both participants. However, for one participant, previous reduction rates were not reached upon reimplementation of treatment following the reversal phase. The differences in effectiveness for these participants will be discussed and limitations to the study will be noted.
 
98. An Evaluation of Video Modeling to Teach Greeting Others by Name in an Echolalic Child
Area: AUT; Domain: Applied Research
HEATHER DOLL (Munroe Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Med), Katie A. Nicholson (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Med), Kari J. Adolf (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Medical Center)
Abstract: High rates of echolalia can interfere with attempts to teach intraverbal responses, including greeting others by name. In the current evaluation, a multiple baseline across responses was used with a 7 year-old boy with autism to assess the effects of video modeling on greeting others by name. Previous attempts to teach this skill were unsuccessful due to the child’s strong echoic repertoire. When others said, “Hi” plus his name, he responded to their greeting using his own name instead of the listener’s name. Prior to each greeting trial during the treatment phase, the child watched a video of a confederate greeter saying, “Hi” plus her own name, which the participant then repeated. Over sessions, the volume on the video was systematically turned down until the child could not hear what the greeter was saying. In vivo probes were then conducted to assess whether the participant responded with “Hi” plus the greeter’s name when the greeter gave an expectant look and also when she said, “Hi” plus his name. A pilot study of this intervention with two greeters demonstrated that this was an effective intervention. We are continuing to evaluate the intervention with a second set of three confederates.
 
99. Newspaper Coverage of Applied Behavior Analysis and Alternative Treatments for Autism in Canada
Area: AUT; Domain: Theory
MARIE-MICHÈLE DUFOUR (Université de Montréal), Marc J. Lanovaz (Université de Montréal), Shalaka Shah (McGill University)
Abstract: Newspapers are often a primary source of information regarding autism treatment for the general population. As such, examining the portrayal of applied behavior analysis in newspaper articles may be important to inform the field about the perception and dissemination of our science. The purpose of the study was to compare trends in coverage of applied behavior analysis and alternative autism treatments in Canadian newspapers over a 10-year period and determine whether the portrayal of the two categories differed. We searched a sample of 10 daily local and national Canadian newspapers using the keyword autism combined with intervention or treatment. In total, 43% of articles on autism treatment discussed applied behavior analysis, 53% at least one alternative treatment, and 12% at least one uncategorised treatment. Newspaper articles provided favourable, unfavourable, and neutral portrayals of applied behavior analysis in 78%, 5%, and 17% of cases, respectively. In contrast, alternative treatments were portrayed favourably in 55%, unfavourably in 29%, and neutrally in 16% of cases. Altogether, our analyses indicate that applied behavior analysis is generally perceived more favourably than alternative treatments for autism in Canadian newspapers.
 
100. Comparison of Matched Stimuli and Matched Stimuli plus Response Interruption on Perseverative Speech
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
CASEY BETHAY (Ivymount School), Stacey M. McIntyre (Ivymount School)
Abstract: Perseverative speech is frequently targeted for decrease as it may interfere with a students ability to learn more adaptive behaviors and can be stigmatizing for the individual. The purpose of our study was to evaluate the treatment effects of Matched Stimuli and Matched Stimuli paired with Response Interruption on perseverative speech maintained by automatic reinforcement for one young adult in a school and vocational setting, as well as social validity of the treatment. Initially, a Matched Stimulus intervention effectively treated the target behavior. However, the intervention lost its effect over time, possibly due to satiation. A response interruption component was then added to the treatment package and resulted in a reduction in preservative speech. A reversal design was employed to evaluate rates of perseverative speech with each treatment and data revealed that a matched stimulus paired with response interruption was most effective in reducing perseverative speech for this individual. Survey data indicated that educators working with the individual found the treatment to be both successful and appropriate across school/community settings. Data from the current study support the value of using matched stimulus plus response interruption treatment to address perseverative speech across school, vocational, and community settings.
 
101. Using Clicker Counter as a Generalized Reinforcer to Decrease Palilalia in an Integrated Classroom
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
TRACY YIP (The Children's Institute of Hong Kong)
Abstract: Students who exhibit palilalia present a challenge to their transition into integration classroom settings as their behaviors may be disruptive to other students as well as their own learning. Providing reinforcers such as tokens during integration classes may interfere with the flow of class and thus decreasing this behavior and promoting appropriate attending skills has been a continued area of interest. The current study employed a discrete form of generalized reinforcer in order to decrease palilalia for a student with a diagnosis of Autism. The intervention involved having a shadow teacher provide a token using a clicker counter along with full interval recording when the student was attending the integration classes. A simple correction and redirection procedure was used when the student engaged in palilalia. The results of the study showed significant improvements in decreasing palilalia in the integration classroom and the use of the clicker counter has been a discrete yet effective generalized form of reinforcer.
 
102. Development of a Circumscribed Special Interest Classifying System of the Korean Students with Autism Spectrum Disorder
Area: AUT; Domain: Basic Research
HYUN OK PARK (Baekseok University), Jeungeun Lee (Daegjeon University)
Abstract: The purpose of this study was to develop a circumscribed special interest classification system of the Students with Autism Spectrum Disorder(ASD). To accomplish this goal, parents and teachers of 361 ASD students of varying age were surveyed. The survey was comprised of free response questions on past and current special interests of ASD students, observed by their parents and teachers. In this survey 1066 responses were collected, which were then categorized using the three following steps. 1) Two researchers compared the contents of the responses and separated them into categories and subcategories. The results of this classification were validated by two experts. 2) Referring to the comments made by the experts in the previous step, researchers tried to refine the circumscribed special interest classifying system. In this process, seven professors, seventeen special teachers, and four speech therapists evaluated and commented on the process and the results of the refined classification system. 3) A final classification system was developed containing six categories and twenty-eight subcategories, in addition to examples of interests in each subcategories and the three response types of ASD students to the circumscribed special interests. Based on the results of this study, the significance of this classification system was established and a future direction for the use of this system was discussed in order to better understand and educate ASD students.
 
104. Prompt Dependency in a Nine Year Old on the Autism Spectrum by Using Differential Reinforcement
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
ERICA VALKO (Carolina Center for ABA and Autism Treatment)
Abstract: Client is a nine-year old male who is diagnosed with an Autism Spectrum Disorder, he was observed by a BCBA and was seen waiting for a one finger touch on the shoulder to move on to the next step of all tasks. Parent were observed giving full prompts and/or giving a one finger touch on the client's shoulder for every task, including but not limited to, eating, using the bathroom, all DTT tasks, putting on socks/shoes. Utilizing four different phases of the prompt hierarchy and differential reinforcement, the team has taken the client from complete prompt dependency in DTT settings and independent living skills to being able to complete all of these tasks independently over the course of about five weeks. Complete prompt dependency is defined as not moving on to the next step in a process without at least a one finger touch on the shoulder. Team utilized using a high tangible reinforcer for a step of a task that was completed without the one finger touch. As less intrusive prompts were used for the client to display independency reinforcement was increased. The client progressed through the protocol mastering all tasks to complete independency within five weeks.
 
105. The Effect of Matrix Training on the Tact With Two-word Utterance in a Child With Autism Spectrum Disorder
Area: AUT; Domain: Service Delivery
SAORI MAEDA (Keio University), Hiroshi Sugasawara (Tokiwa University), Takahide Omori (Keio University), Jun'ichi Yamamoto (Keio University)
Abstract: The students with ASD often show difficulties in producing a two-word utterance. In this study, we examined the effect of the training of tact on the acquisition of two-word utterance (subject + verb) in a student with ASD using the matrix training procedure. We used the picture card as a sample stimulus and required the student to tact the presented picture cards with two-word vocal response. The matrix contained a total of 9 subject-verb pairs, consisting of three animals (cat, rabbit, elephant), and three verbs (sleep, run, sit). In the training phase, we taught the student 3 of 9 two-word utterance with showing him the visual frame prompt "? ga ?" to facilitate two-word utterance "Subject + ga (a Japanese particle) + Verb." In baseline, probe and follow-up phase, the remaining 6 two-word items were used without the visual prompt and no feedback was given. As a result, the student immediately acquired the correct responding such as "Neko (a cat: subject)" "ga" "hashitteru (runs:verb)" in training and probe phase. However, the percentage of correct responding slightly decreased at 1 week follow up. The result was discussed on the procedure to maintain the acquired tact.
 
106. Comparing Strengths of Teaching Strategies and Retention Rates of Math Skills to Children With Autism in a Clinical Setting
Area: AUT; Domain: Basic Research
TAMLA LEE (University of Louisiana at Lafayette), Rachael Judice (Applied Behavior Analyst), Ashley Schaff (University of Louisiana at Lafayette)
Abstract: Math skills, particularly addition and subtraction, are important for basic life skills and thus, are an important area of instruction for children with autism. In the present study, four different math strategies were taught to two pre-kindergarten aged children across multiple session within a social learning environment. These strategies: finger counting, counting pictures, counting tangible objects, and counting on a number line, were all accompanied by a song and instructor lead demonstration. Although the primary goal of the social learning environment is to teach age-appropriate social skills, the center also strived to introduce observational learning by teaching pre-kindergarten skills as identified by the state’s requirements. The charts display the results from the month spent on teaching addition and a month spent teaching subtraction during the observational learning portion of the social learning groups. Lastly, a retention graph displays the overall success at teaching the two students each skill after a month removed. An alternating-treatment design to illustrate the success rate of these strategies. The results indicate that counting tangible objects was the most effective strategy in teaching addition skills. Success in this study is represented by the strategy that yielded the highest percentage of correct spontaneous self-identified responses. The retention session also supports the initial findings of counting tangible objects being the most successful way to teach adding to children with autism, but it also showed growth in counting fingers and using a number line not originally seen in the experimental phase. Learning objectives: 1. Teach basic math skills to children with autism 2. Chart students’ development with specific strategy 3. Test strength/success of strategy by comparison and time elapsed activities
 
 
 
Poster Session #434
DDA Monday PM
Monday, May 25, 2015
7:00 PM–9:00 PM
Exhibit Hall C (CC)
107. The Sensitivity to Aversive Stimulation Survey: An Individualized Anecdotal Assessment to Identify Potentially Aversive Stimuli
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
CHRISTINA DELAPP (University of North Texas), Richard G. Smith (University of North Texas), Katy Atcheson (University of North Texas), Kathleen Dignan (University of North Texas)
Abstract: When working with individuals with intellectual disabilities, information about the types of stimuli, conditions, or situations that serve as aversive stimulation for those individuals may be important to obtain. Knowledge about specific sensitivities to aversive stimuli may be useful to avoid or manage contact with those stimuli, to train tolerance or appropriate avoidance/escape behaviors, or to identify stimuli that may occasion inappropriate avoidance/escape behaviors and inform treatment for those behaviors. Currently, few formal procedures exist to aid in the individualized identification of aversive stimuli. The Sensitivity to Aversive Stimulation Survey (SASS) is a tool that is designed to identify stimuli, situations, tasks, or activities that may function as aversive stimuli. The SASS is a rating scale that attempts to evaluate the effects of 24 common situations (e.g., brushing teeth, transitions) on affect, compliance, and severity of problem behavior if it occurs. Preliminary indicate that when the SASS was administered across five raters, moderate agreement on individualized sensitivities to aversive stimulation was obtained.
 
108. Evaluation of Behavioral Treatments for the Reduction of Problem Behavior During Routine Bathroom Visits
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
NABIL MEZHOUDI (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Cara L. Phillips (Kennedy Krieger Institute, Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine), Jennifer R. Zarcone (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Aila K. Dommestrup (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Jessica Garcia (Kennedy Krieger Institute, University of Maryland Baltimore County)
Abstract:

Problem behaviors, such as self-injury or aggression, exhibited by children with intellectual disabilities pose serious risks to the individual and their caregivers. These risks are greatly increased when an individual engages in problem behavior in certain environments. For example, bathrooms can represent a high-risk area in that there are many hard or slippery surfaces in a constricted space. Treatments for reducing problem behavior during bathroom visits are not frequently evaluated for individuals who engage in aberrant behavior across different settings. Therefore, individualized bathroom treatments were evaluated with three individuals diagnosed with Intellectual Disabilities to determine effective treatments that would reduce problem behavior during routine bathroom visits. Treatment components evaluated included noncontingent reinforcement (participants 1 and 3), differential reinforcement (participants 2 & 3), demand fading (participants 1 and 3), and task analysis (all participants). Results indicate that rates of problem behavior decreased significantly when compared to baseline levels for all 3 participants. Implications for the successful use of multiple treatment components targeting behavior that was resistant to change will be discussed.

 
109. Functional Analysis Screening for Multiple Topographies of Problem Behaviors
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
MARLESHA BELL (California State University, Northridge), Tara A. Fahmie (California State University, Northridge), Sandy Smith (Taking Steps Together Collaboration)
Abstract: A functional analysis (FA) is an experimental test to determine the function of an individual’s problem behavior. Based on the function of a behavior, an effective treatment is developed to reduce the problem behavior. Many individuals with intellectual disabilities engage in multiple topographies of problem behavior, which may be maintained by similar reinforcers (as in a response class) or different reinforcers. Determining the function of multiple topographies of problem behavior could pose a challenge for clinicians who must provide accurate FA results in an efficient manner. The purpose of this study is to determine whether collecting data on multiple topographies (i.e., non-target behaviors) during a standard FA, while only reinforcing a single topography (i.e., target behavior), will assist clinicians in screening for social or automatic functions of non-target behaviors.
 
110. Reducing Pica by Differentially Reinforcing the Exchange of the Inedible Item
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
TIMOTHY NIPE (Melmark)
Abstract: The ingestion of inedible substances may result in serious medical complications including lead poisoning, intestinal obstruction, infection and even death. Pica has been described as being both treatment resistant and maintained in the absence of social consequences (Piazza, et. al. 1998). The current study involves a six-year-old male who engages in pica and was admitted to a residential treatment facility with elevated lead levels. A competing items assessment was completed and the results showed that edible items competed with pica far more effectively than tangible items. However, these items were not successful in effectively suppressing rates of pica when provided on a continuous schedule during five minute sessions. The current study examines the effectiveness of differentially reinforcing the exchange of inedible items with the edible items that had been shown to effectively compete with pica. This intervention was found to have reduced instances of pica to near zero levels across multiple inedible items.
 
111. Half the Work, All the Glory: Empirically-Derived Observation Durations for Single Stimulus Engagement Assessments
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
JONATHAN R. MILLER (Kennedy Krieger Institute/Johns Hopkins University), Gregory Young (Kennedy Krieger Institute/Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine), Kelly Rootes-Murdy (Loyola University), John M. Huete (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Patricia F. Kurtz (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
Abstract: Duration-based preference assessments, such as single stimulus engagement (SSE) and competing stimulus assessments (CSA), have been used for nearly two decades. Using duration measurement provides additional information for predicting the reinforcing efficacy of stimuli, but also requires additional assessment time. Little guidance has been offered for establishing observation durations within assessments, which have varied from 30 s to 15 min. Maximizing predictive validity while minimizing assessment time is important for clinical utility. The present study determined empirically-derived observation durations by conducting a retrospective analysis of SSE/CSA data for nine individuals (ages 2-21) with intellectual/developmental disabilities treated in an outpatient behavioral clinic. Initial observation duration was 5 min, from which truncated durations of 1, 2, 3, and 4 min were evaluated. At each duration, high-preference items (those with engagement ≥80% of the top-ranked items) were identified. Subsequently, the time required to determine high-preference items within each duration was examined using analyses based on signal-detection theory. Results indicated that cumulative engagement at approximately 60% of an observation duration predicted the high-preference items identified at the end of that duration. These results suggest that observation durations of slightly longer than half of the intended access period may be sufficient for determining high-preference stimuli.
 
112. Assessing Increases in Problem Behavior during Competing Stimulus Assessments
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
CARLOS SANCHEZ (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Griffin Rooker (The Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine), Pamela L. Neidert (The University of Kansas), Brian D. Greer (University of Nebraska Medical Center), Andrew Bonner (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Monica Lugo (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Louis P. Hagopian (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
Abstract:

Competing stimulus assessments (CSAs) are a common means to identify stimuli that reduce the occurrence of problem behavior; however, in some cases problem behavior consistently increases during some CSA conditions. One possible explanation for this increase is that the behavior and stimulus may have a complementary relation. This research evaluated both the prevalence of increases in problem behavior during CSAs, as well as the probability of problem behavior and stimulus interaction co-occurring during these conditions. We examined the rate of problem behavior in the presence of each stimulus across 36 competing stimulus assessments (for 32 individuals with intellectual disabilities) to identify cases when problem behavior increased in the presence of particular stimuli (possibly suggesting a complementary relation). Problem behavior increased, when compared to the control condition, in the presence of at least one activity in 89.2% of assessments and on average across 3.7 of the stimuli included in those assessments. A descriptive assessment was then conducted during these sessions and in a subset of cases, problem behavior was highly correlated with stimulus interaction, suggesting a complementary relation.

 
113. Effects of Monitoring Procedures in a Mother of a Child Suspected with Developmental Disabilities Who Had Externalizing Behavior Problems in Parent-Child Interactions
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
HIROSHI ASAOKA (Graduate School of Comprehensive Human Sciences, University of Tsukuba), Fumiyuki Noro (University of Tsukuba)
Abstract: This study examined whether behavior problems decreased by improving the adequacy of recording the antecedents and consequences of behavior problems. A mother with a child of seventeen suspected with developmental disabilities participated in this study. As maternal characteristics, she was strong anxiety, excessive interference to a child. Disruptive behavior and violent language occurred in parent-child interactions. A single-subject experimental AB design with follow-up was used. During baseline, the mother recorded the antecedents and consequences of behavior problems after we explained how to conduct A-B-C recording. In the intervention, we provided positive and corrective feedback on maternal performance. To provide corrective feedback on A-B-C recording, we pointed out the correct recording of the antecedents and consequences associated with each occurrence of behavior problem. The results indicated that behavior problems decreased in relation to the adequacy of recording the antecedents and consequences, expect for the weeks in which there were events such as a regular examination. Furthermore, we considered the following as factors that promoted behavior modifications; (a) behavior problems always occurred in dyadic interaction, (b) there were a certain pattern and frequency of behavior problems, and (c) recording behavior was stably maintained.
 
114. Increasing Self-Drinking for Children with Feeding Disorders
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
BRENNA CAVANAUGH (University of Nebraska Medical Center), Kathryn M. Peterson (University of Nebraska Medical Center), Valerie M. Volkert (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Medical Center), Jason R. Zeleny (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Medical Center)
Abstract: Self-drinking is an important skill for children to acquire as they transition from infancy to early childhood, as it promotes greater independence and continued nutritional intake and growth (Carruth & Skinner, 2002). Often children with feeding disorders lack the motivation to drink and do not progress to age-typical drinking in the absence of individualized treatment (Rivas et al., 2014). Unfortunately, the literature on self-drinking is scarce. One notable exception is a study by Collins, Gast, Wolery, Holcombe, and Leatherby (1991) during which, they demonstrated that physical guidance and descriptive verbal praise increased self-drinking for one child with intellectual disabilities and visual impairment. In the current investigation, we evaluated differential positive reinforcement to increase self-drinking for two children with feeding disorders. All sessions were conducted in the children’s homes via tele-health with their parents serving as feeders. Results showed that differential positive reinforcement with arbitrary tangible items increased self-drinking for both children in the absence of nonremoval of the cup. These results suggest that, for some children, differential reinforcement in the absence of nonremoval of the cup may be an effective intervention for increasing self-drinking.
 
115. Manipulating Response Effort for the Treatment of Pica Maintained by Automatic Reinforcement
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
GREGORY R. MANCIL (Louisiana Tech University), Todd Haydon (University of Cincinnati  )
Abstract: Pica is a life-threatening behavior displayed by many individuals with developmental disabilities. This study was a systematic replication of the Piazza et al. (2002) study. In the current study, a functional analysis was done to demonstrate that the pica for all 4 participants was maintained by automatic reinforcement. Following functional analyses of pica, response-effort manipulations were conducted in which the effort to obtain pica or alternative items was varied systematically similar to the Piazza study. However, the following limitations were addressed: 1. This study was conducted in the natural environment for each participant; 2. We equated the level of effort for the low effort conditions for the participants. When effort to obtain alternative items were increased, pica increased in the low effort condition. In addition, increasing response effort for pica reduced pica behavior as compared to baseline. Also, pica was highest during low effort conditions when no alternative items were available. In conclusion, by keeping response effort levels for alternative items below that for pica items, results indicate clinically significant decreases in pica behavior. IOA was 95% across all conditions and reliability with each observer's ata was 100% across all observers.
 
116. A Protocol for Expanding Spontaneity of a Tablet-based Augmentative Communication System
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
CHRISTIAN BENAVIDES (Beacon ABA Services), Jeff Schram (Beacon ABA Services), John Claude Ward-Horner (Beacon ABA Services)
Abstract: In recent years, the use of tablets and smartphones has become ubiquitous. The proliferation of these devices has provided a new platform for augmentative communication systems. Augementative and alternative communication (AAC) applications are widely available for tablets and smart phones, and are being downloaded with great frequency (Lubas, Mitchell, & DeLeo 2014). When applying tablet-based augmentative communication systems, it is important to recognize that technology alone, no matter how well crafted and presented, is not sufficient to produce functional communication repertoires in children with autism (McNaughton & Light 2013). The current study attempted to craft a training protocol to increase the spontaneous use of such a device. The training protocol used was patterned after phase 2 of the PECS protocol (Frost & Bondy 2002). Graduated guidance and contingent reinforcement was used to teach the use of the device in several environmental contexts. A multiple baseline across contexts design was used to assess the effects of the intervention. Results indicated that the intervention was successful in increasing the use of the device.
 
117. Collaboration between Applied Behavior Analysts and Physical Therapists May Improve Physical Therapy Treatment Outcomes for Children with Cerebral Palsy and Co-morbid Intellectual Disability
Area: DDA; Domain: Service Delivery
TARA M. SHEEHAN (Nova Southeastern University), Dahlia Magdy (Nova Southeastern University), Eric Levin (Nova Southeastern University), Stephanie Trauschke (Nova Southeastern University), Danielle Tarver (Nova Southeastern University), Sydney Webster (Nova Southeastern University)
Abstract: Children with Cerebral Palsy (CP) present with motor movement problems and are typically prescribed physical therapy to help improve motor movements and coordination. Children who have CP and co-morbid Intellectual Disability (ID) may be resistant to, and non-compliant with physical therapy treatment. Collaboration between applied behavior analysts and physical therapists may improve treatment outcomes for children with CP and ID receiving physical therapy. The addition of applied behavior analysis technologies of preference assessments, contingent reinforcement, and precise measurement of target behaviors may improve the efficacy of standard physical therapy practice. The present case study demonstrates the response to treatment of a five-year-old child with CP and ID under standard physical therapy practices including physical exercise and contingent praise, and the addition of applied behavior analytic practices of contingent tangible reinforcement for participation in the physical therapy exercise. Results demonstrated that the addition of contingent tangible reinforcement to social praise improved physical therapy performance. Implications for collaborative practice between physical therapists and behavior analysts to improve treatment outcomes for children with CP and ID are presented.
 
118. A Generalization Assessment of Functional Communication Across Stimuli
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
JULIA IANNACCONE (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Monica Urich (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Samantha Hardesty (Kennedy Krieger Institute), Lynn G. Bowman (Kennedy Krieger Institute)
Abstract: Functional communication has been proven to be an effective treatment for problem behavior such as self-injury and aggression (Rooker, Jessel, Kurtz & Hagopian, 2013); however, these effects sometimes prove difficult to generalize (Falcomata & Wacker, 2013). The current study employed functional communication (pointing to a picture icon) and extinction to successfully reduce self-injury maintained by adult attention in a 5-year-old male diagnosed with autism spectrum disorder and a chromosomal disorder (16p13.11 microduplication syndrome). An assessment was conducted prior to treatment generalization to evaluate treatment effectiveness across social stimuli. Treatment effects were not observed in all conditions, with problem behavior resurging during divided attention conditions in which adults engaged in constant talking. Sequential modification, as described by Stokes and Baer (1977), was used to adjust the treatment to promote generalization. A second observer simultaneously but independently collected data for 45% of sessions and interobserver agreement averaged 96%. The current study provides a model for assessing and programming for effective treatment generalization across settings.
 
119. The Clinical Application of the Verbal Behavior Approach in a Child With Partial Fetal Alcohol Syndrome: A Case Study
Area: DDA; Domain: Service Delivery
SARAH CONNOLLY (Marcus Autism Center), Alice Alice Shillingsburg (Marcus Autism Center), Molly Millians (Emory University School of Medicine), Richard Peterman (Kennestone Hospital)
Abstract:

Many of the same obstacles present for individuals with Autism Spectrum Disorder occur in individuals with Fetal Alcohol Spectrum Disorder. Delayed referrals for diagnoses in both conditions postpone access to the potential gains that occur through early and intensive intervention (Blair, 2011; Dawson, 2008). The current case study describes the longitudinal assessment of a young child diagnosed with Partial Fetal Alcohol Syndrome and Pervasive Developmental Disorder-Not Otherwise Specified. The patient participated in an ABA-based Verbal Behavior treatment program to target communication impairments and functional skill deficits. Because ABA-based interventions have demonstrated efficacy in improving levels of functioning across various developmental disabilities (Sturmey, 2002), it was reasonable to assess the clinical utility of these same strategies when applied to a patient presenting with fetal alcohol spectrum disorder and associated developmental delays. The current study relied on scientifically-based single subject design methods to measure treatment outcomes and to inform clinical decision making. Dependent measures in the study included standardized, norm-referenced assessments of cognitive and adaptive functioning, as well as behavioral data collected throughout treatment to measure gains across skill areas. The impact of treatment on global areas of functioning will be reported.

 
120. Traning and Generalized Effects Using Multiple Schedules With Natural and Contrived Stimuli Following FCT
Area: DDA; Domain: Applied Research
KENNETH SHAMLIAN (Universtiy of Nebraska Medical Center's Munroe-Meyer Institute), Wayne W. Fisher (Munroe-Meyer Institute, University of Nebraska Medical Center), Mark W. Steege (University of Southern Maine), Brenna Cavanaugh (Nova Southeastern University), Kristina Samour (Nova Southeastern University)
Abstract: Multiple studies have shown functional communication training (FCT) to be effective for replacing inappropriate behavior with an alternative communication response to obtain the same functional reinforcer. In addition, results of FCT studies for improving the practicality of their use in the natural environment have focused on teaching individuals to tolerate delays to reinforcement using multiple schedule arrangements with contrived discriminative stimuli as signals for its availability. More recently, researchers have evaluated similar training with naturally occurring discriminative stimuli (e.g., overt therapist behavior). Each type of discriminative stimulus, contrived and naturally occurring, has both benefits and limitations. The purposes of the current study were to: (1) further compare contrived and naturally occurring discriminative stimuli when initially thinning schedules of reinforcement following FCT, and (2) evaluate responding when those treatments are introduced to novel contexts that require more difficult discrimination of reinforcer availability. In the following study, two participants more rapidly acquired clear discriminative use of the functional communication response (FCR) with contrived stimuli during training and demonstrated more accurate responding with a contrived SD when generalizing the effects of FCT in novel contexts with topographically similar stimulus conditions. One participant acquired discriminative use of the FCR similarly with both contrived and naturally occurring stimuli during training. All three participants showed significant decreases in problem behavior across training conditions with individualized differences. Key Words: multiple schedules, functional communication training, generalization, discriminative stimuli.
 
 
 
Special Event #435
ABAI Social
Monday, May 25, 2015
9:00 PM–1:00 AM
Grotto (CC)
Chair: Martha Hübner (University of Sao Paulo)

Please join us, your friends, and colleagues for music and dancing. From 9:30 - 10:30, the ABAI Student Committeewelcomes all members to join them for a panel discussion, "Pavlov, Skinner, & Kantor walk into a bar..."between three great luminaries. Members of this panel will respond to questions by impersonating a prominent figure from the history of psychology. This year’s line-up includes Michael Domjan as Ivan Pavlov, Philip N. Hineline as B.F. Skinner, Linda J. Hayes as J.R. Kantor, and Michael Perone as the moderator. Discussion will be both enlightening and entertaining.

Keyword(s): Social
 

BACK TO THE TOP

 

Back to Top
ValidatorError
  
Modifed by Eddie Soh
DONATE
{"isActive":false}